Amx 4 Ir CD PDF

AMX – 4 IR Support CD
WARNING:
“This information contained herein is for training

purposes only and is current as of the date of
publication only. The information may not be
appropriate for your system. Use of the
information may result in equipment damage or
injury. You are responsible for any use you make
of this information. Always use current service
documentation specific to the system you are
servicing."
FOR REFERENCE USE ONLY
Click HERE to
go to Course
Schedule Page
Rev. 7/22/2002
AMX 4 In-Resident Schedule Home
Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 MISC
Introductions Technical Supplement: Technical Supplement: Technical Supplement: AMX 4 Diagnostics

Mod/Ckt BD Info tab Rotor Controller tab 1KHZ Board tab (46-017207)
Controller BD tab KVP/FIL Board tab Drive Control tab
Technical Supplement:
Administration Tab AMX 4 Diagnostics AMX 4 + Calibration Doc AMX 4 +
Overview 46-017207 Lab prep. 2166910-100 System
Safety Edge Video Documentation
EHS Tab Diags Lab prep. 46-017207
Entering Calibration Troubleshooting (2166910-100)
Operation Tab Tab 3 Section 2:
Diagnostics: Tab 1 Calibration
Entering Diags: Tab 2 Tab 3 Section 3: AMX 4
AMX 011 Video / Data Log: Tab 6
Discussion A. Cal. Drive Handle Documentation
Error Log: Tab 7 B. Cal. Voltmeter
System Diags: Tab 4 (46-017313)
EVT 304 Tape #1 Video / C. Cal. Generator
A. System Block Test i. Cal. MAS
Discussion B. OP Switch Test Class Tech
Segment 1:Operation ii. Cal. KVP
C. Display Controller iii. Cal. TAPS Supplement (XR011)
Segment 2: Installations D. Battery Voltage iv. Cal. FIL CUR TB L
Perform Diags Lab
Perform Calibration
46-017207
Doc Lab 2166910-100
Diagnostics Lab post Calibration Doc Lab post System AMX - 4 Operations
Segment 3: HHS Testing discussion 46-017207 discussion. 2166910-100 (2115603-100)
Troubleshooting
Loop Test Lab prep. Battery replacement Lab.
EVT 304 Tape #2 Video / 46-017207 prep. 2166910-100 Installation of
Discussion Loop Test: Tab 4 Service: Genesis & Panasonic
Segment 4: Calibration Binary and Hexadecimal Tab 6 Section 6 Re-install System
Tab 5: Section 5-2
Batteries (2165154-
Segment 5: Diagnostics Covers 100)
Segment 6: Mechnical A. Field Light = Hex Perform Battery
B. Rotor On = Hex replacement Lab.
C. Safety Cnt. = Hex 2166910-100 Lab Clean Up Revision History
AMX Physical Overview Tab 5: Section 5-8 = Bin
Perform Loop Test Lab Battery replacement Lab

post discussion. Test Questions AMX's (110,1,2,3)
Loop Test post Disc. Tab 6 Sec 6 2166910-100 Review Documentation:
Technical Supplement
Technical Supplement: Look on CD in
Service Info tab pg 8-195
Display Controller tab
Battery Charger tab END OF COURSE Manuals Folder
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
GE Medical Systems
AMX-4
Course No. XR011
Rev. 0
Approved By: Ken Deshaies, October 21, 1994
Copyright E 1994 by General Electric Company
MSI produced documents are not intended for use as

documentation for field based GEMS equipment.
Proprietary to General Electric Company

This manual is the property of and contains information
which is proprietary to General Electric Company. Any
reproduction in whole or part is prohibited. Neither the
manual nor any information contained therein shall be
disclosed to anyone outside the Company without the
written authorization of General Electric Company.
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
Primary Source Documentation Referenced

In This Manual and Used In The Course:
Service Note 3278

Service Note 3335
Service Note 3338
Service Note 3341
Service Note 3397
Service Note 3407
Service Note 3411
Service Note 3493
Direction 46-017207 Rev. 6
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
GE Medical Systems AMX-4 Home
REV 0
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
REVISION DATE REASON

REV 0 October 21, 1994 Initial Release
PAGE REV PAGE REV

Section 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - Section 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -
1-1 to 1-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 7-1 to 7-52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
Section 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - Section 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -
2-1 to 2-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 8-1 to 8-228 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
Section 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -
Section 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -
3-1 to 3-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
9-1 to 9-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
Section 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -
Section 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -
4-1 to 4-160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
10-1 to 10-42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
Section 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -
5-1 to 5-46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Section 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -
11-1 to 11-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
Section 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -
6-1 to 6-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0
This page intentionally left blank.
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
GE Medical Systems AMX-4
REV 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1- ADMINISTRATIVE MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 EMPLOYEE TRAINING AGREEMENT ........... 1-3
1-2 RESIDENT TRAINING COURSE REQUIREMENTS ...................... 1-5
1-3 HARASSMENT POLICY ...................................... 1-7
1-4 COURSE DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-5 SUGGESTED COURSE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-6 COURSE FEEDBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1-7 INSTRUCTOR FEEDBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
SECTION 2 - ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH & SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2-1 LAB SAFETY PROTOCOLS ............................................ 2-3
2-2 BLOODBORNE PATHOGENS
............................................... 2-4
2-3 ECPL (Energy Control & Power. Lockout)
........................................... 2-5
................
2 - 4 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES FOR GEMS EDUCATION CENTER..........................2 -9
2-5 WORK RELATED
. . . . . . . .INJURIES/ILLNSSES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 13
2-6 FIRST AID KITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 14
2 - 8 RADIATION SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 19
SECTION 3 - OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
SECTION 4 - MODULE/CIRCUIT BOARD INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Display Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Battery Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Rotor Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
KVP/FIL Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
1 KHZ Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
Drive Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
Drive Power Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
SECTION 5 - WAVEFORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
SECTION 6 - PROPRIETARY DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 7 - MOBILE AID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
SECTION 8 - SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
SECTION 9 - LAB/QUIZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
SECTION 10 - NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
SECTION 11 - MISCELLANEOUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
ii
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C. Section 1 Table of Contents
Home
REV A
SECTION 1 - ADMINISTRATIVE MATERIAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 1 - ADMINISTRATIVE MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 EMPLOYEE TRAINING AGREEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-2 RESIDENT TRAINING COURSE REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-3 HARASSMENT POLICY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-4 COURSE DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-5 SUGGESTED COURSE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-6 COURSE FEEDBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1-7 INSTRUCTOR FEEDBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1-1
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
REV A
1-2
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
REV A
1-1 EMPLOYEE TRAINING AGREEMENT
THIS AGREEMENT is entered into between General Electric Company, acting through and on behalf of its
Medical Systems Group (GE") and (Employee"), an individual residing at
to be effective .
1. Employee is presently employed by GE and wishes, but is not required to receive at GE's expense, specialized
AMX-4 Training.
2. GE agrees to provide Employee with specialized training at GEMS Education Center.
3. Employee hereby agrees to and acknowledges the following with respect to material, information or
know-how" obtained during AMX-4 training received through GE.
(Course)
3.1 Employee's possession and use of these materials, information or know-how" are subject to the terms
and conditions of Employee's Employee Innovation and Proprietary Information Agreement" with GE
and, Employee is prohibited from using proprietary portions thereof for the benefit of any part other than
GE.
3.2 In the event that Employee accepts employment with a competitor of GE Medical Systems Service
Department, or he himself becomes such a competitor and terminates his employment with GE less
than twenty-four (24) months after beginning of training, Employee shall promptly, upon demand by
GE, reimburse GE for GE's cost of training as specified below. GE's cost includes, but is not limited to,
salary during training, travel, living and tuition.
Time Between beginning Percent of Cost To Be

of Training and TerminaĆ Reimbursed
tion of Employment
0-3 Months 100
3-6 Months 75
6-9 Months 50
9-12 Months 35
12-18 Months 25
18-24 Months 10
GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY
By:
(Employee Signature)
Title:
1-3
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
REV A
1-4
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
REV A
1-2 RESIDENT TRAINING COURSE REQUIREMENTS
PLEASE FILL IN ALL APPLICABLE BLANKS
NAME:
print name
I have received and understand the EMERGENCY PROCEDURE handout and know how to evacuate the
building in case of fire and where to report for shelter.
_______________
Initials
I have received a copy of the Radiation Safety Policy. (The Radiation Safety Policy is located in Section 2 of this
supplement.) I will read this policy and will observe it while in attendance at GEMS Education Center.
Initials
I have received a bar coded access card which permits my access to authorized GEMS Education Center area
during the duration of my training. I will return the plastic card holder upon completion.
Initials
PLEASE NOTE:
Check the message board at each break for messages.
1-5
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
REV A
1-6
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
REV A
1-3 HARASSMENT POLICY
HUMAN RESOURCES POLICY NUMBER 2.5
I. NEED FOR A POLICY

GE Medical systems has a long-standing commitment to provide a professional work environment free
from forms of discriminatory treatment prohibited by federal and state laws and regulations. This policy
is part of GE Medical System's commitment to provide a work environment consistent with optimal
performance of everyone.
II. STATEMENT OF POLICY

GE Medical Systems is committed or providing a work environment that is free of all forms of
intimidation and harassment as defined by this policy. Specifically, GE Medical Systems prohibits such
intimidation and harassment and will take appropriate disciplinary action for violation of the norms of
conduct established by this policy.
III. POLICY APPLICATION

Intimidation and harassment can arise from a broad range of physical or verbal behavior (by employees
or by non-employees such as customers or outside contractors) which can include, but is not limited
to, the following:
- Racial, ethnic and/or religious insults or slurs
- Unwelcome sexual advanced or touching
- Sexual comments, jokes, stores or innuendoes
- Requests for sexual favors used as condition of employment or affecting any personnel
decision such as hiring, promotion, compensation or termination
- Display of sexually explicit or otherwise offensive posters, calendars or materials
These activities are offensive and are inappropriate in the workplace. Any employee, regardless of
position, may be held individually liable as a harasser and subject to the penalties which may be
imposed under federal, state or local law.
Harassment or similar unacceptable activities that could become a condition of employment or a basis
for personnel decision, or which create a hostile, intimidating or offensive environment are specifically
prohibited by GE Medical Systems.
IV. REPORTING AND INVESTIGATION

Any employee (or any other person performing services for us) who feels that he or she has been the
subject of harassment or related retaliation must report the matter promptly to any member or
management, a Human Resources representative, Manager of Cultural Diversity or the Ombudsman.
Any such reports will be investigated promptly by a Human Resources representative and be kept
confidential within the bounds of our investigation and the law.
1-7
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
REV A
V. REMEDIAL ACTION AND SANCTIONS

GE Medical Systems will undertake appropriate remedial action to prevent harassment or intimidation.
Any employee who engages in such harassment, or retaliates against another because that person
made a report of harassment or participated in an investigation of a claim of harassment, is subject to
immediate discipline, up to and including discharge. Appropriate remedial action will also be taken with
respect to non-GE employees (such as employees of suppliers, customers or agency personnel)
engaged in such inappropriate behavior.
VI. RESPONSIBILITY FOR INTERPRETATION

The Manager of the Human Resources Operation or the Manager of Cultural Diversity will provide
counsel regarding the interpretation and application of this policy.
1-8
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
REV A
1-4 COURSE DESCRIPTION
COURSE TITLE: AMX-4
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY: This course introduces the service engineer to the AMX-4 portable X-ray
system. Upon completion of this course, the student will be proficient in the
service and maintenance of this unit. Engineers who will be responsible for the
service, maintenance, and support of this product should attend.
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS: The following skills are beneficial prior to course attendance:
1. Basic computer and electronic fundamentals

2. Basic X-ray systems
3. Good troubleshooting skills
COURSE COMPETENCIES: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:
1. Install the AMX-4 utilizing approved procedures and protocols.

2. Perform applicable functional checks.
3. Perform preventive maintenance checks.
4. Perform assembly/disassembly procedures; identify major component
locations.
5. Safely service mechanical components using existing field service tools
and procedures.
6. Troubleshoot to board/item level using appropriate service
documentation, diagnostics, and peripheral test equipment.
TEACHING METHOD: This course is a combination of classroom lecture and hands-on lab
experience.
1-9
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
REV A
1-10
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
REV A
1-5 SUGGESTED COURSE SCHEDULE
1-11
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
REV A
1-12
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
REV A
1-6 COURSE FEEDBACK
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
YOUR NAME:
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
INSTRUCTOR NAME
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
COURSE NAME
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
COURSE START DATE MONTH DAY YEAR
PLEASE USE THIS SCALE IN YOUR ANSWER TO THE QUESTIONS LISTED: (Circle your answer)
1 = STRONGLY DISAGREE
2 = DISAGREE
3 = NEITHER AGREE NOR DISAGREE
4 = AGREE
5 = STRONGLY AGREE
1. 1 2 3 4 5 This course taught the competencies listed in the course description.

COMMENTS:
2. 1 2 3 4 5 I can perform with minimal assistance the competencies taught in this course.
COMMENTS:
3. 1 2 3 4 5 The prerequisites helped me to prepare for this course. (if not applicable, mark 3.)
COMMENTS:
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
4. 1
2 3 4 5 The course Technical Supplement helped me to learn the material.
COMMENTS:
5. 1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2 3 4 5 There were proper and sufficient tools and equipment to perform the lab exercises.
COMMENTS:
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
6. 1 2 3 4 5 The lab exercises helped me to learn the listed course competencies.
COMMENTS:

7. 1
2 3 4 5 The classroom presentation supported the lab exercises.
COMMENTS:

8. 1
2 3 4 5 All things considered, this course met my expectations.
COMMENTS:
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
9. What did you especially like about this course?
10. In what way would you improve this course?
1-13
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
REV A
1-7 INSTRUCTOR FEEDBACK
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
YOUR NAME:
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
INSTRUCTOR NAME
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
COURSE NAME
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
COURSE START DATE
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
MONTH DAY YEAR
PLEASE USE THIS SCALE IN YOUR ANSWER TO THE QUESTIONS LISTED: (Circle your answer)
1 = STRONGLY DISAGREE
2 = DISAGREE
3 = NEITHER AGREE NOR DISAGREE
4 = AGREE
5 = STRONGLY AGREE
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
1. 1
ÁÁ
2 3 4 5 This instructor stated the learning objectives prior to each lesson.
COMMENTS:
2. 1
2 3 4 5 The instructor's presentation enhanced the learning process for me.
COMMENTS:

3. 1 2 3 4 5 The instructor provided help for me in the lab.
COMMENTS:
4. 1 2 3 4 5 The instructor was helpful in providing answers to my questions.
COMMENTS:
5. 1 2
3 4 5 The instructor promoted safety in the classroom and lab.
COMMENTS:
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
6.
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
1
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
2
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
3 4 5 The instructor appeared technically knowledgeable on the course competencies
taught.
COMMENTS:

7. 1 2
3 4 5 The instructor provided practical troubleshooting suggestions.
COMMENTS:
ÁÁÁÁ
8. ÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
1 ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁ
2 3 4 5 The instructor's overall performance met my expectations.
COMMENTS:
1-14
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
GE Medical Systems
REV A
SECTION 2 - ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH & SAFETY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
SECTION 2 - ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH & SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2-1 LAB SAFETY PROTOCOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-2 BLOODBORNE PATHOGENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-3 ECPL (Energy Control & Power Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-4 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES FOR GEMS EDUCATION CENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2-5 WORK RELATED INJURIES/ILLNESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2-6 FIRST AID KITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2-7 MAGNET SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2-8 RADIATION SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2-1
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
GE Medical Systems
REV A
2-2
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
GE Medical Systems
REV A
2-1 LAB SAFETY PROTOCOLS (Reference Procedure EC-060)
Lab Safety Rules

S There must be at least two (2) people present in the lab during all lab exercises. In the event of a personal
injury incident, this would allow one person to summon medical assistance and aid the injured person.
S Jewelry should be removed or taped before working on any equipment.
S When connecting test equipment, consider turning off system power first.
S Insure test or calibration equipment is correct for the task and is properly set up prior to taking data.
S Hang or stand meters when taking measurements. Do not hold in hand.
S Follow ESD Control Procedure when appropriate (as determined by lab instructors).
- Transport all static sensitive components in static shielding containers.
- Handle static sensitive components at a static safeguarded work area.
- Connect wrist strap and ESD mat to equipment ground potential.
- Treat damaged board with the same ESD precautions as with new boards.
S Acquaint yourself with the peculiarities of each lab, much as you would a customer site. Know the location
of:
- The nearest telephone.
- Emergency Reporting numbers: Front Desk (working hours) 4-1515
Pewaukee Fire Department (after hours) 8-911
- Means of emergency exit.
- Place(s) to apply ECPL locks and tags.
- Nearest Safety Information Station": in corridor containing First Aid Kit, ECPL material, Material Safety
Data Sheets.
- The nearest fire extinguisher.
- The nearest fire alarm pull box
S Employ safe practices prescribed in GEMS Field Service EHS Manual relative to personal protective
equipment, tool safety and electrical safety.
S Cooperate to keep the lab clean, orderly and safe for others by:
- Using waste and recycle containers appropriately.
- Putting tools away at completion of lab exercise.
S Communication Risks - Verbally announce to lab groups impending risks that may affect them: activating
high voltage power", starting gantry rotation", exposing sources".
S Lab Safety Monitor - Assign one member of every lab group to be the Lab Safety Monitor". The Lab
Safety Monitor will have the additional assignment of heightening safety awareness among all lab group
members by focusing on the following:
- PPE used when appropriate
- Radiation badges are worn when appropriate
- Published lab hazards clear to all
- Lab rules (above) followed.
- Cease lab exercises and clarify with instructor before proceeding with questionably unsafe act.
2-3
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
GE Medical Systems
REV A
Incident Reports
Report any and all instances of personal injury or damaged equipment to your instructor and/or the EHS Team
Leader at 4-8682.
ESD Materials
Instructors are responsible for inspecting ESD materials and replacing damaged or out-dated materials.
PART NUMBERS
ESD Kit (includes mat) 46-194427P231
Wrist Grounding Strap 46-198094P1
Service Vacuum w/wrist strap receptacle 46-194427P278
Floor mat for permanent installation under consoles TC400136
Sticker for ESD mat verification F4898X
Audits
Education Center Staff will periodically audit safe behavior and safe conditions in the labs.
2-4
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
GE Medical Systems
REV A
2-2 BLOODBORNE PATHOGENS (Reference Procedure EC-058)
Awareness
S There is a legitimate safety concern for personnel who have an opportunity to encounter blood or other
body fluids that may contain transmittable diseases.
S At the GE Education Center potentially exposed personnel" are maintenance and janitorial personnel and
First-Aid/CPR-trained personnel who serve on the Medical Emergency Response Team. These people
receive Bloodborne Pathogen special training annually.
S Untrained personnel are discouraged from exposing themselves to body fluids (other than their own).
S Any personnel who believe that they have been exposed to bloodborne pathogens should contact the
Medical Department (544-3232) and the EHS Team Leader (4-8682).
S Potentially infectious waste (bandages, sharps, contaminated material) is to be disposed of per Procedure
420.005 EHS. Consult with the Education Center EHS Team Leader (4-8682) for processing such waste.
S Call Front Desk to dispatch trained personnel who will perform cleanup.
Incident Response and Cleanup

S Trained personnel will utilize proper personal protective equipment, proper decontamination and cleanup
methods and waste disposal methods pursuant to their training when encountering blood or body fluids.
S Personal protective equipment and cleanup materials are available from the EHS Team leader's First Aid
Cabinet.
S All incidents must be reported properly to the Education Center EHS Team Leader (4-8682). The exposure
incident report will be forwarded to the Medical Department for follow-up actions.
Training
S Annual Bloodborne Pathogen training for First Aid/CPR trained Emergency Medical Response Team will be
conducted by the GEMS Medical Department annually and arranged by the EHS Team Leader.
S Annual Bloodborne Pathogen training for housekeepers, janitors and other contractor personnel will be
provided by the contractor. Training will meet the standards of OSHA 1910.1030.
S Field Service Engineers may self-administer Bloodborne Pathogen training using GEMS Field Service EHS
Manual E Training CD (current year version) available at the RiversEdge condominiums.
2-5
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
GE Medical Systems
REV A
2-3 ECPL (Energy Control & Power Lockout) (Reference Procedure EC-057)
Awareness
S There is a legitimate safety concern for personnel who service, repair, set-up and train on building,
process and laboratory equipment.
S Defeating a locked and tagged piece of equipment is prohibited.
S Personnel authorized to apply or remove locks and tags receive additional training.
S Questions about the locked-out devices should be directed to the person named on the tag" or to the
EHS Team Leader.
S This procedure will be avaliable to all Education Center personnel to enable compliance with OSHA
requirement to train "affected employees" (those who work in an area where ECPL may occur).
Authorized Personnel
S Authorized Personnel" are those who lockout/tagout equipment for the purpose of performing service,
maintenance repair or training on the equipment. At this location, students in laboratories who are learning
to service and repair medical diagnostic imaging equipment are also Authorized Personnel".
S Authorized Personnel" must receive training and periodic re-training at least equivalent to that afforded by
GEMS training module found in the GEMS Field Service EHS Manual & Training CD, which is modeled after
the GE Corporate E.C.P.L. training program. This video training can be self-administered by guests at the
RiversEdge Condominiums.
S GEMS Eduction Center Instructors charged with the responsibility of training GEMS Field Service engineers
and others, will be trained in ECPL using the same Field Service EHS Manual & Training CD. They will
incorporate ECPL practices in class work and laboratory exercises.
Lockout/Tagout
S All energy sources for equipment on which work will be performed and on which injury could occur due to
unexpected energization, startup or release of stored energy shall be deactivated. This includes opening
electrical circuits, closing and bleeding pressurized hydraulics and pneumatics, blocking springs or
counterweights and discharging capacitors (for example).
S The deactivated equipment shall be locked during the service work to prevent unexpected activation.
S Locks will be tagged during deactivation indicating the name of the person who applied the lock and the
date. (Use the red tag only for ECPL applications).
S Service work shall not proceed until it is verified that the equipment is truly deactivated.
S Approved locks and tags are prominently displayed in the Education Center Safety Information Station and
in select laboratories and mechanical rooms where the likelihood of use is greatest. Supplies will be
replenished by the Facilities Leader as required.
S When multiple personnel are servicing (or training) on the same equipment, each person shall apply his
individual lock and tag. Multiple lock devices are provided with the locks and tags.
S GEMS Field Service EHS Manual, Chapter 5 itemizes the ECPL considerations for the different types of
medical diagnostic imaging equipment. In addition, procedures for specific lab equipment are posted in
the lab.
S At the Education Center the yellow Out of Service" tag is used for equipment that is isolate for purposes
other than ECPL.
2-6
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
GE Medical Systems
REV A
Exception
S An exception is cord and plug connected electronic equipment where the cord and plug is the only means
of energization AND the plug is disconnected from the receptacle AND controlled exclusively by the person
performing the service/repair work.
S When there is any doubt regarding exclusive control" of the cord and plug, a power cord plug cover"
should be utilized and lock and tag applied.
Audits
S The same form used by GE Field Service for periodic audits of ECPL procedures shall be used at the GEMS
Education Center. At least one audit will be conducted annually by the EHS Team members from each
Modality. Copies shall be forwarded to and maintained at the desk of the EHS Team Leader.
S GEMS ECPL Inspection Form follows on the next page.
ECPL Materials
S The following material shall be used for ECPL program:
- Master Lock Padlock 46-194427P320
- ECPL Tags 46-194427P322
- Multiple Locking Devices 46-194427P313
- Power Cord Plug Cover 46-194427P321
2-7
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
GE Medical Systems
REV A
2-8
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
GE Medical Systems
REV A
2-4 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES FOR GEMS EDUCATION CENTER (Reference Procedure EC-26)
Reporting an Emergency
S To report a fire, a medical emergency or a hazardous material leak/spill, call the Front Lobby Receptionist at
4-1515 during working hours (7:00 am-5:30 pm weekdays) or 8-911 after normal hours. Explain the
location and nature of the emergency; remain on the line if possible.
S An alternative method for reporting a fire is to activate a red Fire Alarm" Pull Station. These are located
near all building exit doors and stairways.
S To report a bomb threat or other criminal threat, contact either the EHS Leader (4-8682) or Manager,
Education Center Operations (4-8135) immediately following receipt of the threat.
S To report a gas leak or hazardous material spill, call the EHS Leader (4-8682) or Manager, Education
Center Operations (4-8135).
S Refer to a GEMS Education Center Emergency Information Map" located in each room.
S Upon telephone receipt of an emergency call, the Front Lobby Receptionist will phone the authorities at
8-911, and for a fire, will initiate a local alarm by activating a nearby red Fire Alarm" Pull Station. For a
medical emergency only, the Front Lobby Receptionist will conference" the caller with the Pewaukee Fire
Department Dispatcher to speed transmission of critical medical data.
Responding to an Emergency
S FIRE
- In the event of a fire, the horn/strobe alarms will sound throughout the building.
- All personnel within the building will exit immediately in an orderly fashion through the nearest exit.
S In the event of personnel with disabilities, the responsible instructor or team leader will ask for
volunteers to aid and assist those personnel from the building.
- All personnel will assemble in the designated assembly areas (see Emergency Information Map located
in each room) where a roll call will be taken by the instructors/team leaders.
- Instructors/team leaders will inform the Manager, Education Center Operations that all personnel in their
class or on their team has or has not been accounted for.
S If all have been accounted for, then personnel will wait in their designated assembly area until
notified by the Fire Department Officer in Charge and the EHS Team Leader that it is safe to return
to the building.
S If not all have been accounted for, then the Fire Department Officer in Charge and/or EHS Team
Leader will search the building for those who did not leave at the alarm.
- No one will return to the building without the express permission of the Fire Department Officer in
Charge and/or the EHS Team Leader.
S FIRE DRILL
- The response procedure for a fire drill is the same as for a fire.
S BUILDING EVACUATION
- The response procedure for a building evacuation is the same as for a fire.
- Building evacuations for causes other than fire must be approved/initiated by either the Manager,
Education Center Operations or EHS Leader. These causes could be such things as an uncontrolled
gas leak, hazardous material spill, structural failure or a verified bomb threat.
2-9
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
GE Medical Systems
REV A
S BOMB THREAT
- All bomb threats will be treated seriously.
- Any person who receives a bomb threat must notify the Manger, Education Center Operations or the
EHS Leader immediately. Use telephone, pager, etc. as appropriate.
- A Bomb Threat Questionnaire" will be completed by the threat recipient for use by management and
authorities in assessing the threat. The EHS Leader or Manager, Education Center Operations will
contact local police and fire authorities to review the questionnaire.
- If appropriate, a building evacuation will be conducted per Section 2.3.
- If required by Police/Fire Department officials, a search may be made of all/part of the facility. GE
personnel knowledgeable of the facility and labs and equipment could be asked to conduct the search
for the bomb device.
S SEVERE WEATHER (TORNADO)
- There is a Severe Weather Radio Alarms located in the GEMS Education Center. It will be set to the
weather channel. It is located at the EHS Team Leader's desk.
When the radio alarm sounds, it means there is a Tornado/Thunderstorm Watch or Warning.
- In the event of a Tornado Warning with a confirmed siting nearby, the EHS Team Leader, the Manger,
Education Center Operations or the front desk receptionist will initiate the alarm tone (whooper) and a
SHELTER ANNOUNCEMENT over the building P/A system.
- The Shelter Announcement is Attention please, Attention please, due to severe weather conditions,
everyone is to take shelter in their assigned areas. Move quickly and calmly and avoid building glass.
Move to your shelter now."
- Upon hearing the SHELTER ANNOUNCEMENT, all personnel within the building will move immediately
in an orderly fashion to their designated shelter area. In the event of personnel with disabilities, the
responsible instructor or team leader will ask for volunteers to aid and assist those personnel to their
designated shelter area.
- When the severe weather situation changes, a building-wide page announcing that it is safe to return
to the rest of the building will be made by the EHS Leader.
2-10
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
GE Medical Systems
REV A
EVACUATION ASSEMBLY AREAS Shelter Areas

(60FT. FROM BUILDING)
A Instructional Technology
1 Nuclear & Instructional Technology B Nuclear
2 X-Ray C X-Ray
3 2nd Floor Offices & Marriott employees D Dining and 2nd floor offices
4 GEMS-TV (1st & 2nd floor) & Conference
5 Customer Training & Conference E TV Production
6 CT F Customer Training
7 MR G CT
8 North Wing (Ultrasound, IIS & Six Sigma) H MR
J North Wing 1st Floor
K North Wing 2nd Floor
2-11
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
GE Medical Systems
REV A
2-12
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
GE Medical Systems
REV A
2-5 WORK RELATED INJURIES/ILLNESSES (Reference Procedure EC-024)
Routine Cases - Minor Injury/Illness

S Injured person will self-administer treatment.
S First Aid treatment requires the occurrence be reported to EHS Team Leader at 4-8682.
S If treatment assistance is needed, the employee should report to the Administrative Services Staff who will
make arrangements for him/her to be seen by a nurse or doctor at GEMS Headquarters Clinic or Aurora
HealthCare. Administrative Services Staff will insure that class instructor or Manager is advised (if
appropriate).
S If hospital treatment is required, the employee should travel to the hospital by:
- Company car or van which can be driven only by an employee of GE (not the injured employee).
- Cab transport requires a voucher (may be obtained by contacting the EHS Team Leader or Front Desk).
Best Cab Co. 549-6622.
S Form F4559X, entitled Employee's Notice of Occupational Injury/Illness Claim," will be filled out by the
employee, and forwarded to the EHS Team Leader.
S Follow-up
Whenever treatment is required, the EHS Team Leader must contact the GEMS Nurse (544-3232) as soon
as possible after the occurrence in order that the GEMS Nurse determine the following:
- Injury diagnosis
- OSHA recordable status. If it is a recordable, the student's manager must be informed as the region is
responsible for the reporting and recording in the OSHA 200 Log. If it is an employee of the GEMS
Education Center, contact the GEMS Nurse at 544-3232.
- Work Restrictions
Emergency - Serious or Life Threatening Injury or Illness (or Fatality)
S Report incident immediately for assistance.
- During working hours (7 a.m. - 6 p.m.) call Front Desk at 4-1515.
- After work hours, call Pewaukee Fire Department Paramedics at 8-911.
- Report nature of emergency, building name or address and room or lab number where victim is
located.
S Front desk clerk will notify/activate local First Aid/CPR Response Team AND will call Pewaukee Fire
Department Paramedics at 8-911.
S The first person to respond to the injury scene will render assistance by:
- calling for help;
- providing medical assistance if training;
- guiding respondees to the scene;
- advising victim's manager or instructor (as appropriate).
S Form F4559X, entitled Employee's Notice of Occupational Injury/Illness Claim," must be completed out by
the GE employee as soon as practical and forwarded to the EHS Team Leader.
S Report incident as soon as possible to:
- EHS Team Leader so accident investigation can be initiated.
- GEMS Nurse (544-3232) so the following can be determined:
S Injury diagnosis
S OSHA recordable status. If it is a recordable, the student's manager must be informed as the
region is responsible for the reporting and recording in the OSHA 200 Log.
S Work Restrictions
S Emergency transport to hospital (Elmbrook or Waukesha Memorial) will be provided by Town of Pewaukee
Fire Department Ambulance.
First Aid Kit Locations
There are First Aid Kits located throughout the GEMS Education Center and one in each Condominium plus
Condominium Front Office.
2-13
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
GE Medical Systems
REV A
2-6 FIRST AID KITS (Reference Procedure EC-23)
First Aid Kits and Locations

S GEMS Education Center will provide and maintain 19 first aid kits located as shown on the attached map.
Most are co-located with the easily found Safety Information Stations.
S Each building of the Rivers Edge Condominiums will have one (1) First Aid Kit located in each laundry room
plus Front Desk.
S Additional supplies will be kept at the desk of the EHS Leader, including Bio-hazard waste bags and
clean-up materials.
Using the First Aid Kits

S In the case of minor injury or illness, the injured or ill person will take what he/she deems necessary to
remedy the situation. He/she will enter that information on the First Aid Kit Log located on the inside cover
of the kit. This information includes date of injury, name of injured or ill person, nature/cause of
injury/illness, what item was taken from the kit (see attachment).
Contents of First Aid Kits

S Each kit will contain the following:
• (1) Small water gel packet (for burns)
• (30) Assorted bandages (2 boxes)
• (4) Gauze pads (1 box)
• (1) Cold pack
• (10) Iodine swabs (1 box)
• (3) Foil packets of ointment (multi-antibiotic) (1 box)
• (1) CPR Microshield
• (1) Emergency Blanket
• (1) Sharps Container
Maintenance of First Aid Kits

S Kits will be inspected bi-monthly by the EHS Leader who will also be responsible for
procuring/replenishment.
2-14
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
GE Medical Systems
REV A
Safety Information Stations

✱ Full Station
FAK First Aid Kit Only
✱
3 F
✱ ✱ FAK
FAK
✱ 1ST FLOOR
✱ ✱
✱
✱
North
✱
✱
2ND FLOOR
BASEMENT
2-15
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
GE Medical Systems
REV A
2-16
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
GE Medical Systems
REV A
2-7 MAGNET SAFETY (Reference Procedure EC-061)
References
S GEMS EHS Field Service Manual, Chapter 5A, Procedure #23.
Definitions
S CRYOGEN:
A substance for producing low temperatures. In general, a cryogen is a material in liquid form that
normally is a gas. In MR, the cryogens are liquid helium and sometimes liquid nitrogen. Presently,
the liquid helium is required to produce the very low temperatures necessary for the
superconducting magnet.
S GAUSS (G)/TESLA (T):
A unit of magnetic field strength. The internationally accepted unit is the tesla: 1 tesla = 10,000
gauss. As a comparison, the earth's magnetic field is approximately 0.5 gauss. MR MAX has a
field strength of 5000 gauss or 0.5 tesla and Signa has a field strength of 15,000 gauss or 1.5 tesla.
The earth's magnetic field is approximately one half gauss to one gauss, depending on location.
S MAGNETIC RESONANCE (MR) or NUCLEAR MAGNETIC RESONANCE (NMR):
The absorption or emission of electromagnetic energy by nuclei in a static magnetic field, after
excitation by a suitable RF magnetic field. The peak resonance frequency is proportional to the
magnetic field , and is given by the Larmor equation. Only nuclei with a non-zero spin exhibit
NMR.
S MR IMAGING:
Creation of images of objects such as the body by use of the nuclear magnetic resonance
phenomenon. The immediate practical application involves imaging the distribution of hydrogen
nuclei (protons) in the body. The image brightness in a given region is usually dependent jointly on
the spin density and the relaxation times, with their relative importance determined by the particular
imaging technique employed. Image brightness is also affected by motion such as blood flow.
S QUENCH (RUNDOWN):
Condition where a superconductive magnet boils off helium. In this condition, the static magnetic
field is removed. A very loud but brief sound results when the cryogens boil off. Once quenched, it
can take a significant amount of time and material to return to the superconducting state.
S QUENCHING:
Loss of superconductivity of the current carrying coil that may occur unexpectedly in a
superconducting magnet. As the magnet becomes resistive, heat will be released that can result in
rapid evaporation of liquid helium in the cryostat. This may present a hazard if not properly planned
for.
S RADIO FREQUENCY (RF):
Frequency (intermediate between audio and infrared frequencies) used in magnetic resonance
systems to excite nuclei to resonance. The RF used in MR studies is commonly in the megahertz
(MHz) range. The principal effect of RF magnetic fields on the body is power deposition in the form
of heating, mainly at the surface; this is a principal area of concern for safety limits.
2-17
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
GE Medical Systems
REV A
Safety Practices
S Magnetic field safety includes removal of all metal objects such as watches, keys, pens, hearing aids,
purses, magnetic credit cards, brief cases, IUD's, ferrous jewelry, etc. Persons with steel pins, steel plates,
artificial limbs, surgical clips, or other metal objects are not allowed in areas exceeding the 5 gauss level.
S Exposure to magnetic fields will be kept at the level consistent with the tasks at hand.
S Handling of cryogens includes wearing of nonabsorbent and insulated clothing along with safety glasses or
face shield. Storage of the containers includes the use of nozzle covers and chains.
S Phantoms must be handled with care using cradles provided. Any leakage must be reported to instructor
and EHS Team Leader and treated as a hazardous material" spill.
S Whenever a quench occurs, the magnet room and control area will be evacuated until the atmosphere is
established safe.
S The 5 gauss level of the magnetic field produced by the magnets will be outlined and readily visible.
S Warning signs indicating the present of magnetic fields in excess of 5 gauss will be prominently displayed.
Unattended MR Systems
S The nature of instruction at the GEMS Education Center allows a student to apply power to an MR system,
perform the tasks, then leave the MR system power on for the next person in line, and so on. Normal
practice in the MR labs allows the systems to be powered up in the standby mode at all times. At GEMS
Education Center, the last person using the equipment must assure that the MR system is in the standby
mode and that no RF is being generated and that all RF loads are in place.
S Lockout/Tagout procedures shall be applied as required.
Documentation
S Each staff member and student at the GEMS Education Center, is required to read this document and is
further asked to sign their name to the form provided, attesting to the fact that they have read and
understand this direction.
S Routine unscheduled audits will be made by GEMS safety/managerial personnel.
2-18
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
GE Medical Systems
REV A
2-8 RADIATION SAFETY (Reference Procedure EC-059)
X-ray and CT Areas

S The generation of x-rays at the GEMS Education Center shall be:
- at a technique that will minimize the amount of Kvp, Ma, time, and duration to complete the task at
hand.
- providing the greatest person-to-tube distance
- utilizing the most radiation protection possible consistent with the task at hand
S The instructors at the GEMS Education Center will ensure that x-rays will be directed in the safety way
possible.
S The license granted by the State of Wisconsin allowing the GEMS Education Center to function as a
radiation installation is an INDUSTRIAL LICENSE. This license does not provide for the application of
x-rays to any part of any person. therefore, taking x-rays of any part of a person is ABSOLUTELY
FORBIDDEN.
S When making x-rays, an indication (can be audio or visual, for example, a sign or light) must be present to
warn visitors that x-rays are being made.
S Portable x-ray equipment, such as the AMX, will be operated only in areas designated by the Instructor.
Adequate shielding must be provided.
S During adjustment procedures or demonstrations, it may be necessary to energize an x-ray tube with no
intention of actually making the x-ray. In such cases, you must assume that x-ray will be generated
anyway and therefore attenuate the potential beam by closing the collimator blades when provided on the
equipment. If such attenuating devices are not present, lead aperture caps made of 1/8" lead sheets will
be used to absorb the primary beams.
Use of Sources (Nuclear Area)

S Source Use Rules:
- All sources are to be checked out as needed for test and calibration of the Nuclear Medicine systems.
The checkout procedure includes the GEMS Education Center Radiation Officer -Authorized User -
radioactive sources, staff and students.
- Only check out sources consistent with the tasks at hand.
- Under no circumstances are the sources to be removed from the nuclear lab in the GEMS Education
Center.
- All sources are to be checked in when they are not in use.
- Liquid sources for Nuclear Medicine calibration and testing are not permitted or allowed.
- All sources at GEMS Education Center to be stored in a locked lead safe located in the storage area.
S Checkout/Checkin of sources is required.
S The safe will be opened during working hours only.
S If you are working in the lab after hours, security is your responsibility. You must make special
arrangements with the authorized user to accommodate your needs.
- All sources are to be in their respective pigs. Sources and pigs are numbered and should not be mixed.
- Sources will be transported between pigs in their respective pigs.
- Utilize caution when handling the pigs. They are made of lead and bend easily. If you should damage a
pig, inform your instructor. Under no circumstances should you try to force a source into a distorted pig.
- All pointed rod sources are numbered and stored in marked locations in the safe. Rod sources do not
require shielding for transport or use.
2-19
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
GE Medical Systems
REV A
- A checkout log is provided. When checking out a source, you are required to enter your name, source
number and time. When checking in a source (returning a source), you are required to enter the time
the source is being returned (you checked the source out and you are responsible for returning the
source). At the end of the day, the Instructor will confirm all sources are accounted for by physically
opening each pig and confirming that the correct source is present.
- Wash hands with soap and water after handling the lead containers.
S The nuclear instructors at the Institute will ensure that film or TLD badges are worn (at the neck level) by all
Nuclear Field Engineers attending class.
S Unattended Nuclear Medicine Equipment
The nature of instruction at the GEMS Education Center allows a student to apply power to Nuclear
Medicine Equipment, perform their tasks, then leave the Nuclear Medicine Equipment power on for the next
person in line, and so on. It is therefore, impractical to require the person who turns a Nuclear Medicine
Equipment on to also turn it off, as normal practices usually require. At GEMS Education Center, the last
person using the equipment must turn it off. Lockout/Tagout procedures shall be applied as required.
S Sources
The following sources are used during Nuclear Training:
Cobolt 57 (Co57) Disk - 26 mCi max
Barium 33 (Ba33) Bottle - 1.2 mCI MAX
The following sources are used during PET Training:

Germanium (Ge68) Point - 21.5 mCi max
Badging
The staff and students at GEMS Education Center shall wear radiation badges anytime they are in the labs which will
be monitored at regular intervals. The badge is to be worn at the neck level. A badge must be supplied to any
student who has not brought their personal badge. Anyone person that is pregnant and is working with x-ray or
radiation source may contact the facility Department Radiation Safety Officer (DRSO) about a fetal monitoring
device or other options. The badges monitor Occupations exposure, not Medical exposure. Consequently, the
badge is removed when x-rays prescribed by your doctor are taken.
Shielding
S Lead shielding is provided where needed in the walls of the x-ray rooms at the GEMS Education Center.
In normal use, consistent with the directives contained herein, occupants of rooms adjoining x-ray rooms
are adequately protected from secondary radiation and scatter.
S Protective aprons and gloves are provided in x-ray rooms and will be work during fluoroscopic or image
intensified observations when the operator is not protected by screens or other shielding.
S Some equipment has protective devices built in, such as the longitudinal shield in the RFX table. This
additional protection, and any other such protection devices provided on this equipment, will be utilized
when possible.
S During adjustment procedures or demonstrations, it may be necessary to energize an x-ray tube with no
intention of actually making the x-ray. In such cases, you must assume that x-ray will be generated
anyway and therefore attenuate the potential beam by closing the collimator blades when provided on the
equipment. If such attenuating devices are not present, lead aperture caps made of 1/8" lead sheets will
be used to absorb the primary beams.
Compliance Documentation
S Each staff member and student at the GEMS Education Center is required to read this document and as
further asked to sign their name to the form provided, attesting to the fact that they have read and
understand this direction.
S Routine, unscheduled audits will be made by GEMS safety/managerial personnel. The Radiation Safety
Officer for the GEMS Education Center is Tim Zimmermann at 574-8618.
2-20
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0
SECTION 3 - OPERATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 3 - OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-1
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0
3-2
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0
REFER TO APPLICABLE AMX-4 OPERATIONS MANUAL
DOMESTIC (USA) 46-017493
INTERNATIONAL (COLLECTOR) 46-017531
3-3
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0
3-4
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Product Data Sheet A0657A AMX-4 X-Ray Unit, 7-187, Page 1
3-5
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
3-6
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
3-7
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
3-8
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
SECTION 4 - MODULE/CIRCUIT BOARD INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 4 - MODULE/CIRCUIT BOARD INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Display Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Battery Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Rotor Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
KVP/FIL Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
1 KHZ Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
Drive Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
Drive Power Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
4-1
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
4-2
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
MODULES AND CIRCUIT BOARDS
IDENTIFICATION
AMX3A2 TUBE ARM

AMX3A3 TUBE
AMX3A4
COLLIMATOR
AMX1 AMX3 A1
GENERATOR TUBE COLUMN
HIGH VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMER
AMX1A6A1
AMX2 - BASE ASSY

AMX2A1 REAR
AMX2A2 FRONT
BEHIND FILM BIN: AMX2A3 BATTERY GROUP
DRIVE CONTROLLER AMX1A5A1
DRIVE POWER AMP AMX1A5A2
AMX-4 Major Components
4-7
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
kVp AND mAs

DISPLAY
ËËËËË
ËËËËË
MESSAGE
DISPLAY
kVp UP mAs UP
mAs
DOWN
kVp
DOWN
Operator's Panel
AMX1A1A1 - Display controller - KVP/MAS 7 segment display

AMX1A1A2 - Display Board. - 16 segment display & bar graph
AMX1A2A1 - Controller - CPU Board.
AMX1A2A2 - LVLE - Low Voltage Limited Energy Power Supply
4-8
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CHARGER/VOL TMETER BOARD

CB1 AMX1A3A2
AMX1A3A1
60 HZ INVERTER
FOR ROTOR
CONTROL AND
COLLIMA TOR
LAMP
AMX1A3R1
Charger/Rotor Panel
4-9
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
TP3
TP4
46-270157 AMX-4 kVp and mA Jumper Location
AMX1A4A1 - 1 KHZ INVERTER

AMX1A4A2 - FIL/KVP (2 KHZ FILAMENT INVERTER)
TP3
TP4
AMX1A4A3
46-315161 (And Later) AMX-4 kVp and mA Jumper Location
4-10
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017502, AMX-4 Schematics (Model 46-315161 Series), Rev. 5, Page 2-3
SH NO. 1 CONT ON SHEET 2
FOLD
FOLD
FOLD
46–329267–S 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 GENERAL ELECTRIC 46–329267–S
DRAWING NO.
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED USE THE
FOLLOWING : – REV 1 TITLE CONT ON SHEET 2 SH NO. 1
APPLIED PRACTICES
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
SURFACES TOLERANCES ON DIMENSIONS
DECIMALS DECIMALS ANGLES 46–329267–S OVERALL_SCHEMATICS_FOR_AMX_IV
46–208600 (2 PLACES) (3 PLACES)
+
–
+
–
+
–
CONT ON SHEET 2 SH NO. 1 FIRST MADE FOR AMX IV PRODUCTIVITY
P/L ISSUED
46–329267G1
A 46–329267G2
THE REVISION NUMBER OF THIS SHEET IS THE CONTROL 46–329267G4
NUMBER OF THIS ENTIRE DOCUMENT. THIS REVISION NUMBER 46–329276G5
MUST INCREASE WHENEVER ANY SHEET IS CHANGED.
46–329276G6
PCN # – – 180067 – – –
46–329267G7
DATE 46–329267G8
24NOV93 30NOV93 7JAN94 – – –
SHT 46–329276G9
Battery backed RAM 2
3
A
A
0
0
0
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
46–329276G10
46–329276G11
(Diags & Calibrations) 4

5
A
A
0
0
0
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
THIS SCHEMATIC IS ALSO
APPLICABLE TO:
6 A 0 0 – – –
Located under top front 7
8
A
A
0
0
0
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
46–315161G1
46–315161G2
Left Side latch 46–315161G3

46–315161G4
46–315161G5
B 46–315161G6
Controler bd.
ROTOR CONTROL AND BATTERY CHARGER
MODULE AEC ELECTRONICS
CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT
A3T1
LOW VOLTAGE LIMITED ENERGY
KEY SW
ROTOR CONTROL AKA: 60HZ PADDLE
J2 TO A3T1 PHASE 1 AND 2 # INDICATES RIBBON CABLE POWER SUPPLY

KEY SWITCH J3 FROM A3T1 SECONDARY Inverter
J4 FIL VOLTS/COMM CAP CRG/SAFTY CONTACT
AEC ELECTRONICS L.V.L.E
J5 DC POWER FROM LVLE
+BATT
C J1 CPU J3 ROTOR CONTROL #
A3A2
When on J9 DC POWER
AEC CONTROL J7 & KV Gold box behind key

BATTERY CHARGER measured switch
J1 CPU J1 BATTERY CHARGER #
J2 KEY SW/+BATT SW.
+BATT MODELS G7, G8, G9, G10, G11 ONLY
J4 BREAKER TRIP IN
BATTERIES J5 115 VAC & RETURN MAIN HARNESS J8
FOLD J4 1KHZ INVERTER #

–BATT J10 POWER OK/POWER STABLE*
FOLD
D J11 CHARGE OUTPUT
J6 J7
A3A1 # DISPLAY CONTROLLER J6
J5 FIL/KVP CONTROL #
DC POWER J12
AMX1A2A1 AMX1A2A2
J2 MOTOR CONTROL # + BATT SWITCHED DC POWER
FAN CHARGE
LAMP
AMX1A3
MAIN WIRING HARNESS
E
Right Side
HIGH VOLTAGE MODULE DRIVE CONTROL MODULE TOP COVER

1 KHZ INVERTER KVP/FIL CONTROL MOTOR CONTROLLER DISPLAY CONTROLER DISPLAY BOARD
MOTOR CONTROLLER
J1 TO CPU

TO CPU J2
DC POWER FROM LVLE J1
J11 TO BUMPERS
POWER AMPLIFIER
+ BATT SWITCHED J10
KV / MAS
J4 PHASE1,PHASE2, &RETURN
CURRENT LOOP CHECK J3
27 VAC FROM ROT. CONT. J4
J2 TO CPU – BATT J7
up & down shows KV
F
J5 TAP SELECT RELAYS PWM L & RETURNS J5
signals from J9
MODULE
J1 TO CPU J2
TRANSITION
J2
& MAS
Pulses for TRIP BREAKER J6
PMW E & PMW L J8
CPU & INTERCON
J9
LEFT MOT & CONT. J1
RIGHT MOT & CONT. J2
HEADER
SCR's EXP J3
KVFDBK
J7 Filament LEFT & RIGHT POWER* J4
Drive handle LEFT BRAKE J5
start & stop

A4A1
Drive RIGHT BRAKE J6
A4A2 A5A1 A5A2 A1A1 A1A2
Key switch AMX1A1
CAPACITOR
TAP
SELECT
For auto transformer, SCR's are turned on LEFT AND RIGHT
BOARD RELAYS LEFT MOTOR RIGHT BRAKE
J1
J4
J2
A4A3
J3
Q1–Q3
it's the rough KV select and off (forced AND
BRAKE
CONTACTORS
AND
AND
MOTOR
REVISIONS PRINTS TO
DYNAMIC BRAKES
1.2uH
CHOKE
POWER
BLOCKS
commutation) 1 DPB_7JAN94
PCN_180067
404
H AMX1A4 AMX1A5
MADE BY
APPROVALS MEDICAL SYSTEMS
D.R.LONG_24NOV93
ISSUED
DRL
DIV OR
DEPT. 46–329267–S
M.BOEHM_1DEC93 1DEC93 MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN LOCATIONCONT ON SHEET 2 SH NO. 1
FOLD
FOLD
FOLD
46–329267–S 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4-3/4-4(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
FOLD
FOLD
FOLD
DRAWING NO.
APPLIED PRACTICES
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
This Fuse always HOT
46–208600 (2 PLACES) (3 PLACES)
+
–
+
–
+
–
CONT ON SHEET 3 SH NO. 2 FIRST MADE FOR AMX_IV_PRODUCTIVITY
P/L ISSUED
On Bracket on New Vintage BRAKE

RELEASE POWER DISTRIBUTION
1A3F10
A
1 Breaker. 24v Trip coil. (RED)
2A
(RED)
1A2S1
BRAKE RELEASE
(BLU)
7–C4
GRN/YEL GRN/YEL
Batt <108v will also trip +BATT (BLK) (#8AWG)
6–C6
TO X–RAY
COLUMN GROUND ARM GROUND
breaker 1A3CB1 1A3CB1

1
6–E6
CONTROL MODULE (BLK)
(BLK)
–BATT (BLK) (#8AWG) (BLK)
+ MAIN _
(RED) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK)
BATTERY
+BATT –BATT
BOX
Opens during
GROUND STUD ON BASE
8AMP (RED) 64AMP
RT side If working on Batteries you must disconnect and tape these 1A2TS1
1A3F9
15A charge K CHARGE 1= disable #2 LEAD up separately
under (BLU)
J4–1
KON1 drives 7–D9
(BLK)
4
J2–7
B panel A3F6 J1–2 J1–1 KON2
(BLK)
(ORN) (BLU)
KEY SWITCH
.5A KON2= batt
key switch A3F4 J11–1
BATT CHARGE pwr to machine Verticle lock 7–D9
(BLK)
(ORN)
fuse CIRCUIT
1150 W
10A
J2–5
2 modes. 132v (WHT/BLK) 8 UPPER 10
1A2TS3
(BLK) (BLK) (VIO) 11 (BLK)
1A5F1 (RED)
across Batt OR COLUMN
BRAKE
1A2TS1 7–E9
to drive 3.2amp
1340 W
3 3A1TS1 3A1TS1
(WHT) (WHT)
K ON 2 K LINE 2
1A5F2 (RED)
7–E9 mod (whichever the 1A2TS3 9 11
(RED) ARM (BLK)
system needs) 10
latch BRAKE
2A2TS1–1
700 W rotational lock 2A2TS1–2
(RED) (RED) LOWER (BLK) (BLK)
BATTERY AMX1A3A1 BOARD COLUMN
BRAKE
J2–9
J11 IN4936 5
250 W
9 8 4
1A2TS4 1A2TS4
(VIO)
fuse for the locks 1A3F3 4 4
K1+
6 3 1A2TS2–4 (RED) (BLK)
1A2TS2–3
(VIO) (RED) (RED) (RED) TUBE PARKED (BLK)
2A LATCH
FOLD lock 8–F6

1A2FL1 (BLK) FOLD
6–F5
D
1A2TS1
J1–1 A2A2 J1–2 6
(VIO) (BLK)
8 LVLE
(VIO)
6–F5
J1–3 J2
TO CPU must be 2.5 & is used for calibration
8–E4 A3R1 A3F5
J2-J8 are wired (BLK)
(VIO)
4–D1 GND STUD the same & easy J3
TO BATT CHARGER
3–D9
2.5
200W
10A
–BATT
9
(VIO)
to mix up
E J4 +BATT
TO ROTOR CONTROL
(VIO) 4–B2
3–H3
MR756 BATTERY
J5 F1
All plugs wired identically

TO MOTOR DRIVE
7–A9 BATTERY HARNESS AMX1A2TS6
(VIO) 1A5A2J10–2 J1–1 BOARD AMX2A3A1 J11–3
10 7–D4
J6
BATTERY 1
+BATT SWITCHED
TO FIL/KVP
5–E2 +5v, +/-15v, +24v. F2
J2–1 J11–1 RT side of blue
–BATT
4–D1
J7
DC/DC converter 2
panel
TO 1KHZ
BATTERY J3–1 J11–8
this was the Bat + signal. 6–F1 Input of 90v - 150v F3 3
J4–1 J11–9
The key switch will enable pwr or J8–7
PWR FAIL DETECT BATTERY 4
BATTERY COMPARTMENT
3–F5
plug cord (ORN)
1A2TS4
F4 J5–1 J11–5 1 1 DEE DETAIL DP FOR TEST HARNESS CONNECTIONS.
F 1 5 APPLICABLE TO ALL 46–329267 SERIES AMX4’S AND
J8–2 J8–1 PGND (BRN)
+24V J6–1 J11–4 UPGRADED 46–315161 SERIES AMX4’S.
BATTERY
F5 6
3A4 (BRN) B
(BLU) K1 J7–1 J11–6
A114B
SW2 7
BATTERY
F6 J8–1 J11–7
A
1A2TS3–13 3A1TS1–13 3A1TS1–12 1A2TS3–12 (YEL) 8
(YEL)
J9–1 J11–10
SW3 BATTERY
2 F7
9
1A2TS4 J10–1 J11–11
10
In standby or idle mode, The AMX-4 draws approximately 290 mA COLLIMATOR

BATTERY
F8
REVISIONS
404
PRINTS TO
H with meter in series with lead marked 2" to battery negative terminal Brings in K1 # 10 is NOT ground
Prep draws about 5 amps. to light the filament
BATTERY
F9
–BATT
DETAIL DP
MADE BY
D.R.LONG_24NOV93
ISSUED
DIV OR
DEPT. 46–329267–S
– MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN LOCATION CONT ON SHEET 3 SH NO. 2
FOLD
FOLD
FOLD
46–329267–S 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4-5/4-6(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
SECTION 5
CONTROLLER
AMX1 A2 A1
46-264974G1/G2
4-13/4-14(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
SH NO. 8 CONT ON SHEET –
FOLD
FOLD
FOLD
DRAWING NO.
FOLLOWING : – REV 0 TITLE CONT ON SHEET – SH NO. 8
APPLIED PRACTICES
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
DECIMALS DECIMALS ANGLES 46–329267–S OVERALL SCHEMATICS FOR AMX IV
46–208600 (2 PLACES) (3 PLACES)
AMX1A2 +
–
+
–
+
–
CONT ON SHEET – SH NO. 8 FIRST MADE FOR AMX4 IV PRODUCTIVITY
P/L ISSUED
J1 - J8 are wired the same, could be CONTROLLER MODULE
A
mixed up OR plugged in upside down
CONTROL PROCESSOR CONTROL PROCESSOR

J1 OPERATIONAL CONNECTIONS J6 TEST MODE CONNECTIONS
V–CHANGE CMND 1 1 DISP DATA OUT
AMX1A2A1 AMX1A2A1
V–CHANGE RTN 2 3 SW DATA INPUT
24v signals I–CHARGE CMND 3 5 MAS UP
J11
I–CHARGE CMND RTN 4 6 DISP DATA RESET* 1 PREP SW
TO BATTERY CHARGER BATTERY V & CHARGE CUR 5 # 6 can't be 7 MAS DOWN 2 EXP SW
LINE SENSE 6 9 X–RAY ON LAMP* 3 SERVICE SW
7 selected the same
AMX1A3A1 BATTERY V & CHARGE CUR SEL 11 KVP UP 4 LINE SENSE
3–D2 3–D2 TRIP BREAKER
CHARGE RELAY*
8
10
time as key switch 12
13
DISPLAY OK
KVP DOWN
5
6
BUMPER*
TUBE PARKED
B KEY SWITCH ON 11 on 14 +24 VDC
TO DISPLAY CONTROLLER AMX1A1A1 1–F9
7 DRIVE ENABLE SW
CHARGE SCALE SELECT 12 15 SONART* 8 KEY SW ON
LOAD 14 16 PWR GND 9 MAS UP
17 +40 V V.F. DISP SUP 10 MAS DWN
J2 18 +5 V 11 KVP UP
RIGHT DRV FDBK + 1 20 LOGIC GND 12 KVP DWN
RIGHT DRV FDBK – 2 21 XMIT OK* 13 DISP. DATA OUT
LEFT DRV FDBK + 3
1 - 8 are analog 23 LGND 14 DISP. DATA OUT RTN
LEFT DRV FDBK – 4 24 +24V V.F.SUP 15 FIELD LIGHT SW
RIGHT DRIVE CMND – 5 # 24 is for the vacuum florescent display 17 +24 VDC
TO MOTOR CONTROLLER RIGHT DRV CMND + 6 J7 18 BUFFERED DISP. DATA

LEFT DRV CMND + 7 19 RGT HALL INPUT
AMX1A5A1 LEFT DRV CMND – 8 1 AEC ON 21 LFT HALL INPUT
7–B1 BUMPER* 10 2 AEC RTN
RIGHT STALL 12 3 KVP 0*
C FULL SPD ENA 13 # 13 must have 4 KVP 1*
LEFT STALL 14 5 KVP 2*
DRV RESET 15 tube parked switch 6 KVP 3*
TO AEC OPTION
MOTOR ENA 16
closed 7 KVP 4* if present
DRIVE ENA SW 17 8 GEN READY*
9 AEC EX EN
J3 10 EXP START*
ROTOR INTERLOCK 3 11 KVP5
12 KVP6
24v signals 60 HZ INV OK 5
X–RAY PRESS SW
X–RAY PRESS SW RTN
6
7
# 9 is rotor start &
TO ROTOR CONTROL ROTOR SELECT* 9 collimator light
AMX1A3A2 SAFETY CONTACTOR ENB * 10
FOLD 4–A1 4–B10 4–C2

60HZ INV. RELAY*
PREP SW
11
12
# 10 is a software
4–F2 4–F10 4–H2 60 HZ PHASE 2 13 signal FOLD
D 60 HZ PHASE 1 15
FIELD LIGHT SW 16
FIELD LIGHT SW RTN 17
J12
J4
1 PWR GND
TAP 6 FDBK 7 2 +24 VDC
TAP 6* 8 4 –15 VDC
9
TAP 5 FDBK 5 SIGNAL GND TO LVLE AMX1A2A2 2–E5
TAP 5* 10 6 +15 VDC
1K HZ INVERTER READY 12 8 LOGIC GND
13 +5 VDC
24v signals TAP 4 FDBK
TAP 4* 14
9
TO 1KHZ INVERTER TAP 3 FDBK 15 J8 (ORN) RGT MAN TDS OUT

J2
4 (WHT)
1A2S2
TAP 3* 16 1 OUTPUT
E
AMX1A4A1 TAP 2 FDBK 17
5
(RED) HALL RGT REF 3 (RED)
REF
TAP 2* 18 (BLK) HALL RGT REF RET 5 (BLK)
6–C1 6 RTN
TAP 1 FDBK 19
TAP 1* 20 RIGHT HALL
INVERTER OK 22
23 J1 1A2S3
these are from the Drive Handle
EXP STOP CMND
(WHT) LFT MAN TDS OUT 4 (WHT)
1K HZ PHASE 1 24
25
# 25 is for the SCR's 3
(RED) HALL LFT REF 3 (RED)
OUTPUT
START 7 REF
1K HZ PHASE 2 26 (BLK) HALL LFT REF RET 5 (BLK)
8 RTN
LEFT HALL
(YEL) POWER OK
J5 10 3–F3
1A2TS2 1A2TS2
LEAKAGE COMP + 3 1A2S1 1A2S1
(BLU) TUBE PARKED SW 1 1
LEAKAGE COMP – 4 13 TUBE TUBE TUBE PARKED SENSOR
(BLK) TUBE PARKED SW RTN 2 2 BLU
14 PARKED PARKED REPLACED TUBE PARKED
F + LEAKAGE COMP FDBK 5 YEL
– LEAKAGE COMP FDBK 6 SWITCH 2–D7 SENSOR SWITCH END OF 1992
1A2S8 BLK
FIL +
FIL –
7
8
# 7 & 8 are 19
(GRY) SERVICE SW
(GRY) SERVICE SW RTN
SERVICE
TO FIL/KVP CONTROL
FIL FDBK + 9 filament demand 20 SWITCH
FIL FDBK – 10 1A2J3 1A2S–6&7

AMX1A4A2 KVP + 11
11 & 12 are 21
(GRN) FIELD LIGHT SW 4 FIELD LIGHT SW
KVP – 12 (WHT) PREP SW 2 PREP SW
5–C1
KVP DWN FDBK + 13 KV demand 23
(BLK) HAND SW COM 3 HAND SW COM
KVP DWN FDBK – 14 24
16 KHZ CLK 15 (RED) EXP SW 1 EXP SW HAND SWITCH
25
2 KHZ PHASE 1 17
1A2S4
2 KHZ PHASE 2 19 21 is a Frequency, 1A2S5
LEFT RIGHT
REVISIONS PRINTS TO
MAS 21 1A2J1–1 1A2J1–2 1A2J2–2 1A2J2–1
X–RAY ON 22 Digital rep of tube 28
(BLU) DRIVE ENA SW (BLU) DRIVE
ENABLE
(YEL) (YEL) (YEL) DRIVE
ENABLE
(BLU) 404
N.C. COM COM N.C.

H PREHEAT
FILSHORTTEST
26
25
current (BLU) DRIVE ENA SW RTN
SWITCH SWITCH
27
The system looks for # of pulses for a selected MAS MADE BY APPROVALS MEDICAL SYSTEMS
D.R.LONG_24NOV93
ISSUED
DIV OR
DEPT. 46–329267–S
– MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN LOCATIONCONT ON SHEET – SH NO. 8
FOLD
FOLD
FOLD
46–329267–S 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4-11/4-12(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
One of the Labs has us Write to and Read
Technical Supplement Dashed Lines show what page the schmatics are on
these ports
1 SH NO. 2 CONT ON SHEET
GENERAL ELECTRIC
FOLD
FOLD
FOLD
46–264974–S 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 46–264974–S
DRAWING NO.
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED USE THE FOLLOWING : – REV 9 TITLE CONT ON SHEET 2 SH NO. 1
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
These are all Inputs on this APPLIED PRACTICES SURFACES TOLERANCES ON DIMENSIONS Home
AMX1 A2 A1 46–208600
DECIMALS
(2 PLACES)
DECIMALS
(3 PLACES)
ANGLES 46–264974–S CONTROLLER
side (SHT 1 BLOCK DIAGRAM) +
–
+
–
+
–
CONT ON SHEET 2 SH NO. 1 FIRST MADE FOR AMX–4
P/L ISSUED
SHEET 3 SHEET 2
PREP SWITCH WRP0* 46–264974G1–G
WRP1* 46–264974G2–A
A
EXPOSE SWITCH
TUBE PRESS SW
These enable the WRP2*
60HZ INV OK THE REVISION NUMBER OF THIS SHEET IS
NUMBER OF THIS ENTIRE DOCUMENT.
THE CONTROL
THIS REVISION NUMBER
Inputs at the left WRP3* SHEET 3
ROTOR INTLK SW CRITICAL WRP4* EPROM 1 P0AD0–P0AD7
STATUS P1 INPUT & BUS MUST INCREASE WHENEVER ANY SHEET IS CHANGED.
FILAMENT SHORTED RDP0* WRP5*
PCN # – 157155 157692 179132 179471 179780 KVPD0*
1KHZ INV OK RDP1* WRITE WRP6* EPROM1 EN
DATE READ KVPD1*
X–RAY ON 13JUN89 29AUG89 01AUG90 19AUG92 19JAN93 22OCT93 RDP2* ADDRESS WRP7*
SHT ADDRESS KVPD2*
SONALERT AND SONALERT RDP3* DECODE WRP8* EPROM 2 AEC
2 A 0 1 2 3 3 DECODE RAM 1 KVPD3*
X–RAY ON* X–RAY ON LAMP RDP4* WRP9* CONTROL AEC DATA
LINE SENSE
TIMER
X–RAY ON
3
4
A
A
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0 RDP5* WRP10* EPROM2 EN LATCH
DRIVERS FOR
AEC CONTROL
KVPD4* All of these on
LAMP* WRP11* RAM1 EN KVPD5*
BUMPER* 5 A 0 0 0 1 1 RDP6*
RDP7* WRP12* KVPD6* the right are
TUBE PARKED 6 A 0 0 0 0 0 ADR11 EPROM WRP3*
LEFT STALL CHARGER
WATCHDOG CLR*
7 A 0 0 0 0 0
WRP13*
AND WATCHDOG CLR*
GEN RDY
Outputs
WRP14* ADR12 RAM 2
RIGHT STALL & DRIVE RAM
STATUS WRP15*
DEADMAN SW ADR13 SELECT RAM2 EN I–CHRG CMND
OPTION SW2 SHEET 4 CHARGE BATV&CHRG SEL
B GHARGER & DATA DRIVERS FOR
OPTION SW3
2 DRIVE BATT CHARGER
CHARGER RELAY
CHRG SCALE SEL
ADR0–ADR15
RDP0*
functions. CONTROL
LATCH
DRIVE
DATA
FULL SPEED EN
SERIAL PORT EN
KEY SW ON 80C31
But 1 at a MOTOR EN
LOW
COLL FIELD LT SW P1 INPUT & BUS UC P0AD0–POAD7 ADDRESS A0–A7 time WRP2* DRV RST
FIELD LT SW LATCH DRIVERS FOR RST DRV CMND+
OPERATOR WATCHDOG CLR*
MAS UP D0–D7 DATA BUS RST SW MOTOR DRIVES RST DRV CMND–
MAS DOWN I/O STATUS RESET RST LFT DRV CMND+
PWR DWN RST HOLDOFF ALE
KVP UP CIRCUIT RST CLR* LFT DRV CMND–
SHT–5
KVP DOWN PWR DWN RST* DATA BUS DO–D7 DATA BUS
BUFFER 60HZ
12MHZ CLK INV ROTOR SELECT*
RDP4* XTAL OSC CLK ADR8–ADR15
GENERATOR ROTOR CONTROL SAFETY CONT EN*
TAP 1 FDBK 12MHZ DATA
CONTROL 2 DRIVERS
C TAP 2 FDBK
TAP 3 FDBK 6MHZ WRP12* WATCHDOG LATCH
CLR INTO
TAP 4 FDBK GEN & AEC 750MHZ TIMER TAP1*
RXD
TAP 5 FDBK STATUS FREQ 375KHZ WRP0* TAP2*
TXD
TAP 6 FDBK DIVIDER 187.5KHZ WTCHDOG CLR* TAP3*
WATCHDOG CLR* T1 1KHZ MODULE
AEC ON 93.75KHZ TAP4*
DRIVERS
AEC EXP EN 11.718KHZ TAP5*
1KHZ
DATA TAP6*
RDP6*
DUAL
SERVICE SW SHEET 4 DAC#1
–10V REF. FILAMENT
OPTION SW1 (12 BITS)
SW DATA IN CONTROL FIL I DMND
BAUD RATE SW DRIVERS KVP DMND DAC
FOLD XMIT OK WRP11* 0–10V ANALOG
ON BOARD D0–D7 DATA BUS UART CHARGE CMND
DISP OK DISPLAY WTCHDOG CLR* OUT
STATUS DISP DATA OUT
D CONTROLLER MUX R&L
SPD
DUAL CMND
DAC#2
ON BOARD FEEDBACK +10V REF
ADDRESS BUS (8 BITS)
CONTROL MUX
RDP1*
EXPOSURE CMND STATUS
UART AND MUX CONTROL WRP8*
BACK–UP TIMER OK
A/D STATUS DISP RST I–CHRG
DUAL CMND
SHEET 5
RIGHT HALL DEVICE DAC#3
WRP7* –10V REF
LEFT HALL DEVICE RST CLR* (8 BITS) LEAKAGE CURRENT
RIGHT SPEED CMND SHT–2 COMPENSATION
LEFT SPEED CMND SHEET 6
WRP9*
KVP DEMAND FDBK
E D0–D7 DATA BUS
FIL CURRENT DEMAND
16 CHANNEL
DAC FDBK SAMPLE ADC
ANALOG
LEAKAGE CURRENT (8/12 BITS)
MULTIPLEXER HOLD
COMP FDBK +10V REF
VOLTAGE
+24V SUPPLY
REFERENCE
+40V VF SUPPLY –10V REF A/D CONTROL
SOURCE
LATCH
EXPOSURE CMND
STATUS LATCH
ENABLE
WATCHDOG CLR*
16KHZ 16KHZ
ADR0 2KHZ 01 2KHZ 01
ADR1 2KHZ 02 2KHZ 02
16KHZ DIVIDERS DRIVERS FOR
X–RAY ON PROGRAMABLE PHASE 1KHZ 01 1KHZ 01
F 3.2KHZ COUNTERS AND
COUNT DATA X–RAY ON TIMER SPLITTERS 1KHZ 02 1KHZ 02
12 BIT BINARY 8–BIT TIMER 11.718KHZ 120HZ DIVIDERS
FREQ 750KHZ 60HZ 01 60HZ 01
COUNTER MAGNITUDE STATUS
375KHZ SELECT 60HZ 02 60HZ 02
COMPARATOR LATCH
WRP10*
RDP5*
FREQ SELECT
ENABLE LINE
WATCHDOG CLR*
GENERATOR START EXP CMND
CONTROL 1
SET BACK–UP STOP EXP CMND
SHT–2 D0–D7 TIME LATCH
START/STOP REVISIONS PRINTS TO
EXPOSE CMND
4 GT_1MAR91 7 GJ0_19AUG92 404
WRP4* CONTROLLER EXP START CMND
WRP6* PCN_164091 PCN_179132
H BACK–UP TIMER OK
EXPOSURE TIME OUT EXP STOP CMND 5 GT_5MAR91 8 GJO_19JAN93
HI/LO RESOLUTION SELECT LINE PCN_164045 PCN_179471

6 GT_1MAR91 9 GJO_22OCT93
PCN_164091 PCN_179780
MADE BY
F.PIERCE 13JUN89 APPROVALS MEDICAL SYSTEMS
ISSUED
DIV OR
DEPT. 46–264974–S
F.C.TRAVANTY 24AUG89 MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN
LOCATION CONT ON SHEET 2 SH NO. 1
FOLD
FOLD
FOLD
46–264974–S 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4-15/4-16(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CONTROLLER
CONTROLLER Contains 80C31 CPU, Applications Eprom & Service & Diagnostic Eprom, Zero
P ower RAM(s), 12 MHZ clock, clock generators, read & write ports and selects, A to D and D to A
converters, reset switch, LEDS
Refer to Page 4-19
CPU (46-264974G1 Board) (E-4)
Contains DA T A BUS, P0AD0-7; ADDRESS BUSS, ADA8-15 and status bus used as
inputs for critical status ports.
Critical status ports are hard wired signals monitored during prep and exposure; i.e.
rotor interlock, inverter ready, X-RAY ON, etc.
EPROMS (B7-9)
U6 & U36 [U51 & U104] - 46-279160G8 and G9 are current firmware for the
46-232828G1 CPU Board U36 [U104] contains application and diagnostic code and
U6 [U51] contains calibration code.
New firmware: (46-264974G1/G2 Board)*
Reference AMX-4 Diagnostics Manual (Direction 17207)
Zero Power RAM (D-6)
RAM 1 & 2
U107 MK48ZO2 zero power RAM. Uses no external power to maintain memory.
Stores calibration data, DA T A LOG & DA T A BASE
OLD CPU 46-232828G1 - RAM 2 not used
NEW CPU *46-264974G1/G2 RAM 2 is used on version of firmware.
New Firmware: *
RAM 1 - will store cal. data with extra write protection via the service switch and JP1
JP-1 A ; No write protect; the CPU has control when data is written
JP-1 B; Data may only be written in RAM 1 when service switch is in the service
mode
JP-1C ; Data is write protected all the time and cannot be written into
New Firmware: *
RAM 2 - will store auto cal data, data log; this information is updated into RAM on a
real-time basis.
CL OCK (B-4)
Clock is developed from 12MHz crystal oscillator Y36 loc. (B-1)
Clock generator U99 develops clock signals for all subsystems; 1KHz Board. for the
generator , 60Hz for the rotor controller and field light, 2KHz & 16 KHz for the FIL/KVP
Board.
Each output is divide by 2.
4-17
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
R/W - Port selects (C-10) & (E-10)

P ort enables for input ports and output ports.
They enable the CPU to read status signals and cause an appropriate output whether it
is analog or digital. (Analog signals are converted to digital for the CPU to read.)
Reset Switch (C-1)

Used to reset CPU without cycling power.
New CPU boards have the switch accessible from the side so that the metal shield does
not have to be removed.
POWER DOWN RST* (C-1)

or POWER OK from battery charger board. Used to hold off or halt the processor while
unit is being powered down.
Prevents writing into RAM while POWER supply disappears; if not this would
corrupt data in NVRAM.
CPU is constantly writing data into ram during exposure & in standby ;including unit
on-time, drive timer, charge time & amp hours, exposure counter etc.
OLD LVLE might give 100ms delay after key switch is turned off.
This occasionally caused memory corruption.
NEW LVLE will give about 500 ms; plenty of time for CPU to finish any writing if the
power was turned off in the middle of a write cycle. Ref. WF B1
POWER DWN RST HOLDOFF (D-1)

Allows CPU to finish writing to 2nd of 2 bytes if power turned off in the middle of a 2
byte word.
POWER UP DELAY (C-2)
holds off CPU until power supplies come up.
SW DA T A INPUT (F-1)
Input from display controller serial data input to CPU RXD input.
The SW DA T A INPUT would have been used for an anatomical programmer

Serial data option removed on new CPU Board.
DISP DA T A OUT (H-7)

Output is TXD on the CPU, serial out to the Display controller through U241 driver.
This is how the display data gets to the display Board.
SERVICE SWITCH (E-2)

This selects the EPROM on Power up.
One prom contains applications and diagnostics code.
The other contains calibration code.
Switch serves as an IF-THEN-GOTO" to jump to CAL or DIAG. mode.
4-18
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
GENERAL ELECTRIC
FOLD
FOLD
FOLD
46–264974–S 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 46–264974–S
DRAWING NO.
+5V UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED USE THE
+5V
AMX1 A2 A1 +5V
APPLIED PRACTICES
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
R26 DECIMALS DECIMALS ANGLES 46–264974–S AMX–4–CONTROLLER

+5V 46–208600 (2 PLACES) (3 PLACES)
10K 16 16 + + + CONT ON SHEET 3 SH NO. 2
– – – FIRST MADE FOR AMX–4
R100 R163 16
CLOCK GENERATOR P/L ISSUED
10K 10K
4 R135
10K
Divide by = output 2
D
PR
Q
5
D0–D7
3–A3 4–A1 5–F6 6–H2
A U96
Frequency ALE 3
U25
HC74 6
4 5 6 7 5 3 15 10
POAD4 2 AC245 18 D4
15 2 14 3 11 6 10 7
2–F5 CK Q DR0 DB0

9 POAD3 3 D3
Q1 DR1 DB1 17
U99 7 CLR
P0AD2 4
DB2
16 D2
Q2 DR2
HC4040 6 P0AD5 5 15 D5
+5V Q3 6–D6 1 DR3 DB3 U64
5 750KHZ P0AD6 6 14 D6 WR* 12
Q4 6–E1 DR4 DB4 2–F10 11
+5V 3 375KHZ P0AD1 7 13 D1 RD* 13 AC08
U46 Q5 6–D5 DR5 DB5
+5V R35 U63
9 8 10 2 187.5KHZ P0AD0 8
DB6
12 D0
10K CLK Q6 DR6 1
14 HC14 R101 Q7
4 93.750KHZ
6–D8
P0AD7 9
DR7 DB7
11 D7 EPROM 1 & 2 are 2 AC32
3
4.7K 13
Y36
VCC
OUT
8 1
U44 U46 Q8
Q9
12
DATA BUS
T/R* OE Firm ware
3 5 6 1
C27 OSC 2 HC32 14 11.718KHZ 19
GND Q10 6–D4
0.1 HC14 R98 15
12MHZ 7 Q11
TP9 4.7K 1
RD*
Q12 P0AD0–P0AD7
B L
L
12 MHZ RESET
11
EPROM 1 EPROM 2 ADR0–ADR1
L +5V 6–C7
12MHZ
R43 2–F8 L
10K LOW ADDRESS LATCH ADR0 P0AD0 P0AD0 ADR0–ADR2
R55 10 11 ADR0 10 11
A0 Q1 A0 Q1 4–A1
10K ADR1 9 12 P0AD1 ADR1 9 12 P0AD1
A1 Q2 A1 Q2
P0AD0 3 2 ADR0 ADR2 8 13 P0AD2 ADR2 8 13 P0AD2 ADR0
RST CLR D0 Q0 A2 Q3 A2 Q3 5–D8
L 2–E5 P0AD1 4 5 ADR1 ADR3 7 U104 15 POAD3 ADR3 7 U51 15 POAD3
D1 Q1 A3 Q4 A3 Q4
4 P0AD2 7 U108 6 ADR2 ADR4 6 27C512 16 POAD4 ADR4 6 27C512 16 POAD4
U60 D2 Q2 A4 Q5 A4 Q5
B1
+5V
1 PR
POAD3 8 9 ADR3 ADR5 5 EPROM 17 P0AD5 ADR5 5 EPROM 17 P0AD5
3 2
D Q
5 D3 Q3 A5 Q6 A5 Q6
2 HC08
U59
POAD4 13 HC374 12 ADR4 ADR6 4 18 P0AD6 ADR6 4 18 P0AD6
U174 D4 Q4 A6 Q7 A6 Q7
P0AD5 14 15 ADR5 ADR7 3 19 P0AD7 ADR7 3 19 P0AD7
1 2 RST CLR* 3 HC74 6 D5 Q5 A7 Q8 A7 Q8
5–B9 CK Q P0AD6 17 16 ADR6 ADR8 25 ADR8 25
R182 CR181 D6 Q6 A8 A8
S183 is the 100K 1N4148
HC04
CLR
P0AD7 18
D7
CK
Q7
19 ADR7 ADR9 24
A9
ADR9 24
A9
OE ADR10 21 ADR10 21
U116
CPU reset R118
1 2 9
U115 1
11 1 ADR11 23
A10
A11
ADR11 23
A10
A11 READ PORT SELECT
8
C switch C176 HC14 +5V
10 HC32
R106
ADR12 2
A12
ADR12 2
A12
100K
ADR13 ADR13
This is a fast pwr S183
4.7
10% PWR UP 16
U60
300
ADR14
26
27
A13
46–303815G1 ADR14
26
27
A13
46–303816G1 ADR8 1 15 RDP0*
35V DELAY R163 A14 A14 A0 Y0 3–C3
5
down for the CPU L 3–F8 10K
4 HC08
6 ADR15 1
A15
ADR15 1
A15
ADR9
ADR10
2
A1 Y1
14 RDP1*
RDP2*
4–H9
22 22 3 13
U160
to stop from L
RESET R180
10 8 9
L
20
VPP/G*
CE
20
VPP/G*
CE
A2 Y2
Y3
12 RDP3*
5–F7 5–C11
NC
U170 RDP4*
having a shut J8
7
R171 10
100 9
U60
10 +5V HC138
Y4
11
10 RDP5*
3–F3
PWR DOWN 10 1489 Y5 6–D7
down during a RST* C177
10
9
8 12 PR 9
16
R163 Y6
9 RDP6*
3–F6
HC08 D Q
RAM 2: CPU
B1
10K U87 7 RDP7*
U59 Y7
write mode. It 0.01
50V
11 HC74 8
13 12
10K
EN1 EN2 EN3
NC
comes from the

CK Q
HC04 controlled system info 8 6 4 5
L
Charger bd U174
CLR
19 18 (error log, data log, RD*
U115 13
FOLD
PWR DWN RST
5–B10
3 4 12
11
X1 X2
P0.0
39 P0AD0
prep timer, ect) ADR12*
HOLDOFF HC04 13 HC32 9
RESET P0.1
38
37
P0AD1
P0AD2 RAM 1
Calibration RAM 2
FOLD
D P0.2
36 POAD3 Data
U174 P0.3
11 10 35 POAD4 STATUS
P0.4 3–B9
34 P0AD5 ADR0 P0AD0 ADR0 P0AD0
HC04 P0.5 8 9 8 9
P0AD6 A0 D0 A0 D0
33 ADR1 7 10 P0AD1 ADR1 7 10 P0AD1
SERVICE SW P0.6 A1 D1 A1 D1
+5V 32 P0AD7 ADR2 P0AD2 ADR2 P0AD2
P0.7 6 11 6 11 WRITE PORT SELECT
1 P1D0 A2 D2 A2 D2
P1.0 ADR3 5 13 POAD3 ADR3 5 13 POAD3
R119 2 P1D1 A3 D3 A3 D3
P1.1 ADR4 4 14 POAD4 ADR4 4 14 POAD4
13K A4 D4 A4 D4
U222 3 P1D2 ADR5 3 15 P0AD5 ADR5 3 15 P0AD5
RST* WATCHDOG CLR P1.2 A5 D5 A5 D5 WRP0*
3 4 4 P1D3 1
6–E6 3–B4 4–H8 4–B2 P1.3 ADR6 2 U107 16 P0AD6 ADR6 2 U54 16 P0AD6 Y0 4–C8
HC04 P1D4 A6 D6 A6 D6 2 WRP1*
5 ADR7 1 P0AD7 ADR7 P0AD7 Y1 NC
6–B4
C68 P1.4 A7 D7 17 1
A7 D7 17 3 WRP2*
6 P1D5 ADR8 ADR8 Y2 4–E8
10 P1.5 23 MK48Z02 +5V SERVICE SW* 23 MK48Z02
P1D6 A8 4–H8 A8 4 WRP3*
35V U63 P1.6
7 ADR9 22 2Kx8 ADR9 22 2Kx8 Y3 3–B4
7 6 12 A9 A9 ADR7 23 5 WRP4*
WRP12* 9 RX CX 5 13 AC32 11 WATCH DOG CLR*
3–F9 4–C8 P1.7
8
21
X–RAY ON
ADR8
# 8 tells the CPU to start ADR10 19 A10
ZRAM
R56
5
U115 ADR10 19 A10
ZRAM A0 Y4
6 WRP5*
6–B7
E +5V 2–F11 T1 Q P2.0 CS OE WE 4.7K CS OE WE Y5 5–F7
R67
10
U65
HC123 12
6–C4 P2.1
22 ADR9 counting MAS pulses ADR11 9
U44
18 20 21
4 HC32
6
ADR11 11
U222
10 5
U228
18 20 21
ADR8 22
A1
U24
Y6
7
8
WRP6*
WRP7*
6–F4
T2 Q U103 23 ADR10
8 6 Y7 5–C9
P2.2 ADR12 HC32 B C HC32 ADR9 HC154 WRP8*
24 ADR11 10 HC04 4 21 9
10K P2.3 A2 Y8 4–E2
CLR ADR12 10 WRP9*
1% 25 3 Y9 4–H2
P2.4 A JP1 ADR10 20 11 WRP10*
0.125W 11 80C31 26 ADR13 A3 Y10 6–D7
P2.5 U115 ADR12 13 WRP11*
10 27 ADR14 RST CLR 1 Y11 4–B2
RXD P2.6 2–C3 3 14 WRP12*
12 28 ADR15 2 HC32 Y12 2–E1
WATCHDOG CLR INT0 P2.7 WRP13*
X–RAY ON 13 11 ADDRESS BUS 15
57.3mS 3–D10 INT1 TX0 Y13 NC
WR* 16 WRP14*
14 16 Y14 NC
T0 WR WRP15*
15 17 RD* 17
T1 RD Y15 NC
EN1 EN2
ALE/ PSEN 29
+5V FDBK OUT PROG* EA U87 19 18
5–B8 ADR12 9 8 ADR12* NOTES:
16 30 31 ALE 1. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
R163 2–A4 12MHZ HC04
10K +5V 2–B3 ALL RESISTORS ARE 0.25W,5%
L
F 16 U46 AND ARE IN OHMS
J6 R285 U235 R163 13 12 +5V ALL CAPACITORS ARE IN MFD
1 5 12 WR*
9 8 10K
SW DATA INPUT 3 16 2–A9 2. * INDICATES AN ACTIVE LOW
HC14
10K HC14 R100
14 R287 10K FOR PROPER CONFIGURATION
14 1 3
OF JUMPER JP1 REFER TO
J11
51 15 AMX–4 CALIBRATION
18 BUFFERED DISP DATA TP11
J11 R287 8 DIRECTION 46–017206,46–
1 2 U241 13 2 4 U44
IN1 OUT1 13 DISP DATA OUT 1 CK 3 WR* 13 017326 OR 46–017497,
7 3 2 HC240 18 DIN1 Q0 11
IN2 OUT1 14 DISP DATA OUT RTN 51 4 2 PR 5 12 HC32 TABLE 1 JUMPERS AND
9 6 17 3 Q1 D Q
IN3 OUT2 R287 J6 5 U87 U95 SWITCHES POSITION.
15 5 4 16 12 3 +5V Q2
IN4 OUT2 1 DISP DATA OUT U82 6 3 4 3 HC74 6
10 15 5 16 Q3 CK Q
OUT3 51 R100 HC164 10 HC04
L U288 11 6 14 Q4 TP11 REVISIONS PRINTS TO
+5V OUT3 +5V R287 10K 11 CLR
16 26LS31 14 16 13 7 11 4 Q5 SHORTEND WRITE 1 JKK_01AUG90 404
OUT4 6 DISP RESET* 12 1
R163 13 R163 DISP RST
8 12 Q6
WR* PCN_157692
10K OUT4 10K 51 14 2 13
H 5–B10 11 9 DIN2 Q7
EN EN 10
R287
5 J 11 & J 6 are the text CLR
DELAYED WRITE
2 GJO_19AUG92
4 12 9 PCN_179132
4 12 L
1 19 51 messages 250NS–333NS
3 GJO_20JAN93
R287 R86 +5V
9 6
67NS–150NS PCN_179471
51 10K
MADE BY
APPROVALS
L F.PIERCE 13JUN89 MEDICAL SYSTEMS
ISSUED
DIV OR
DEPT. 46–264974–S
F.C.TRAVANTY 24AUG89 MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN LOCATION CONT ON SHEET 3 SH NO. 2
FOLD
FOLD
FOLD
46–264974–S 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4-19/4-20(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
4-21
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
Refer to Page 4-23

AEC Control (A-5)
Sent to AEC module, when installed, via J7.
Sends selected KVP information for KVP compensation when AEC is on.
AEC EN from AID module goes false to terminate a phototimed exposure. Actual
MAS is displayed on the 16 character display.
LEDs (C-6)
During power up, the LEDs display the tests as they pass.
Used for troubleshooting if the vacuum fluorescent displays are out.
In the applications mode when the AEC option is used, the LEDs display binary
value of selected KVP.
AEC module uses this for KV compensation.
T AP 1-6 FDBK (D-F,5)
Read port select RDP6. The CPU monitors that correct relays for proper primary
voltage have been selected.
This input port is also used to monitor AEC status (AEC exposure enable and AEC
on).
Input Ports (A-H,1)
These are operator accessible inputs.
All are 24v inputs
They include MAS UP & DOWN, KVP UP & DOWN, drive enable, bumper field light
switch, tube park, etc. (exception is left and right stall).
Switch Debounce (B-7)
Prep and Exposure switch inputs - J8-23 and J8-25
24volt inputs to TTL output and debounced by U111. Ref. WF B-2.
After debounce each signal splits up. One set goes to P. 5-8, (B-2) (U150 Input) to
Develop EXPOSURE START . The other goes to the critical status ports of the CPU.
Critical Status Inputs (C-E,8)
This is run-time status checked continually during prep and exposure.
They include x-ray tube pressure switch, 60Hz inverter ok, rotor interlock, 1KHz
inverter ready, filament shorted detect, x-ray on, prep and expose switches.
SONART & X-RAY ON LAMP (F-11)
24volt drivers to display controller for x-ray on indicators.
Driven by X-RAY ON signal from FILAMENT/KVP Board.
X-RA Y ON signal goes high when actual KVP is 75% of selected KVP.
A problem with the old CPU boards was that noise would get on the X-RAY ON line
and the sonalert and lamp to turn on giving false indication that an exposure was
taken. This was impossible since the safety contactor was not pulled in.
4-22
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
1
W/CHRG IN ONLY
x
X = These
are 24v CHRG On & Key Switch Off = 0 J8 23 PREP & 25 EXP are from the hand switch. J3 pin 12 is an example of a signal that
CHRG On & Key Switch On = 0 They are also debounced for no false triggers leaves this board (see pg 4-11/4-12 J3)
signals CHRG Off & Key Switch On = 1
This switch is CHRG Off & Key Switch Off = 0
explained in
the SVC
Calibration 6-B2 is an example of a signal
manual that is still on this board but on
another sheet of the schmatic
WRP 3
WRP 3 is a B2
binary code. See
x
46-017207 tab 5
RDPO
These count up in
binary. Can be used
x
PWR up Test = 1 is during pwr up to see
DS19, 2 is DS18, 3 what test fails if display
x is DS19 & 18, 4 is isn't working OR
DS17, 5 is DS17 & shows what KV is
19, 6 is DS17 &18 & selected after the prep
x 19. is pushed for the first
This comes time
from the drive
handle
CHRG On & Key Switch On = 0

CHRG On & Key Switch Off = 1
CHRG Off & Key Switch On = 0
CHRG Off & Key Switch Off = 0
x
B2, B4, B5
R430
1.13 K
x C431
.01
50V
x
C432
.01
50V
x
"Watchdog CLA": resets & clears the sonalert &
x-ray on lamp. If this isn't present both indications
x will stay on.
4-23/4-24(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
4-25
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
Refer to Pg. 4-27

Digital to Analog converters
D to A outputs for FILAMENT DMN, KVP DMN, DRIVE CMND, CHARGE CMND
They are accessed by CPU write ports WRP8,9,11
D/A U363 has two modes that are exclusive of each other
Pin 2 supplies the CHARGE CURRENT CMND in the charge mode and
HANDLE CHECK pulse in the drive mode. Cannot charge and drive at the same
time.
Pin 20 supplies LEAKAGE COMP during an exposure and VOLT AGE CHARGE
CMND during charge mode. Again, cannot expose and charge at the same
time.
VOL T AGE CHARGE CMND is not used.
Generator Control 2 (B-9)
Output ports for auto transformer tap relays, safety contactor enable, and rotor
relay select; (WRP0 output port).
Charger and Drive Control (D-9)
Output port selects:
TRIP BRKR- gives CPU control over the main breaker for fault conditions. Trips
breaker if battery voltage is less than 110 volts in idle mode or if exposure is not
terminated correctly.
CHARGE SCALE-SELECT-selects high or low charge rate on the charger
board.
CHARGER RELAY-brings power to the charger bridge when CPU is ready for
charging.
MOTOR ENABLE-pulls in two relays that brings power to the FET bridge for the
drive motors. This is active when the drive handle is pulled in and there are no
drive faults.
FULL SPD ENABLE-selects high speed or low speed for drive system.
Operated by tube park switch.
DRIVE RESET-pulse that occurs after a drive stall. Resets latches on drive
controller .
BA T V & CHARGE CUR SELECT-this selects what channel on the charger
board will be read into the CPU internal counters via the Voltage to Frequency
converter .
On Board Status (F-8)
Input ports for CPU Board status
XMIT OK from display controller
DISPLA Y OK also from display controller
BU TMR OK-back-up timer ready
EXPOSURE CMND STA TUS- checks that the EXPOSURE START pulse did
occur
A/D STA TUS-checks status of main A/D
SERVICE SW-input onto data buss for CPU
4-26
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
FOLD
GENERAL ELECTRIC
FOLD
FOLD
46–264974–S 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 46–264974–S
DRAWING NO.
FOLLOWING : – REV A TITLE CONT ON SHEET 5 SH NO. 4
APPLIED PRACTICES
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
AMX1 A2 A1 DECIMALS DECIMALS ANGLES 46–264974–S AMX–4–CONTROLLER
46–208600 (2 PLACES) (3 PLACES)
+
–
+
–
+
–
P/L ISSUED
A D0–D7
2–A9
–10V REF
5–E11
TP27
ADR0–ADR2 D0 4 19 AR359 +24V
2–B10 DB0 VREFA 2
D1 R358 J5
3 18 6
DB1 RFBA OP–07 7 FIL DMN +
D2 2 17 10
DB2 IOUTA 3 8
D3 1 100
DB3 J4
1 1 18
ADR0 8 8 TAP6*
A0
ADR1
ADR2
7
6
A1
U355
AD7549
8 FIL DMN – 2 17
J3
9 ROTOR SELECT*
"Rotor Select" is true for
2–E4
WATCHDOG CLR 11
A2
CLR
DAC S
GEN CONTROL 2
prep of rotor OR
B +5V R135
5
UPD VREFB
13 D/A outputs at 0vdc to 10vdc 3 16
10 SAFETY
CONT ENB* collimator light on
16 4 9 14 TP26 J4
CS RFBB 4 15
10 15 20 TAP1*
10K WR IOUTB 2 AR354 D0 8 9
L R353 D0 Q0
6 D1 7 6 5 14
OP–07 11 KVP DMN + D1 Q1 18 TAP2*
WRP11* 3 D2 4 U351 5
2–E11 8 100 D2 Q2
D3 3 HC273 2 6 13
1 D3 Q3 16 TAP3*
D4 18 19
D4 Q4
D5 17 16 7 12
12 KVP DMN – D5 Q5 14 TAP4*
D6 14 15
D6 Q6
S D7 13 12 8 11
D7 Q7 10 TAP5*
CLR CK
1 11 U318
WATCHDOG CLR* ULN2803
2–E3
WRP0*
R399 2–E11
C
20K
1%
CHARGER AND
0.125W TP18
DRIVE CONTROL
R403 AR404
+10V REF 13
5–H10 R398 J2
14
20K TL074 5 RIGHT DRV CMND– U272
1% R401 12 BMPR* 9 U193
10K 100 3–B2 8 1
0.125W 10 HC32 3
AR404 1% HC08
6 0.125W 2
17 6 RIGHT DRV CMND+
7
VDD TL074
4
5
TP16
S -10v to 0v to +10v output U322
VREFA J1
2 D0 8 9 1 18
D0 14 OUTA S D0 Q0 8 TRIP BRKR
D0 D1
D1 13 3 14 15
D1 RFBA D1 Q1
FOLD
D2 D2 17 U264 16
D3
12
11
D2
U402
Note that these are opposite polarity. One D3 3
D2
D3
HC273
Q2
Q3
2
UDN6118A
U322
FOLD
D D3 D4
D4
D5
10
D4
AD7528 TP17 motor turns forward & the other turns D5
18
4
D4 Q4
19
5 2 17 CHARGE
9 D5 Q5 12
D6 8
D5
D6 19
backward for the AMX to move in one D6
D7
7
D6 Q6
6 +24V
SCALE–SELECT
D7 RFBB 13 12 UDN6118A
7
D7
20 2
AR404
R410
direction D7
CLR CK
Q7 U283 10
18 OUTB 3 16
VREFB 1 1 11 10 CHARGER RELAY*
ADR0 6 TL074
A/B 3 20K
CS WR LGND AGND R408 1% ULN2803
WRP2*
10K 0.125W 2–E11
15 16 5 1 1% TP19 U322
S +5V J2
0.125W
9
AR404
R406
+10v to 0v to -10v output 10
6 13
16 MOTOR ENA
L 8
R407 TL074 7 LEFT DRV CMND+ R163
10 10K UDN6118A
WRP8* 100
2–E11 J6 R285 U235
20K 2
E 1% XMIT OK*
8 9 13 12
21 U322
0.125W 8 LEFT DRV CMND–
10K HC14
3 16
13 FULL SPD ENA
S +5V
16 UDN6118A
"Handle Check" is a safety check pulse that ensures the R163
U322
10K
handle drive is actually pushed and it's not a false signal R171 U235
4 15
15 DRIVE RESET
7 6 11 5 6
17
from an OP AMP failure. DISPLAY OK 12
C238
ON BOARD
STATUS UDN6118A
10K 0.1 HC14 U322
VDD HANDLE CHECK*
5–A4 50V J1 BAT V &
TP29 5 14
4 7
VREFA BU TMR OKAY D0 CHARGE CUR SEL
2 2 AR368 L 8 9
D0 OUTA J1 +5V +5V 6–E6 D1 Q1
14 R365 EXP CMND STATUS 14 15 D1
D0 6 16 R135 16 R100 6–A5 D2 Q2 UDN6118A
D1 13 3 OP–07 3 I–CHARGE CMND A/D STATUS U159 D2
D1 RFBA 3 17 16
D2 8 10K 10K 5–D10 D3 Q3
F 12 100 R335 3 2 D3
D2 D4 Q4
D3 11 U363 1
D3 S75 +5V 18 19 D4
D4 AD7528 4 I–CHARGE RTN D5 Q5
10 13 4 8 8 10K 4 HC373 5 D5
D4 D6 Q6
D5 9 D6
D5 S 7 6
D6 BAUD RATE SW D7 Q7
8 13 12 D7
D6 19 TP28 14 3 D8 Q8
D7 7 RFBB
D7 CLK OE
20 2 AR362
OUTB J5 OPTION SW 1 11 1
18 R361
VREFB 6 L RDP1*
ADR0 6 OP–07 3 LEAKAGE COMP + 2–C11
A/B 3 8 100
CS WR LGND AGND 1 J11
15 16 5 1 4 LEAKAGE COMP – 3 SERVICE SW
U164 U174 REVISIONS PRINTS TO

L AR369 J8 R171
2 12 5 1 3 13 12 SERVICE SW
R370 J1 19 2–E2 404
WRP9* S 6 SERVICE SW
2–E11 OP–07 1 V–CHARGE CMND C237 2 HC04
3 +24V 10K 0.1
H 8 100 50V 1489
1 SERVICE SW*
SERVICE SW RTN 20 2–E7
2 V–CHARGE RTN L
D/A CONVERTERS
MADE BY
F.PIERCE 15JUN89 APPROVALS MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIV OR
46–264974–S
DEPT.
ISSUED
MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN LOCATIONCONT ON SHEET 5 SH NO. 4
FOLD
FOLD
FOLD
46–264974–S 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4-27/4-28(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
Refer to Pg. 4-31

System analog signals are buffered and converted to digital.
Left and Right transducer inputs (A-B,1)
Handle voltages are fed in here.
Handle Check is a 1ms pulse 24ms apart used to take the inputs to 0volts to
check that the handle circuitry is functioning. When this goes to zero, the CPU
knows to look for this.
Other analog inputs are drive fdbk, KVP DMN FDBK, FILAMENT FDBK, LEAKAGE
COMP FDBK, ±15volt supply, +24volt power supply and the +5volt power supply,
+24v & +40v vacuum fluorescent displays.
The power supply monitors are not present on the old version of CPU boards,
except the +5v monitor.
All analog inputs are fed into a 16 channel analog multiplexer U342 (D-6).
Analog lines are enabled one at a time by the A/D CTRL U339, outputs
AMUX0-3. This allows the desired signal to pass to the sample and hold and
finally to the A/D.
The 12 bit A/D (D-8) read enable is controlled by the A/D CTRL chip.
When true, the A/D reads the voltage from AR426, Sample and Hold (D-7); it is then
digitized sent to the data bus.
The 8 most significant bits are used.
The A/D also provides +10v reference voltage for use by external circuits.
The -10 ref. voltage is used for D/A; +10v ref is used to supply the Hall Effect
sensors in the drive handle. TP15 must be clean 10 volts. If not, may have drive
problems.
Digital Signals monitored by the CPU (B-8).
MAS & BAT V AND CHARGING CUR are input to U123 mux.
These are 24volt voltage-to-frequency converted pulses from the charger board
Other inputs to U123 to monitored by the CPU:
TMR0-16KHz clock
TMR1-T imer used by CPU to determine actual exposure time
TMR2-120Hz clock
The inputs are selected to go to the output FDBK OUT, by address lines from the ON
B OARD CONTROL, U127. FDBK OUT goes directly to the CPU T1 input, to the
onboard counters.
POWER DOWN RST HOLDOFF from the ON BOARD CONTROL holds off the reset if
the power is turned off while the CPU is in the middle of a write function.
4-29
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
Refer to Pg. 4-33

EXPOSURE CMND CONTROL (A-3) Ref. WF B4
U150 (B-2) monitors PREP SWITCH., AEC EXPOSURE EN, EXPOSURE SWITCH,
PRES SURE SWITCH, BACKUP TMR OKA Y, and STOP EXPOSURE STA TUS.
When all are true, the CPU will issue a START EXPOSURE from GEN CONTROL
1 (A-7)
EXPOSURE START CMND is about a 3ms pulse that stays high until X-RAY ON
becomes valid. Then EXPOSURE START CMND goes away. This starts the primary
SCRs commutating.
EXPOSURE STOP CMND is also about a 3ms pulse that, once the CPU has
determined proper exposure, stays high until X-RAY ON goes away.
GEN CONTROL 1 (A-7)
Output port for 60Hz, 1KHz, 2KHz, and 16KHz clock enables.
Clock outputs from board are 24volts.
Phase 1 & Phase 2 signals are 180 degrees out of phase except for the 16kHz clock.
PROGRAMMABLE TIMER (C-6)
Decodes data from CPU into clocks:
TMR0-16KHz output; goes on to Develop 1KHz & 2KHz clocks
TMR1-exposure duration timer used by firmware for fixed time and phototimed
exposures.
TMR2-120Hz- develops 60Hz clock
BACK UP TIMER (E-2 thru E-4) area
X-RA Y ON is clocked through the U148 flip flop at 750Khz, then ANDED with 60Hz
clock. The 60Hz starts the binary counter (E-2) counting until X-RAY ON goes
away .
The binary counter output is compared to a backup time latched in on U88 (F-3) by
an 8 bit magnitude comparator. If input A=input B, then BU TMR OKA Y goes away
and outputs an error.
Noise can get in this circuit and cause an error when no exposure is taken; i.e.
during idle or driving.
Tube spits may cause Error 466 during an exposure followed by Error 437 when
the next exposure is attempted.
4-30
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
5 6
FOLD
SH NO. CONT ON SHEET
GENERAL ELECTRIC
FOLD
FOLD
46–264974–S 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 46–264974–S
6 5
DRAWING NO.
FOLLOWING : – REV 1 TITLE CONT ON SHEET SH NO.
APPLIED PRACTICES
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
CR340 AMX1 A2 A1 DECIMALS DECIMALS ANGLES 46–264974–S AMX–4–CONTROLLER

46–208600 (2 PLACES) (3 PLACES)
1 2 HANDLE CHECK* + + + CONT ON SHEET 6 SH NO. 5
4–F4 Safety signal incase OP – – – FIRST MADE FOR AMX–4
P/L ISSUED
R296
AR300
1N4148 TP21
AMP fails
10K 2 10V
A J8 1
TL074
3 0V
RGT MAN TDS OUT 1
C291 24MS
R293 0.1 R295 J11
These are 3v or 2.2K 50V
19 RIGHT HALL INPUT
1MS
5v or 7v signals R292 2.2K CR341

1 2
100
from hall effects S
1N4148
TP22 J5
1
R260
16 1
U188
3
ON BOARD CONTROL
R302 MAS 21
AR300
10K 6 2
R319 10K
S 7 2.2K 1489
TL074
5
LFT MAN TDS OUT 3
C303
R304 0.1 D0 13 12
R305 J11 D0 Q0
2.2K 50V
21 LEFT HALL INPUT This is a verying frequence 24v BAT V AND J1 P
7
R260
10 10
U188
8
L D1 7
D1 Q1
6 PWR DOWN RST HOLDOFF
2–D1
5 D2 17 U127 16 DISP RST
B
R307
100
2.2K
square wave. It's an analog to CHARGING CUR R325 10K 9
7
D3 3
D2
D3
HC273
Q2
Q3
2
2–H5
2.2K 1489
S
C394 frequency signal 4
3
C0
EN
U123
Y
5
6
FDBK OUT
2–F3
D4
D5
18
4
D4 Q4
19
5
C1 Y D5 Q5
TMR0 OUT 2 HC151 D6 14 15
S 0.1 6–D8 C2 D6 Q6
P TMR1 OUT 1 D7 8 9 U411
50V 6–D8 C3 D7 Q7 DB11 2 DA0 18 D7
TMR2 OUT 15 CLR CK DB0
6–D8 C4 DB10 3 ACT245 17 D8
R391 14 DA1 DB1
8 9 C5 1 11 DB9 4 16 D5
13 RST CLR* DA2 DB2
x J2
10
R391
7
15K 12
C6
C7
2–C3
2–E11
WRP7*
DB8
DB7
5
DA3 DB3
15 D4
D3
RIGHT DRV FDBK – 2 1% 6 14
+15V +24V DA4 DB4
A2 A1 A0 DB6 7 13 D2
15K AR392 DA5 DB5
9 L 9 10 11 DB5 D1
1% 8 12
X = These x R391 TL074
8 R421
10K
R422
10.2K
DB4 9
DA6
DA7
DB6
DB7
11 D0
15 2 10 1% 1%
are input RIGHT DRV FDBK + 1
15K 16 +7.52V +2.39V
T/R* OE
signals C
1%
C396
R391
15K R423 R419
1 19
0.1 30.1K 1.13K R337

1% RDP2*
50V 1 1% 1% ANALOG MUX +5V 2–C11
10K
+5V
S C390 SAMPLE/HOLD
P R289
–15V 10K
12 BIT ADC
B3 B3
0.1 +5V
50V R290 18 17 AMUX0
R391 EN A0
19 16 AMUX1
6 11 S1 A1 TP31 8 TP20
10K 20 15 AMUX2 AR426
L
xLEFT DRV FDBK – 12
R391
5
15K
1%
21
S2
S3
A2
A3
14 AMUX3 EN LF398 N
4 A/D STATUS
22 28 3 5 1 28
15K S4 OUT IN OUT +5V STS 4–F7
AR392 23 2 27 DB11
1% 13 S5 CH DMS12/8* DB11
24 3 26 DB10
FOLD
x 13
R391
4 12
TL074
14
25
S6 OA
2
6 ADR0 4
CS DB10
25 DB9
LEFT DRV FDBK + 3 S7 2–B6 AO DB9
26 U342 C429 5 24 DB8
S8 0.033 R/C* DB8 FOLD
15K 14 11 AD7506 6 23 DB7
D 1% R391 S9 L 1% CE DB7
C387 10 MUX 100V 10 22 DB6
0.1 15K S10 REFIN DB6
1% 9 S 9 21 DB5
50V S11 ACOM DB5
3 8 7 U413 20 DB4 R372
C386 S12 +15V DB4
7 11 AD574 19
S13 –15V DB3
6 12 18 10K
S S14 BIPOFF DB2
0.1 5 13 17 1%
50V S15 10VIN DB1 0.125W TP30
R385 4 14 16
7 10 S16 20VIN DB0 R378 AR371
15 8 2
x J5 R385 15K S
S DCOM REFOUT
10K OP–07
6 –10V REF
4–B3
11 6 1% 3
KVP DMN FDBK – 14 1% 8
A/D CTRL R420
15K AR392 0.125W 1
1% 2
49.9 S
x 12
R385
5 3
TL074
1
D0 13 12 1%
+15V
E KVP DMN FDBK + 13 D1
D0 Q0 0.125W
8 9
4 D1 Q1
15K D2 7 U339 6
1% R385 D2 Q2 C248 R243
C380 D3
0.1 15K 14 15 62
1% D3 Q3
50V D4 4 HC374 5
13 D4 Q4 0.1
D5 18 19
D5 Q5 50V
C376 D6 17 16 READ A/D
D6 Q6 2 AR247 7
S D7 3 2 U427
D7 Q7 R246 Q242
CK HOLD 6 6
OE 13 12 R309 OP–07 CA3083
0.1 3
1 11 HC04 8 200
50V 8
WRP5* 1
2–E11 10K
R375
3 14
L
x 15
R375
2
15K RDP2* 11
U427
10 R310 R244
2
Q242
TP 15 must be
FIL FDBK+ 1% 2–C11 3
9
15K
HC04 10K CA3083 R308
10 a very clean
2 AR377 51 1%
F
x 1%
R375 6
4 0.125W
TP15
+10vdc
OP–07 D0–D7
10 7 3 2–A9 J8
FIL FDBK– 10 8
8 5 HALL RGT REF
15K R375 1 AR300
9
1% C379 15K 7 HALL LFT REF
0.1 C393 8
1% J6 TL074 +10V REF R311
R301
50V 9 10 4–C3 4.7K
+40V VF DISP SUPPLY 17
0.1
50V 15K R298
6 HALL RGT REF RTN
2.2K
S R385 8 HALL LFT REF RTN
9 8
R385 15K
Vacuum Florescent S
14 3 P
LEAKAGE COMP FDBK – 6 1% AR300
13 REVISIONS PRINTS TO
15K AR392 14
1% 6 J6 R297 TL074 1 GJO_20JAN93 404
R385 7 12
+24V VF SUPPLY 24
TL074 PCN_179471
H 15 2 5 18K R299
LEAKAGE COMP FDBK + 5
1 4.7K
15K R385
1% C388 15K
0.1 1%
50V
16 RPCK16CV P
MADE BY
46–264974–S
S ISSUED
DEPT.
F.C.TRAVANTY 24AUG89 MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN LOCATIONCONT ON SHEET 6 SH NO. 5
FOLD
FOLD
FOLD
46–264974–S 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4-31/4-32(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
CONT ON SHEET 7
FOLD
SH NO. 6
FOLD
FOLD
DRAWING NO.
FOLLOWING : – REV A TITLE CONT ON SHEET 7 SH NO. 6
APPLIED PRACTICES SURFACES TOLERANCES ON DIMENSIONS
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
AMX1 A2 A1 DECIMALS DECIMALS ANGLES 46–264974–S AMX–4–CONTROLLER
46–208600 (2 PLACES) (3 PLACES)
+
–
+
–
+
–
P/L ISSUED
Exp GEN CONTROL 1
U322
J5
Pulse
EXPOSURE COMMAND CONTROL 7 12
26 PREHEAT
A
UDN6118A 60HZ RELAY
+5V
16
R83 12
6–F9
TP1 D0 8 9 60HZ EN
10 D0 Q0
D1
Exp stop 10K 7 6 1KHZ EN
D1 Q1
PR EXP CMND STATUS D2 4 U128 5 2KHZ EN
12 9
^ 5 msec D Q 4–F7 D2 Q2
D3 3 HC273 2
RST16B U140 D3 Q3 +24V
HC74 D4 18 19
11 8 U283
"Start EXP" is CK Q D5
D4 Q4 10
H/SW
17 16
D5 Q5 J7 U266
D6 14 15 4 15 U193
Release from the CPU CLR
D7 13
D6 Q6
12
10 EXP START* 13
11 3 16
J5
START EXP
13 D7 Q7 12 HC08 17 2KHZ PHASE 1
CLR CK ULN2803
U132 1 11 UDN6118A
+5V
2–E2
RST* 5
6
B4 ia a square WRP4* 4
U268 U266
J5 R265
16
R83
11 +5V
4 HC08
signal, not a pulse
2–E11
5 HC08
6 2 17
15 16KHZ
1 2
For the
CLK
B 4.7K
Filament
B4
10K 16 U266 P
UDN6118A
R135 J4 U198
16
R83 9
10K 7 12 RST16B
25 EXP START CMND 13 12
1 U268 U266
U144 10K 6 TP7
12
5 UDN6118A +24 HC04 U198 1
3 4 15
9 8 STOP EXP* 12 U132 U198 1 2 2 HC08 19 2KHZ PHASE 2
U150 U144 12 R265 +5V
1 6
HC04 3–B10
PREP SW P1D0
AEC EXP EN
3
4 HC30
8 5 6 13 HC08
11 2
4
J U202
PRE
Q
6
J4 25 goes to the 1 5
HC04
6
16
HC04
UDN6118A
3–F7 CLK 4.7K R135 R265
3–B10
EXPOSE SW P1D1 5
HC04
3
K HC109 Q
7
P
khz bd 10K 1 3
TUBE PRESSURE SW 2 CLR
3–C10 5 4.7K
BU TMR OKAY 11 P
WATCHDOG CLR* 1
2–E3
2 7 10 RST16B
All Interlocks are +5V
3
CK P T
14
16
C
checked here. All 16
+5V
PROGRAMABLE R135 4
D0
D1
U197
Q0
Q1
13
U193 U266
TIMER 10K 5 HC163 12 2KHZ 10 J4
must be a logic "1" to R83
10K 1
TP13 6
D2 Q2
11 1KHZ 9 HC08
8 6 13
24 1KHZ PHASE 2
D7 1 11 D3 Q3
enable an EXP 13 D6 2
D0 G0
14 CY
15
B4
D1 G1 UDN6118A
U266 3 16 93.75KHZ
D5 2–B4 CLR CT/LD
U136 11 J4 D4 4
D2 G2
19 ADR0 2–B10 TP14 L
1
R265 5
13
HC32
11 14
J
PRE
Q
10
8 11
23 EXP STOP CMND
D3 5
D3
D4
U217
A0
A1
20 ADR1
1
8
CK 3
1 9
For the KVP
12 U202 DIN1 Q0 4.7K
12 D2 6 82C54 10 TMR0 OUT P
CLK UDN6118A TP12 D5 O1 5–B7 4
7 RTIMER 13 Q1
13 9 D1
K HC109 Q D6 O2 Q2
5
RST16B
CLR D0 8 17 +5V
U136 R265 D7 O3 TP8 U270 6
1 7 750KHZ 9 21 16 Q3
9 HC164 10 U198 U266
8 15 2–A4 CLK0 CS R124 R135 Q4 U193
10 HC32 15 3 4 4
4.7K CLK1 10K 11 6 5 14
P 18 TMR1 OUT Q5
CLK2 12 HC04 5 HC08 26 1KHZ PHASE 1
300 5–B7 Q6
TP5 RD WR L 12
2 13
U132 DIN2 Q7 UDN6118A
FOLD 11.718KH U136 22 23 CLR
9 TP25
2–B4 8 5 WRP10* R265
10 HC08 6 2–E11
TMR2 OUT
9 1 4 FOLD
4 HC32
D RDP5* 120 HZ
U198 TP6 2–C11 4.7K
12 BIT BIN CNTR 8 BIT MAG COMPARATOR U268 2–C10 +5V P
U136 11 10 13 +5V
11 5–B7
16
1 HC04 12 HC08 RST16B
3 375KHZ U268 R83 R83 60HZ 01
2 HC32 2–A4 16 14 +24V
10 10K
+5V 8 4
+5V 9 HC08
1 10K U283 10
1 +5V U207
16 U198 2 PR 5 1 J3
R83 EN 16 R201 U207
D Q 3 5 14
10K 9 2 9 8 5 U206 2 HC08 15 60HZ PHASE 1
Q1 DA0 R163 10K 5
U139 7 4 10K HC04 PRE
6 3 HC74 6
15 Q2 DA1 2 6 4 HC08 CK Q ULN2803
HC4040 6 6 U143 J U203 Q
Q3 DA2 6 4
4 5 8 HC688 CLK CLR
Q4 DA3 3 HC109 7
X–RAY ON 2 PR 5 1
U37
Q5
3 11
DA4
10 K
CLR
Q 1 Rotor / Collimator Light.
3–D10 D Q 3 10 2 13
U140 PR 11
E 750KHZ 3 HC74 6
2 HC08 CLK Q6
Q7
4 15
DA5
DA6 U87
12
D
U95
Q
9
L 1 1 & 2 are 180 degrees
2–A4 CK Q 13 17 14 PRE 10
Q8
12 3
DA7
A=B
19 1 2 11
CK
HC74
Q
8
4–F7 12
J
CLK
U203 Q +24V out of phase
CLR Q9 DB0 60HZ 02
B5
HC04 BU TMR OKAY 13 9
14 5 K HC109 Q U283 10
1 Q10 DB1 CLR 10 U207
15 7 CLR
Q11 DB2 13 60HZ PHASE 2
1 9 RST* 13
PR
11 7 12
Q12 DB3 2–E1 15 12 9 12 HC08 13
D Q
RESET 12 U207 U206
DB4 10 ULN2803
11 14
DB5 TMR STATUS LATCH 8 11 HC74 8
16 9 HC08 CK Q +24V
DB6
18 CLR
DB7 U283 10
D0 3 2 13 60 HZ
D0 Q0 RELAY 6 13
D1 4 5 6–A9 11 60 HZ INV. RELAY*
D1 Q1
D2 7 U88 6
D2 Q2 ULN2803
D3 8 HC273 9
D3 Q3
D4 13 12
D4 Q4
F D5 14 15 U37
D6
D5 Q5 12
17 16 11 TIMING DIAGRAM FOR 60 HZ SIGNALS
D7
D6 Q6 13 HC08
18 19
D7 Q7
CLR CK
+5V 120HZ
R100 1 11
16 3 WRP6*
2–E11 DELAYED 120HZ
10K
60HZ
SET BACKUP TIME LATCH 60HZ=01

74.67uS
60HZ=02
74.67uS
D0–D7 REVISIONS PRINTS TO
2–A9
404
MADE BY APPROVALS
F.PIERCE 15JUN89 MEDICAL SYSTEMS
ISSUED
DIV OR
DEPT. 46–264974–S
MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN LOCATIONCONT ON SHEET 7 SH NO. 6
FOLD
FOLD
FOLD
46–264974–S 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4-33/4-34(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7 – CONT ON SHEET
FOLD
SH NO.
FOLD
FOLD
DRAWING NO.
FOLLOWING : – REV A TITLE CONT ON SHEET – SH NO. 7
APPLIED PRACTICES
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
AMX1 A2 A1 46–208600
DECIMALS
(2 PLACES)
DECIMALS
(3 PLACES)
ANGLES 46–264974–S AMX–4–CONTROLLER
+
–
+
–
+
–
CONT ON SHEET – SH NO. 7 FIRST MADE FOR AMX–4
P/L ISSUED
B1
SPARES
TP3 J6
18 +5VDC
J12 U46 U283 10 U87 U229 +5V +5V
+5VDC 9 +5VDC 3 4 5 6 1
8 11 3 16 12 9 16 16
15 14 HC04 2 HC08 R74
HC14 R74 R74 R135 R163
RX CX 10K
1 13 ULN2803 U427 10K 10K 10K 10K
C22,C23,C27,C28,C38,C42,C49,C50,C52,C53, T1 Q U46 P U229
U65 11 10 1 2 9 1 5 8 9 13
C57,C58,C61,C62,C66,C76,C77,C80,C84,C85, 8
2 HC123 4 U322 HC04 10 HC08
C89,C90,C97,C102,C105,C109,C1 10,C113,C114, T2 Q HC14
C120,C121,C125,C126,C130,C134,C137,C138, CLR U116 8 11 U427 +5V +5V
B U229 16 16
C141,C142,C145,C146,C152,C153,C157,C158,C162, 3 3 4 3 4 12
11
C166,C172,C186,C187,C192,C195,C196,C199 UDN6118A HC04 13 HC08 R100 R83
C114 HC14 10K 10K
22UF 0.1UF C200,C204,C205,C209,C210,C214,C216,C225, U266
5% L U116 U427
C227,C233,C234,C240,C262,C263,C267,C269,
50V 5 6 1 18 5 6 U44
C271,C277,C286,C317,C336,C338,C350,C360, 5
HC14 HC04 6 1, 2,9,10,11,12,13 2,3,4,5,6,7
C397,C424 7 6 4 HC32
UDN6118A U427
RX CX U116
9 5 9 8 U131 9 8 U228
T1 Q
U221 10 8 HC04 1 7 8 1 4 5 6
TP4 HC14 3 R287 R265 R375 R375 R375 R375
10 HC123 12 9 2 HC32
T2 Q U116 51 4.7K 15K 15K 15K 15K
1489 U37 1% 1% 1% 1%
J6 CLR 11 10 4
6 U228 8 1 16 13 12 11
LOGIC GND 8 20 LOGIC GND U131 5 HC08 12
11 HC14 11
23 LOGIC GND 13 11 13 HC32
L U116 U37 P
L 13 12 12 9
C 1489 8 U272
10 HC08 1 U64 U63
HC14 3 1 4
U154 2 HC32 3 6
U235 4 6 2 AC08 5 AC32
TP24 3 4 U60
1 U272
5 3 4 U64 U63
10 HC14 1489 2 HC08 6 4 9
5 HC32 6 8
+15VDC 6 +15V L U235 5 AC08 10 AC32
12 S 9 U154 U60
D Q 11 10
U25 13 11 12 U272
11 12 U64
11 HC74 8 HC14 12 13 HC08 11 9
CP Q 13 HC32 8 L
C250 C245,C294,C343,C352,C356,C366 1489 10 AC08
10UF 0.1UF C L
10% C367,C374,C389,C400,C425 L
50V 13 L L
L
SIGNAL GND 5
FOLD ALL DEVICES SHOWN TOP VIEW
C249,C306,C344,C357,C364, S FOLD
D C373,C381,C395,C405,C428 +15V +15V

C179
10UF 0.1UF +15V 1 20 1 18
10% TP23 1 14 1 8 1 8
50V +15V
4 11 2 7 2 7 16 5 15
7 8 4 5 4 5 12 S 10
–15VDC 4 –15V –15V
10 11 9
TL074 –15V OP–07 –15V LF398N S
L CA3083
AD7549
TP2
J6
+24VDC 2 +24VDC +5V +5V +5V +5V +15V
E 14
J11 1 14 1 16 1 18 1 20 1 24 1 28
17 +24VDC 2 10 2 10 2 15 2 15 2 15 12 27
C178
15UF 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 12 13 14 15 –15V
10% S
50V
ULN–2803A L 74HC154 AD7506
J6 L 74HC04 74HC112 P L 74HC273 82C54
PWR GND 1 16 PWR GND 74HC08 L 74HC123
74HC14 74HC138 74HC373
P 74HC30 74HC221 74HC533
74HC32 74HC151 74HC245
74HC74 74HC393
74HC125 74HC4040 74HC374
74HC164 DS26LS31 74HC688
74HC21 DS26LS32C 74HC240 CR324 CR323 1 20 +5V
DS14C89A 74HC163 S 1N5158 1N5818
74AC08 74HC109 5 17
F 74AC32 74HC163
74AC245 10 11
L AD7528
+5VDC
+5V +5V
+15V 1 28 +5V
1 18 1 24
7 C409 1 40
C414 C412 0.1 5 17 +24V 5 17
0.1 0.01 9 1 28
50V 50V 2 30
11 12 18 9 10 12 13
C418 C417 20 21 REVISIONS PRINTS TO
0.1 0.01 14 15 14 15 UDN–6118A MK48Z02–20
S 50V 50V 404
80C31 L L
L 27C512
H –15V AD574A CR416 L
1N5158 CR415
1N5158
S L
S
MADE BY
46–264974–S
DEPT.
ISSUED
MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN LOCATIONCONT ON SHEET – SH NO. 7
FOLD
FOLD
FOLD
46–264974–S 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4-35/4-36(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
4-37
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
➀ ➁ ➂
Enable - Prep - Expose Sequence - Refer to Pg. 4-39 thru Pg. 4-47
4-38
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017207, AMX-4 DIAGNOSTICS, Rev. 6, Page 15-5
ILL
USTR ATION 15-2
X-RAY ENABLE PREPARATION 1 ENABLE X-RAY MODE 2 PREP SEQUENCE 3 EXPOSE SEQUENCE
AND EXPOSE SEQUENCE
PREP SEQUENCE EXP SEQUENCE
PREP SW PRESSED &

TUBE NOT P ARKED 3
(FROM ENABLE EN. K37 EXPOSE SW PRESSED
X-RA Y MODE)
ST ART
with Prep. Switch
CHECK INTERL OCKS:

ARE X-RA YS ASSERT EXP ST ART CMND 3A
INHIBITED? VERIFY DA T A BASE
CHECKSUM
MAKE SURE THE FOLL OW-
X-RA YS INHIBITED IF : ING CRITICAL ST A TUS Second bullet: Xray EXPOSURE BEGINS.
BA T V < 112 VDC SIGNALS ARE OK:
BACK UP TIMER EXPIRED X-RA YS
- X-RA Y PRES SW
- 60HZ INV OK 2 pres swiths is a hi FIL/KVP CONTROL BOARD
DETECTS HV AND ASSERTS
ON LAST EXPOSURE INHIBITED - ROTOR INTLK signal All others are low X-RA Y ON.
UNIT NOT CALIBRA TED - 1 kHz INVERTER READY X-RA Y ON KICKS OFF THE
Line Sense is referencing LINE SENSE DETECTED - FIL SHORTED FOLL OWING EVENTS:
ON POWER-UP - X-RA Y ON
the charger plugged in or not PREP OR EXPOSE SWITCH VERIFY THA T NO HV ST ARTS BACK UP TIMER 3B
DETECTED ON POWER-UP AUTO XFMR RELA Y T APS TRIGGERS 8031 uC INT1,
ARE SELECTED ST ARTING MAS PULSE
X-RA YS NOT VERIFY BACK UP TIMER COUNTER
INHIBITED ST A TUS SOUNDS SONALERT
AMX1 A1 A2 LIGHTS X-RA Y ON LAMP
IS HEA T WAIT YES DISPLAY
REQUIRED? ST ART ROTOR B Y ASSERTING EN means enable For exposure 20ms
HEA T WAIT THE FOLL OWING SIGNALS:
8031 uC COLLECTS AUTO CAL or longer it updates
ROTOR SELECT* 2A DA T A (SEE 2-2-1, FILAMENT /
NO mAs CONTROL) Fil Cal Data
60HZ INV RELA Y*
60 Hz EN
IS PREP SW NO
PRESSED? 8031 uC CONTINUOUSL Y
CHECKS INTERL OCKS 3C
BOOST FILAMENT B Y ASSERT-
YES ING THE FOLL OWING SIGNALS: 2KHZ is the Filament drive
AMX1 A1 A2 PREHEA T 2B
DISPLAY 2 kHz EN
turn on WHEN MAS PULSE COUNT =
OPERA TOR'S mAs INPUT ,
IS TUBE YES
8031 uC ASSERTS EXP STOP
P ARKED? CMND . 3D
TUBE P ARKED
OUTPUT KVP DMN VALUE EXPOSURE STOPS.
NO BASED ON OPERA TOR'S 2C DNM means demand
kVp INPUT
TURN OFF 1KHZ & 2KHZ

INVERTERS 3E 1KHZ is KV
OUTPUT LEAKAGE COMP
GO TO PREP SEQ VALUE AS CALCULA TED FROM 2D 2KHZ is Filament
DA T A BASE
UPDA TE FIL DMN DA TA BASE
USING AUTO CAL INFO
OUTPUT FIL DMN VALUE
BASED ON:
OPERA TOR'S kVp INPUT
2E TURN OFF ROTOR & HV AUTO
XFMR RELA Y T APS 3F
SAMPLED BA T V LEVEL
AUTO CAL DA T A BASE
WAIT FOR RELEASE OF PREP

SWITCH 3G
PREP ARE FOR HIGH VOL T AGE:
ASSERT SAFETY CONT ENB
SELECT HV AUTO XFMR
RELA Y T APS
ASSERT 1 kHz EN 2F
LOAD EXP BACK UP TIMER EXIT
INITIALIZE MAS PULSE
COUNTER
AMX1 A1 A2
DISPLAY
READY FOR X-RA Y
GO TO EXP SEQ
4-39/4-40(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
ILL
USTR ATION 15-1
X-RAY ENABLE CONTROL AMX1 A2 A1 AMX1 A3 A2
GEN
CONTROLLER J3 2A J1 ROTOR CONTROL
ROTOR SELECT*
CNTRL 2 9 9 SEE ILL . 15-5
1000H ROTOR
60HZ INV RELA Y* 2A CONTROL
GEN 11 11
SEE ILL . 15-2 CNTRL 1
FOR X-RA Y ENABLE, 1200H
60 Hz EN 2A 3F
PREP SEQUENCE &
EXPOSE SEQUENCE 60HZ PHASE 1/ 60HZ
FL OW CHARTS PROG TMR 2 60HZ PHASE 2 INVERTER ROTOR DRIVE
TIMER DRI- 15 13 15 13
1500H VERS
+24V
GEN SAFETY CONT ENB* 2F CURRENT

CNTRL 2 10 10 K37
1000H DETECT
2 3G PREP SW ROTOR
12 12 DRIVE
J8
PREP SW PREP SW PREP SW
23 J4 J1
EXP SW
25
EXP SW EXP SW All 8 5 3
3 EXP 2F BU TMR high

OKA Y SCR signals are a SAFETY
BACK UP
TIMER
at SEE ILL . 15-3 CONT ACTOR 60HZ ROTOR
1300H Prep HIGH VOL T AGE
pulse not a square INV INTLK
X-RA Y A OK
HAND SWITCH N GENERA TION
PRES SW AMX1 A4 A1 AMX1 A4 AMX1 A6 A1
D +BA T T
Square 1 kHz INVERTER HV MODULE HV XFMR
J7 AEC 3 ms Pulsepulse
AEC EXP EN AEC EXP EN EXP EN
9
3A B4 ST ART SCR SAFETY
HI/L O CONT ACTOR
8031 EXP A J4 EXP ST ART CMND J1 ST ART J4
MICRO- STOP* N 25 25 PULSE 11 13
CONTROLLER D GEN 2
N SCR
O
N ST ART
* HI-PRIORITY CRITICAL O
T EXP SCR
PORTS ST A TUS T ST ART 3D B4 STOP SCR 1 3B
090H + L ANODE
HI/L O -BA T T SCR PRIMARY VOL TS+/ HV
(NON-MUX) P1.0 O EXP STOP CMND STOP PRIMARY VOL TS- XFMR C
23 23 PULSE 7 9 STOP & S
R AUTO
P1.1 GEN
3 ms Pulse GEN SCR
XFMR
HV
RECTI- - X-RA Y
J3 CNTRL 1 FIER
X-RA Y PRES SW
6 P1.2 1200H
TUBE +24V
ROTOR INTLK
1 kHz 2F 3E SCR's COM CAP
EN + -
3 P1.4 1/ 2
3C 1 kHz PHASE 1/
60HZ INV OK
5 P1.3 * PROG
TIMER
TMR 0
DRI-
VERS
26 24
1 kHz PHASE 2
26 24 1KHZ
INVERTER
(HV DRIVE)
2 J5
1500H
T AP COIL
FIL SHORTED
25 P1.6 6 SELECTS 2 2F J5
SELECTS 3F 6
GEN
CNTRL 2 OPTO X-RA Y
X-RA Y ON 1000H ISO'S PRES 2
SW
P1.7
1 kHz INVERTER READY
2 J4 STOP
CAP
12 12 DETECT 16
P1.5 -70VDC
KV 60HZ ROTOR
FDBK PRIMARY VOL TS+/ INV INTLK
+/-
J3 RECT- J6 PRIMARY VOL TS- 3B OK
1 2 IFIER
X-RA Y ON
INT1 SEE ILL . 15-4
FILAMENT / mAs
2D AMX1 A4 A2
2F CONTROL J5 LEAKAGE FIL / KVP CONTROL
J5 LEAK COMP +/- J2 MA+ / MA-
MAS CMP DAC 3 4 3 4
21 PULSE
COUNTER 1481H J7
SEE ILL .
15-9 BA T V &
CHARGING MUX T1 2C 1 2 DETECT SUM
BA T TERY J1 KV
POWER / CUR KVP KVP DMN +/- J2 75% OF
5
CHARGING DMN DAC 11 12 11 12 DEMAND
1584H
PWR
DOWN
2E S
RST*
J8
FIL FIL DMN +/- U 3B FILAMENT DRIVE
L
PWR OK 10 DMN DAC 7 8 7 8 FILA-
M C
1580H 2KHZ MENT
ON-BOARD INVERTER XFMR S
CNTRL 2 kHz PHASE 1/
1280H PROG TMR 0 2 kHz PHASE 2 CA THODE
LINE TIMER DRI- 17 19 17 19 VOL T AGE SHORT
SENSE J1 1500H VERS -TO- DETECT
6 3E FREQ
CHGR & DRV CONVERT
TUBE ST A TUS GEN 2 kHz EN 5-7 MS DELA Y
SEE ILL . P ARKED
SW
J8 1000H CNTRL 1 2B PREHEA T
15-6 OR 15-7 13 1200H PREHEA T
VEHICLE 26 26 J2
DRIVE
22 21 25
AMX1 A1 A1 AMX1 A1 A2
2 3B DISPLAY CONTROLLER X-RA Y MAS FIL 2 2 60HZ ROTOR DISPLAY
ON 2 SHORTED INV INTLK 2
J5 J6 J1
X-RA Y ON
22 15
SONALERT*
15 LS85 3B OK DS30
XRA Y ON
DRI- SONALERT J2 3B J1
VERS X-RA Y ON LAMP* X-RA Y ON LAMP*
3D 9 9 17 17
4-41/4-42(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017207, AMX-4 DIAGNOSTICS, Rev. 6, Page 15-7 Relay contacts are closed before a voltage is applied
through them. This helps keep from having an arch
ILLUSTRATION 15-3
HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATION build up on the contacts
SEE ILL . 15-9 AMX1 A4 AMX1 A6 A1
BA T TERY HV MODULE HV XFMR
POWER / CHARGING PRIMARY
-BA T T -BA T T ST ART VOL TS-
SCR SCR P2
ST ART SCR HI/L O ST ART SCR HI/L O K6

AMX2 A3
BATTERIES STOP CAP STOP CAP (STOP CHARGE = -70V)
COM CAP CHARGE - STOP K5

SCR
SEE ILL . 15-1 SEE ILL . 15-5 COM
CAP COM
X-RA Y ENABLE ROTOR RECT- CAP
CONTROL CONTROL IFIER C2
COM CAP CHARGE RTN K4
+
STOP SCR HI/L O STOP SCR HI/L O
SAFETY CONT ACTOR SAFETY CONT ACTOR L ANODE
AUTO + C
XFMR HV HV
T1 RECTI- S
+BA T T +BA T T XFMR
T1 FIER
-
SAFETY
CONT ACTOR X-RA Y
K7 TUBE
K3
K2
AMX1 A1 A2 AMX1 A2 A1 AMX1 A4 A1

DISPLAY 2C CONTROLLER 1 kHz INVERTER
J4 1 kHz K1
+24V PHASE 2 J1 J4 2
kVp S43 KVP 24 24 1
J1 J6
UP DRI-
34 11 PROG TMR 0 VERS 1 kHz PRIMARY
TIMER
S44 KVP
DOWN
OPER I/O
ST A TUS 1500H 16 XFMR
T120 SCR
VOL TS+
P1
32 13 1400H 1 kHz
PHASE 1 1
26 26 5
GEN SEE ILL . 15-4
1 kHz EN
CNTRL 1 FILAMENT / mAs
1200H J5 CONTROL
T AP 6* K6 COIL
8 8 4
T AP 5* K5 COIL FILAMENT L
10 10 5
OPTO DRI- C
6 T AP 4* 6 ISO'S 6 VERS 6 K4 COIL XFMR
GEN 14 14 6 T2
CNTRL 2 S
T AP 3* K3 COIL
1000H 16 16 7 CA THODE
T AP 2* K2 COIL
18 18 8
T AP 1* K1 COIL
20 20 9
8031 T AP 6 FDBK
MICRO- 7 7
CONTROLLER T AP 5 FDBK
9 9 OPTO
6 T AP 4 FDBK 6 ISO'S 6
GEN & AEC 13 13
ST A TUS T AP 3 FDBK
CRITICAL 1600H 15 15
090H 17 17
PREP SW T AP 1 FDBK
P1.0 19 19
EXP SW 20:1 J6 PRIMARY VOL TS-
P1.1
KV FDBK +/- J3 KV 1
HAND RECT- FDBK
1 2 IFIER XFMR 2C PRIMARY VOL TS+
SWITCH T25 3
SEE ILL . 15-1

X-RA Y ENABLE 2C AMX1 A4 A2
CONTROL FIL / KVP CONTROL
A/D KV FDBK +/- J7
CNTRL
POAD0- 1280H 1 2 AMP
POAD7
KVP DMN
J5 FBK +/- J2 DETECT
A/D ANA- J2 X-RA Y ON SEE ILL . 15-1
NVRAM CONVERT 13 14 13 14 AMP KV
DA TA LOG 75% OF 22 X-RA Y ENABLE
1200H MUX
BASE 2C DEMAND CONTROL
D0-D7 DA T A BUS KVP DMN +/-

KVP
DMN DAC 11 12 11 12 AMP
1584H
DETECT J6
KV>15KV TRIP BRKR* SEE ILL . 15-9
8031 uC READS OPERA TOR'S kVp INPUT AND SETS 2
AUTO XFMR T APS & KVP DEMAND DAC ACCORDINGL Y ABOVE BA T TERY
DEMAND POWER / CHARGING
150ma or greater will also cause a

4-43/4-44(blank) "TRIPBRKR"
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
ILLUSTRATION 15-4
FILAMENT AND MAS CONTROL
AMX1 A1 A2
DISPLAY
+24V AMX1 A2 A1 AMX1 A4 A2
mAs S45 J1 MAS J6 CONTROLLER FIL / KVP CONTROL
UP
31 5 FIL DMN +/-
MAS
D0-D7 DA T A BUS FIL J5 J2 AMX1 A4 AMX1 A6 A1
S46
DOWN DMN DAC 7 8 7 8 AMP HV MODULE HV XFMR
33 7 1580H X-RA Y
OPER I/O TUBE
kVp S43 KVP ST A TUS CHOKE
UP KVP DMN +/- S PWM J8 PWM E PWM L
1400H MODU-
34 11 KVP U POWER 3 XC
KVP DMN DAC 11 12 11 12 AMP M LA TOR L3
S44 AMP
DOWN 1584H
32 13 8 AMP
CURRENT
GEN PREHEA T PREHEA T LIMIT
CNTRL 1 26 26
1200H 2 kHz EN CURRENT
2B DETECT
TMR 0 16 kHz CLK FILAMENT S
PROG 15 15
TIMER XFMR C
1500H T2 L
DRI- 2 kHz
VERS
17
PHASE 1
17 BUF FET
J5
1
PWM RTN 1 F7 PWM RTN 1
XS1
CA THODE
8 2 kHz
19
PHASE 2
19 BUF FET 3
PWM RTN 2 F9 PWM RTN 2
XS2
FIL FDBK +/- FIL SEE ILL . 15-1

J2 SHORTED
AMP SHORT X-RA Y ENABLE
9 10 9 10 DETECT 25
CONTROL
8031 F10
MICRO-
CONTROLLER AMX1 A4 A1
1 kHz INVERTER
A/D J6
ANA- 20:1
CONVERT J7 KV FDBK +/- J3 3
1200H LOG KV
RECT-
MUX AMP 1 2 1 2 IFIER FDBK
XFMR 1
CRITICAL LEAKAGE T25
ST A TUS COMP When the switch closes it allows
090H FDBK +/-
PREP SW
P1.0
the system to start the filament
A/D 5 6 5 6 AMP SEE ILL . 15-3
5-7 mS X-RA Y
adjustment
EXP SW CNTRL DELA Y ON HIGH VOL T AGE
P1.1 1280H LEAKAGE GENERA TION
COMP +/-
HAND LEAK
SWITCH CMP DAC 3 4 3 4 AMP AMX1 A4
1481H HV MODULE
PRIMARY
SEE ILL . 15-1 ON-BOARD VOL TS+
CNTRL AUTO P1 HV HV -
X-RA Y ENABLE 1280H PRIMARY RECTI- L ANODE
CONTROL XFMR XFMR
PULSE 100MA = 16kHz VOL T AGE T1 VOL TS- T1 FIER + C
COUNTER MAS NOMINAL -TO- S P2
21 21 U S
T1 MUX FREQ
CONVERT M
POAD0- J3 MA+ MA J2 MA+
POAD7 1 FDBK 1 MA+
NVRAM RECT- MA- XFMR MA- SAMPLE
DA T A DURING EXPOSURE, FIL/KVP IFIER 2 T2 3 MA-
BASE CONTROL BOARD DRIVES
FIL CURRENT UNTIL
KV FDBK = KV DMN
DURING PREP SEQUENCE, 8031 uC SETS UP DAC'S:
- SETS UP FIL DEMAND DAC BASED ON: J6 TRIP
* OPERA TOR'S kVp SELECTION DETECT BRKR* SEE ILL . 15-9
>150MA 2
* BA T TERY VOL T AGE BA T TERY
* CALCULA TED EMISSION CURRENT AS DETER- POWER / CHARGING
MINED B Y CAL DA T A BASE
2E - SETS KVP DEMAND DAC TO A UNIQUE VALUE
FOR EACH OPERA TOR'S kVp SELECTION
(THIS FINE-TUNES kVp AUTO XFMR T AP
SELECTIONĊSEE ILL . 15-3, HIGH VOL T AGE GEN)
- SETS UP LEAKAGE COMP DAC TO COMPENSA TE
FOR HV T ANK LEAKAGEĊOTHERWISE MA
VALUE WOULD APPEAR TO BE HIGHER THAN
IT ACTUALL Y IS. DAC VALUE BASED ON:
* OPERA TOR'S kVp SELECTION
* CAL DA TA BASE
DURING EXPOSE SEQUENCE, 8031 uC COLLECTS
AUTO CAL DA T A:
- READS FIL FDBK
- READS LEAKAGE COMP FDBK
- READS KVP DMN FDBK (SEE ILL . 15-3, HV GEN)
TO END EXPOSURE, 8031 uC COUNTS MAS PULSES.
WHEN PULSE COUNT = OPERA TOR-SELECTED mAs,
EXPOSURE TERMINA TES. (SEE ILL . 15-1, X-RA Y
ENABLE CONTROL .)
AFTER EXPOSURE, 8031 uC UPDA TES AUTO CAL
DA TA BASE
4-45/4-46(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
ILL
USTR ATION 15-5
ROTOR CONTROL
AMX1 A3
ROTOR CONTROL & BATTERY CHARGER MODULE
COLL LAMP TRANS
A3T2
TO COLL
F93: If this fuse blows you should replace FIELD LAMP
the board. The next fuse usually allows
more / serious damage to occur. The FET A3F7
is most likley bad and will take out the xfmr
next.
SEE ILL . 15-9 J6 1 J6 2
BA T TERY KEY ROTOR CONTROL
POWER / CHARGING SWITCH BATTERY CHARGER
KEY ROTOR Normally closed is PHASE
SWITCH DRIVE K39 SHIFT
J2
T1 PHASE 2 XFMR for the collimator light PHASE CAP PHASE
T1 SHIFT E C1 SHIFT L
FET 6 J3 J7
AMX2 A3 100 VAC (ROTOR 1)
3 2
BATTERIES +BA T T T1 PRI COM T6 (GRN)
X-RAY
K215 SWITCHED J8 K121 F93 TUBE
- + T1 SEC
2 3 J4 ROTOR COMM (WHT)
COM
2 3
T1 PHASE 1
-BA T T
1 FET 1 (BLK)
ROTOR 2
4
B-
T5
2A J1 ROTOR
AMX1 A2 A1 CURRENT INTLK
DETECT 3
D0-D7 CONTROLLER J3
60HZ INV
J1 SEE ILL . 15-1
DA TA RELA Y*
BUS GEN 11 11 X-RA Y ENABLE
27 VAC OPTO 60HZ CONTROL
HAND 8031 CNTRL 1 60 Hz EN 6 ISO INV OK
MICRO- 27 VAC RECT-
SWITCH CONTROLLER
1200H 60HZ RTN IFIER
5
J8 PHASE 1 1 7
PREP SW 15 15
23 P1.0 J4 COM CAP
DRI- OPTO DRI- CHARGE
PROG VERS 80 VAC
CRITICAL TMR 2 ISO'S VERS 8 2 SEE ILL . 15-3
ST A TUS
090H
TIMER
1500H 2 60HZ
PHASE 2
80 VAC
RTN
COM CAP
CHARGE RTN HIGH VOL TAGE
2 9 1 GENERA TION
13 13
SEE ILL . 15-1 OPTO Isolators are
X-RA Y ENABLE ROTOR
CONTROL GEN SELECT* usually a weak link.
CNTRL 2 9 9
1000H
WHEN OPERA TOR PRESSES PREP SWITCH, 8031 uC 2A

ENABLES 60HZ INVERTER & ROTOR SELECT RELA YSĊ
X-RA Y TUBE ROTOR MOTION BEGINS.
4-47/4-48(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
4-49
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
SECTION 3
DISPLAY CONTROLLER
AMX1 A1 A1
46-264982G1
4-51/4-52(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
DISPLAY CONTROLLER BOARD

The DISPLAY CONTROLLER BOARD receives data from the CPU Board for display
Refer to Pg. 4-53

Commands, ASCII data and special character data are received from the CPU serial
output to the DISPLAY CONTROLLER CPU (U35). Ref. WF A1
This controller can support up to three displays.
INT0 from the DISPLAY CONTROLLER CPU generates XMIT OK* for display status.
XMIT OK* is a toggling signal that synchronizes the display to the data being
transmitted. This eliminates flicker.
DISPLA Y OK is a `watchdog' signal that if for any reason XMIT OK* doesn't toggle the
one-shot, DISPLAY OK will go false signaling a display error, 23.
Refer to Pg. 4-55
DS27 is a 9 character display which displays the KVP/MAS technics (C-6).
The vacuum fluorescent displays require a separate power supply (B-8).

X83 has 2 outputs; 40VDC supply used by the 16 character display and filament supply
F1 & F2 used by all displays.
The 40 v supply is divided down to 33VDC used by the KVP/MAS display and 24VDC
used by the bargraph.
F1 & F2 are the filament supplies for all displays. Ref. WF A2
W aveforms are out of phase. If they were DC, the display brightness would not be
uniform.
The x-ray SONALERT is located on this board

Cannot make the sonalert louder using existing one.
Have seen where U13 can go bad causing certain segments to be lit and letters double
spaced on the 16 character display.
DISPLAY BOARD
DISPLA Y BOARD contains the 16 character (message) display DS-37 (P. 4-59/B-5) and the
Bargraph Display DS-35 (E-10)
CPU sends bargraph data to the DISPLAY CONTROLLER memory which then updates
the bargraph.
When a bargraph change in needed, the CPU will send COMPLETE bargraph data;
unwanted segments are blanked.
4-50
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
A1
These
go to
the
Display
bd
4-53/4-54(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
KV / MAS Display. 9
character display
A2
J2 goes to the
A2 Display Board
kVp/mAs
Display
LS90
4-55/4-56(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
SECTION 4
DISPLAY
AMX1 A1 A2
46-232832G1
4-57/4-58(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
high failure items
16 character
display.
Alpha/Numeric
These are on
the touch pad
4-59/4-60(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
SECTION 6
BATTERY CHARGER
AMX1 A3 A1
46-288786G1/G2
4-63/4-64(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
GENERAL ELECTRIC
4 SH NO.3
CONT ON SHEET
FOLD
FOLD
FOLD
46–329267–S
DRAWING NO.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 46–329267–S
European Models Only APPLIED PRACTICES SURFACES TOLERANCES ON DIMENSIONS
DECIMALS DECIMALS ANGLES 46–329267–S
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
OVERALL SCHEMATIC FOR AMX IV
46–208600 (2 PLACES) (3 PLACES)
G2 AND G3 ONLY CHARGER/ROTOR CONTROL MODULE +
–
+
–
+
–
CONT ON SHEET4 SH NO. 3 FIRST MADE FOR AMX IV PRODUCTIVITY
220V/240V
1A2TS5 50HZ P/L ISSUED
1 3.15 AMPS TS3–2 AMX1A3T3 AMX1A3
BRN
(HOT) A3F1 (BRN)
A TS3–2
(BRN/WHT)
2
LINE AMX1A3T3
IN TS3–3
G1 ONLY G4 AND G5 ONLY L2
115V/120V 100V (BLU) TS2–3 TS2–4
60HZ 50/60HZ (RED)
(BLK)
(BRN) 10 MH
Domestic
(BLU)
8 9 1
B 1A2TS5 TS3–1 J5
2 3.15 AMPS TS3–1 (BLK/WHT) CB1 CB1
BLU (BRN/WHT)
(NEUTRAL) A3F2 TS3–2 +
(VIO)
1A2TS5
FRAME 3
J5 MAIN
3 BATTERY
GRN/YEL GROUND 8 AMP 64 AMP
(BLK) BATTERY _ BOX
CHARGER
6 AMP
BLK 1 CIRCUIT
(HOT) A3F1 J11 F4
1
6 AMP TS3–1 (BLK/WHT) (YEL) 5
J5 K CHARGE SCR
1
LINE WHT BRIDGE
IN
Energized
(NEUTRAL) RECTIFIER
A3F2 10 AMP
GROUND STUD
When Plugged In
C GRN
FRAME
B
PHASE
On Left side
GROUND
CONTROL
CONDUCTED
1
Fuse Panel
NOISE
AMX1A3FN1 K LINE 2 K LINE 1 SNUBBER 2.5 OHM

J6 J11 200 W F5
(BLK) 1 4 R1
Command To Charge FAN

(BLK)
2 2–C2
8
From CPU
K CHARGE CLOSED 10 AMP
1
J7 LOOP I CHAR. FDB –
(BLK)
CURRENT
LAMP 2 CONTROL
9 I CHAR. FRB +
SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY
(BLK)
J1 J1
FOLD
3 I CHARGE CMD 1 J3
3 +V PGND FOLD
D 2
4 I CHARGE RTN 4 +24V
4
K CHARGE –15V
10 CHARGER RELAY * 10
5 TO LVLE
8–B2 K LINE 1 S GND
TO CPU 6 LINE SENSE 6 Charge Mode 6
+15V
2–E5
8
L GND
+24 VOLTS
9
Trip Coil Resistance ^ 97 W

K ON 1 +5V
11 KEY SWITCH ON 11
E
J4 2–B4
Keyswitch In Run Position 5
J4
If J4 pin 5 is pulled and the main breaker still trips
TRIP BREAKER * (YEL) 8
From FIL/kV Board 5–F2 (RED) = SCR problem
– TRIP COIL +
J10 If J4 pin 5 is pulled and the main breaker doesn't
POWER OK (YEL) 4 B
To CPU Board 8–F5 POWER UP trip = low voltage problem
LOGIC
POWER OK (RED) 2 POWER STABLE
FET 1 CIRCUITRY FOUND ONLY ON 46–288786G2 VERSION
To Drive Controller 7–C10 Switch CHARGER BOARDS.
J3
F PWR FAIL DETECT(ORN) 7 2 IF A 46–288786G1 VERSION CHARGER BOARD
2–F6 IS USED, THE TRANSFORMER CONNECTS DIRECTLY
From the LVLE AMX1A3A1
BATTERY CHARGER BOARD
TO TS2–3 AS SHOWN. IT DOES NOT CONNECT TO
THE CHARGER BOARD.
+BATT SWITCHED(VIO)
2–E2
REVISIONS PRINTS TO
1 DPB_7JAN94 404
PCN_180067
H
MADE BY APPROVALS MEDICAL SYSTEMS

D.R.LONG_24NOV93
ISSUED
DRL
DIV OR
DEPT. 46–329267–S
M.BOEHM_1DEC93 1DEC93 MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN CONT ON SHEET 4 SH NO. 3
FOLD
FOLD
LOCATION
FOLD
46–329267–S 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4-61/4-62(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
145v
While plugged in it will

forward bias & run the
system. Blocking the
key switch signal.
"PWR DWN RESET"

This is what tells the CPU to go into a reset
so it will not lose pwr during a write mode
4-65/4-66(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
BATTERY CHARGER BOARD
BA T TERY CHARGER BOARD consists of a constant current battery charger capable of charging
batteries to 145 volts at a rate of 3 amps.
Refer to Pg. 4-69 & 4-71
When the charger cord is plugged in:
Line sense relays K216 and K196 energize (Pg. 4-69, B-2)
Refer to Pg. 4-71 (D-9)
K196 contacts bring battery voltage to the charger board and the rest of the system
by means of BAT SWT, TP7 .
K216 contacts sends a signal to the CPU telling it that the cord is plugged in and to
go to the charge mode.
If the unit will not charge, chances are the line sense relays are not energized.
Refer to Pg. 4-69
AC power is applied to the full wave bridge and to the phase control SCR.
The average current is controlled by varying the conduction angle of the SCR by
means of an optically coupled triac.
A ramp generator is synced with the zero crossing of the AC line (CR198, B-4);
(U181, B-6); (Q188, B-7).
The zero crossing ramp is compared to the output of the charger current error amp.
When the error voltage at TP4 (D-8) is higher than the ramp voltage at TP5 (C-7),
the SCR is fired. Ref. WF C1 & C2
This varies the average current to the batteries
Ref . Coordinates A-C/9-11: Circuitry here keeps batteries from charging at no more
than 145 volts.
Charge current feedback is accomplished by picking off the charge current through a
2.5 ohm resistor in series with the charger and the batteries.
The voltage drop across the resistor is fed into an isolation circuit 2-F4
Then to gain network operated by CHARGE SCALE SELECT (E-3) J1-12. This
changes gain by a factor of 10.
When low, the charger is in the HIGH charge rate
When high, the charger is in the LOW charge rate
I-CHARGE CMND is a 0 to 10 volt signal from the CPU that is compared to the
actual charge current. The output is the charge current error .
Other functions:
Refer to Pg. 4-71
During power-up, POWER STABLE* & POWER OK (F-1) signals are generated by
power supply monitor U20 (H-3).
This provides a delayed signal to allow the power supplies to stabilize as well as a
fast power down warning for the CPU Board. (renamed POWER DWN RST)
POWER STABLE is also used to hold off the trip breaker signal on power-up and
power-down.
BREAKER TRIP from FILAMENT/KVP Board trips the circuit if KV >15KV above
demand or MA > 150 mA.
NOTE: J4-8 BREAKER TRIP* on Charger Board comes from FILAMENT/KVP Board
as TRIP BRKR*.
4-67
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
Q228 drives the trip coil of the main breaker
When POWER STABLE* is true, then Q210 off. This desensitizes the breaker trip
circuit on power-up until power supply is stable.
POWER STABLE* is not used off the board.
When TRIP BRKR from CPU is false and BREAKER TRIP from FILAMENT/KVP
Board is false, Q228 remains off.
If either trip breaker signals go true, then the breaker will trip.
Battery voltage and charge current are sampled and sent to the CPU Board.
Battery voltage from BAT SW is fed to a voltage sense circuit, (B-5), through a
select FET switch to a Voltage-to-F requency Converter (VFC)
The charge current is sampled through another FET switch and also is sent to the
VFC.
When BAT V & CHARGE CUR SELECT (A-1) is low, the battery voltage line is
selected. When high, the charge current line is selected.
During voltmeter cal, the frequency is read for 5 sec for max accuracy.
VFC output (typical) :
Batt.=120v TP6=7.8KHz
Batt=115.5v TP6=7.407KHZ Ref. WF C3
Batt=114.5v TP6=7.299KHZ
When the charger is plugged in, the LINE VOLT AGE is supplying the BAT SWT voltĆ
age to the rest of the system (LVLE).
The voltmeter is not affected by this because of diode CR81 (D-8).
This would eliminate the system running off of the batteries since the unit might sit
around a while after the CHARGE COMPLETE message appears.
This prevents unnecessary battery drain.
KEY SWITCH ON SEQUENCE
Main breaker on
+BA T T volts through F6 to KEY SWITCH
KEY SWITCH to ON position
sends voltage to Charger Board J4-1 (D-9) through K149 contacts.
K215 energizes bringing battery voltage to the board and out to BAT SWT (D-8).
BA T SW also goes to the power supply monitor to develop POWER OK &
POWER STABLE *
BA T SW voltage feeds the LVLE power supply
K62 energizes closing contacts (3C9) which go to CPU Board. This lets the CPU know
that the key switch is on.
CPU starts power-up sequence.
4-68
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
K150 = Charger relay. It

turns on the Fan and Lamp
145 Volt Regulator
145v is the max it
will go to
C2
C2 C1
C1
0v to 10v
C2
Used to adjust
charge current to
high or low
Large resistor by the ground lug
4-69/4-70(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
C3
145v during charge

or 132v on battery
see 4-5/4-6 for thr

fuse
From CPU
Can see from here
which one is causing
the breaker to trip
KV > 15kv of the selected

OR MA > 150ma From FIL/kVp
Board
4-71/4-72(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
4-73
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
BA T TERY POWER AND CHARGING - Refer to Pg. 4-75 thru 4-79

SEE PAGE 4-77 FOR CHARGE CYCLE
LINE SENSE is energized when the charger cord is plugged in. Also relay K196 comes in
bringing battery voltage to the system as BAT SWT. BAT SWT supplies, among other
things, the LVLE . When the LVLE supply comes up, the CPU powers up, sees LINE
SENSE and proceeds to the charger mode. K150 comes in from the CPU to bring
power to the charger bridge.
I-CHARGE CMND is output from the CPU to the Charger Board and is summed with the
charger feedback. The output is compared to a ramp generator which is line-synced.
This fires SCR to give average current through the batteries.
I-CHARGE FDBK is developed across a 2.5 ohm resistor behind the ground stud. It is
scaled depending if batteries need high charge or low charge mode. This feedback
goes through a MUX which selects between charge fdbk and battery voltage, then to a
V oltage to Frequency Converter (VFC).
BA T V & CHARGING CUR is sent to the CPU's internal pulse counter T1 input and
converted. The CPU counts these pulses for a fixed time to determine their value.
A new circuit designed into the charger runs the system off the line when plugged in from
the REGULATOR. This supplies BAT SW to the LVLE . Diodes were installed to allow the
voltmeter to read the voltages on the batteries, not the regulator (center of sheet).
KEY SWITCH brings in K62 (KEY SWITCH ON) and K215 (BAT SWT). Note that K215 and
K196 are in parallel; one for charging, one for key switch operation. Also note that when
the charger is plugged in K150 opens and disables the key switch whether it is on or off.
POWER UP DELAY is operated by the BAT SWT signal. It provides a power up delay as
well as a fast power down. PWR STABLE desensitizes the Trip Breaker circuitry while
the power supplies come up.
TRIP BREAKER from the CPU board & BREAKER TRIP* from the FIL/KVP board are low
voltage signals designed to trip the breaker as follows:
CPU - if battery voltage is less than 110 volts in standby.
if charge current feedback is not within 20% of expected value.
if CPU cannot terminate exposure normally
FIL/KVP - if KV is 15 KV above demand
if ma is greater than 150 ma.
When the breaker is to be tripped, 0 volts is given to the trip coil of the circuit breaker.
To troubleshoot breaker tripping symptoms, disconnect wire at J4-5. this will eliminate or
indicate blocks of circuitry as a possible cause. If the breaker still trips, then there is an
actual overload; whether it is a tube spit or inverter latchup. Watching the wire marked #5
to the START/STOP SCR jerk is also a good indication that a high current situation
occurred.
Collimator brake release switches operate K1 located under the CPU board.
This brings battery voltage to the positioning brakes and park latch.
4-74
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
ILLUSTRATION 15-9
BATTERY POWER AND CHARGING, WITH CHARGER BOARD 46-288034 OR 46-288786
AMX1 A3
LAMP +BA T T
(NEWER
UNITS) F AN
AMX1 A3 A1 F9
BATTERY CHARGER +BA T T
BA T
F1 CHOKE 117 VAC J5 K150 J11 CHARGE+ F4 CB1 CB1 F10
T3 +BA T T
1 + SCR 1
L2 8A 64A
110 VAC F55
3 RECT- F6
IFIER 145 VDC
BLK REGULA TOR BA T
F2 NEUTRAL CHARGE-
CORD WH
5 - 4 C + B + + + +
REEL GRN B B R B B B B
1 A E A A A A
117 VAC FRAME T A T T T T
60 Hz GROUND B T K T T T T
PHASE RAMP A E
DETECT GEN T R
T AMX2 A3
AMX1 A2 A1 O BATTERIES
CONTROLLER P +
C
LINE K-LINE2 O E
J1 SENSE J1 K216 +24V TO K196 M N BRAKE DRIVE
CHGR & DRV
ST A TUS P * RELEASE MOTORS
6 6 A BUT TON
1000H
R
I-CHARGE E SAFETY
CHARGE CMND CONT ACTOR
CUR DAC 3 3 SEE ILL . 15-5 OR 15-6
1480H VEHICLE SEE ILL . 15-3
I-CHARGE AMP DRIVE HIGH VOL TAGE
D0-D7 RTN S
U I-CHARGE GENERA TION
DA TA BUS 4 4 FBK- -
8031 M
MICRO- 8
TIMES 0.8 - - -
CONTROLLER B B B
OR AMP I-CHARGE
TIMES 8 A A A
VOLTAGE FBK+ T T T
-TO- AMP
9 F5 T T T
FREQ -BA T T -BA T T -BA T T
CONVERT
7.8 kHz CB1
BA T V & J2 BA T T
PULSE CHARGING +/- 25% B-
@ 120V 4
COUNTER CUR ANA-
MUX 5 5 +BATT
T1 LOG K- SEE ILL 15-5
4.6 kHz MUX K215 K196 LINE2
+/- 35% ROTOR
@ 0.5V CONTROL
SEE ILLS. 15-10 & 15-11 I-CHRG,
FOR DET AILED CHARGE & ON-BOARD AMP BA T SWT +BA T T +BA T T
DISCHARGE CYCLE CIRCUIT CNTRL @X8 (+BA T T SWITCHED) SWITCHED SWITCHED
OPERA TION 1280H 9
KEY -
SWITCH +24V B
OPERA TOR ON K62 AMX1 A2 A
CHARGE CYCLE I/O ST A TUS 11 11 KEY TOP DECK T
1400H SWITCH +BA T T T
8031 uC ISSUES I-CHARGE K150*
K149**
J4 J1 J1 PWR DWN RST"
CMND & CHARGER RELA Y* 1 1 2
WHEN LINE SENSED CHARGER AMX1 A2 A2 +24V
8031 uC ISSUES TRIP BRKR RELA Y* LOW VOLTAGE +15V TO
IF CHARGING CUR FEEDBACK 10 10 LIMITED ENERGY
IS NOT WITHIN +/- 20% OF SEE ILL . 15-1 ALL
EXPECTED VALUE BA T V & X-RA Y (LVLE) -15V CKT
ENABLE POWER SUPPLY BDS
CHARGE KEY +5V
CUR SEL SWITCH CONTROL
DISCHARGE CYCLE
CHARGER 7 7
8031 uC ISSUES TRIP BRKR IF &
BA T V IS LESS THAN 110V . DRIVE CHARGE +24V
CONTROL SCALE POWER-UP
1100H SELECT DELA Y
12 12 PWR OK AMX1
4 A3 AMX3 A4
TRIP
J10 F3 COLLIMATOR
BRKR PWR OK PWR OK PWR OK
8 8 2
PWR S2 & S3 ARE
ST ABLE S2 S3 BRAKE RELEASE
J4 SWITCHES L O-
A BREAKER OPEN* CA TED ON COLL
N 5
AMX1 A4 A2 O
D
HANDLES.
R
SEE ILL 15-3 FIL / KVP CONTROL
TRIP BREAKER AMX1 A2
HIGH VOL TAGE DETECT J6 BRKR* TRIP* J4 K1
GENERA TION KV>15KV
ABOVE 2 8
DEMAND O
SEE ILL 15-4 R UPPER LOWER TUBE
ă*K150 FOR CHARGER BOARD 46-288034 COLUMN ARM COLUMN P ARKED
FILAMENT / mAs DETECT BRAKE
CONTROL **K149 FOR CHARGER BOARD 46-288786 BRAKE BRAKE LA TCH
>150MA
Name -BA T T
Change
4-75/4-76(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
ILLUSTRATION 15-10
BATTERY POWER CHARGE CYCLE WITH CHARGER BOARD 46-288034 OR 46-288786
AMX1 A3
LAMP +BA T T
(NEWER
UNITS) F AN
AMX1 A3 A1 F9
BA T
ÍÍ
T3 +BA T T
1 SCR 1
ÍÍ
+
L2 8A 64A
ÍÍ
110 VAC F55
3 RECT- F6
ÍÍ
IFIER 145 VDC
BLK REGULA TOR BA T
ÍÍ
F2 NEUTRAL CHARGE-
CORD WH
5 - 4 C + B + + + +
ÍÍ
1 A E A A A A
ÍÍ
PHASE RAMP A E
ÍÍ
DETECT GEN T R
T AMX2 A3
ÍÍ
CONTROLLER P +
C
LINE K-LINE2 O E
+24V
ÍÍ
CHGR & DRV J1 SENSE J1 K216 TO K196 M N BRAKE DRIVE
6 6 A BUT TON
1000H
ÍÍ
R
I-CHARGE E SAFETY
CMND CONT ACTOR
ÍÍ
CHARGE
CUR DAC 3 3 SEE ILL . 15-5 OR 15-6
1480H VEHICLE SEE ILL . 15-3
ÍÍ
D0-D7 RTN S
ÍÍ
8031 M
MICRO- 8
- - -
ÍÍ
CONTROLLER TIMES 0.8
OR B B B
AMP I-CHARGE A A A
VOLTAGE TIMES 8 FBK+
ÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍ
AMP T T T
-TO- 9 T T T
FREQ F5
-BA T T -BA T T -BA T T
ÍÍ
CONVERT
7.8 kHz CB1
BA T V & J2 BA T T
ÍÍ
@ 120V 4
COUNTER CUR ANA-
+BATT
ÍÍ
T1 MUX 5 5 LOG K- SEE ILL 15-5
+/- 35% ROTOR
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Í
@ 0.5V CONTROL
I-CHRG,
ON-BOARD AMP BA T SWT +BA T T +BA T T
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
Í
CNTRL @X8 (+BA T T SWITCHED) SWITCHED SWITCHED
1280H 9
KEY -
Í
SWITCH +24V B
Í
8031 uC ISSUES I-CHARGE K150* J4 J1 J1
CMND & CHARGER RELA Y* K149**
1 1 2 +24V
WHEN LINE SENSED CHARGER AMX1 A2 A2
CHARGE KEY +5V
DISCHARGE CYCLE
CHARGER 7 7
1100H SELECT DELA Y
12 12 PWR OK AMX1
4 A3 AMX3 A4
TRIP
J10 F3 COLLIMATOR
BRKR Highlighted items are PWR OK PWR OK PWR OK
8 8 2
S2 & S3 ARE
what can cause a PWR
J4 SWITCHES L O-
breaker trip A
5
BREAKER OPEN* CA TED ON COLL
AMX1 A4 A2 O N HANDLES.
R D
GENERA TION KV>15KV
ABOVE 2 8 ă*K150 FOR CHARGER BOARD 46-288034
DEMAND O **K149 FOR CHARGER BOARD 46-288786
ÍÍÍ
R
SEE ILL 15-4
FILAMENT / mAs
CHARGE CYCLE UPPER
COLUMN ARM LOWER
COLUMN
TUBE
P ARKED
DETECT BRAKE BRAKE BRAKE LA TCH
CONTROL >150MA NOTE: Cross-hatched path ( ) represents circuitry to supply the low voltage limited enĆ
-BA T T
ergy power supply from the line instead of from the batteries during the charging cycle.
4-77/4-78(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
ILLUSTRATION 15-11
BATTERY POWER DISCHARGE CYCLE WITH CHARGER BOARD 46-288034 OR 46-288786
AMX1 A3
LAMP +BA T T
(NEWER
UNITS) F AN
AMX1 A3 A1 F9
BA T
T3 +BA T T
1 + SCR 1
L2 8A 64A
110 VAC F55
3 RECT- F6
IFIER 145 VDC
BLK REGULA TOR BA T
F2 NEUTRAL CHARGE-
CORD WH
5 - 4 C + B + + + +
1 A E A A A A
PHASE RAMP A E
DETECT GEN T R
T AMX2 A3
CONTROLLER P +
C
LINE K-LINE2 O E
J1 SENSE J1 K216 +24V TO K196 M N BRAKE DRIVE
CHGR & DRV
6 6 A BUT TON
1000H
R
I-CHARGE E SAFETY
CHARGE CMND CONT ACTOR
Must have K216 OR CUR DAC 3 3 SEE ILL . 15-5 OR 15-6
K62 pulled in. 1480H VEHICLE SEE ILL . 15-3
Neither or both D0-D7 RTN S
pulled in will cause 8031 M
MICRO- 8
TIMES 0.8 - - -
a x-ray inhibit CONTROLLER
OR B B B
AMP I-CHARGE A A A
VOLTAGE TIMES 8 FBK+
AMP T T T
-TO- 9 T T T
FREQ F5
-BA T T -BA T T -BA T T
CONVERT
7.8 kHz CB1
BA T V & J2 BA T T
@ 120V 4
COUNTER CUR ANA-
MUX 5 5 +BATT
T1 LOG K- SEE ILL 15-5
+/- 35% ROTOR
@ 0.5V CONTROL
I-CHRG,
ON-BOARD AMP BA T SWT +BA T T +BA T T
CNTRL @X8 (+BA T T SWITCHED) SWITCHED SWITCHED
1280H 9
KEY -
SWITCH +24V B
8031 uC ISSUES I-CHARGE K150* J4 J1 J1
CMND & CHARGER RELA Y* K149**
1 1 2 +24V
WHEN LINE SENSED CHARGER AMX1 A2 A2
CHARGE KEY +5V
DISCHARGE CYCLE
CHARGER 7 7
1100H SELECT DELA Y
12 12 PWR OK AMX1
4 A3 AMX3 A4
TRIP
J10 F3 COLLIMATOR
BRKR PWR OK PWR OK PWR OK
8 8 2
PWR S2 & S3 ARE
J4 SWITCHES L O-
A BREAKER OPEN* CA TED ON COLL
N 5
AMX1 A4 A2 O
D
HANDLES.
R
GENERA TION KV>15KV ă*K150 FOR CHARGER BOARD 46-288034
ABOVE 2 8 **K149 FOR CHARGER BOARD 46-288786
DEMAND O
SEE ILL 15-4 R UPPER LOWER TUBE
COLUMN ARM COLUMN P ARKED
FILAMENT / mAs
CONTROL
DETECT
>150MA DISCHARGE CYCLE (NORMAL SYSTEM OPERATION) BRAKE BRAKE BRAKE LA TCH
Turning Key Switch On Applies Battery Voltage to Load! -BA T T
4-79/4-80(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
SECTION 7
ROTOR CONTROLLER
AMX1 A3 A2
46-232786G2
4-83/4-84(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
GENERAL ELECTRIC
FOLD
FOLD
FOLD
46–329267–S 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 46–329267–S
DRAWING NO.
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
Tube and Collimator
APPLIED PRACTICES SURFACES TOLERANCES ON DIMENSIONS
46–208600 (2 PLACES) (3 PLACES)
signals pass through

+
–
+
–
+
–
CONT ON SHEET 5 SH NO. 4 FIRST MADE FOR AMX IV PRODUCTIVITY
CHARGER/ROTOR CONTROL MODULE P/L ISSUED
AMX1A3 X–RAY TUBE

A AMX3A3
J1 J4
6 XRAY PRES SW XRAY PRES SW (YEL) AMX1A2TS3 AMX3A1TS1 TS1
J3–6 13
6 4 1
7 XRAY PRES SW RTN. XRAY PRES SW RTN. (GRY)
TO CPU J3–7 14 WHT/ORN
8–D1 16 FIELD LITE SW. FIELD LITE SW. (BLU)

J3–16 16 SW1
7 5 2
17 FIELD LITE SW. RTN. FIELD LITE SW. RTN. (VIO)
J3–17 15 GRY
PRESS. SW
8 6
J5 AMX3A4
1 WHT/BRN
P GND
2 9 7 SW1
+24V WHT/RED
To every circuit 4
COLLIMATOR
–15V AMX1A3T1
B board TO LVLE 5
S GND
2–E5
6
+15V
8 J1 TO CPU
L GND J3 5 60 HZ INV OK
8–D2
9 6
+5V
(YEL) Developed here
Filament
27 VAC
drive
J3
7
(YEL) 60 HZ INV INTLK.
C Inverts are 60hz 180 degrees 6

J4
27VAC SQUARE WAVE RTN (BLU)
60HZ PHASE 1 15
J1 out of phase 1
J2 5–F2
To FIL/kV BOARD
8–D1
7 27VAC SQUARE WAVE (YEL)

5–F2
INVERTER DRIVER PHASE 1 J3
TS2 8 COMM CAP CHARGE (BLK)
(VIO)
1 Keeps 60hz out of (BRN) (BLU)
2
2–E2
+BATT SWITCHED pwr supplies F93 is the 1 time To Commutation
MR–756
fuse. If replaced is 80 VAC SAFETY CONTACTOR ENA
80 Vac 6–F5
L1
Capacitor
2
(BLK)
could cause more (BLU) 9 1 COMM CAP CHARGE RTN (WHT)
FOLD 500 500
(BLK)
12MH
J8 F 93 damage J2 K 37 J4
FOLD
D 5 2 +24V
(WHT) 5 3 4 6 3 3 5 8 SAFTY CONTACTOR (RED)
6–C5
(BLU/W)
1 K–121 9 SAFTY CONTACTOR RETURN
(BLK) 6 AMP (BLK)
SAFETY CONTACTOR ENB 6–C5
6 250V C80
(BLK) .1
2–E9 J9 250V P A3TS1
–BATT
(BRN)
1 1 1
(WHT)
(YEL)
(BLU) 1
Taps for light brightness
(BLK)
2
(GRN)
(BLU)
J6 (ORN)
(RED)
K39 normal state allows
R3 C2 AMX1A2TS3 AMX3A1TS1
27K
5W
3100
200V
ROTOR CONTROL
(BLK)
4 ROTOR SELECT
K39 5
K39
2
(BRN/WHT)
(BLK/WHT) 8 (ORN) 15 15 collimator light. Energized
1 (VIO)
20%
6 A3T2
(BRN)
(BRN) 14 14 FIELD
LIGHT allows rotor but no light
E J2 J4 A3F7
6 2
J3 3 8A
ROTOR COMM.
(GRN)
4
100 VAC
ROTOR PHASE 2 X–RAY TUBE
K39 CURRENT SENSE XFMR
3 CURRENT SENSE XFMR 2 AMX1A2TS3 AMX3A1TS1 TS1

(GRN/WHT)
4 2 5
5 3 (WHT) WHT
J1 C1
60HZ PHASE2 13
J7 15 MF
8–D1 INVERTER DRIVER PHASE 2 1 165V 3 1 3
(BLK)
K121 pulles in & stays in 5

J4
ROTOR PHASE 1 (GRN)
5 3 4
BLK
GRN
F until pwr is turned off or a

CPU reset is performed 9
J1
ROTOR SELECT *
ROTOR CONTROL AMX3A3
active low 7
K–39
J1
10 SAFETY CONTACTOR ENB * CR38 3
NOT ON PWB ROTOR INTERLOCK
TO CPU
A114B 8 ROTOR INTER–LOCK 8–D2
7
8–D2 K–37
CR36 +24V
A114B
12 8
+24v PREP SW
REVISIONS PRINTS TO
Coil ^ 13 W
404
11 60 HZ INV. RELAY*
H
7 AMX1A3A2
K–121 ROTOR CONTROL BOARD
CR–124
A114B 8
MADE BY
D.R.LONG_24NOV93
ISSUED
DIV OR
DEPT. 46–329267–S
– MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN LOCATIONCONT ON SHEET 5 SH NO. 4
FOLD
FOLD
FOLD
46–329267–S 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4-81/4-82(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
ROTOR CONTROLLER
ROTOR CONTROLLER contains the 60Hz inverter for the rotor and the collimator field light.
The inverter also serves as a power supply for other modules
Refer to Pg. 4-87 thru 4-89
60Hz inverter (1-C1) inputs from the CPU are optically isolated and sent to driver
transistors.
The outputs of the FETs are connected to opposite ends of the inverter transformer.
The center tap is connected to BAT SW through F93 and surge resistors.
BA T SW came from charger Board through K215.
F or inverter waveforms Ref. WF D1, D2, D3.
Soft start is a function of firmware.
This only happens when the 60Hz inverter is turned on for the first time after the unit
has been turned on.
The frequency starts at about 200 Hz and slews down to 60Hz. Ref. WF D3.
Prevents inrush of current.
K121 is a hardware soft-start. It comes in upon 60Hz turn-on to short the resistors
that allow the capacitor to charge up (D-4) after power up and stays in until unit is
turned off or reset.
The 60Hz inverter transformer supplies not only rotor and collimator light but also
commutation capacitors, 27VAC used by the FILAMENT/KVP Board, and develops
60Hz INVERTER OK.
K39 contacts (1-C7) select either the rotor windings or the collimator light
ROTOR SELECT (1-H1) comes from the CPU Board operated by the field light
button.
When ROTOR SELECT false, the collimator light is enabled .
If light is on when rotor button is pressed, K39 energizes routing the voltage to
the rotor windings.
Rotor has priority over the collimator light.
VOL T AGES; J3-2 & 3 measured 105 vac out of transformer.
Rotor windings: BLK to WHT =105 VAC ; GRN to WHT =165 VAC.
Collimator light transformer output is tap selectable.
FMI 10257 instructed to install collimator light lead to TS1-8
Battery @112V TS1-8=22.7 Lamp=21.6
Battery @116V TS1-8=23.5 Lamp=22.4
This will help lengthen bulb life.
Also recommend changing FLD LT ON TIME in calibration mode to be 15-20
seconds.
4-85
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
27V AC supplies the 60Hz INVERTER OK to the CPU for status check and supplies the
FILAMENT/KVP Board filament circuit.
COM CAP CHARGE is about 83VAC during prep and charges the commutation caps in
the generator for exposure shut off.
SAFETY CONT ENB* relay K37 (H-2) brings in contacts (A-8) for safety contactor.
K37 is operated by the CPU and is enabled by the PREP SWITCH.
The Rotor Interlock is made up of current transformers and circuitry Pg. 4-89 (C-6
thru C-9)
When rotor is called for, current flows through T5 & T6.
The voltage is sensed and trips both op amps in U20. U20 is wired AND circuit. Ref.
WF D4 & D5.
Output is ROTOR INTERLOCK +V. Goes to CPU for monitoring. +24volts when
happy .
Problems with board were corrected with resistor changes (blowing F93).
4-86
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
D1
U54 provides an D2
OPTO Isolation for D3
the CPU from the
Battery voltage
D1
D5
This is the soft start relay

that stays pulled in
D2
4-87/4-88(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
D4 D5
D4
+15Z
Limited pwr for
push/pull
transistors
4-89/4-90(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
4-91
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
(READ THE NOTES IN THE CPU BLOCK)
ROTOR CONTROL - Refer to Pg. 4-93

When the operator presses the prep switch, the CPU enables the 60Hz inverter and rotor
select relays. The CPU starts the clocks which are isolated from the drivers. FETs are clocked on
and off alternately in the primaries of the 60Hz transformer supplied by battery voltage. The
secondary supplies the rotor, filament supply, and the commutation capacitor.
The only difference between the collimator light and the rotor is K39. When the collimator
button is pushed, the ROTOR SELECT* signal is NOT selected, therefore, voltage is sent through
the normally closed contacts to K39 to the collimator light transformer (not shown in diagnostic
block diagrams).
60Hz INV OK is used during 60Hz turn on for the collimator lamp. Both ROTOR INTLK and
60Hz INV OK are looked at for rotor sequence by the CPU. ROTOR INTLK is developed from 2
current sense transformer in series with the GRN and BLK wires.
COM CAP CHARGE signal goes to a bridge rectifier in the HV module which will charge up
the commutation capacitor. Note that the commutation cap gets charged in both modes; when
collimator light is lit and during rotor.
4-92
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
ILL
USTR ATION 15-5
ROTOR CONTROL
AMX1 A3
COLL LAMP TRANS
A3T2
TO COLL
FIELD LAMP
A3F7
SEE ILL . 15-9 J6 1 J6 2

BA T TERY KEY ROTOR CONTROL
POWER / CHARGING SWITCH BATTERY CHARGER
KEY ROTOR PHASE
SWITCH DRIVE K39 SHIFT
T1 PHASE 2 XFMR CAP PHASE
J2 PHASE
T1 SHIFT E C1 SHIFT L
FET 6 J3 J7
AMX2 A3 100 VAC (ROTOR 1)
3 2
BATTERIES +BA T T T1 PRI COM T6 (GRN)
X-RAY
K215 SWITCHED J8 K121 F93 TUBE
- + T1 SEC
* 165 VAC
2 3 J4 ROTOR COMM (WHT)
COM
2 3
T1 PHASE 1
-BA T T 100 VAC *
1 FET 1 (BLK)
ROTOR 2
4
B-
T5
J1 ROTOR
AMX1 A2 A1 CURRENT INTLK
DETECT 3
D0-D7 CONTROLLER J3
60HZ INV
J1 SEE ILL . 15-1
DA TA RELA Y*
BUS GEN 11 11 X-RA Y ENABLE
27 VAC OPTO 60HZ CONTROL
HAND 8031 CNTRL 1 60 Hz EN 6 ISO INV OK
MICRO- 27 VAC RECT-
SWITCH CONTROLLER
1200H 60HZ RTN IFIER
5
J8 PHASE 1 1 7
PREP SW 15 15
23 P1.0 J4 COM CAP
DRI- OPTO DRI- CHARGE
PROG VERS 80 VAC
CRITICAL TMR 2 ISO'S VERS 8 2 SEE ILL . 15-3
ST A TUS
090H
TIMER
1500H 2 60HZ
PHASE 2
80 VAC
RTN
COM CAP
CHARGE RTN HIGH VOL TAGE
120hz 13 13
2 9 1 GENERA TION
SEE ILL . 15-1

X-RA Y ENABLE ROTOR
CONTROL GEN SELECT*
CNTRL 2
1000H
9 9 *Measured with
RMS Meter
WHEN OPERA TOR PRESSES PREP SWITCH, 8031 uC
ENABLES 60HZ INVERTER & ROTOR SELECT RELA YSĊ Switches
X-RA Y TUBE ROTOR MOTION BEGINS.
Between
Rotor and Field
Lamp
4-93/4-94(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
SECTION 9
KVP/FIL CONTROL
AMX1 A4 A2
46-264986G1
4-97/4-98(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
CONT ON SHEET
FOLD
5 SH NO. 6
GENERAL ELECTRIC
FOLD
FOLD
46–329267–S 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 46–329267–S
DRAWING NO.
APPLIED PRACTICES
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
46–208600 (2 PLACES) (3 PLACES)
+
–
+
–
+
–
CONT ON SHEET 6 SH NO. 5 FIRST MADE FOR AMX_IV_PRODUCTIVITY
P/L ISSUED
A This is direct from the xfmr

& will be higher (~10%)
FIL/KVP BOARD
than real tube current
X–RAY CONTROL MODULE HIGH VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
AMX1A4A2 because leak correction is
J3 AMX1A4 AMX1A6
J2 3 not applied yet
3
LEAKAGE COMP + 4 LOOP FOR CURRENT CHECK
4
LEAKAGE COMP – > = incoming signals
5
LEAKAGE COMP FDBK + < = outgoing signals J7
6 1 KVP FEEDBACK + (VIO/W)
LEAKAGE COMP FDBK – 6–B1
B
21 2 KVP FEEDBACK – (VIO)
MAS 6–B1
7
FIL DMD +
8
FIL DMD –
J8
11 1 FILT CAP+
J3 R8
(RED) C6
KVP DMD + 3 1K PWM E
16000uF 2W
TO CPU 12 2 FILT CAP– (WHT) 60V
KVP DMD – 5
8–F1
9
FILAMENT FEEDBACK + 3 PWM E (BLK)
J4 L3
1 1 1.2 MH
10
FILAMENT FEEDBACK – 4 PWM L (BLK)
2 2
C 22
CAPACITOR
X–RAY ON AMX1A4 A3 BOARD
17
2 KHZ PHASE 1
19 CATHODE
2 KHZ PHASE 2 J5 XS1 L
1 (BRN) PWM RETURN 1 FILAMENT C
15 TO RAY TUBE
16 KHZ CLK S
FILAMENT 25 Duty cycle

SHORTED
is changed Pulse width modulated XC
26
2 PWM1
PRENEAT
to vary MA (GRN)
13
+KVP DMN FDBK
FOLD
14
XS2
–KVP DMN FDBK FOLD
3 PWM RETURN 2 FILAMENT
D (ORN)
Demand ANODE
L
feedback, not C
S TO RAY TUBE
real feedback
J1
1
POWER GROUND
2
+ 24 VDC
4
TO LVLE – 15 VDC J3 AMX1A4T2
5 1
J2 1 MA+ PRIMARY VOLTS + P1
E 2–E5 SIGNAL GROUND MA+ (RED) (BLU)
6–A7
6
+ 15 VDC
8 2 (WHT) BRASS STUD
LOGIC GROUND
9
+ 5 VDC
P2
2 MA– (RED/WHT) 3 (BLK) MA– PRIMARY VOLTS –
6–A11
From
J4
CPU 27VAC SQUARE WAVE
(YEL) 1 BLK
4–C10 2
(BLU)
27VAC SQUARE WAVE RTN CHASSIS
46–270954
GROUND
F
TRIP BREAKER*
J6
2
(YEL)
3–E3
to charger bd
then breaker
REVISIONS PRINTS TO
404
MADE BY
D.R.LONG_24NOV93
ISSUED –
DIV OR
DEPT. 46–329267–S
– MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN LOCATIONCONT ON SHEET 6 SH NO. 5
FOLD
FOLD
FOLD
46–329267–S 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4-95/4-96(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
Inner loop is for Filament drive
Outer loop is for KV

feedback used to 16khz
modify Filament
Fil Error: At start of exp

then after x-ray on it
compares the KV DMN
& FDBK & becomes KV
error that is then used to
16khz will
adjust filament drive
change pulse
width
This compares Input of R188: This not a normal

phase 1 to output of resistor. It has special
phase 2 & looks for a properties
short square pulse:
Stays High = open Fil
No Pulse = shorted Fil
4-99/4-100(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
FILAMENT/KVP BOARD
FILAMENT/KVP BOARD controls the filaments with pulse width modulation and regulates KVP by
varying the filament current.
Refer to Pg. 4-103
The CPU sets up the FILAMENT DAMAND DAC for the selected technic as established
during calibration.
This is summed with the actual filament current (C-4) which makes up the ìnner
loop'.
When and exposure is made, the KV DMND and KVP FDBK modify the
filament/tube current depending on the KV error. This makes up the òuter loop'.
In other words, this changes the loading on the tube to increase/decrease the
KVP .
Both KVP DMN and KVP FDBK and FILAMENT DMN are summed into a sine wave
type waveform which is summed with a 16KHz sawtooth which, depending on the
level of the desired filament current, determines output pulsewidth.
P ulse width drive is clocked through RS flip flop and sent to driver transistors.
The 27VAC supply from the 60Hz Board. supplies the voltage to the filament
inverter .
PREHEA T (C-6) signal drives PWM to maximum duty cycle (50%) to boost the filament
to temperature during prep. Ref WF F5.
PREHEA T also desensitizes current limit circuitry.
Comparator AR 79 looks at actual filament current compared to a reference level. If
filament current gets too high, AR79 will trip disabling PWM DRIVE (C-7).
KVP FDBK is compared to KVP DMN to detect 75% level to activate X-RAY ON. Ref
WF F3.
X-Ray ON starts the backup timer on the CPU Board.
During calibration the 75% detector was changed to 33% with a jumper installed on
TP 14 to TP 15. (F-3).
2 KHZ PHASE 1 & 2 (D-9) square wave from CPU Board is sent through driver
transistors and to filament inverter transformer.
The center tap of the transformer is the 16kHz pulse width modulated signal
developed by the filament demand circuit.
FILAMENT current is sensed across R188 @TP 13 (F-9) at .1 volt per amp for
feedback to CPU Board. Ref. WF F7, F8, F9.
Tube spits will take out diodes CR 281 & CR283 (D,E-10). Symptom might be
insufficient filament drive Error 45F.
4-101
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
Refer to Pg. 4-105
MAS is measured by MA+ & MA- input to bridge and sent to a VFC to be converted to
pulses. (C-8)
The CPU terminates the exposure by counting pulses for operator-selected MAS.
Ref WF F11.
Inputs to CPU internal counter.
MA does not have to be exactly 100MA. The CPU is looking for MAS only.
New boards have pot to compensate for different manufactures of VFC.
100.0MA= 16 KHZ. Do not adjust in the field.
MA & KVP are monitored by comparators AR153 & AR 244.
If the tube current is over 150 ma AR153 will trip causing TRIP BREAKER* to go true.
If the KVP FDBK is 15 KVP higher than KVP DMN, then AR244 will trip causing TRIP
BREAKER* to go true, tripping the main breaker.
The FILAMENT SHORTED signal (F-10) monitors conduction of the filament. Ref WF
F10.
2KHz Phase 1 is one input from the CPU. PWM RTN 2 is actual filament conduction.
When rotor is first prepped, 2KHz PH 1 is there instantly, which will trigger
FILAMENT SHORTED true.
When the filaments are first turned on, they are very low resistance; almost a
short.
As the filament heats, resistance and voltage increase across it since current
though the filament is constant.
V oltage at PWM RTN 2 slowly increase to about 8 volts which will trip FILAMENT
SHORTED false.
V oltage at PWM RTN 2 is actually voltage from the other side of the inverter
transformer while Q184 is off Ref. to Pg. 4-103 (E-10).
The FILAMENT SHORTED signal is monitored by the CPU for timing.
If FILAMENT SHORTED signal never comes up, the PWM RTN 2 pulses come
up immediately meaning the filament inverter is not conducting. Error 45E.
If the FILAMENT SHORTED signal comes up and stays up, PWM RTN 2 never
came up, this means that there is no voltage across the filaments which means a
possible short. Error 45F.
If FILAMENT SHORTED is high when prep switch is first pressed, then ERROR
45D occurs. This means that the associated circuitry is faulty.
LEAK AGE COMP (D-2) from CPU Board is a fixed correction for transformer
leakage used to modify MAS.
F actor can be changed in DA T A BASE ACCESS.
4-102
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
F6 F6
F2 F4
F5 F6
F5
F7
F9
F8
F9
F1 F2
F1 F7
F8
F7
F9
F2
F4 F10
TP13: Measure and

F3 multiply by 10,
should be equal to
Filament current R188
F1
F3 F4
During Cals jumper

14 - 15 lowers
threshold to 33% of
KV feedback insted
of 75%
4-103/4-104(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
KV Feedback and
Breaker trip
MA or KV
MA Feedback and
TP4: Your meter in series with Breaker trip
TP3 during MAS Meter Cal is
the only time TP 4 is used
DO NOT
F11 adjust this pot
F11
F10
4-105/4-106(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
4-107
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
FILAMENT AND MAS CONTROL REFER TO PG. 4-109 (following page)

Read Bullets in Controller block.
Describe outputs of the Controller board; D to A, clocks, etc.
Filament/kVp block; note that on prep. FIL DMN drives the filament through a modulator.
Preheat signal forces the modulator into 50% duty cycle which provides a `boost' to get
the filament upto temperature. During the exposure kVp demand and KV FDBK are
then allowed to modify the filament current to deliver an accurate operator selected kVp
by changing the loading on the tube.
2kHz clocks drive the filament inverter (the 2 FETs). This frequency and pulsewidth do not
change.
FIL FDBK is sensed across a 0.1 ohm resistor (R188) at 0.1 volt per amp.
FIL SHORTED is a status signal used to indicate conduction of the filament. When the
filament is first turned on, it is cold and appears to be shorted. As the filament warms
up, the resistance increases and no longer appears as a short.
KV FDBK is actually primary votlage feedback, not secondary feedback. Primary votlage
is sent to a stepdown transformer, rectified and sent out as KV FDBK; it is not DC
filtered.
MA+ & MA- are sampled from the transformer, rectified, and summed with LEAKAGE
COMP . LEAKAGE COMP voltage respresents HV transformer leakage and is
subtracted from the MA from the transformer. The MA from the transformer is actually
tube current PLUS leakage. Leakage is subtracted to give true tube current. This is
then sent to a voltage to frequency converter and is sent out as pulses to the internal
counter T1 in the CPU.
4-108
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
ILLUSTRATION 15-4
FILAMENT AND MAS CONTROL
AMX1 A1 A2
DISPLAY
+24V AMX1 A2 A1 AMX1 A4 A2
mAs S45 J1 MAS J6 CONTROLLER FIL / KVP CONTROL
UP
31 5 FIL DMN +/-
MAS
D0-D7 DA T A BUS FIL J5 J2 AMX1 A4 AMX1 A6 A1
S46
DOWN DMN DAC 7 8 7 8 AMP HV MODULE HV XFMR
33 7 1580H X-RA Y
OPER I/O TUBE
kVp S43 KVP ST A TUS CHOKE
UP KVP DMN +/- S PWM J8 PWM E PWM L
1400H MODU-
34 11 KVP U POWER 3 XC
KVP DMN DAC 11 12 11 12 AMP M LA TOR L3
S44 AMP
DOWN 1584H
32 13 8 AMP
CURRENT
GEN PREHEA T PREHEA T LIMIT
CNTRL 1 26 26
1200H 2 kHz EN CURRENT
DETECT
TMR 0 16 kHz CLK FILAMENT S
PROG 15 15
TIMER XFMR C
1500H T2 L
DRI- 2 kHz
VERS PHASE 1 J5 PWM RTN 1 PWM RTN 1 CA THODE
17 17 BUF FET 1 XS1
8 2 kHz
PHASE 2 PWM RTN 2 PWM RTN 2
19 19 BUF FET 3 XS2
FIL FDBK +/- FIL SEE ILL . 15-1

J2 SHORTED
AMP SHORT X-RA Y ENABLE
9 10 9 10 DETECT 25
CONTROL
8031
MICRO-
CONTROLLER AMX1 A4 A1
1 kHz INVERTER
A/D J6
ANA- 20:1
CONVERT J7 KV FDBK +/- J3 3
1200H LOG KV
RECT-
MUX AMP 1 2 1 2 IFIER FDBK
XFMR 1
CRITICAL LEAKAGE T25
ST A TUS COMP
090H FDBK +/-
PREP SW
P1.0 A/D 5 6 5 6 AMP SEE ILL . 15-3
5-7 mS X-RA Y
EXP SW CNTRL DELA Y ON HIGH VOL T AGE
P1.1 1280H LEAKAGE GENERA TION
COMP +/-
HAND LEAK
SWITCH CMP DAC 3 4 3 4 AMP AMX1 A4
1481H HV MODULE
PRIMARY
SEE ILL . 15-1 ON-BOARD VOL TS+
CNTRL AUTO P1 HV HV -
X-RA Y ENABLE 1280H PRIMARY RECTI- L ANODE
CONTROL XFMR XFMR
PULSE 100MA = 16kHz VOL T AGE T1 VOL TS- T1 FIER + C
COUNTER MAS NOMINAL -TO- S P2
21 21 U S
T1 MUX FREQ
CONVERT M
POAD0- J3 MA+ MA J2 MA+
POAD7 1 FDBK 1 MA+
NVRAM RECT- MA- XFMR MA- SAMPLE
DA T A DURING EXPOSURE, FIL/KVP IFIER 2 T2 3 MA-
BASE CONTROL BOARD DRIVES
FIL CURRENT UNTIL
KV FDBK = KV DMN
DURING PREP SEQUENCE, 8031 uC SETS UP DAC'S:
- SETS UP FIL DEMAND DAC BASED ON: J6 TRIP
* OPERA TOR'S kVp SELECTION DETECT BRKR* SEE ILL . 15-9
>150MA 2
* BA T TERY VOL T AGE BA T TERY
* CALCULA TED EMISSION CURRENT AS DETER- POWER / CHARGING
MINED B Y CAL DA T A BASE
- SETS KVP DEMAND DAC TO A UNIQUE VALUE
FOR EACH OPERA TOR'S kVp SELECTION
(THIS FINE-TUNES kVp AUTO XFMR T AP
SELECTIONĊSEE ILL . 15-3, HIGH VOL T AGE GEN)
- SETS UP LEAKAGE COMP DAC TO COMPENSA TE
FOR HV T ANK LEAKAGEĊOTHERWISE MA
VALUE WOULD APPEAR TO BE HIGHER THAN
IT ACTUALL Y IS. DAC VALUE BASED ON:
* OPERA TOR'S kVp SELECTION
* CAL DA TA BASE
DURING EXPOSE SEQUENCE, 8031 uC COLLECTS
AUTO CAL DA T A:
- READS FIL FDBK
- READS LEAKAGE COMP FDBK
- READS KVP DMN FDBK (SEE ILL . 15-3, HV GEN)
TO END EXPOSURE, 8031 uC COUNTS MAS PULSES.
WHEN PULSE COUNT = OPERA TOR-SELECTED mAs,
EXPOSURE TERMINA TES. (SEE ILL . 15-1, X-RA Y
ENABLE CONTROL .)
AFTER EXPOSURE, 8031 uC UPDA TES AUTO CAL
DA TA BASE
4-109/4-110(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
4-111
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
4-112
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
SECTION 8
1KHZ INVERTER
AMX1 A4 A1
46-288764G1
4-117/4-118(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017356, AMX-4 (UPGRADED) Schematics, Rev. 2, Page 4-8
G1
From 60Hz Board
contacts at
10 vertical
normally
closed
4-113/4-114(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
6 7
FOLD
SH NO. CONT. ON SHEET
GENERAL ELECTRIC
FOLD
FOLD
46–329267–S 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 46–329267–S
CONT. ON SHEET 7 SH NO.6
DRAWING NO.
FOLLOWING : – REV 0 TITLE
APPLIED PRACTICES
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
– DECIMALS DECIMALS ANGLES 46–329267–S OVERALL_SCHEMATICS_FOR_AMX_IV
46–208600 (2 PLACES) (3 PLACES)
+
–
+
–
+
–
CONT. ON SHEET 7 SH NO. 6 FIRST MADE FOR AMX_IV_PRODUCTIVITY
P/L ISSUED
5–E11 PRIMARY
A VOLTS+
X–RAY CONTROL MODULE 5–F11

PRIMARY
VOLTS–
AMX1A4 R7
K3 K2 K1 K6 K5 K4 K4 K5 K6
3 6 3 6 3 6 .25 3 7 3 7 3 7 8 4 8 4 8 4
90W
3 3 3 3 3 3 8 4 4
K3 K2 K1 K6 K5 K4 K4 K5 K6
T1
Output is from the 1KHZ BOARD
AMX1A4A1
5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6
B
primary voltage 1 2 6 7 3 5 16 19 20 21 22 8 9 10 12 13 15
J6 17 14
(BLK)
J3 1
(VIO/WHT)
KVP FEEDBACK+ 1
(BLK)
5–B5 3 SAFETY
(VIO)
KVP FEEDBACK– 2 CONTACTOR
J4 C5
(WHT)
1
1KHZ PHASE 1 24
J1
G2 1 big block 1 2
1 big block unit
L2 20uF
3 (BLK)
G1 2–A5
+BATT (#8AWG) (BLK) unit AK
10uH 500V
AK
1KHZ PHASE 2 26
5
(WHT)
STAT 25
(WHT) 4–D10
SAFETY CONTACTOR
Q1 Q2
1 SCR turns on & the
11 (RED)
C STOP 23 START HOLD PULL IN G (WHT)
(WHT) G other shuts off. The cap
TAP 1 20
13
(BLK)
A114B A114B
283
OHM
13.1
OHM G1 G2 makes it possible by the
TAP 2 18
7
(WHT)
SAFETY CONTACTOR
A K K (BLK) (BLK) K K A charge it holds
Notice 9
STOP 4–D10
RTN (BLK)
(NC)
TAP 3 16
all of (BLK)
TAP 4 14
these K7 5S
4F
signal The Pull In is used at first

G1
TAP 5 10 L1
T1 300uH T1
TAP 6 8 names 1 1 1
for lower current draw,
FOLD
TO CPU
8–E1 TAP 1 FEEDBACK 19 K1 K2 K3 then the Hold In takes 5F
4S
TAP 2 FEEDBACK 17
over. FOLD
D
J5 2 2 2
TAP 3 FEEDBACK 15 9
(BRN)
A
Starts and stops
TAP 4 FEEDBACK 13
8
(WHT)
J2
R21 CR18 1N5352 F
C
C11
the SCR's at the
(ORN) (RED) R16 J2 Q3
TAP 5 FEEDBACK 9
7
(RED)
6
250
9
(WHT) G1 G2 (WHT)
beginning and end
2 7 1N5062 CR19
TAP 6 FEEDBACK 7 5
55W 50
12W
1.0
10%
200V
START STOP of the exposure
(RED) R14 (BLK) (BLK)
C15 K1 K K K2
27K
1 KHZ READY 12 1200 2W
10%
1 2 1 250V
INVERTER OK 22
K4 K5 K6
E B D
J5 2 1 2 E
(YEL) –BATT
6 2–A5
(#8AWG)
J2 (VIO) (BLK)
5
POWER GROUND 1 (BLU)
4
J1 C10 R9
2 (BLK) (VIO)
+24 VDC 1 +BATT SWITCHED CR20 770 27K
2–E2 1 + CR7 10%
400V 2W
COM CAP CHARGE (BLK) 6A 1N1186 250V
–15 VDC 4 4–D10 3
(WHT) 80VAC
TO LVLE COM CAP CHARGE RTN –
4–D10 4
2–E5
SIGNAL GROUND 5
2–D9
–BATT (BLK)
5
CR13 This board
1N1186
+15 VDC 6 C12 R5
27K
is on new
770
F 10% 2W
models
From 60 Hz
LOGIC GROUND 8
250V
R17
+5 VDC 9
J2 Board 500
CAPACITOR
BOARD
3
J4 12W
(WHT) STOP CAP
11 1
AMX1A4 A3
A
REVISIONS PRINTS TO
404
MADE BY
D.R.LONG_24NOV93
ISSUED
– DIV OR
DEPT. 46–329267–S
– – MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN LOCATIONCONT. ON SHEET7 SH. NO. 6
FOLD
FOLD
FOLD
46–329267–S 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4-115/4-116(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
One kHz Inverter Concise Theory of Operation
The 1 kHz inverter is a push-pull self commutated design employing SCRs as switches. Self commutating means
that one SCR must be turned on in order to shut the other SCR off. The inverter is stopped and started by Q3 which
houses two SCRs.
Sequence of Events
1. C12 is charged to -70v during prep.
2. Clocks applied to Q1, Q2 (clocks have dead time as dictated by driver circuitry).
3. Start SCR fired.
4. Assume Q1 is clocked on, when Q3 start SCR is triggered.
5. V oltage at Q1 anode goes low, current ramps up thru battery, thru upper half of T1, thru Q1 SCR thru L1, thru Q3
start SCR back to battery.
6. V oltage across C5 is 2 times battery voltage (220v).
7. Q1 drives goes low, device continues to conduct (fundamental SCR).
8. Q2 fired.
9. V oltage at Q2 anode goes low Q1 anode goes to -60 (due to C5).
10. Due to L1, voltage spikes positive at Q1, Q2 cathode.
11. Current ramps up thru bottom half of T1 thru Q2.
12. Current decreases thru Q1 and top half of T1.
13. Circulating current also flows thru aux winding thru Q2 diode thru SCR thru L1 and back to aux.
14. Cycle repeats starting at step 4.
15. To stop inverter, stop SCR is pulsed on.
16. Due to C12, voltage at anode of start SCR goes negative shutting it off.
17. Current ramps down by charging up C10.
18. Stop SCR turns off due to minimal current thru it.
4-119
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
1 kHz BOARD
1KHz BOARD has the 1KHz inverter gate supply for the auto transformer inverter SCRs,
EXPOSURE START & STOP signals for main SCRs, tap select logic, KVP feedback, and stop cap
status.
Refer to Page 4-120 thru Page 4-123
Inverter receives 1KHz PHASE 1 & 2 from CPU. Ref. WF E1 & E5.
Ph. 1& 2 drive FETs through center tapped transformer.
Center tap is connected to 24volts.
Outputs G1 & G2 are sent via twisted pair to inverter SCRs Q1 & Q2 power blocks
which provide AC primary volts for auto transformer.
1KHz PHASE 1 & 2 are there when prep is pressed.
EXPOSURE START CMND from CPU is about a 3ms pulse which is sent through a
pulse transformer for the exposure start SCR, Q3. Ref. WF E2.
EXPOSURE STOP also from CPU works the same.
KV FDBK is sampled from high voltage primaries through an isolation transformer.
KV FDBK is used by the FILAMENT/KVP Board. to regulate mA. Ref. WF E3 & E4.
STOP CAP voltage is checked on this board - Page 4-121 (D-7) Ref. WF E6
STOP CAP voltage must be at least -69 volts.
Have measured 77vDC.
Stop cap volts develop 1kHz READY and is checked once during prep.
If stop caps are not charged, do not allow an exposure.
T AP SELECTS 1-6 are active low from CPU Board.

Selection of relays for the technic selected by the operator were established during
calibration.
Active low signals drive opto-iso;
First opto-iso drives transistors which, when conducting, brings in relay coil
The relay current conducts through the 2nd opto-iso which is the feedback to
the CPU.
The feedback only detects if current is flowing through the coil, NOT if the relay
physically came in (contact closure).
During prep, all relays come in 2 times to `wipe' the contacts, then select
appropriate tap, then bring in safety contactor.
4-120
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
Isolation Rectified
Transformer feedback
SCR Pulses E3, E4
FETS
E1
E5
E1
E5
E6
E7
E6
E2
E2, E3, E4, E7
4-121/4-122(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
Current flow through the

coil develops the "Tap
Feedback" signal. It is not
total proof that the tap is
pulling in or making contact
4-123/4-124(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
4-125
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
DIAGNOSTICS 1KHZ BOARD
REF . P. 4-127 AMX1A4A1 1KHZ Inverter Board

S Detect - 70V sees that forced commutation capacitor charged, which
then spits out 1 KHZ Inverter Ready" - See P. 4-129 for COMM CAP
CHARGE" Path
S See waveform B4 (EXP. START", EXP STOP" and X-RAY ON")
REF . P. 4-129
S 1KHZ ENABLE" from controller, drives T120 and fires main SCR's
S K1 thru K6 coil commands are a function of kVp demand from the console
slew switch via the controller
REF . P. 4-127
S KV FEEDBACK" is sampled from the HV Primary, and is used to regulate
mA .
4-126
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
ILL
USTR ATION 15-1
X-RAY ENABLE CONTROL AMX1 A2 A1 AMX1 A3 A2
GEN
CONTROLLER J3 J1 ROTOR CONTROL
ROTOR SELECT*
CNTRL 2 9 9 SEE ILL . 15-5
1000H ROTOR
60HZ INV RELA Y* CONTROL
GEN 11 11
SEE ILL . 15-2 CNTRL 1 60 Hz EN
FOR X-RA Y ENABLE, 1200H
PREP SEQUENCE &
EXPOSE SEQUENCE 60HZ PHASE 1/ 60HZ
FL OW CHARTS PROG TMR 2 60HZ PHASE 2 INVERTER ROTOR DRIVE
TIMER DRI- 15 13 15 13
1500H VERS
+24V
GEN SAFETY CONT ENB*

CNTRL 2 10 10 K37 CURRENT
1000H DETECT
PREP SW ROTOR
12 12 DRIVE
J8
PREP SW PREP SW PREP SW
23 J4 J1
EXP SW EXP SW EXP SW
25 8 5 3
BU TMR
EXP OKA Y SAFETY
BACK UP SEE ILL . 15-3 CONT ACTOR
TIMER 60HZ ROTOR
1300H HIGH VOL T AGE INV INTLK
X-RA Y A OK
HAND SWITCH N GENERA TION
PRES SW AMX1 A4 A1 AMX1 A4 AMX1 A6 A1
D +BA T T
1 kHz INVERTER HV MODULE HV XFMR
J7 AEC
AEC EXP EN AEC EXP EN EXP EN
9
B4 ST ART SCR
HI/L O
SAFETY
CONT ACTOR
8031 EXP A J4 EXP ST ART CMND J1 ST ART J4
MICRO- STOP* N 25 25 PULSE 11 13
CONTROLLER D GEN 2
N SCR
O
N ST ART
CRITICAL O
T EXP
ST ART
3 msec Pulse SCR
ST A TUS
090H
T
B4 STOP SCR
HI/L O -BA T T SCR
1
HV + L ANODE
PRIMARY VOL TS+/ C
EXP STOP CMND STOP PRIMARY VOL TS- XFMR
P1.0 O 23 23 PULSE 7 9 STOP &
R AUTO S
GEN SCR HV
P1.1 GEN XFMR RECTI- - X-RA Y
J3 CNTRL 1 FIER
X-RA Y PRES SW
6 P1.2 1200H
TUBE +24V
1 kHz COM CAP
ROTOR INTLK EN + -
3 P1.4 1 kHz PHASE 1/ 1/ 2
60HZ INV OK PROG TMR 0 1 kHz PHASE 2 1KHZ (HV DRIVE)
5 P1.3 TIMER DRI- 26 24 26 24
VERS INVERTER
1500H
J5 T AP J5 COIL
FIL SHORTED SELECTS SELECTS
25 P1.6 GEN 6 6
CNTRL 2 OPTO X-RA Y
1000H ISO'S PRES
X-RA Y ON
P1.7 STOP SW
1 kHz INVERTER READY J4 CAP
12 12 DETECT 16
P1.5 -70VDC
KV 60HZ ROTOR
FDBK J3 J6 PRIMARY VOL TS+/ INV INTLK
+/- RECT- PRIMARY VOL TS- OK
1 2 IFIER
X-RA Y ON
INT1 SEE ILL . 15-4
FILAMENT / mAs AMX1 A4 A2
CONTROL J5 LEAKAGE FIL / KVP CONTROL
J5 LEAK COMP +/- J2 MA+ / MA-
MAS CMP DAC 3 4 3 4
21 PULSE
COUNTER 1481H J7
SEE ILL . BA T V &
15-9 MUX T1 1 2 DETECT SUM
BA T TERY CHARGING J1 KV
POWER / CUR KVP KVP DMN +/- J2 75% OF
5
CHARGING DMN DAC 11 12 11 12 DEMAND
PWR 1584H
DOWN J8 S
RST* FIL FIL DMN +/- U L
PWR OK 10 DMN DAC 7 8 7 8 FILAMENT DRIVE FILA-
M C
1580H 2KHZ MENT
ON-BOARD INVERTER XFMR S
CNTRL 2 kHz PHASE 1/
1280H PROG TMR 0 2 kHz PHASE 2 CA THODE
LINE TIMER DRI- 17 19 17 19 VOL T AGE SHORT
SENSE J1 1500H VERS -TO- DETECT
6 FREQ
CHGR & DRV CONVERT
TUBE ST A TUS GEN 2 kHz EN 5-7 MS DELA Y
SEE ILL . P ARKED J8 1000H CNTRL 1
15-6 OR 15-7 SW 1200H PREHEA T PREHEA T
13 26 26 J2
VEHICLE
DRIVE
22 21 25
B4 DISPLAY CONTROLLER X-RA Y
ON
MAS FIL
SHORTED
60HZ
INV
ROTOR
INTLK
DISPLAY
J5 J6 J1 OK DS30
X-RA Y ON SONALERT* LS85
22 DRI- 15 15 J2 XRA Y ON
X-RA Y ON LAMP* SONALERT X-RA Y ON LAMP* J1
VERS
9 9 17 17
4-127/4-128(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
ILLUSTRATION 15-3
HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATION
SEE ILL . 15-9 AMX1 A4 AMX1 A6 A1
BA T TERY HV MODULE HV XFMR
POWER / CHARGING PRIMARY
-BA T T -BA T T ST ART VOL TS-
SCR SCR P2
ST ART SCR HI/L O ST ART SCR HI/L O K6

AMX2 A3
BATTERIES STOP CAP STOP CAP (STOP CHARGE = -70V)
COM CAP CHARGE - STOP K5

SCR
SEE ILL . 15-1 SEE ILL . 15-5 COM
CAP COM
X-RA Y ENABLE ROTOR RECT- CAP
CONTROL CONTROL IFIER C2
COM CAP CHARGE RTN K4
+
STOP SCR HI/L O STOP SCR HI/L O
SAFETY CONT ACTOR SAFETY CONT ACTOR L ANODE
AUTO + C
XFMR HV HV
T1 RECTI- S
+BA T T +BA T T XFMR
T1 FIER
-
SAFETY
CONT ACTOR X-RA Y
K7 TUBE
K3
K2
AMX1 A1 A2 AMX1 A2 A1 AMX1 A4 A1

DISPLAY CONTROLLER 1 kHz INVERTER
J4 1 kHz K1
+24V PHASE 2 J1 J4 2
kVp S43 KVP 24 24 1
J1 J6
UP DRI-
34 11 PROG TMR 0 VERS 1 kHz PRIMARY
TIMER
S44 KVP
DOWN
OPER I/O
ST A TUS 1500H 16 E1
XFMR
T120 E5 SCR
VOL TS+
P1
32 13 1400H 1 kHz
PHASE 1 1
26 26 5
GEN SEE ILL . 15-4
1 kHz EN
CNTRL 1 FILAMENT / mAs
1200H J5 CONTROL
T AP 6* K6 COIL
8 8 4
T AP 5* K5 COIL FILAMENT L
10 10 5
OPTO DRI- C
6 T AP 4* 6 ISO'S 6 VERS 6 K4 COIL XFMR
GEN 14 14 6 T2
CNTRL 2 S
T AP 3* K3 COIL
1000H 16 16 7 CA THODE
T AP 2* K2 COIL
18 18 8
T AP 1* K1 COIL
20 20 9
8031 T AP 6 FDBK
MICRO- 7 7
CONTROLLER T AP 5 FDBK
9 9 OPTO
6 T AP 4 FDBK 6 ISO'S 6
GEN & AEC 13 13
CRITICAL 1600H 15 15
090H 17 17
PREP SW T AP 1 FDBK
P1.0 19 19
EXP SW 20:1 J6 PRIMARY VOL TS-
P1.1
KV FDBK +/- J3 KV 1
HAND RECT- FDBK
1 2 IFIER XFMR PRIMARY VOL TS+
SWITCH T25 3
SEE ILL . 15-1

X-RA Y ENABLE AMX1 A4 A2
CONTROL FIL / KVP CONTROL
A/D KV FDBK +/- J7
CNTRL
POAD0- 1280H 1 2 AMP
POAD7
KVP DMN
J5 FBK +/- J2 DETECT
A/D ANA- J2 X-RA Y ON SEE ILL . 15-1
NVRAM CONVERT 13 14 13 14 AMP KV
DA TA LOG 75% OF 22 X-RA Y ENABLE
BASE 1200H MUX DEMAND CONTROL
D0-D7 DA T A BUS KVP DMN +/-

KVP
DMN DAC 11 12 11 12 AMP
1584H
DETECT J6
KV>15KV TRIP BRKR* SEE ILL . 15-9
8031 uC READS OPERA TOR'S kVp INPUT AND SETS 2
AUTO XFMR T APS & KVP DEMAND DAC ACCORDINGL Y ABOVE BA T TERY
DEMAND POWER / CHARGING
4-129/4-130(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
SECTION 11
DRIVE CONTROLLER
AMX1 A5 A1
46-232834G1
4-133/4-134(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
CONT ON SHEET 8
FOLD
SH NO. 7
FOLD
FOLD
DRAWING NO.
APPLIED PRACTICES
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
AMX1A5 DECIMALS DECIMALS ANGLES 46–329267–S
46–208600 (2 PLACES) (3 PLACES) OVERALL SCHEMATICS FOR AMX IV
+
–
+
–
+
–
CONT ON SHEET 8 SH NO. 7 FIRST MADE FOR AMX4_IV_PRODUCTIVITY
Bumper Maintenance: Techs P/L ISSUED
MOTOR DRIVE MODULE

like to open doors with the
[Controller Is A Slave To CPU] Hard to troubleshoot
A
bumper, this tends to break the
switches in the bumper mounts because of it's location
DC voltage +10 to -10
J1
J2 9
+5
LEFT DRIVE COMMAND + 7 LOGIC GROUND

8
LEFT DRIVE COMMAND – 8 DRIVE CONTROL + 24
2
RIGHT DRIVE COMMAND – 5 TO LVLE
AMX1A5A1 1
POWER GROUND
2–E5
RIGHT DRIVE COMMAND + 6 + 15
LEFT DRIVE FEEDBACK + 3

Kind of hidden behind the 6
– 15
4
LEFT DRIVE FEEDBACK – 4 Drive PWR AMP board 5
SIGNAL GROUND BUMPER
B
To J2 RIGHT DRIVE FEEDBACK + 1
Rear Board J11 (WHT) LEFT BUMPER
AMX2A2
Of AMX1A2A1 8–C1 RIGHT DRIVE FEEDBACK – 2 1

1 C
CPU
LEFT STALL
< 14
(BLK) LEFT BUMPER RETURN 2
AMX2A2S1
RIGHT STALL
< 12 5 NO
FULL SPD ENA > 13
> = input (WHT) RIGHT BUMPER
BUMPER
< 10
< = output
2
1
C
MOTOR ENABBLE > 16
(BLK) RIGHT BUMPER RETURN
AMX2A2S2
DRV RESET 15 2
J9 3
6 NO
DRIVE ENA SW > 17
C
From Fuse 9. LIVE VOLTAGE Break in normally
(RED) POWER OK*
3–F3
RIBBON CABLE INTERCONNECT
to switch even with Breaker on / applied
OFF J10
BATT + 2–A5
(BLU) BRAKE RELEASE
1
J9 1
(BLK) –BATT
2–B9
BRAKE RELEASE 2–F2

(VIO) +BATT SWITCHED
2
DRIVE POWER AMP J7
(BLK) –BATT
(Switch Below Drive Handle)

2 2–B9
AMX1A5A2
(RED) BRAKE REL
1 1
BRAKE REL (RED)
➀
➀
FOLD
RIGHT FOLD
LEFT J6 AMX2A1BRK2
Clutch Type Brakes
BRAKE
D AMX2A1BRK1
BRAKE J5
BRAKE REL RTN (BLK)
2
(BLK) BRAKE REL RTN
2
Good Brake ^ 1350 Ohms

Front Board
The motor breaks DRIVE ENB. (WHT)

1
can be replaced J1 A5K1B

A5F1
(RED) +BATT
1 A5K1 A5K2
E without replacing the 2
A114B J4
2
(ORN) 6 4 (YEL)
2–C3
8 AMP
motors A114B
J2 A5K2B
A5F2
(RED) +BATT
2 1 (BLU) 2 2–C3
2 (GRN) 6
RIGHT POWER* 4 (YEL)
8 AMP
LEFT POWER*
(ORN)
➁
3
Good Motor ^ 7.5 Ohms (Out-Of Circuit)

A5K1A A5K2A
3 VM– (VIO) (BLK) 1
(RED) (BLK) (VIO) VM– (BLK)
3 1
F 3 5 5 3
3
A5K1A 3
+
LEFT
7
(BLU)
J1 J2
7
A5K2A –
➁
AMX2A1MTR1
J1 J2 RIGHT
➂
MOTOR 10 OHM AMX2A1MTR2
10 OHM MOTOR
25 WATT 25 WATT
– +
A5R1 A5R2
1 3
(BLK) (RED) (BLK) VM+ 1 VM+ (BLK) (RED) (RED)
3
REVISIONS PRINTS TO
Snubber
➂ 404
H
(Black Electrocube)
Cuts down the noise on the
signal MADE BY
D.R.LONG_24NOV93
ISSUED
APPROVALS MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIV OR
DEPT. 46–329267–S
– MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN LOCATION CONT ON SHEET 8 SH NO. 7
FOLD
FOLD
FOLD
46–329267–S 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4-131/4-132(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
If a motor stall happens, you must let off

the drive handle then squeeze again
If left or right "Feedback" goes to zero it will display a left

or right stall message and stop the drive command
Both of these amps would have to

fail to get an uncommanded Drive
Allowed by the tube parked

switch From the CPU
Either one of these

will cause an error
4-135/4-136(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
SECTION 12
DRIVE POWER AMPLIFIER
AMX1 A5 A2
46-232836G2
4-137/4-138(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
A sample of how this drives is: #1 and #2

are turned on with simultaneous pulses at
3 a given frequency. #3 is pulsed (between 2
the #1 & #2 pulses) to provide a type of a
break to prevent free speed pickup from
pushing or going down hill
+15z
Isolated and filtered

because the "Top"
signals are not
referenced to ground
4-139/4-140(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
DRIVE CONTROLLER
DRIVE CONTROLLER used in conjunction with the DRIVE POWER AMP deliver up to 1KW of
power to the motors. Circuitry between right and left drives is identical. Left Drive will be
discussed.
Refer to Page 4-143
The CPU Board reads the inputs from the Hall Effect sensors from the handle. Voltage
depends on how hard the handle is pushed.
Then the CPU outputs LEFT/RIGHT DRIVE CMND to DRIVE CONTROLLER (F-1)
LEF T DRV CMND enters board at (F-1). Command is+10v full forward; 0 v
stopped; and -10 v full reverse.
DRV CMND is summed in AR154 (F-6) with drive FDBK. The error then goes
through an invert/non-invert amp, depending on direction of command.
The àbsolute value' error output is connected to a voltage clamp CR197 (F-8) .
The error voltage is sent to AR260 (C-7) 555 timer used as a voltage to pulse
width converter. As the command increases, the error increase, the pulse width
increases.
Direction is determined by the polarity at TP5 (D-6)
If TP5 is + then TP15 =1 for reverse direction .
U283 flip flop has 2 outputs;Q (CCW) enables U282 to pass pulses from AR 260;
Q* (CW) output disables other U262 and blocks pulses from AR260.
U283 outputs also drive FET switches to invert/non-invert amps & FET
switches at (D-2) which maintain the polarity of the motor feedback regardless
of direction the motors are turning.
Output of U280 has only 2 outputs pulsing at a time and are 180 out of phase .
These pulses are sent to the DRIVE POWER AMP.
Stall circuitry is provided to detect when the current through the motors is too high. (A-7)
A stall is also caused by overheated motors.
When a stall occurs, U283 trips and sends a signal to the CPU.
The stall is reset when the handle is released. Can't see the stall LEDS.
Refer to Page 4-151
DRIVE ENA SWITCH (C-1) and POWER OK develop +5V-DRV (C-5) which goes to the
DRIVE POWER AMP.
MOTOR ENA (D-1) from CPU develops BRAKE RELEASE, RIGHT & LEFT MOTOR
ENA .
They go to the DRIVE POWER AMP drivers that pull in the brake release and motor
relays.
Inputs from both bumper switches develop BUMPER* to the CPU board.
This signals the CPU that there is an obstruction and disables MOTOR ENA and causes
the software to output a display REVERSE ONLY, enable MOTOR ENA, then to ignore
any forward direction handle commands until the obstruction is cleared.
FULL SPD ENA (H-1) from the CPU Board brings in a resistor which changes the gain of
the op amp which lowers the voltage at TP11.
This lower voltage causes voltage clamp diode CR197 to become forward biased if the
voltage at TP12 (F-7) goes higher than the +PW LMT.
This imposes a new limit on the max voltage the error amp can put out, therefore
limiting max speed.
FULL SPD ENA is operated by the TUBE PARK SWITCH through the CPU.
4-141
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
DRIVE POWER AMP

DRIVE POWER AMP delivers pulsed voltage from batteries to the motors through a
transistor bridge circuit. Left" will be discussed.
Refer to Page 4-147
+5V-DRV from the DRIVE CONTROLLER supplies voltage for the input to the
opto-isolator (C-3).
Motor is powered by varying pulse width or duty cycle and polarity, giving variable speed
and direction.
Turning the unit is accomplished by pulling one end of the handle back and pushing the
other end forward.
Right and left drives are identical and completely independent from each other.
One wheel will drive in reverse; the other forward, allowing the unit to turn on a dime.
DRIVE EXAMPLE Ref WF I1 through I4.
IDLE-Drive switch not activated; +5V-DRV is absent. BOT CW & CCW are high to
turn on Q165 & Q5 (This keeps noise away from motors by shorting it out.)
DRIVE MODE
When handle is picked up, +5V-DRV becomes active supplying 5 volts to the high
side of the opto isolators U96 and U65.
P ulses are supplied to TOP CCW; pulse width is determined by the operator
pushing or pulling on the handle for desired speed.
In this case, we are in reverse.
TOP CCW is active low, which causes U96 output to go high, Q94 to turn on, Q93
to turn off, and Q90 to turn on.
This supplies the +battery volts to the motor.
B OT CCW is active low (does not pulse) turns off Q15, turns on Q12, turns Q14 off,
turns Q5 on.
B OT CCW stays active low and does not pulse so long as the unit is traveling in
the same direction.
This supplies ground to the other side of the motor.
At the same time TOP CCW is true (Q98 is on), BOT CW is normally high but pulsed
low (Q165 turns off).
When Q98 is off, Q165 is on, providing ground to both sides of the motor.,
This is used for dynamic braking and better response in case of a direction
change.
The timer circuit at (F-3) and the transformers are a supply for the TOP circuits of the
drive amp since the reference used in NOT ground.
The secondary of the transformer has a diode and filter cap to supply DC voltage to
those circuits.
LEF T V+ comes from the drive relays in bottom of the drive module (BAT T V)
MOTOR ENB comes from the DRIVE CONTROLLER and brings in the drive relays.
BRAKE RELEASE operates relay K145 (E-F, 7-8) which energizes the brakes on
the back of the drive motors to release. (BRAKE RELEASE 1 & 2, 120V.)
K145 also brings power to the timer circuit (F-2) and the transistor/
transformer circuit (F-3).
4-142
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
This board receives DC commands
Left Drive
Direction Feedback
FET switches H4
H3
H6
H1 Direction
H1
H2 Detector
Monitors motor H2
operation (Feedback)
Drive command
compared to
H4 feedback
4-143/4-144(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
4-145/4-146(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
I2
I4
I1
I2
I4 I3
I1
4-147/4-148(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
4-149/4-150(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
Technical Supplement Miscellaneous componets of the drice control
H5
H6 H5
From the CPU
From the
CPU
This is a "not
signal" (active low)
C240: As it charges / discharges it varies

the pulse width and will speed up / slow
down the drive
FET
4-151/4-152(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
4-153
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
LEF T DRIVE - Refer to Page 4-155

Note: The left and right side are identical therefore only cover the left drive.
TUBE PARKED SW-(S1 is normally open switch shown incorrectly in the blocks).
This signal tell the CPU if the tube is parked or not through the CHGR & DRV
ST A TUS input port. This operates FULL SPD ENA sent to the drive module.
FULL SPD ENA from the CPU operates a voltage clamp on the Drive Controller board.
Therefore the maximum speed is hardware limited.
DRIVE ENA SW developed from S4 & S5 `deadman' switches. Both switches must work before
the drive is enabled. This signal goes to the CPU board and splits up-one to an input port;
the other, off the board to the drive module to supply +24 volts to the + side of the drive
relay , K1. DRIVE ENA SW to the CPU input port tells the CPU to read the Hall Effect Sensors
and output MOTOR ENA & DRIVE RESET. MOTOR ENA develops 0 volt path to the drive
relay LEFT MOTOR ENA and also develops BRAKE RELEASE.
LF T MAN TDS OUT is the output of the left Hall Effect Sensor. This output is sent to the CPU's 16
channel analog MUX and converted to digital. The CPU then outputs +10v to 0v to -10v
signal to the Drive Controller. The polarity determines direction of the motors.
LEF T DRV CMND on the Drive Control board is summed with the drive feedback to give an error,
then is voltage clamped (for maximum speed control). The voltage is then converted to a
pulsewidth and sent to drivers. Polarity of the error is sensed which is a function of desired
direction (pushing forward or backward on the drive handle) then converted to an absolute
value so that there is always a positive voltage going to the voltage-to-frequency
converter . Depending on the desired direction CW or CCw, different drivers are enabled
which eventually provides reversible current flow through the motors.
LEF T TOP CW*, LEFT BOT CW*, LEFT TOP CW*, LEFT BOT CCW* are sent to the Drive Amp
where the pulses are amplified through opto-isolators and power FETs.
LEF T IM is the feedback signal from the motor drives. The analog MUX is there to maintain a
relationship with the DRV CMND so that they are always opposite since the motor
feedback is always positive. This is done by a direction detect or a invert/non-invert amp.
LEF T DRV FDBK is also sent to the CPU for monitoring.
The BUMPER switches are normally closed and go to the Drive Controller board.
BUMPER* is developed and sent to the CPU board. When the bumper switches open, the
CPU turns off MOTOR ENA to stop the motors. It also prompts the CPU to ignore any
forward commands from the drive handle until the obstruction is cleared.
BRAKE RELEASE is from the white pushbutton under the drive handle is wired ORed with the
BRAKE RELEASE 1 on the Drive Power Amp. The white pushbutton is connected directly
to the battery in case the unit will not stay on to drive out of the way.
CAUTION - When working around this module, there will be battery voltage present if the white
pushbutton is pushed.
NOTE: LEFT AND RIGHT FUNCTIONAL FLOW IS ON PAGE 4-159
4-154
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
ILLUSTRATION 15-6
LEFT DRIVE SIGNAL FLOW MUST BE SOLID (NO DRIFT) OR UNIT AMX1 A5 A2 AMX1 A5
DRIVES WHEN S5 & S4 ACTIVATED DRIVE POWER AMP MOTOR DRIVE
AMX1 A2 MODULE
TOP DECK HALL LFT LEFT
J1 REF J8 AMX1 A2 A1 AMX1 A5 A1 J1 V+ K1 F1
3 7 CONTROLLER DRIVE CONTROL
HALL LFT REF +10V REF Must be a MAX SPEED 2
SUPPL Y
5
RTN
8 clean +10v LIMIT LEFT
NE555 J9 LEFT TOP J9 OPTO
VM+
LFT MAN TDS REF OUT LEFT DRV CW* POWER RED
HALL 4 4 ISO 1
EFFECT OUT CMND +/- FET
MAG- 4 3 ANA- A/D LFT SPD J2 J2
NET SENSOR
S3 LOG CONVERT DMN DAC 7 8 7 8 AMP VOL T AGE
MUX 1200H 1401H S VOL T- -TO- DRI-
U AGE PULSE VERS
M CLAMP WIDTH
CONVERT
A/D LEFT BOT LEFT
CNTRL LEFT DRV CW* VM-
1280H POWER BLK
FDBK +/- 8 8 FET 3
3 4 3 4 LEFT
HANDLE AMP
DIRECT-
CW MOTOR
ASSM TION CCW AMX2 A1
DETECT MTR1
LEFT LEFT TOP
CCW* OPTO
7 7 ISO POWER
DRI- FET
VERS
LEFT BOT
D0-D7 CCW* POWER
3 3 FET
DA T A
8031 BUS
MICRO- LEFT
CONTROLLER IM+
5 5
ANA-
SEE ILL . 15-7 LOG LEFT
VEHICLE MUX IM-
DRIVE 2 2
SEE ILL . PWR
(RIGHT) 15-9 OK J11
BA T TERY
POWER / 3
A +5V DRV
LEFT RIGHT CHARGING N
NOT 9 9
DRIVE DRIVE D
ENA ENA DRIVE
S5 SW S4 SW J1 ENA SW DRIVE J2 DRIVE J4 DRIVE
J8 ENA SW ENA SW ENA
1 27 17 17 17 17 1
FULL
TUBE SPD ENA
TS2 P ARKED 13 13
S1 SW CHGR DRIVE ST ALL LEFT MOTOR LEFT
1 13 CHGR ENA PWR*
& & RESET RESET* 3
TUBE DRV 15 15 INV DRI- 12 12 INV
LINE J1 DRV VERS
+24V P ARKED SENSE CONTROL MOTOR BRAKE
SW 6 ST A TUS 1100H RELEASE
1000H ENA
16 16 14 14 INV
SEE ILL . LEFT
15-9 ST ALL ST ALL
14 14
NORMALL Y BA T TERY DETECT +BA T T
OPEN POWER / SWITCHED J10 K145
CHARGING 2
S1: SEE ILL .
CL OSED = P ARKED DS285 J11 15-9 -BA T T J7
N.O . = NOT P ARKED BUMPER #1 BA T TERY 1
1 POWER /
BUMPER* O
S4 & S5: 10 10 CHARGING
R BUMPER #2
BOTH SWITCHES 2
MUST CL OSE FOR 8031 uC READS CHGR & DRV ST A TUS PORT : B-
FORWARD , REVERSE - IF DRIVE ENA SW CL OSED (ACTUA TED B Y J10 J5
OR PIVOT MOTION. HANDLE), 8031 READS HALL EFFECT SENSOR, IF BUMPER HITS SOMETHING,
(PROVIDES A BUMPER SWITCH OPENS & 1 1
REDUNDANT DEAD- OUTPUTS APPROPRIA TE VALUE TO LFT SPD
DMN DAC BUMPER* = TRUE (0V) +BA T T +BA T T
MAN'S SWITCH.")
- IF TUBE P ARKED SW CL OSED , 8031 ASSERTS
FULL SPD ENA.
IF TUBE P ARKED SW OPEN, 8031 NEGA TES
FULL SPD ENA, REDUCING DRIVE SPEED B Y 50%.
- IF THE AC LINE IS SENSED (CHARGE CYCLE),
8031 PROHIBITS VEHICLE DRIVE BRAKE RELEASE 1
TUBE
- IF A BUMPER SWITCH OPENS, 8031 ALL OWS P ARKED
REVERSE MOTION ONL Y SW
- IF ST ALL IS DETECTED , 8031 STOPS MOTOR
DRIVE. HANDLE
RELEASING AND RE-APPL YING HANDLE
RESETS ST ALL DETECT .
AMX2 A2
FRONT BASE
LEFT
BRAKE S1 BUMPER
RELEASE BUMPER
BUT TON RIGHT
S2 BUMPER
+BA T T LEFT BRAKE

SOLENOID
AMX2 A1 BRK1
S6 BRAKE RELEASE BRAKE RELEASE DRIVE
BRAKE RELEASE
WHEEL
4-155/4-156(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
ILLUSTRATION 15-7
RIGHT DRIVE SIGNAL FLOW AMX1 A5 A2 AMX1 A5
DRIVE POWER AMP MOTOR DRIVE
AMX1 A2 MODULE
TOP DECK HALL RGT RIGHT
J2 REF J8 AMX1 A2 A1 AMX1 A5 A1 J2 V+ K2 F2
3 5 CONTROLLER DRIVE CONTROL 2
HALL RGT REF +10V REF
RTN SUPPL Y
5 6 RIGHT
J9 RIGHT TOP J9 VM+
CW* OPTO
HALL RGT MAN TDS REF OUT RIGHT DRV ISO POWER RED
OUT 23 23 3
EFFECT CMND +/- FET
MAG- 4 1 ANA- A/D RT SPD J2 J2
NET SENSOR
S2 LOG CONVERT DMN DAC 6 5 6 5 AMP VOL T AGE
MUX 1200H 1400H S VOL T- -TO- DRI-
U AGE PULSE VERS
M CLAMP WIDTH
CONVERT
A/D RIGHT BOT RIGHT
CNTRL RIGHT DRV CW* VM-
1280H POWER BLK
FDBK +/- 19 19 FET 1
1 2 1 2 RIGHT
HANDLE AMP
DIRECT-
CW MOTOR
ASSM TION CCW AMX2 A1
DETECT MTR2
RIGHT RIGHT TOP
CCW* OPTO
22 22 ISO POWER
DRI- FET
VERS
RIGHT BOT
D0-D7 CCW* POWER
24 24 FET
DA T A
8031 BUS
MICRO- RIGHT
CONTROLLER IM+
20 20
ANA-
SEE ILL . 15-6 LOG RIGHT
VEHICLE MUX IM-
DRIVE SEE ILL . PWR 26 26
(LEFT) 15-9 OK
J11
BA T TERY
POWER / 3
A +5V DRV
LEFT RIGHT CHARGING N
NOT 9 9
DRIVE DRIVE D
ENA ENA DRIVE
S5 SW S4 SW J1 ENA SW DRIVE J2 DRIVE J4 DRIVE
J8 ENA SW ENA SW ENA
1 27 17 17 17 17 1
FULL
TUBE SPD ENA
TS2 P ARKED 13 13
S1 SW CHGR DRIVE ST ALL RIGHT MOTOR RIGHT
1 13 CHGR ENA PWR*
& & RESET RESET* 2
DRV 15 15 INV DRI- 11 11 INV
TUBE LINE J1 DRV VERS
+24V P ARKED SENSE CONTROL MOTOR BRAKE
6 ST A TUS 1100H RELEASE
SW 1000H ENA
16 16 14 14 INV
SEE ILL . RIGHT
15-9 ST ALL ST ALL
12 12
NORMALL Y BA T TERY DETECT +BA T T
POWER / SWITCHED J10 K145
OPEN CHARGING 2
SEE ILL .
S1: DS289 J11 15-9 -BA T T J7
BUMPER #1 BA T TERY 1
CL OSED = P ARKED 1
N.O . = NOT P ARKED BUMPER* POWER /
10 10 O CHARGING B-
R BUMPER #2
S4 & S5: 2
BOTH SWITCHES 8031 uC READS CHGR & DRV ST A TUS PORT :
MUST CL OSE FOR - IF DRIVE ENA SW CL OSED (ACTUA TED B Y J10 J6
FORWARD , REVERSE HANDLE), 8031 READS HALL EFFECT SENSOR, IF BUMPER HITS SOMETHING,
BUMPER SWITCH OPENS & 1 1
OR PIVOT MOTION. OUTPUTS APPROPRIA TE VALUE TO RT SPD
(PROVIDES A DMN DAC BUMPER* = TRUE (0V) +BA T T +BA T T
REDUNDANT DEAD-
MAN'S SWITCH.") - IF TUBE P ARKED SW CL OSED , 8031 ASSERTS
FULL SPD ENA.
IF TUBE P ARKED SW OPEN, 8031 NEGA TES
FULL SPD ENA, REDUCING DRIVE SPEED B Y 50%.
- IF THE AC LINE IS SENSED (CHARGE CYCLE),
8031 PROHIBITS VEHICLE DRIVE BRAKE RELEASE 2
TUBE
- IF A BUMPER SWITCH OPENS, 8031 ALL OWS P ARKED
REVERSE MOTION ONL Y SW
- IF ST ALL IS DETECTED , 8031 STOPS MOTOR
DRIVE. HANDLE
RELEASING AND RE-APPL YING HANDLE
RESETS ST ALL DETECT .
AMX2 A2
FRONT BASE
LEFT
BRAKE S1 BUMPER
RELEASE BUMPER
BUT TON RIGHT
S2 BUMPER
+BA T T RIGHT BRAKE

SOLENOID
AMX2 A1 BRK2
S6 BRAKE RELEASE BRAKE RELEASE DRIVE
BRAKE RELEASE
WHEEL
4-157/4-158(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
ILLUSTR ATION 15-8

DRIVE CONTROLLER TP16 NOTE: RIGHT AND LEFT DRIVE CIRCUITS ARE THE SAME.
LEFT & RIGHT DRIVE FUNCTIONAL FLOW +5V-DRV GOES HIGH (STALL)
(19) IF TP1 GETS MORE NUMBER IN PARENTHESIS IS FOR RIGHT DRIVE CIRCUIT
DRIVE NEGA TIVE THAN
-8 VOLTS (10A)
AMX IV DRIVE CIRCUITRY
POWER -8V + F AST STALL
AMP
MUST
+5V-DRV
HAVE
-
REV B
TO ENABLE COMP ARA TOR
+ BAT T
64A 8A SWITCHED HIGH SIDE GOES HIGH
NORMALL Y 0 VOLTS.
FETS (ST ALL)
WILL START TO RISE IF
IF TP3 GETS
-5V TP1 GETS MORE
GREA TER THAN DS285 IF STALL IS
NEGA TIVE THAN -5 HIGH, LED
+10 VOLTS
VOL TS (6.25A)
TP17 (289) WILL BE ON
+ TP3 +10V (18) AND ERROR
WILL OCCUR
F9 F1(2) (6)
K1(2)
+ LA TCH ST ALL
BA T TERY HIGH HIGH
A B DELA YED STALL
- - CLR ST ALL OUTPUT OF
COMP ARA TOR CONTROLLER
CHARGE INTEGRA TOR BOARD
PANEL LOW LOW PULSE WILL
A B CLEAR LATCH DIR
ST ALL RESET
TP1
TP4
(2)
(9) F ALL DELAY
-3.98 +/-1 CL OCK TO HIGH SIDE
-8 VOLTS/AMP
COMP ARA TOR TP15 10.9 KHZ FET A
FEEDBACK SELECT ABLE
.2 OHMS AMP (20) F ALL DELAY
DIFF TO LOW SIDE
AMP + DIR LOGIC FET A
K1(2)
R1(2) MUX 5 - (.5 X TP4) - F ALL DELAY TO HIGH SIDE
TP5 FET B
X 10
DYMANIC BRAKE RESISTOR LEVEL (10) TO LOW SIDE
.2 OHMS SHIFTER F ALL DELAY
+ FET B
VOL T AGE TO
- ERROR +/-1 PULSE WIDTH
DIFF
TP7 + CONVERTER
K1(2) SELECT ABLE
DRIVE AMP (8) SHOULD BE 8.7 VOLTS F ALLING EDGE DELAY
X 6.25 AMP
CONT ACTOR WHEN FULL SPD ENA IS HIGH AND PREVENTS HIGH AND LOW SIDE
4.2 VOLTS WHEN FULL SPD ENA IS FETS FROM BEING ON AT THE
+ BAT T 1 ST ALL TP11 LO . HAS CAPACITOR DELAY. CLAMPS SAME TIME AND DESTROYING
VOT AGE INTO PULSE WIDTH THEMSEL VES
SWITCHED
PWR OK CONVERTER
K145 (FROM BAT T
BRAKE
FET
CHARGE BOARD)
FULL SPD ENA THESE OUTPUTS ARE INVERTED
SWITCH B Y THE FET DRIVERS, THUS A LOW WILL
K145 TURN ON THE FET.
SHORTS TO GND DRIVE ENA SW +5V-DRV
WHEN DRIVE IS
NOT ENABLED
DRV FBK SHOULD BE

HALL OUTPUT WILL RANGE DRIVE COMMAND -10 TO 10V
FROM ABOUT 3 TO 7 VOLTS.
DRV FBK
5 VOLTS WHEN THE
THIS IS TRANSLATED INTO A TP19 (18)
UNIT IS NOT MOVING.
-10 TO +10 VOLT COMMAND
IT SHOULD MOVE
BY THE SOFTWARE BEL OW 5 VOLTS IN DA T A
TP15
ONE DIRECTION AND BASE D/A
ABOVE 5 VOLTS IN PIN 25
THE OTHER. (26)
HALL
EFFECT
3
SENSOR
RED +10V REF TP22 MOTOR ENA
BUMPER SWITCHES:
CL OSE WHEN OBJECT IS
(21) MUX HIT
U342 SAMPL A/D SOFTWARE U151-3
4 BUMPER
WHT HOLD CONTROL
X1
U151-4(7)
5 ST ALL
BLK U264-6
TP29 PORTS ST ALL RESET
U264-19
FULL SPD ENA
10 V
SQUARE WAVE
HANDLE CHECK 24mS ONL Y WHEN ENABLE
SMALL BLACK 1mS BAR IS ENGAGED U151-13
CONNECTOR OUT OF OTHERWISE CONSTANT 10V DRIVE ENA SW ENABLE BAR SWITCH: CLOSED WHEN DRIVE IS ENABLED
HANDLE ENDS U151-18
WHEN THE ENABLE BAR IS ENGAGED, THIS ERROR CODES
SIGNAL FORCES THE HALL EFFECT TUBE PARKED SW P ARK SWITCH: CLOSED WHEN TUBE IS PARKED
SIGNAL INTO THE MUX TO BE 0 VOLTS FOR
A SHORT TIME. THE SOFTWARE CHECKS TO +24V
SEE THAT THIS OCCURS. (SAFETY
CPU FEA TURE) +24V
4-159/4-160(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
SECTION 5 - WAVEFORMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 5 - WAVEFORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5-1
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
5-2
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 TP1
DISPL. DATA OUT
WAVEFORM A1
Display data out from serial output of µ controller. Waveform captured in idle mode, i.e., not
prepped, no switches pushed (kv, mAs)
5-3
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH. 1 TP8
F2
CH. 2 TP9
F1
WAVEFORM A2
Two 70 µs 14.3 kHz pulses approximately 6v, 180° out of phase. Filament supplies for vacuum
fluorescent displays. If they were DC, display would be light on one side, dark on the other side.
5-4
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 TP3
+5V SUPPLY
CH.2 J8-10
PWR DWN RST
CPU BOARD
NOTE:
WAVEFORM B1 This shows the 5v supply turn off delay after the key
switch is turned off
CONDITON: Key switch turned off.

PWR DWN RST senses when power has been turned off to hold off the µ controller before the 5
volt supply goes away. New LVLE supplies give approximately .5 sec. Old LVLE might give 100
ms maximum.
5-5
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 J8-25
EXP SW
CH.2 J5-22
X-RAY ON
CPU BOARD
WAVEFORM B2
CONDITION: 50 kVp 2.5 mAs

Delay from pressing exposure switch to actual exposure. Rotor already prepped. Note switch
bounce on top waveform.
5-6
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 TP31
SAMPLE & HOLD IN
CH.2 TP20
SAMPLE & HOLD OUT
CPU BOARD
WAVEFORM B3
Sample and hold during exposure 50 kVp 5 mAs.
5-7
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
NOTE:
There are THREE wave forms
being compared here
J4-25 EXP
START CMMD
J4-23 EXP
STOP CMMD
J5-22 X-RAY
CPU BOARD
WAVEFORM B4
CONDITION: 50 kVp 2.5 mAs

EXP START is a 3 ms pulse. When X-RAY ON" becomes valid, EXP START" goes false. When
exposure is to be terminated, EXP STOP", also a 3 ms pulse, goes true and stays true until
X-RAY ON" goes false.
NOTE: If "X-RAY ON" does no go positive within the 3ms pulse of "EXPSTART"
the system will error out
5-8
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 U37-3
CLOCK FOR
BACKUP TIMER
CH.2 J5-22
X-RAY ON
CPU BOARD
WAVEFORM B5
CONDITION: 50 kVp, 16 mAs

X-RAY ON" starts back-up timer counting into a magnitude comparator to check actual
exposure time against a preloaded backup time.
5-9
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 SCR GATE

CR32J-K (CR61)
CH.2 SCR ANODE

CR11-K (CR41)
GND TP9 -
WAVEFORMS HAVE
120V OFFSET
BATTERY CHARGER BOARD 46-288034G1 (46-288786G1)
WAVEFORM C1
CONDITION: Charger charging.

SCR gate is fired by a comparator which is operated by zero crossing circuit and current charge
command and feedback circuit. When the the SCR is fired, the anode goes to 120v which is
across the battery and allows current to flow.
5-10
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
TP5-ZERO CROSSING
TP4 CHARGE ERROR
U181-7 (U146-7)
COMPARATOR OUTPUT
WAVEFORM C2
CONDITION: Charger charging.

When ramp at TP5 is lower than charger current error (or error is greater than ramp), the output of
the comparator goes low, eventually firing the SCR.
5-11
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
TP6-UFC
BATT @ 115.5V
7.407 kHz
TP6-UFC
BATT @ 114.5V
7.299 kHz
WAVEFORM C3
CONDITION: Idle
Output of voltage to frequency converter.
Top waveform: Batt volts 115.5V TP3 = 6.57; TP6 = 7.407 kHz
Batt volts 114.5V TP3 = 6.49; TP6 = 7.299 kHz
5-12
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 J1-15
60Hz PHASE 1
CH.2 TP4
ROTOR CONTROLLER BOARD
WAVEFORM D1
CONDITION: 60 Hz inverter on (field light or rotor on)

Input from CPU compared to FET drive
Note phase relationship and voltage difference.
5-13
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 60 Hz
PHASE 1 (MOD) TP4
NOTE:
They are 180 out of phase
CH.2 60 Hz
PHASE 2 (MOD) TP5
WAVEFORM D2
CONDITON: 60 Hz inverter on.

Signals driving inverter FETS.
5-14
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 TP4
60Hz PHASE 1 (MOD)
WAVEFORM D3
CONDITION: First time 60 Hz inverter is turned on after unit is first turned on.
60 Hz clock starts off at about 200 Hz, then slews down to 60 Hz in about 60 ms.
NOTE:
This reduces the in rush of current the first time it is turned on
5-15
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 TP1
ROTOR CURRENT
SENSE
CH.2 TP3
ROTOR INTLK
WAVEFORM D4
CONDITION: Rotor prepped.

Interlock comes up as soon as current is sensed.
5-16
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 J1-15
60 Hz PHASE 1
CH.2 TP1
ROTOR INTLK
DEVELOPMENT
WAVEFORM D5
CONDITON: Rotor switch pressed: 60 Hz inverter turned on, rotor started.

Delay from 60 Hz inverter (rotor start) turn to rotor interlock development
5-17
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 CR117-K
CH.2 CR118-K
1 kHz BOARD
WAVEFORM E1
CONDITION: Unit prepped, ready for x-ray.

Inputs to 1 kHz inverter transformer.
5-18
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 J1-25
+24V EXP START
NOTE:
"EXP START" initiates
the "SCR HI" signal
CH.2 J4-11
EXP START
SCR HI
SEE NOTE
BELOW!
1 kHz BOARD
WAVEFORM E2
CONDITION: X-ray exposure.

Exposure start from CPU converted to SCR start pulse. Stop pulse is the same.
NOTE: These waveforms were taken separately! The bottom waveform was referenced to
AMX1 A4A1J4-13.6
5-19
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 J1–25
EXP START
CH.2 TP3
kV FDBK
1 kHz BOARD
WAVEFORM E3
CONDITION; 50 kV 2.5 mAs

kV Feedback.
5-20
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 J1-25
EXP START
CH.2 TP3
kV FDBK
1 kHz BOARD
WAVEFORM E4
CONDITION; 80 kV 2.5 mAs

kV Feedback.
5-21
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 G2
J4-1
CH.2 G1
J4-5
1 kHz BOARD
WAVEFORM E5
CONDITION: Rotor prepared, 1 kHz inverter on.

These are gate pulses to autotransformer inverter; leaves the board via twisted pairs.
5-22
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 J4-16
STOP CAP
CH.2 J1-12
1 kHz INVERTER
READY
1 kHz BOARD
WAVEFORM E6
CONDITION: Rotor prepped.

60 Hz inverter turns on, charges stop caps (top waveform) to develop 1 kHz INV RDY.
NOTE: This resulted in a normal exposure. The cause for 1 kHz Inverter Ready dropping out is
unknown, but it did.
5-23
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 J4-16
STOP CAP
CH.2 TP3
kVp FDBK
1 kHz BOARD
WAVEFORM E7
CONDITION: Straight to exposre, no hold at prep.

At prep, rotor starts, stop cap is charged, then exposure is allowed. There is almost a 3 second
delay from standby to expose.
NOTE: Lower waveform is actual exposure at 7.5 mAs.
5-24
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 TP10
kV DMND
CH.2 TP11
kV DMND ERROR
CH.2 TP12
kV FEEDBACK 5v/DIV
FIL/kVp BOARD
WAVEFORM F1
CONDITION: 50 kV 16 mAs Exposure

CPU outputs kV DMND during prep; max error until exposure occurs.
When kV DMND is 2.4v, the kV Feedback must be equal. If not, error at TP11 will drive filament up
or down to minimize error.
5-25
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 TP11
kV ERROR
CH.2 TP8
FIL. CUR. FDBK.
CH.2 TP7
FIL. DRIVE PROC.
10v SCALE
FIL/kVp BOARD
WAVEFORM F2
CONDITION: 50 kVp 16 mAs, no hold at prep.

Initial hump" at TP8 during prep is preheat or boost.
TP7 is noisy because during prep the inner loop is such a high gain. During the exposure, the
filament is entered into the outer loop" which has a much slower response.
Preheat is there for about .6 sec
5-26
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 TP12
kVp FDBK
CH.2 J2-22
X-RAY ON
FIL/kVp BOARD
WAVEFORM F3
CONDITION: 50 kVp 16 mAs exposure.

kVp Feedback signal operates X-RAY ON when KVP FDBK is 75% of kV DMND.
5-27
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 TP6
16 kHz RAMP
CH.2 TP7
FIL CUR. DRIVE
PROCESSED
CH.2 TP1
PWM 5v/DIV
FIL/kVp BOARD
WAVEFORM F4
CONDITION: 50 kVp 16 mAs exposure
5-28
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 TP1
P WIDTH DRIVE
CH.2 J2-26
PREHEAT
FIL/kVp BOARD
WAVEFORM F5
CONDITION: Prep.
Preheat equivalent to Boost" to get filament up to temp quickly. High for .658 seconds forces
maximum duty cycle on PWM.
5-29
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 TP1
PW DRIVE
CH.2 CR177-K
PWM-E J8-3
FIL/kVp BOARD
WAVEFORM F6
CONDITION: Filament inverter on. Pulse width varies.

Note large pulse width at first of exposure due to preheat.
5-30
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 J5-3
PWM RTN 1
CH.2 J5-1
PWM RTN 2
REF J5-2
FIL/kVp BOARD
WAVEFORM F7
CONDITION: Rotor prepped, filament inverter on; input to inverter transformer.
5-31
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 U18-1
2 kHz PHASE 1
CH.2 CR281-K
INPUT TO FET
FIL/kVp BOARD
WAVEFORM F8
CONDITION: Prep
Signal in phase
NOTE: If tube spits 1N5713 diodes may short giving insufficient filament drive error.
5-32
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 U18-1
2 kHz PHASE 1
CH.2 J5-3
PWM RTN 1
FIL/kVp BOARD
WAVEFORM F9
CONDITION: Prep
As soon as the prep switch is pressed, 2 kHz clocks are turned on. (Top waveform). At that
instant, the filament is seen as a short (low resistance.) A few pulses later, the filament RTN
voltage comes up as the resistance increases..
5-33
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH. 1 J5-1
PWM RTN 2
CH. 2 J2-25
FIL. SHORTED
FIL/kVp BOARD
WAVEFORM F10
CONDITION: Prep switch pressed.

When the filaments are first turned on they are low in resistance, which would appear as a shorted
filament, but only until the resistance increases, which increases the voltage across it, to cause
FIL SHORTED to go false.
5-34
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 TP3
mA
CH.2 TP2
VFC OUTPUT
FIL/kVp BOARD
WAVEFORM F11
CONDITION: 50 kVp .4 mAs exp.

TP3 is mA waveform from bridge rectifier, compared to mAs out which is voltage-to-frequency
converted. TP2 is approximately 24v pulses.
5-35
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 Q3-ANĆ
ODE
EXP. START SCR
0v CH.1
CH.2 Q1-ANĆ
ODE
INV. SCR
GENERATOR
WAVEFORM G1
CONDITION: 50 kV 1 mAs exposure.

Q3 anode goes to 0v during an expsosure. Q1 Anode commutates until forced off.
5-36
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 TP5
ANALOG DIRECTION
CH.2 TP15
LOGIC DIRECTION
DRIVE CONTROL BOARD
WAVEFORM H1 & H2
CONDITION: Drive handle enabled pulling back and forth.

Pushing forward on handle caused TP5 to go positive. Positive voltage drives the left motor in the
forward direction. Note that TP 15 is low. When the handle is pulled back, TP5 goes negative and
TP15 goes high just when TP5 passes through zero volts.
NOTE:
This is how direction is changed
5-37
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 TP12
DRIVE ERROR
CH.2 AR260-3
PULSE OUT
DRIVE CONTROL BOARD
WAVEFORM H3
CONDITION: Drive handle enabled, moving back and forth.

TP12 is analog drive error. Voltage is always positive because of invert/non-invert amp. Voltage
goes to a 555 timer used as voltage-to-pulse-width converter. AR260-3 is output. Note that
when voltage is maximum, there is maximum pulse width; when minimum voltage, pulse width is
minimum.
5-38
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
THERE IS NO WAVEFORM H4
5-39
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH. 1 TP14
CLOCK
CH. 2 AR265-3
TRIGGER
DRIVE CONTROL BOARD
WAVEFORM H5
CONDITION: Idle
Approximately 10 kHz clock for board. Clock used for direction control. Trigger used for
voltage-to-pulse-width converter.
5-40
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 AR265-3
TRIGGER
CH.2 AR260-3
PULSE OUT
DRIVE CONTROL BOARD
WAVEFORM H6
CONDITION: Drive handle enabled and pushed forward.

Analog voltage is only converted when trigger pulse is present. Pulse width is determined by level
of voltage. See waveform H1.
5-41
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 TP2
PULSE
TRANFORMERS
CH.2 J9-7
LEFT TOP CCW
DRIVE POWER AMP BOARD
WAVEFORM I1
CONDITION: Drive handle pulled back (reverse).

The top waveform is the supply for the top FET circuitry. The transformers are there to isolate the
circuit since the reference used is not ground. The secondary of the transformer has a rectifier
and filter capacitor for DC supply to circuitry. The pulses are only there when the drive handle is
picked up.
5-42
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 TP6
LEFT TOP CCW
FET DRIVE
CH.2 J9-7
LEFT TOP CCW
WAVEFORM I2
CONDITION: Drive handle enabled and pulled back.

LEFT TOP CCW* is active low from drive controller. TP6 is FET drive signal to top FET. When input
is low, top FET turns on. Pulse width is determined by handle position for desired speed.
5-43
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH. 1 TP6
LEFT TOP CCW
FET DRIVE
CH. 2 TP1
LEFT BOT CCW
FET DRIVE
WAVEFORM I3
CONDITION: Drive handle enabled and in reverse direction.

LEFT TOP CCW* is pulsed when LEFT BOT CCW* is steady on. This completes current path for
the motor (through Q90 to Q5).
5-44
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
CH.1 TP6
LEFT TOP CCW
FET DRIVE
CH.2 TP9
LEFT BOT CCW
FET DRIVE
DRIVE PWR AMP BOARD
WAVEFORM I4
CONDITION: Drive handle enabled and pulled back for reverse.

LEFT BOT CCW* is on and pulsed off. When TP6 is high (Q90 is on), TP9 is low (Q165 is off). TP1
(Q5 is on) is steady high. This is done for dynamic braking and quick response in case of direction
change.
5-45
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
5-46
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
SECTION 6 - PROPRIETARY DIAGNOSTICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 6 - PROPRIETARY DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6-1
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
6-2
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
SERVICE SWITCH FUNCTIONS
POWER UP DIAGNOSTICS AND APPLICATIONS

-Service Switch up
-Key switch on
-Power up tests complete
CALIBRATION AND DATA BASE ACCESS

-Service switch down
-Key switch on
ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS
-Service switch up
-Key switch on
-Service switch down during power up tests
CHECKSUM BYPASS (NOTE: VALID ONLY WHEN TEST 4 FAILS)

-Service switch up
-Key switch on
-Service switch down before TEST 4 goes away
-Service switch up before TESTING COMPLETE goes
away
Note: All functions are restored except when drive checksum

fails, the drives will not work.
DRIVE DIAGNOSTICS
-Service switch up
-Key switch on
-Service switch down in applications after
power-up
-Left/Right drive commands and feedback
displayed on KVP/mAs display
CHARGER DIAGNOSTICS
-Service switch up
-Charger cord plugged into a wall outlet
-Power up test complete and CHARGING"
displayed
-Service switch down in applications after
power-up
-Current battery volts and charging current on
console display
6-3
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
6-4
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
6-5
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
REFER TO PAGE 6–2 & PAGE 6–3 DIR. 46–017207 AMX–4 DIAGNOSTICS FOR EPROM REVISIONS
# cycles HIGH CHG TIMER hours

# cycles # cycles
NUM CHG INIT # cycles
Total Total
6-6
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
–to FFFF
–to FFFF
–to FFFF
–to FFFF
to FFFFFFFF (= 4 million KW)
FFFF (= 1200 hrs)
6-7
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
6-8
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
Battery Safety
Helpful hints when working around batteries:
• All tools should be taped to prevent accidental shorts
• Wear Safety Glasses with side shields
• Wear long sleeves---sweaty arms can get you shocked
• Wear a hat---protect hair from possible hot flying metal
• Button all buttons and wear long sleeves to protect arms
• Remove all jewelry, rings, necklaces, bracelets, watches, anything metallic
• Do not depend on either silk or nylon as these materials melt and offer no protection
• Wrap all jewelry that can not be removed
• If anything out of the ordinary happens or you have any questions ask a doctor
• Don't hurry---Haste makes sparks
Determining a Bad Battery Set

The only reliable method for determining whether a battery set is bad is to monitor the battery voltage under load at a
lower state-of-charge. The procedure follows.
1. Bring the open circuit battery voltage on the set below 113.00 v. unloaded. Drive the unit, use a lamp (or some
other type) load, etc.
2. Monitor the battery voltage from the circuit breaker to the ground stud with a storage scope. Use 5 or 10 v./div.
and 5 ms /div (2 ms /div on the 2230 to eliminate aliasing) with negative edge trigger.
3. Take a 125 kVp 4 mAs exposure, getting the scope to trigger (use sample mode) on the falling edge of the
battery voltage (I used the anode of the kVp waveform on channel 1 for a trigger.)
4. A alternate technique: Instead of 125 KVP @ 4 mAs - 80 KVP @ 4 mAs can be used - look for an average drop
of less than 13 volts.
5. Note the average drop from the unloaded voltage to the voltage under load. See figure below.
If the average drop is greater than 17 volts the batteries as a set are bad (unless your scope isn't properly calibrated).
At this point you know whether or not the battery set is bad. You won't know how many of the batteries in the set are
actually bad without further testing. If the set is bad and it is fairly new (<2 months old) you may have a single bad
battery. The following test can be used to isolate the problem to an individual battery.
6-9
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
Isolating the problem to an individual battery

1. Take the batteries out of the unit, reassemble them next to the unit and connect them to the AMX 4 + and -
power leads. WATCH THE POLARITY!! USE EXTREME CAUTION MAKING SURE THAT YOU DON'T SHORT A
BATTERY
2. Record the unloaded voltage of each battery.
3. Record the voltage of each battery after 10 seconds under the prep load.
4. If the drop (unloaded voltage minus loaded voltage) on any battery is greater than the drops on any of the other
batteries by more than 0.2 volts, chances are that this is your bad battery.
5. Confidence in this decision can be increased by monitoring the voltage drop on this battery during an exposure
and comparing it to the drop of the other batteries. If you prefer, you can skip steps 3&4 above and record the
voltage drop during an exposure (read off scope) for each battery. A single bad battery should stand out as
having a much greater voltage drop.
6. If you are absolutely sure you have one or two bad batteries, you can replace only the bad batteries. MAKE
SURE THE NEW BATTERIES ARE AT A HIGHER STATE-OF-CHARGE (higher open circuit voltage) THAN
THE OTHER BATTERIES IN THE PACK BEFORE CHARGING.
7. IF YOU CAN NOT CONFIDENTLY ISOLATE THE PROBLEM TO A SINGLE BATTERY, REPLACE THE ENTIRE
SET.
6-10
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
Oscilloscope Sampling Methods
There are two methods of sampling kVp with the Tektronix 2230. The `Peak Detect' and the `Sample' modes (the
Sample mode is used in the 468). The difference is basically this: the `Sample' mode displays a voltage point that was
randomly sampled during the time allotted (e.g., with 1023 sample points at 5 ms/div. yields 4.8875855 ms per
sample). The `Peak' mode displays the the maximum signal that occurred during the sample time. This yields a
completely different display. Aliasing occurs in both modes; however, the `Sample' mode becomes almost unusable.
Attached are some AMX-4 kVp waveforms acquired in both modes for comparison. For more information see
Tektronix Literature No. 46W-605 1, An Introduction to Digital Storage."
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
100 kVp 5 mAs
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Channel 2 on battery
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ Channel 1 on bleeder anode
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
(bottom waveform)
Note the scope was in the PEAK DETct mode. This is
the reason for all the spikes.
6-11
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
80 kVp 2 mAs
80 kVp 2 mAs
6-12
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
80 kVp 10 mAs
80 kVp 10 mAs
6-13
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
80 kVp 20 mAs
80 kVp 20 mAs
6-14
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
80 kVp 40 mAs
80 kVp 40 mAs
6-15
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
6-16
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0
SECTION 7 - MOBILE AID
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 7 - MOBILE AID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7-1
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0
7-2
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Product Data Sheet S200J AMX-4 Automatic Exposure Control Unit, 2-193, Page 1
7-3
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Product Data Sheet S200J AMX-4 Automatic Exposure Control Unit, 2-193, Page 2
7-4
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Mobile-AIDR Model D1300, Direction 46-134017, December 1994, Title Page
7-5
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Mobile-AIDR Model D1300, Direction 46-134017, December 1994, Page i
7-6
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Mobile-AIDR Model D1300, Direction 46-134017, December 1994, Page ii
7-7
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Mobile-AIDR Model D1300, Direction 46-134017, December 1994, Page 1
7-8
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-9
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-10
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-11
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-12
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-13
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-14
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-15
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-16
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-17
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-18
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-19
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-20
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-21
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-22
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-23
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-24
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-25
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-26
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-27
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-28
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-29
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-30
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-31
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-32
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-33
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-34
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-35
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-36
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-37
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-38
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-39
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-40
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-41
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-42
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-43
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-44
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-45
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-46
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-47
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-48
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-49
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-50
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-51
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0
7-52
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
SECTION 8 - SERVICE INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 8 - SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8-1
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
SERVICE INFORMATION INDEX
Software Handling During Cals 8-5

AMX - 4 Fuse List 8-9
AMX - 4 Model # to Publication List 8-10
FE Packet 8-15
Typical CPU Board Voltage 8-17
Signature Test Procedure 8-19
AMX - 4 Auto Transformer Tap Relays 8-42
Wheel Jack Information Sheet 8-44
AMX - 4 Reliability Phase-ins 8-45
AMX - 4 Service Note History 8-46
AMX - 4 FMI History 8-48
AMX - 4 Vintage Table 8-51
AMX - 4 Firmware Differences 8-53
AMX - 4 Main Circuit Breaker Wiring 8-56
AMX - 4 Battery / Charge System Issues 8-60
New AMX - 4 Film Bin 8-73
Latch Switch Assembly 8-74
Hall Effect Latch Switch Loose Connections 8-75
ESD Protection Inspection 8-77
Front Caster Lube Check 8-78
Column Flaking Resolution 8-80
Column Replacement Instructions 8-83
Wheel Replacement Instructions 8-101
Main Harness Replacement Instructions 8-119
Battery Load Fixture Instructions 8-123
Horizontal Arm Replacement 8-131
Battery History Label Installation 8-157
Counterweight Lifting Fixture Instructions 8-161
Caster Replacement Instructions 8-167
Film Bin Kit Installation 8-177
Latch Switch Assembly Installation 8-185
Installation of Genesis Batteries 8-195
HHS Forms 8-219
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
8-2
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
8-3
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
8-4
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
SOFTWARE HANDLING DURING CALS
DRIVE PARAMETERS Drive Handle Zero - with no force applied - RELEASE HANDLE - Pressing MAS
DWN will cause voltage from hall effect sensors to be read into controller board, then
digitized and stored in the database as RIGHT INPUT ZERO POINT & LEFT INPUT
ZERO POINT.
Drive Handle Gain - determines torque delivered to drive circuits. For each forward
& reverse gains, voltage is read into controller, gains, minimums, maximums and
polarity are calculated and stored.
BATTERY PARAMETERS VOLTMETER - establishes relationship of actual battery voltage to the VCO output
derived from the battery. Allows system to determine current battery volts when
measurements are taken, i.e., during CAL TAPS, stored in memory as BATTERY
VOLTS CALIBRATION COUNTS.
CHARGER CAL Charge Cal - signals are output from main controller board to charger module.
See CAL CHGR ERRs Commands result in voltage drop across a current sense resistor. FE installs
for voltage levels & freq.voltmeter across current sense for CPU to learn. Then is
converted to frequency. Stored in CHARGE PARAMETERS.
GENERATOR CALS
mAs CAL - injects about a 100 mA signal through an ammeter. The VCO is
converted and read to the display . The operator is prompted to enter the value
read on the ammeter. Output in frequency is 16 kHz at 100.0 mA. VCO output is
converted for 3 sec. and stored as MAS FREQUENCY AT 100MA.
KVP - Matches kVp demand to KVP FDBK at 52, 64, 85, 120 kVp steps. KVP FDBK
is a sample of the primary volts. Software adjusts filament demand and kVp demand
until KVP FDBK matches the demand kVp, and the emission current is close to 100
mA. Before each kVp station, the battery voltage is read once no load and once
when loaded ( 60Hz inv. & rotor is turned on ) Displays each voltage on kVp/mA
display - generally drops .9 - 1.1V. Stored in CALIBRATIBLE X-RAY PARAMETERS
TAPS - establishes relationships of tap selection to KVP DEMAND at specific

emission currents. Defines systems characteristics of as many of the 28 valid tap
combinations possible, starting in the DATA BASE; System resistance which is the
slope of the tap combination load line & effective turns ratio which is y-intercept
KVP at Oma - battery voltage.
Basically electrical characteristics for transformer, batteries, tube. A must for batĆ
tery,transformer or tube change.
FILAMENT CURRENT TABLE - Filament current needed for selected kVp with
minimum KVP overshoot or undershoot. Actual x-ray exposures are taken at
different KVP selections 52, 64, 85, 120 kVp. For each KVP station, 2 tap
combinations are used - the ones that will yield emission currents closest to 90mA
& 110 mA. Linear interpolation is used to determine the filament current demand
values at 90 and 110 mA for each kVp station. These eight calibrated points are
then used to interpolate the remaining filament current table entries in the data base
shown in Table 35, P.111
8-5
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
END RESULT OF GENERATOR CALS - example - 80 kVp 2mAs; on prep the corĆ
rect tap combination is pulled in, learned during taps, - The filament demand output
was learned during filament cals.
First 20-25 ms of exposure regulation occurs.
mA is varied to regulate kVp.
If mAs counter is a little too long before terminating exposure, this means mA must
be low, therefore update AUTO CAL TABLE with new Fil Current Demand value.
FIELD LIGHT - Adjustable 5 to 45 sec

Recommend 15-20 seconds to prolong bulb life.
Max on time address 1A8H, 200 sec before being disable for cooling.
Field Light Cooling Time - cooling time set after light has been on for more than
max on time.
On time starts when field light switch is released.
LOAD DEFAULTS -
Loads NV data base from proms with a set of operating parameters that can be used
as a basic for cals.
All data base values are affected.
All calibrations must be redone.
Any data base customization such as acceleration factor, must be re-entered
through data base access.
Good for troubleshooting in addition to checksum bypass.
EXITING CAL - CHECKSUMS

Intermediate checksums are calculated after calibration is completed; for instance,
when going from "REMOVE METER" to "CALIBRATE mAS"
To exit calibration mode, must go to at least CALIBRATE SYSTEM if not to END
SERVICE MODE.
If calibration is existed before CALIBRATION SYSTEM prompt, will get PWR UP error
TEST4, but no checksums will show up when looking under calibrate system. This is
TOTAL CHECKSUM calculated when operator goes to CALIBRATE SYSTEM. To
clear, re-enter CALIBRATE SYSTEM, then back out correctly.
8-6
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
8-7
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
Main SCR Check
Turn on unit, depress prep switch. When unit prompts Ready for X-ray", release prep.
Hook DVM from Q3-A to ground (left most screw). Voltage should be approximately 75 VDC dropping to
approximately 30 VDC or less in a few seconds.
Hit prep again; after safety contactor pulls in (K7), voltage should jump to battery voltage (within a few volts).
Release prep, votlage should drop to 30 VDC or less, as in step 2, in a few seconds.
If not, one or both of the SCRs is bad. Check by removing bottom connection from each SCR and repeating tests
above.
NOTE: A bad SCR will have very low (>100W) resistance from anode to cathode at all times.
8-8
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
AMX-4 Fuse List
FUSE NAME FUNCTION FUSE RATING
AMX1A2F1 & F2 LINE POWER 6AMP250V3AG
AMX1A3F3 COLUMN BRAKES AND LATCH POWER 2AMP250V3AG
AMX1A3F6 KEY SWITCH 0.5AMP250V3AG
AMX1A3F7 COLLIMATOR LAMP 8AMP250V3AB
AMX1A3F9 DRIVE MOTORS 15AMP250V3AB
AMX1A3F10 EMERGENCY BRAKE RELEASE 2AMP250V3AG
AMX1A3A1F55 CHARGER BD. REGULATOR 1.5AMP250V3AG
AMX1A3A2F93 60HZ. INVERTER POWER 6AMP250V3AG
AMX1A5F1 LEFT MTOR V+ 8AMP250V3AB
AMX1A5F2 RIGHT MOTOR V+ 8AMP250V3AB
AMX3A3F1 GENERATOR .15AMP125KVP
ADDITIONAL AMX-4 PARTS:
Column Lifting Eye 46-303362P1
1/2 Ton Hoist 46-195700G1
Lifting Jack 46-302966G1
Mist Gray Paint (6 oz.) 46-208777P1
Charcoal Gray Paint 46-220244P1
(Early) AMX-4 Upgrade Package R4390GA

- Spring Caster (2)
- Cap Key
- Delrin Latch Pin
- Polyurethane Coil Cord
17.5 Foot Belden Cable 46-219921G2

(For H/V Bleeder)
8-9
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
8-10
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
8-11
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
8-12
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
8-13
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
8-14
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
GE FE
PACKET
THIS PACKET TO BE GIVEN ONLY TO GE EMPLOYEES
8-15
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
8-16
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
TYPICAL VOLTAGES ON CPU BOARD
kVp Selected 52 64 85 120
FIL DMN TP27 5.43V 4.30V 4.52 3.49V
kV DMN TP26 3.17V 3.95V 5.40V 8.03V
Leakage Comp TP28 0.03V 0.187V 0.50 1.28V
SAMPLE READINGS FROM AN AMX–4
BATTERY
FIL VAC PRI VAC P1 DROP VDC
Sel. XS1-XS2 TO P2 W/SCOPE MR OUTPUT
KVP DURING W/FLUKE 87 BATTERY DROP VDC - (PREP TO @ 40
PREP. DURING PREP TO EXPOSE EXPOSE - INCHES
(AFTER 3.0 EXPOSE USE AVG. OF 40 MAS
SEC). NOISE) USE MDH
52 17.0 75.0 114.3 ➜ 106.9 6.5 73.6
64 16.35 92.3 114.0 ➜ 105.5 7.6 141.0
85 16.20 123.4 113.9 ➜ 104.1 8.4 270.0
100 16.27 147.6 114.0 ➜ 102.3 10.0 386.0
120 16.15 177.6 114.0 ➜ 100.6 10.8 543.0
NOTE:
XFMR FIL. W XC - XS = .3W
TUBE FIL. W = .9W
XFMR PRI P1 TO P2 = .2W
8-17
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
8-18
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017401 Signature Tests For AMX-4 Performance, Rev. 9, Title Page
GE Medical Systems
Technical
Publications
Direction 46-017401
Revision 9
Signature Tests for AMX-4

Performance Verification,
Field Procedure
Copyright 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994 By General Electric Co.
Operating Documentation
8-19
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017401 Signature Tests For AMX-4 Performance, Rev. 9, Page i
THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

WARNING IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER
THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE
TRANSLATION SERVICES.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE
MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.
FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE
PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK,
MECHANICAL OR OTHER HAZARDS.
CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.

AVERTISSEMENT SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE
LANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE
TRADUIRE.
NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE
MANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS.
LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LE
TECHNICIEN, L’OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À DES
DANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES.
DIESES KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER

SPRACHE.
WARNUNG
FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENÖTIGT,
IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG
ZU SORGEN.
VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERÄT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES
KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN
WURDE.
WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN
DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN
DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE
GEFAHREN KOMMEN.
ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.

AVISO SI ALGÚN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN IDIOMA
QUE NO SEA EL INGLÉS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN
SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIÓN.
NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER
CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.
LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL
PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN
LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O DE
OTRA NATURALEZA.
8-20
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017401 Signature Tests For AMX-4 Performance, Rev. 9, Page ii
ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA DISPONÍVEL

EM INGLÊS.
ATENÇÃO
SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A
GEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA
RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO.
NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E

COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA.
O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANÇA
DO TÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A‘ CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS,
MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS.
IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN

INGLESE.
AVVERTENZA
SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS RICHIEDE IL
MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE È TENUTO A PROVVEDERE
DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.
SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO

AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL
CONTENUTO.
NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR
COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO ALLA
MANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER
FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.
8-21
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017401 Signature Tests For AMX-4 Performance, Rev. 9, Page iii
Direction 46-017401
Revision 9
Signature Tests for AMX-4 Performance

Verification, Field Procedure
IMPORTANT! . . . XĆRAY PROTECTION
XĆray equipment if not properly equipment can provide complete Room 1016, Bethesda, Maryland
used may cause injury. AccordĆ protection. Nor can any practical 20814, and of the International
ingly, the instructions herein design compel the operator to take Commission on Radiation ProtecĆ
contained should be thoroughly adequate precautions to prevent tion, and take adequate steps to
read and understood by everyone the possibility of any persons protect against injury.
who will use the equipment carelessly exposing themselves or
before you attempt to place this others to radiation. The equipment is sold with the
equipment in operation. The understanding that the General
General Electric Company, MediĆ It is important that everyone having Electric Company, Medical Systems
cal Systems Group, will be glad to anything to do with xĆradiation be Group, its agents, and representaĆ
assist and cooperate in placing properly trained and fully acĆ tives have no responsibility for injury
this equipment in use. quainted with the recommendaĆ or damage which may result from
tions of the National Council on improper use of the equipment.
Although this apparatus incorpoĆ Radiation Protection and MeasureĆ
rates a high degree of protection ments as published in NCRP Various protective material and
against xĆradiation other than the Reports available from NCRP PubliĆ devices are available. It is urged that
useful beam, no practical design of cations, 7910 Woodmont Avenue, such materials or devices be used.
8-22
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017401 Signature Tests For AMX-4 Performance, Rev. 9, Page v
If you have any comments, suggestions or corrections to the information in this document,
please write them down, include the document title and document number, and send them to:
MEDICAL SYSTEMS
ENGINEERING, X-RAY W-702
MANAGER - FIELD SERVICE DEVELOPMENT
P.O. BOX 414
MILWAUKEE, WI 53201-0414
CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

All electrical installations that are performed by qualified GE Medical requirements of the applicable electriĆ
preliminary to positioning of the personnel. The products involved cal codes.
equipment at the site prepared for the (and the accompanying electrical
equipment shall be performed by installations) are highly sophisticated, The purchaser of GE equipment shall
licensed electrical contractors. In and special engineering competence only utilize qualified personnel (i.e.,
addition, electrical feeds into the is required. In performing all electrical GE's field engineers, personnel of
Power Distribution Unit shall be work on these products, GE will use thirdĆparty service companies with
performed by licensed electrical its own specially trained field engiĆ equivalent training, or licensed electriĆ
contractors. Other connections beĆ neers. All of GE's electrical work on cians) to perform electrical servicing
tween pieces of electrical equipment, these products will comply with the on the equipment.
calibrations, and testing shall be
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely discovery, or in any event, within 14 damage is found. At this time be
examined at time of delivery. If days after receipt, and the contents ready to supply name of carrier,
damage is apparent, have notation and containers held for inspection delivery date, consignee name,
damage in shipment" written on by the carrier. A transportation freight or express bill number, item
all copies of the freight or express company will not pay a claim for damaged and extent of damage.
bill before delivery is accepted or damage if an inspection is not
signed for" by a General Electric requested within this 14 day period.
representative or a hospital receivĆ Complete instructions regarding
ing agent. Whether noted or conĆ Call Traffic and Transportation, claim procedure are found in
cealed, damage MUST be reported Milwaukee, WI (414) 827-3449Ă/ Section S" of the Policy & ProceĆ
to the carrier immediately upon 8*285-3449 immediately after dure Bulletins.
6/17/94
8-23
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017401 Signature Tests For AMX-4 Performance, Rev. 9, Page vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
REVISION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3 PRELIMINARY STEPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
4 X-RAY GENERATOR SIGNATURE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
5 COLLIMATOR ALIGNMENT SIGNATURE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
6 FINAL STEPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
FORM 1 - SIGNATURE TEST DATA SHEET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
8-24
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017401 Signature Tests For AMX-4 Performance, Rev. 9, Page ix
REVISION HISTORY
REV DATE REASON FOR CHANGE

0 Nov. 30, 1990 Initial release.
1 Mar. 1, 1991 General clarification of procedure. Added trial specification limits.
2 Aug. 9, 1991 Revised to reflect that HHS compliance testing is now performed in the factory.
3 Oct. 23, 1991 Added references to Direction 46-017496, AMX-4 Installation (Model
46-315161 Series) and Direction 46-017497, AMX-4 Calibration (Model
46-315161 Series).
4 May 1, 1992 Added references to Mobil-Aid AEC testing not being done in the factory.
5 May 29, 1992 Corrected error in HHS Test Number 6-2-4 in Steps 2.b. and 2.c. of Section 6.
6 Aug. 27, 1993 Update references to System Field Test for HHS, Direction 46-013894.
7 Nov. 24, 1993 Deleted requirement for field to send copies of Form 1 and Form F3382MX to
headquarters. Corrected test name references to Form F3382MX.
8 Mar. 4, 1994 HHS testing of factory installed AEC is now done at the factory.
9 July 15, 1994 Added reference to Direction 2115678-100, Installation (Model 2115090 Series)
and to Direction 2115679-100, Calibration (Model 2115090 Series).
PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION

NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER
Title Page 2
i thru x 2
1 thru 16 2
8-25
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017401 Signature Tests For AMX-4 Performance, Rev. 9, Page 1
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
For NEW AMX-4 installations (that is, received from factory, NOT reinstalled from
another location), acceptance testing is defined as the AMXĆ4 Signature Tests" deĆ
scribed in this direction.
AMXĆ4 Signature Tests" are quality tests which show that the AMXĆ4 unit has been
safely shipped to installation site without damage or change.
The AMXĆ4 Signature Tests consist of two parts:
XĆRay Generator Signature Test" with radiation exposure measurements at two

combinations of kVp-mAs techniques, with and without the customer's alumiĆ
num filter that is provided with each AMX-4 unit. (Section 4 of this direction.)
Collimator Alignment Signature Test" to check one transverse edge and one lonĆ
gitudinal edge of collimator light field. (Section 5 of this direction.)
HHS compliance testing (including for factory installed AEC) is performed in the facĆ
tory.
The Signature Tests replace field HHS testing at NEW installations except for the folĆ
lowing conditions as detailed in the flowchart of Illustration 1:
If either XĆRay Generator Signature Test and/or Collimator Alignment Signature

Test fails to pass, the appropriate HHS testing must be done in field in addition to
the signature tests. (Note that one re-try is allowed for each signature test before
considering test to be a failure.)
If you do not have an MDH meter, you must do a field test with x-ray film per the
HHS test for Collimator Alignment and SID" INSTEAD OF the Collimator
Alignment Signature Test. (Also, the Field Engineer may choose the option of
testing the collimator with x-ray film instead of doing Collimator Alignment SigĆ
nature Test, even if MDH meter is available.)
Note: If HHS testing is required by customer, then FULL HHS testing must be done
in field in addition to signature tests.
You will be recording field signature test data on Form 1 on last page of this direction. If
any HHS testing is required for any of the above reasons, then you will also be recording
data in appropriate section(s) of the mobile x-ray HHS Form F3382MX. (Form
F3382MX is a condensed version of Form F3382, dedicated specifically to mobile x-ray
units.)
Note: If a Mobil-Aid AEC is field installed on this generator, Form F3382MX is reĆ
quired for the AEC functions, regardless of whether or not Form F3382MX is
required for generator and collimator functions.
In Section 6 of this direction, you are told what documents to send to the appropriate
region filing office for every AMX-4.
8-26
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
ILLUSTRATIONă1
FLOWCHART
AMX-4 SIGNATURE TEST FOR FIRST TIME INSTALLATIONS
START GENERATOR SIGNATURE

TEST
INITIAL SETUP
MEASURE AND RECORD VERIFY PROPER SID, kVp,

mR VALUES mAs, FIELD SIZE,
FAILS 1ST AND PROBE PLACEMENT
TRY
FAILS RE-TRY
OK
PERFORM FOLLOWING HHS

TESTS IN SECTION 5 OF
NO IS AN MDH OK DIRECTION 46-017205, 46-017325, 46-017496, OR
METER 2115678-100
SEC. 5-2, kVp ACCURACY"
AVAILABLE? SEC. 5-3, mAs METERING ACCURACY"
SEC. 5-4, REPRODUCIBILITY"
YES SEC. 5-5, BEAM QUALITY"
FAILS HHS RETEST

YES DO YOU WANT
TO TEST WITH
FILM ANYWAY? RECALIBRATE GENERATOR
SECTION 3-3 OF DIRECTION 46-017206,
46-017326, 46-017497, OR 2115679-100
NO
COLLIMATOR SIGNATURE
TEST
INITIAL SETUP
MEASURE AND RECORD VERIFY PROPER SID, kVp,

mR VALUES mAs, FIELD SIZE,
FAILS 1ST AND PROBE PLACEMENT
TRY
FAILS RE-TRY
PERFORM FOLLOWING HHS

TEST (WITH X-RAY FILM) IN SECTION 5 OF
DIRECTION 46-017205, 46-017325, 46-017496, OR 2115678-100
SEC. 5-7, COLLIMATOR ALIGNMENT AND SID"
OK
FAILS HHS RETEST
OK
REALIGN WITH COLLIMATOR
ALIGNMENT TOOL 46-166390G1
AND/OR REPLACE COLLIMATOR
DONE
8-27
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
SECTION 2
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
1. For X-Ray Generator Signature Test:
X-ray radiation meter, such as MDH 1015, MDH 2025, Capintec 174, or
Capintec 192A, with radiographic radiation probe
Lab stand for holding radiographic probe
THE SAME 2.5 mm Type 1100 Aluminum Filter (Standard Absorber)
shipped with this AMX-4 unit
2. For Collimator Alignment Signature Test:
MDH 1015 or MDH 2025 radiation meter with a fluoroscopic radiation probe
Note: If you don't have either of these models of MDH meter, you must use x-ray
film and do HHS test of Section 5-7 Collimator Alignment and SID" of
AMX-4 Installation Direction 46-017205, 46-017325, 46-017496, or
2115678-100 instead of the Collimator Alignment Signature Test. Refer to
flowchart of Illustration 1.
(Probes of other meter types are NOT suitable for this test, because they will
not necessarily yield results that correlate with the factory data taken with an
MDH probe. This is because the probe size and geometry is critical to the test
of radiation ratio of half size field to full size field.)
Lab stand for holding fluoroscopic probe.
SECTION 3
PRELIMINARY STEPS
1. Look at the AMX-4 Serial Number recorded on top of Form 1 (Signature Test
Data Sheet) on last sheet of this direction. Verify that it agrees with the Serial
Number on AMX-4 unit.
2. Put your signature and date of field test on Form 1.
8-28
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
SECTION 4
X-RAY GENERATOR SIGNATURE TEST
SET-UP SetĆup for the XĆRay Generator Signature Test. Refer to Illustration 2 for the following:
1. Attach the radiographic radiation probe to lab stand with x-ray sensitive area of
probe within 10 inches + 2 inches of surface that supports lab stand.
Note: Maintain this distance to avoid reading errors due to backscatter.
2. Adjust x-ray focal spot to probe distance (SID) to 40 inches + 1/2 inch.
3. Open collimator blades to 5 inches x 5 inches as indicated on collimator dials for

the 40 inch setting. (Do NOT use a ruler to actually measure light field at plane
of probe.)
4. Center active area of radiation probe in collimator light field.
5. Turn on radiation meter and adjust for EXPOSURE (NOT RATE) readings.
6. Turn ON the AMX-4, set to 60 kVp and 40 mAs, and make six warm-up expoĆ
sures. (Note that this warmup procedure is also performed in factory prior to sigĆ
nature testing.)
7. Clear reading from radiation meter to get display of ZERO.
PROCEDURE Refer to Form 1 of this direction for recording data for the XĆRay Generator Signature
Test, and proceed as follows:
Note: Before making any xĆray exposures, always make sure to reset radiation meter
to display ZERO.
Note: Do not make any xĆray exposures while the WAIT message on AMXĆ4 is disĆ
played.
1. Set the AMXĆ4 unit to 60 kVp and 40 mAs.
a. Verify that the 2.5 mm aluminum filter is NOT in xĆray beam.

b. Verify that radiation meter displays ZERO.
c. Make an xĆray exposure and record the mR reading in appropriate place on
Form 1.
d. Place the 2.5 mm aluminum filter into the slots at bottom of collimator, in orĆ
der to completely block xĆray beam.
e. Reset radiation meter to display ZERO.
f. Make another xĆray exposure and record the mR reading in appropriate place
on Form 1.
g. Reset radiation meter to display ZERO.
h. Remove aluminum filter from collimator.
8-29
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
ILLUSTRATIONă2
SETĆUP OF RADIOGRAPHIC PROBE FOR XĆRAY GENERATOR SIGNATURE TEST
TRANSVERSE (LATERAL)
(LEFT KNOB)
SLOTS FOR 2.5 MM

ALUMINUM FILTER
PUT CENTER
OF ACTIVE LONGITUDINAL
(BLACK) AREA (RIGHT KNOB)
OF PROBE IN
CENTER OF
LIGHT FIELD. 40 INCHES +1/2 INCH
FROM FOCAL SPOT
TO AXIS OF PROBE
5 INCH
SETTING
LONGITUDINAL
LIGHT
FIELD
5 INCH
SETTING
TRANSVERSE 10 INCHES
(LATERAL) +2 INCHES
TO AXIS
OF PROBE
8-30
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
2. Repeat Step 1 of procedure, except with the AMXĆ4 unit set to 125 kVp and 8 mAs.
3. Referring to data recorded for Steps 1 and 2, calculate the X-Ray Generator SigĆ
nature Test ratios at both kVp settings, by dividing exposure value with the alumiĆ
num by exposure value without the aluminum. Record these ratios on Form 1.
4. For both kVp settings, calculate the difference of field test and factory test ratios,
and record these ratio differences in right-hand column of X-Ray Generator
Signature Test chart on Form 1. The ratio differences MUST NOT EXCEED the
specification limit of 0.020.
5. If neither ratio difference exceeds specification limit of 0.020, then jump to Section
5 of this direction. If any ratio difference exceeds 0.020, then continue with Step
6.
6. Continue with this step only if any ratio difference exceeds 0.020. Check set-up
and rerun X-ray Generator Signature Test beginning at Step 1 of procedure, as
one re-try is allowed per flowchart of Illustration 1. Record the new data, ratios,
and ratio differences in Comments Section of Form 1.
7. If neither re-try ratio difference exceeds specification limit of 0.020, then jump
to Section 5 of this direction. If any re-try ratio difference exceeds 0.020, then
continue with step 8.
8. Continue with this step only if there is any re-try failure. Do the kVp accuracy,
mAs metering accuracy, reproducibility of exposure for nonĆAEC Mode and (if
applicable) for AEC mode, and Beam Quality HHS tests of Sections 5-2, 5-3,
5-4 and 5-5 of AMX-4 Installation Direction 46-017205, 46-017325,
46-017496, or 2115678-100.
Note: If any of these HHS tests fails, then recalibrate AMX-4 Generator per Section
3-3 of AMX-4 Calibration Direction 46-017206, 46-017326, 46-017497
or 2115679-100. Then re-do the kVp accuracy, mAs metering accuracy, reĆ
producibility of exposure for nonĆAEC Mode and (if applicable) for AEC
mode, and Beam Quality HHS Tests of Sections 5-2, 5-3, 5-4 and 5-5 of
AMX-4 Installation Direction 46-017205, 46-017325, 46-017496, or
2115678-100.
9. Record final HHS results on the mobile x-ray HHS Form F3382MX under kVp
Accuracy," Generator mAs Specification Accuracy," Reproducibility of ExpoĆ
sure" for nonĆAEC Mode and (if applicable) for AEC mode, and Beam Quality
(Half Value Layer)," respectively.
Note: Do NOT re-do X-Ray Generator Signature Test after performing HHS test.
8-31
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
SECTION 5
COLLIMATOR ALIGNMENT SIGNATURE TEST
SET-UP Set-up for the Collimator Alignment Signature Test. Refer to Illustration 3 for the folĆ
lowing:
Note: If you do not have an MDH meter, you must do field test with x-ray film per
HHS test of Section 5-7 Collimator Alignment and SID" of AMX-4 InstalĆ
lation Direction 46-017205, 46-017325, 46-017496, or 2115678-100 INĆ
STEAD of doing Collimator Alignment Signature Test. (Refer to flowchart of
Illustration 1.) For this case, record test results on AMX-4 HHS Form
F3382MX under Manual Collimator," and then jump to Section 6 of this DiĆ
rection 46-017401.
(Also, the field engineer may use the option of testing the collimator with x-
ray anyway, even if MDH meter is available.)
1. Get the MDH fluoroscopic radiation probe, and draw a pencil line across middle
of the disc-shaped sensor on top side of disc (in the direction parallel to length
of the shaft that supports disc-shaped sensor), per Illustration 3.
(The purpose of this pencil line is to divide the detector sensor into TWO EQUAL
HALVES.)
2. Attach the fluoroscopic radiation probe to lab stand with x-ray sensitive area of
probe within 10 inches + 2 inches of surface that supports lab stand.
Note: Maintain this distance to avoid reading errors due to backscatter.
3. Adjust x-ray focal spot to probe distance (SID) to 40 inches + 1/2 inch.
Note: There are four different combinations of probe location/collimator opening

geometries that will be specified in the procedure. These are shown in IllustraĆ
tions 4 through 7, which will be referred to at the appropriate times during proĆ
cedure.
Note: Best results are obtained with no background (ambient) light, (that is, with
the room dark), when setting light field positioning. Refer to Detail A" of IlĆ
lustration 3 for appearance and where to set.
4. Set AMX-4 unit to 50 kVp and 50 mAs.
Do NOT change this kVp - mAs technic for the remainder of Collimator AlignĆ
ment Signature Test.
5. Do NOT use the 2.5 mm aluminum filter for any of the Collimator Alignment SigĆ
nature Test.
6. Reset radiation meter to display ZERO.
8-32
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
ILLUSTRATIONă3
SETĆUP OF MDH FLUOROSCOPIC PROBE FOR COLLIMATOR ALIGNMENT SIGNATURE TEST
(LEFT KNOB)
TYPICAL" LIGHT FIELD GEOMETRY.

SEE ILLUSTRATIONS 4 THROUGH 7
FOR DETAILS OF FOUR DIFFERENT
LIGHT FIELD GEOMETRIES FOR
COLLIMATOR ALIGNMENT TEST.
LONGITUDINAL
(RIGHT KNOB)
40 INCHES +1/2 INCH

FROM FOCAL SPOT
TO AXIS OF PROBE
8 INCH
SETTING
LONGITUDINAL
5 INCH 10 INCHES
SETTING +2 INCHES
TRANSVERSE TO AXIS
(LATERAL)
OF PROBE
DETAIL A"
ALIGNMENT OF LIGHT FIELD
DRAW PENCIL LINE

ON CENTER LINE
OF TOP OF PROBE
SET AND ALIGN RADIATION PROBE

ON BOUNDARY BETWEEN NO LIGHT
AND SOME LIGHT
8-33
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
PROCEDURE Refer to Form 1 of this direction for recording data for the Collimator Alignment SigĆ
nature Test, and proceed as follows:
Note: Before making any xĆray exposures, always make sure to reset radiation meter
to display ZERO.
Note: Do not make any xĆray exposures while the WAIT message on the AMXĆ4 is
displayed.
1. Test front collimator blade edge alignment as follows:
(The front edge is defined as the edge closest to you as you face collimator adjustĆ
ment knobs.)
a. Refer to Illustration 4 for Front Edge, Half Size Test."

Note: The word transverse" in the following steps is synonymous with the word latĆ
eral" that is used in the AMX-4 HHS form F3382MX.
b. Open collimator blades to 5 inches transverse (left-side collimator knob) and
8 inches longitudinal (right-side collimator knob), as indicated on collimator
dials for the 40 inch setting. (Do NOT use a ruler to actually measure light
field in plane of probe.)
c. Position probe in x-ray field per Illustration 4, such that front edge of light
field falls on the pencil line (that you marked on probe). Half of the probe is
in light field, and the other half is dark.
Note: The image of the light field edge in the plane of the probe is more easily located
with no background (ambient) light, (that is, with the room dark). This is the
preferred condition. Refer to Detail A" of Illustration 3 for how to set edge.
d. Verify that radiation meter displays ZERO.
e. Make an x-ray exposure and record the mR reading on the appropriate place
on Form 1.
f. Reset radiation meter to display ZERO.
g. Refer to Illustration 5 for Front Edge, Full Size Test."
h. Open the transverse blades (with left-side collimator knob) to 12 inches as
indicated on collimator dials for the 40 inch setting.
Do NOT move probe, and do NOT adjust longitudinal blades at this step.
i. Make another xĆray exposure and record the mR reading on Form 1.
j. Reset radiation meter to display ZERO.
2. Test leftĆside collimator blade edge alignment as follows:
(The left edge is the edge toward your left side as you face collimator adjustment
knobs.)
a. Refer to Illustration 6 for Left Edge, Half Size Test."

b. Open collimator blades to 8 inches transverse (left-side collimator knob) and
5 inches longitudinal (right-side collimator knob), as indicated on collimator
dials for the 40 inch setting.
8-34
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
ILLUSTRATIONă4 ILLUSTRATIONă5
LIGHT FIELD GEOMETRY FOR FRONT LIGHT FIELD GEOMETRY FOR FRONT
EDGE, HALF SIZE TEST EDGE, FULL SIZE TEST
(LOOKING DOWN ON PROBE) (LOOKING DOWN ON PROBE)
8 INCH
PUT THIS LIGHT 8 INCH SETTING
FIELD CENTER SETTING LONGITUDINAL
LINE ON CENTER LONGITUDINAL
OF PROBE
PROBE
FULLY
5 INCH EXPOSED
SETTING
TRANSVERSE 12 INCH
(LATERAL) SETTING
TRANSVERSE
(LATERAL)
ALIGN THIS
LIGHT FIELD
EDGE WITH
PENCIL LINE
ON PROBE
ILLUSTRATIONă6 ILLUSTRATIONă7
LIGHT FIELD GEOMETRY FOR LEFT LIGHT FIELD GEOMETRY FOR LEFT
EDGE, HALF SIZE TEST EDGE, FULL SIZE TEST
(LOOKING DOWN ON PROBE) (LOOKING DOWN ON PROBE)
PUT THIS
LIGHT FIELD
CENTER LINE
ALIGN THIS ON CENTER
OF PROBE PROBE
LIGHT FIELD
FULLY
EDGE WITH
EXĆ
PENCIL LINE
POSED
ON PROBE
8 INCH
8 INCH SETTING
SETTING TRANSVERSE
(LATERAL)
12 INCH
SETTING
5 INCH LONGITUDINAL
SETTING
LONGITUDINAL
8-35
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
c. Position probe in x-ray field per Illustration 6, such that the left edge of light
field falls on the pencil line. Half of the probe is in light field, and the other
half is dark.
d. Verify that radiation meter displays ZERO.
e. Make an x-ray exposure and record mR reading on appropriate space on
Form 1.
f. Reset radiation meter to display ZERO.
g. Refer to Illustration 7 for Left Edge, Full Size Test."
h. Open longitudinal blades (with right-side collimator knob) to 12 inches as inĆ
dicated on collimator dials for the 40 inch setting.
Do NOT move probe, and do NOT adjust transverse blades at this step.
i. Make another x-ray exposure and record mR reading on Form 1.
j. Reset radiation meter to display ZERO.
3. Referring to data recorded in Steps 1 and 2, calculate the Collimator Alignment

Signature Test ratios for both the front and left blade alignments, by dividing expoĆ
sure value for Half Size Test by exposure value for Full Size Test. Record these raĆ
tios on Form 1.
4. For both the front and left blade alignments, calculate the difference of field test
and factory test ratios, and record these ratio differences in right-hand column
of Collimator Alignment Signature Test chart on Form 1. The ratio differences
MUST NOT EXCEED the specification limit of 0.065.
5. If neither ratio difference exceeds ratio specification limit of 0.065, then jump to
Section 6 of this direction. If any ratio difference exceeds 0.065, then continue with
Step 6.
6. Continue with this step only if any ratio difference exceeds 0.065. Check setting
and rerun Collimator Alignment Signature Test beginning at Step 1 of procedure,
as one re-try is allowed per flowchart of Illustration 1. Record new data, ratios,
and ratio differences in Comments Section on Form 1.
7. If neither re-try ratio exceeds specification limit of 0.065, then jump to Section
6 of this direction. If any re-try ratio difference exceeds 0.065, then continue with
Step 8.
8. Continue with this step only if there was any re-try failure. Do HHS test of Section
5-7 of AMX-4 Installation Direction 46-017205, 46-017325, 46-017496, or
2115678-100.
Note: If this HHS test fails, then realign collimator with alignment tool
46-166390G1 and/or replace collimator. Then re-do HHS test of Section
5-7 of AMX-4 Installation Direction 46-017205, 46-017325, 46-017496,
or 2115678-100.
9. Record final HHS results on the mobil x-ray HHS Form F3382MX under ManuĆ
al Collimator."
Note: Do NOT re-do Collimator Alignment Signature Test after performing HHS
test.
8-36
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
SECTION 6
FINAL STEPS
1. By now, Form 1 of this direction should have been completely filled out.
If you have any comments on the Signature Tests, please write them in space proĆ
vided on bottom of Form 1.
2. Also by now, the appropriate part(s) of the mobile X-ray HHS Form F3382MX
should have been filled out if any one or more of the following conditions apply:
a. If AMX-4 unit failed the XĆRay Generator Signature Test (one re-try is alĆ
lowed before considering test to be a failure, per flowchart of Illustration 1),
you must have Form F3382MX filled out under the following: kVp AccuraĆ
cy," Generator mAs Specification Accuracy," Reproducibility of ExpoĆ
sure" for non-AEC mode and (if applicable) for AEC mode, and Beam
Quality (Half Value Layer)."
b. If AMX-4 unit failed the Collimator Alignment Signature Test (one re-try
is allowed before considering test to be a failure, per flowchart of Illustration
1), you must have Form F3382MX filled out under Manual Collimator."
c. If an MDH meter was not available, (or if you chose to test with x-ray film
anyway, even if MDH meter was available), you must have Form F3382MX
filled out under Manual Collimator."
d. If HHS testing is required by customer, you must have Form F3382MX comĆ
pletely filled out.
3. If the AMX-4 unit could not pass either the XĆRay Generator Signature Test and/
or Collimator Alignment Signature Test, then do as follows:
If you had to make any repairs, adjustments, or reĆcalibration to this AMXĆ4
unit in order to pass HHS testing, please describe in Comments" section on
bottom of Form 1.
8-37
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
4. Complete and file Assembler's Report, Federal Form FD2579.

File Blue Installer's Copy with appropriate region filing office.
Mail: White Federal Copy
Yellow State Copy
Pink Purchaser's Copy
5. Send the following test data (with AMX-4 Serial Number filled in on each docuĆ
ment) to appropriate region filing office:
Factory HHS Test Data
Filled-in Form 1
Form F3382MX (filled-in in requested places), if required in any one or
more of Steps 2.a, 2.b, 2.c, or 2.d above, and/or if required by the following
note:
Note: If a Mobile-Aid AEC is factory installed on this generator, look at the furĆ
nished factory HHS test data to verify that AEC HHS tests (Reproducibility
of Exposure, AEC Mode" and AEC Minimum Exposure Time") were done at
the factory. If so, only the Mobil-Aid AEC calibration needs to be performed
in the field during the initial installation of the AMX.
Note: If a Mobil-Aid AEC is field installed on this generator, HHS testing for the
AEC function must be done in the field. A copy of Form F3382MX filled in for
AEC Minimum Exposure Time" and for the AEC Mode portion of ReproĆ
ducibility of Exposure" must be sent to the appropriate region filing office.
This is regardless of whether or not Form F3382MX is required for the generaĆ
tor and collimator functions.
6. Complete and file Product Locator Cards with appropriate region filing office.
Use salmon colored envelope to mail installation set with red stripe.
Note: Do NOT send any copies of Form 1 or Form F3382MX to headquarters.
8-38
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
FORM 1 Ċ SIGNATURE TESTS DATA SHEET
FOR AMXĆ4 SERIAL NUMBER _____________________________
XĆRAY GENERATOR SIGNATURE TEST

Radiographic Probe (7/8 dia) @ 40 inches SID
FACTORY TEST FIELD TEST FIELD AND FACTORY
ALUMINUM RATIO ALUMINUM RATIO RATIO DIFFERENCE
(Difference must not
2.5 MM/ 2.5 MM/ exceed 0.020.
kVp mAs NONE 2.5 MM NONE NONE 2.5 MM NONE See Note below.)
60 40
125 8
COLLIMATOR ALIGNMENT SIGNATURE TEST

50 kVp @ 50 mAs with Fluoro Probe (4.5 dia.) @ 40 inches SID
FACTORY TEST FIELD TEST FIELD AND FACTORY
LIGHT FIELD RATIO LIGHT FIELD RATIO RATIO DIFFERENCE
(Difference must not
exceed 0.065.
POSITION 1/2 FULL HALF/FULL 1/2 FULL HALF/FULL See Note below.)
FRONT
LEFT
MODEL OF RADIATION METER USED IN FIELD TEST: _________________________________

FACTORY TEST: BY____________________________________ DATE _________________
FIELD TEST: BY____________________________________ DATE _________________
Note: If any signature test ratio difference exceeds specification limits (i.e., 0.020 for X-Ray Generator Signature
Test, or 0.065 for Collimator Alignment Signature Test), then check set-up, and rerun that test. Record the
new data, ratios, and ratio differences in Comments Section below. In case of a retest failure, follow the logic
of flowchart of Illustration 1.
Comments (if appropriate) on Signature Tests, HHS tests (if performed), and any other problems relative to
acceptance testing for this AMX-4 unit:
8-39
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0
8-40
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0
8-41
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0
AUTO TRANSFORMER TAP RELAYS FOR AMX–4

(All calculations are for an ideal transformer)
+
NP1 P1
B NS1
+ BATT TOTAL
NS2
NP2 P2
–
No. of turns in autotransform-

er TOTAL PEAK TO PEAK VOLTAGE = P1 + P2
NP1 = NP2 = 29 turns
NS1
NSNOTAPS = 10 turns P1 = 2 (+Batt) : NS1 = NSNO + NS what taps
NP1 (windings) are in
NSK1 = 2 turns
N2K2 = 4 turns
NS2
NSK3 = 8 turns P2 = 2 (+Batt) : NS2 = NSNO + NS selected taps
NP2 except K1, K2, K3
NSK4 = 8 turns
Note: K4, K5, K6 will only come
N2K5 = 16 turns in one at a time
NSK6 = 20 turns
Example 1
Battery Voltage + 113v
TOTAL PEAK TO PEAK VOLTAGE IS P1 + P2
P1 = K4 K5 K6 OFF = 78v
K4 ON = 140v K1 = 16v
K5 ON = 203v K2 = 31v
K6 ON= 233v K3 = 62v
PICK ONLY ONE Pick any combina-

tion
& add together
P2 = K4 K5 K6 OFF = 78v
K4 ON = 140v
K5 ON = 203v
K6 ON = 233v
Assume TAPS 1,3,5 are in
P1 = 16v + 62v + 203 = 281 P1 + P2 = TOTAL P to P
P2 = 203 281 + 203 = 484 (OVER)
8-42
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0
Example 2
+ BATT during exposure drops to 104 volts with taps 1, 2, 4 pulled in
10 + 2 + 4 + 8 = 172.1
P1 = 2 (104v)
29
P1 + P2 = 172.1 + 129.1 = 301.2
10 + 8 = 129.1
P2 = 2 (104v)
29
NSEC 11,293 + 11,293 22,586 594.4
HV Transformer turns ratio = =
NPRI 38 38 1
HV Transformer is a step–up 1 : 594.4
(P1 + P2) = 301.2 X 594.4 = 179023.8 Since this is full wave rectified ÷ 2
179023.8
= 89.5 kVp
2
D. Voigt
R. Fillet
1/18/91
8-43
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0
8-44
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0
AMX-4 RELIABILITY PHASE-INS
NEW ITEM PART # DATE Serial Number
1. New Column 46-286991G1 FW-43 '89 247496WK3

2. Drive Amp Board 46-232836G2 FW-50 '89 253373WK5
3. Rotor Board 46-232786G2 FW-51 '89 255707WK2
4. New LVLE 46-302350G1 FW-2 '90 256921WK8
5. Drive Handle 46-302276G1 FW-3 '90 256918WK4
6. Display Control 46-264982G1 FW-3 '90 256918WK1
7. 1kHz Board 46-264984G1 FW-5 '90 257797WK1
8. Fil/kVp Board 46-264986G1 FW-5 '90 257797WK1
9. CPU Board (Rev B) 46-264974G1 FW-5 '90 257797WK1
10. New Base 46-302158G1 FW-5 '90 258616WK2
11. New Generator 46-302322G1 FW-9 '90 263675WK1
12. New Charger Board 46-288034G1 FW-14 '90 257816WK9
13. (Rev C) CPU 46-264974G1 FW-14 '90 257816WK9
14. New Arm 46-302156G2 FW-21 '90 265995WK1
15. Battery Boots/
Insulators/Labels FW-3 '90 256922WK6
16. New Collimator Lock Switches 46-303297G1 FW-1 '91 285499WK0
17. New Molded Key 46-315031P1 FW-23 '91 298560WK4
18. Spring Castors 46-303780P1 FW-47 '91 316718WK6
19. G151 Battery Casing 46-270889P2 FW-50 '91 318620WK2
20. Delrin Latch Pin 46-315591G1 FW-3 '92 320538WK2
Battery Boots @ Breaker & Field

Light Tap Change FW-24 '89 237951WK9
NOTE: Old Style Base Requiring Rework for P5 Wheel Assembly FW-2 '88
8-45
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0
AMX 4 SERVICE NOTE HISTORY
SN NAME TITLE COMMENTS

SN3129 System Test for HHS Update for AMX 4 VALID - Although mostly replaced by the Signature Test.
SN3131 Circuit Breaker Trips OBSOLETE - This has not happened with units since
the MURATA-ERIE LVLE, Jan 90.
SN3132 High Battery Voltage Prompt OBSOLETE - The batteries since FMI 10289 & 10291
are charged at a lower voltage, therefore this message
shouldn't be seen.
SN 3133 Replacement Key Switch VALID - This number will cross up to the new key switch
46-303993G1.
SN3134 Battery Cables VALID-However, old battery cables should no longer be
used. These batteries have not been available since
early 1988. If you have old style cables, order new set
46-270967G2 for proper lug size; 1/4" on both ends.
SN3135 Replacement Collimator Lamp VALID
SN3144 Corner Pad Replacement VALID-for older units. New units have PEM nuts that do
not require drilling.
SN3155 Removal of AMX 4 Yellow Charging OBSOLETE-All labels should have been removed by
Label now.
SN3168 French or English Display VALID-Jumpers and Switches added to new installation
manual.
SN3176 Loose X-Ray Tube Collimator Port Plate VALID-SAFETY!!! SAFETY!!! SAFETY!!!
SAFETY!!! SAFETY!!! SAFETY!!! SAFETY!!!
SAFETY!!! SAFETY!!!
SN3213 High Voltage Charge Time OBSOLETE-Changed parameters with FMI 10289 &
10291. Refer to AMX 4 Diag. for correct data in the
locations listed. Now part of the defaults.
SN3223 Base Assembly OBSOLETE-Block has been replaced by caliper in new
wheel kit.
SN3227 AMX 4 Bar Graph Update OBSOLETE-Location 19F is now 2C88. Changed by
FMI 10289 & 10291 and later firmware.
SN3249 CPU Jumpers and Switches VALID-However, does not include firmware in new
production. See REV 11 Calibration manual.
SN3250 AMX 4 Bar Graph Fall-off VALID-Although the FMI has closed, bad batteries may
still show up in the set.
SN3253 AMX 4 Battery Testing Procedure VALID-Single cells can be replaced in battery packs
less than 12 months old. When testing the batteries
outside the AMX, turn on Load box for 15 min. When
total voltage is 107vDC, the measure each cell with load
still on. They should be within 0.08vDC of each other.
SN3255 AMX 4 HV Transformer Oil Leak Fix VALID-Fixed on forward production. Renewal parts
updated.
SN3256 FMI 10289 & 10291 OBSOLETE-FMI is closed. Firmware rev is valid.
SN3259 AMX 4 Merchandise Return Label OBSOLETE-This was a short term program to identify
recurring problems. THANKS!!
8-46
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0
AMX 4 SERVICE NOTE HISTORY(continued)
SN3262 Collimator Lock Release Microswitch VALID-The kit is still around.

Replacement
SN3264 AMX 4 Shuts Off or Trips Breaker for No VALID-All boards should have been upgraded by now.
Apparent Reason FMI is closed.
SN3265 AMX 4 Circuit Breaker Trips During VALID-Old units may not have the fishpaper around C5.
Exposure On new production units.
SN3278 AMX 4 Firmware Differences for VALID-for firmware 46-303272G1/46-303273G1 and
Applications & Calibration 46-303815G1/46-303816G1
SN3279 AMX 4 Battery Aging Disable VALID-Service Note is included with all new production
units.
SN3280 AMX 4 Fuse Change VALID-US and Japanese units only (120VAC)
SN3288 AMX 4 Replacement Coil Cord VALID
SN3298 AMX New Plastic Molded Key VALID
SN3311 AMX 4 New Latch Pin Kit VALID-New latch pin included with Hall Effect Sensor kit
SN3312 Loss of Tube Detent VALID-on about 150 units
SN3313 AMX 4 Collimator Renewal Parts VALID
SN3319 AMX 4 Spring Castor VALID-Introduction of castors
SN3335 AMX 4 Main Circuit Breaker Wiring VALID-For all 46-270157 & early 46-315161 series
Correction units up to serial number 333784WK7
SN3338 AMX 4 Charge Issues VALID-Battery System Troubleshooting Guide
EXCEPT data base values! Check for current firmware
and batteries.
SN3341 New AMX 4 Film Bin VALID-Addressed potential finger pinch issue
SN3397 AMX 4 Latch Switch Assembly VALID
SN3407 AMX 4 Hall Effect Latch Switch-Loose VALID-on unit serials 389053WK0 to 39147WK1 and
Connections on AMX1 A2 TS2 Hall Effect Latch kits shipped from SPO before June 11,
1993.
SN3411 AMX 4 ESD Protection Inspection VALID-Up to models 46-329467 series units
SN3493 AMX 4 Front Caster Lubrication VALID-on units shipped between April 15 and June 24,
1994
SN3504 AMX 4 Columns - Flaking Issues VALID-on units shipped between February 1991 thru
March 1994.
8-47
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0
FMI HISTORY
10220
First major FMI
-Check horizontal arm; if failed do FMI 10221
Start 5-88 -Check batteries; if failed do FMI 10222
End 8-88 -Modify 1kHz board
-Change firmware to G6 & G7
-Add ground lead to transformer
-Change key switch
-Check generator for loose hardware
-Strengthen apron hanger
-Fix bumper end caps
-Add caster plates
-Change wheel bolts
-Add counterweight shims
-Realign park latch
10221
Horizontal arm replacement
Need if test failed per FMI 10220
Start 5-88
End 7-89
10222
Battery replacement
Needed if test failed per FMI 10220
Start 5-88
End 7-89
10231
Drive control upgrade
-Changed circuitry to monitor drive current feedback instead of drive command
Start 10-88 feedback
End 3-89 -Repositioned filament current filter capacitor, C6
-Changed firmware to G7 & G8
10250
Battery charger algorithm upgrade
-FMI installed when batteries are replaced
Start 2-89 -Change firmware to G8 & G9
End 8-89 -Introduced 'Extended Recharge' message
10257
Boot installation and field light tap setting
-Installed boots on exposed lugs of circuit breaker
Start 11-89 -Changed tap on collimator light transformer
End 3-90
10264
Battery insulation
-Adds insulator boots to wires on battery terminals
Start 4-90 -Adds sheets of insulating material on top and bottom of battery compartment
End 5-91 -Add a second ground stud for easy removal of battery ground
8-48
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0
10271 CANCELLED - REISSUED AS 10289

New battery charger
-Install new charger board
Start 5-90 -Change firmware to 46-302687G1 & 46-302688G1
End 11-90 -Change DATA BASE values address 184H data 24H address 19FH data 2CECH
10289 REPLACES 10271

New battery charger
-Install new charger board
Start 8-90 -Change firmware to 46-303273G1 and 46-303272G1
End 8-91 -Change database value address 19FH to 2C88 for bar graph
10291 PROM CHANGEOUT (OPTIONAL)

-For units that have firmware 46-302687G1 and 46-302688G1 already installed
from
Start 10-90 the factory and have new charge board 46-288034G1
End 5-91 -For units that have had FMI 10271 performed
10359 REPLACEMENT OF BAD CAPACITORS IN L.V.L.E.

Start 8-90 Inspect MURATA-ERIE L.V.L.E. power supplies for NIPPON CHEMICON
capacitors
End 8-91 -Replace capacitors if suspect ones are found
10464A AMX-4 MOBIL-AID AEC Location & Identification

-Find AMX units with the AEC optional installed
-Enter them in the Product Locator File
10465 AMX-4 MOBIL AID Rating Plate Installation

-Install duplicate rating plate based on information supplied by FMI 10464A
10515A AMX-4 MOBIL AID AEC New Paddle Holder Installation

-Install new design paddle holder
10519 AMX 4 Tube Units Installation of New Rating Plates

Start 10-92 -Install rating plates on tubes with GE-CGR inserts in which the print
End 4-93 will not come off.
10545 AMX 4 Replacement of Firmware

Starts 3-93 -Introduced firmware 46-316685G1/46-316686G1
End 10-93 -Only for 46-264974G1 CPU boards only
-Contains battery charging algorithm fix for Hawker batteries.
10546 AMX 4 Replacement of CPU board

Start 3-93 -Included firmware in 10545 with new CPU board since f/w was not backwards
End 10-93 compatible with the older CPU boards
8-49
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0
8-50
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0
AMX 4 VINTAGE TABLE
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Item Old Number New Number Comments
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
AMX 4 Unit ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
46-270157
Series
46-315161
Series
Contains new generator panel layout, new capacitor
module, new charger board, 1 Khz board & PWR FAIL
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ DETECT harness.
G1 UL & CSC Listed (US & Canada, others)
G2 IEC (Eupope)
G3 French Homoligation (Currently using G2)
G4 Japan JIS Unit w/Short Column
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
G5
G6
Japan JIS Unit w/Tall Column
IEC (Europe) Unit w/Short Column (intended for E.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Germany)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
AMX 4 Unit
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
46-315161 46-329267 Added new Gates batteries and battery test harness.
Series Series Also contains modifications for EMC compliance.
G1 thru G6- Same as above
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Horizontal Arm
46-270159G1 46-302156G1 Old arm had problems with internal chain & bracket
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
assembly. Current arms have new adhesive on the
wear strips. Part of kit
46-303170G1
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Column ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
46-270158G1 46-286991G1 Old column had no wear strips & the bearings would
dent the area by the exp guide where the tube is
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
parked. New columns have wear strip and larger
bearings, plus stronger rotational brake. Recent
problems with column channel flaking and bending.
Changed to different bearings and harder steel. Part
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ of kit 46-250216G1.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Drive Wheels
46-270166P4 46-270166P5
46-270165P6
Old wheel had basic rotation problems: the mounting
screw would break, causing the wheel to 'fall off' due
to reotational torque when rolling over a threshold.
New wheel has a caliper which removes the rotaional
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
torque rfrom the mounting shaft. Part of kit
46-250217G1.
P6 Wheel added screw mounted hub caps.
Base 46-270193G1 & 46-270193G3 Old base had two bolts each side for wheel mount,
G2 new one has four olts each side; general
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
improvements. Part number crosses to complete base
assembly with motors, wheels, spring castors, 'flower
pot', trim. Does not include batteries. Base kit is
46-250221G1.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
CPU Board
46-232828G1 46-264974G1 &
G2
Removed serial input option; added 2nd NV Ram chip,
3 write protect options, power supply monitor into
analog mux, rearranged board for improved noise
immunity. Backwards compatible. G2 added new
SmartGauge firmware.
8-51
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0
AMX 4 VINTAGE TABLE (continued)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Battery Charger
46-232842G1 46-288786G1 & Removed 0.3 sec turn-on delay circuitry. Add Power
46-288034G1 G2 Fail Detect signal to board. G2 board is EMC
compliant. Backwards compatible.
Rotor Control
46-232786G1
46-232786G2 Changed diodes around relays and some resistor
values. Backwards compatible.
1kHz Board
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
46-264984G1
46-232828G1
46-288746G1 Backwards compatible.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Fil/kVp Board
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
46-232840G1
46-264986G1 FET Drivers changed U183 from TSC426 to TSC4426;
X-Ray ON Circuit noise immunity, used op amp
instead of transistor; R188 to non-inductive.
Backwards compatible.
Drive power Amp 46-232836G1
46-232836G2 Minor component changes; transparent. Backwards
compatible.
Display
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Controller
46-232830G1
46-264982G1 DC to DC converter change (VF supply), changed
resistor values. Backwards compatible.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
LVLEÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Cord Reel
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
46-219987G1
46-270724P1 46-302350P1 & Old pwer supply caused CPU memory corruption
P2 problems, after KEY SW is turned off there might be
100ms delay from 'PWR DWN RST' to +5V decay.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Vendor was Power Designs Inc.
New LVLE PS gives about 0.5 sec delay. Improved
reliablity. Current vedor is Murata Erie/Ascent.
P2 has changes for EMC compliance.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Backward compatible.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Drive Handle
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
46-270275G1
46-302276G1 Redesigned drive enable switch assembly; mounted
new-style switches to frame instead of drive enable
bar. Also mounted handle connectors to support bar.
Backwards compatible.
Horizontal Arm 46-250255G1 Kit inclues new brake cable and strain relief bushings.
Electric Lock The new bushings are larger than the old and will not
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Cable Kit
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
crush the cable when installed or removed. Must
enlarge 3/8" holes to 1/2" holes on older arms. Be
carefull how cable is draped inside of arm.
Collimator Lock 46-303376G1 Kit replaces the 2 switches in the collimator lock
Switch Kit handles for improved reliability. Unsolder ond
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
swtiches, solder new switces and drop in holders. See
service note 3262.
Transformer Oil
Leak Fix
46-303297P1 Install shim in cap to prevent oil leak caused when oil
splashes up through the air vent. See Service Note
3255.
Spring Castors
46-303780P1 Added springs for shock absorbtion. See Service
Note 3319.
Handswitch
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
46-270800G2
46-270800G3 &
G4
Added foam tape to increase switch mounting
strength. Added extra 0.1" of travel between PREP &
EXPOSE. Increased reliability.
G4-changed adhesive.
8-52
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Service Note 3278, September 6, 1991, Page 1 of 3
8-53
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-54
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-55
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Service Note 3335, August 26, 1992, Page 1 of 4
8-56
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-57
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-58
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-59
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Service Note 3338, July 31, 1992, Page 1 of 1
8-60
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: AMX4 Battery System Troubleshooting Guide, Page 1
Section 1
INTRODUCTION
1-1 PURPOSE
The purpose of this troubleshooting is to aid the Field Engineer in the troubleshooting and diagnosis of AMX 4 battery
SYSTEM problems.
Symptoms such as: Won't hold a charge", CHARGE COMPLETE when bargraph is at 50%, CHARGE COMPLETE in
15 minutes when the bargraph started at about 10% charge and circuit breaker tripping following CHARGE
COMPLETE may all be caused by one of the many components in the charging system. These components include;
Line plug/cord reel
Data base values
Fuses
Charger board
Isolation transformer/choke
LVLE power supply
Batteries, and battery cables.
1-2 FAILURE THEORY

The majority of the items listed represent high impedances in the charge circuitry that will keep the batteries from
getting a good charge. When this happens, the CPU is tricked into thinking the batteries have a good charge and then
will terminate the charge mode, prematurely, with CHARGE COMPLETE. Note that once some of these items are
checked for the first time, it may not be necessary to recheck them if the fast bargraph fall-off symptom reoccurs. If
the fast bargraph fall-off symptom reoccurs, the batteries should be retested as well as the charging system.
Battery failures range from shorted cells to weak cells. Shorted cells generally fail within the first 6 months from
manufacture. They are the `ten volters'. After CHARGE COMPLETE, the battery voltage should fall to about 116VDC. A
set with a bad cell will fall to about 114VDC in about 15 minutes after CHARGE COMPLETE. A shorted cell can
generally be measured no-load and will stand out from the rest of the batteries as being much lower in voltage. A
weak cell, in most cases, must be loaded down before it will show up. It will read about 11.4VDC when the others might
read 12.05VDC.
Breaker tripping after charging, while still plugged in, occurs when the open circuit battery voltage drops to 115VDC.
The length of time that the breaker will trip after CHARGE COMPLETE is determined by address 1A5, BREAKER TRIP
TIME. The default value is 3 hours. As mentioned above, the battery voltage should fall to about 116VDC after
CHARGE COMPLETE. Some batteries appear to be resistant to a charge and therefore don't get a good charge,
causing the battery voltage to drop faster than normal at CHARGE COMPLETE.
The following procedure will evaluate some possible fault areas causing the fast bargraph fall-off symptom.
1-3 REQUIRED TEST EQUIPMENT

Storage Oscilloscope
120Volt/1 200 Watt AMX 4 Load Fixture (Service Tool 46-302882G1
Digital Voltmeter (2 meters recommended)
Black Felt-tipped marker
AMX 4 Model Number AMX 4 Service Dir # AMX 4 Cal Dir #
46-2701 57G1, G2 & G3 46-017220 46-017206
46-270157G4 & G5 46-017328 46-107326
46-315161 series 46-017499 46-017497
Standard Field Service Tool Kit
Torque Wrench 46-282782P12 - 36 in-lbs (0.23 - 4.1 N-m)
8-61
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Section 2
INSPECT CORD REEL
The cord reel consists of a line plug, line cord and brushes. The integrity of the reel will be checked.
2-1 LINE PLUG

1. Turn off main breaker.
2. Remove the strain relief on the back of the plug.
3. Remove 3 screws holding the plug to the plug cover.
4. Verify that the BLK, WHT & GRN wires do not pull out of the plug and are securely fastened with the
holding screws.
5. Tighten if necessary.
6. Reassemble plug.
2-2 CORD REEL RESISTANCE

1. Check resistance of cord reel using an Ohm meter.
2. Connect one lead of the Ohm meter to the brass colored blade on the end of the charger plug.
Connect the other lead to A3TS3-2 (below charger board, behind the fuse bracket). Reading should
read less than 1 ohm
3. Slowly pull the cord reel all the way out and back in again. The meter reading should not change by
more than a few tenths of an ohm.
4. Next, connect one lead of the Ohm meter to the silver colored blade on the end of the charger plug.
Connect the other lead to A2TS3-1 (below charger board, behind the fuse bracket)). Reading should
read less than 1 ohm.
6. Connect one lead to the ground prong of the charger plug. Connect the other lead the main ground
stud. Reading should be less than 1 ohm.
2-3 CHECK CORD REEL CRIMPS

(Does not apply to IEC or French version AMX 4 units)
1. Check the crimps on the push-ons on the cord reel.
2. Remove the wires coming from the cord reel from the back of F1 and F2. It may be necessary to
remove the LVLE power supply to get at the back of the fuses.
3. Visually inspect the crimps. Check to see if the insulation has been crimped. If so, then reterminate
the wire(s) at this time.
4. Reinstall the black (or brown) wire to F1 the white (or blue) wire to F2.
5. Reinstall the LVLE, if previously removed.
8-62
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Section 3
3-1 CHECK DATA BASE LOCATIONS
1. Enter DATA BASE ACCESS and compare the data in the table below. If any data is different, make a
note and correct the data. This data is applicable to firmware revisions 46-30268G1 &
46-302688G1, 46-303272G1 & 46-303273G1 AND 46-303815g1 & 46-303816G1. Refer to
AMX 4 Diagnostics, Dir. 46-017202, Rev. 4, sec 10 or 11, depending on the firmware in the system
under evaluation.
ADDRESS DATA ADDRESS DATA

17E OF 189 O04B0-1388
17F 7C 18B 0258-05DC
180 28-3C 18D 02EE-04E2
181 0F-23 18F 00FA-02EE
182 AF-E1 191 1388-61A8
183 4B-7D 193 03E8-3A98
184 24 or 1A 197 09C4
185 82 199 02EE
186 NOT USED 19D 0000
187 NOT USED 19F 2C88
188 06 1A1 4E20-EA60
1A3 1F40-3A98
2. If location 19D does not have 0000 loaded in it, do so at this time. This will disable the battery aging
algorithm. For more information on this, see SERVICE NOTE 3279.
3. Check the revision of the firmware in the unit being evaluated and continue with checking the data
base according to the table below;
FIRMWARE REVISION LOOP TEST DATA BASE ACCESS DATA

46-302687G1/46- ADDRESS (NOT ACCPLICABLE) 2B & C0
302688G1 (FMI 10271) 52DH & 52EH
46-303272G1/46-
303273G1 (FMI 10289 &
FMI 10291)
46-30381G1/46- (NOT ADDRESS 2BC0
303816G1 (NEW APPLICABLE) C8DH
PRODUCTION)
NOTE: When in LOOP TEST, perform the READ function first to view the data in the locations listed under
LOOP TEST. If the data in either location is NOT 2BC0, then this may be the cause of the fast bargraph
fall-off problem for this particular area. If the data in the appropriate address in the table is NOT 2BC0,
then enter 2BC0 in that address at this time.
However, continue with this evaluation to determine other possible causes.
8-63
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Section 4
4-1 INSPECT FUSES AND FUSE HOLDERS
1. Turn off circuit breaker.
2. Remove the fuses, one at a time, from the fuse holder and inspect for dirt and corrosion. Use a
flashlight, if necessary, to look inside each fuse holder for corrosion.
3. Use the table below fo reference:
FUSE NAME FUNCTION RATING LOCATION

AMX1A2F1 & F2 LINE POWER 6AMP250V3AG ABOVE LVLE
AMX1A3F3 COLUMN BRAKES 2AMP250V3AG CHARGER MODULE
AMX1A3F4 & F5 BATTERY CHARGER 10AMP250V3AB CHARGER MODULE
AMX1A3F6 KEY SWITCH 0.5AMP250V3AG CHARGER MODULE
AMX1A3F7 COLLIMATOR LAMP 8AMP250V3AB CHARGER MODULE
AMX1A3F9 DRIVE MOTORS 15AMP250V3AB CPU TRAY OR IN
LINE HOLDER
AMX1A3F10 EMERGENCY 2AMP250V3AG CPU TRAY OR IN
MOTOR BRAKE LINE HOLDER
8-64
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Section 5
VOLTMETER/CHARGER CHECK
NOTE: IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT THE DVM USED IS IN CALIBRATION AND FUNCTIONING CORRECTLY.
A 1 VOLT ERROR CAN THROW OFF THE BARGRAPH BY 50% OR MORE!!
5-1 VOLTMETER
1. Enter the calibration mode per appropriate AMX 4 Calibration" Direction 46-017206, 46-017326, or
46-017497.
Select CAL VOLTMETER and proceed with the calibration.
2. Place DVM meter leads at the circuit breaker to the ground stud.
3. Enter the correct value if it does not agree with the DVM.
NOTE: If the initial voltage reading from the AMX 4 display differs from the DVM by more than 0.2 volts, this
could be the cause of the charging problems and/or fast bargraph fall-off. However, continue with the
checks in this document after the voltmeter calibration is complete.
5-2 CHARGER
1. Select CALIBRATE CHARGER and proceed with the calibration. Refer to the appropriate AMX 4
Calibration" Direction 46-017206, or 46-017497. You should get the 2 readings 1.2v and 2.4v on the
DVM. If you do not, replace the charger board.
2. Exit calibration and return to the applications mode.
5-3 LINE VOLTAGE TO CHARGER BRIDGE

1. Measure the customer's line voltage where the AMX 4 unit is normally plugged in for charging. The
line voltage must be within the following parameters:
105 to 132 for 120VAC nominal

2. Plug in the charger cord and enter the charge mode.

3. Measure the voltage on the charger bridge, A3TS2-4 to charger board A3A1J5-5.
Acceptable tange is 107-134VAC.
If not, suspect isolation transformer A3T3, choke A3L2, low line voltage, line cord and associated
wiring.
4. Unplug charger cord.
8-65
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Section 6
VERIFY FUNCTION OF CHARGER BOARD
NOTE: The batteries should have close to a full charge in them or this procedure could take a long time.
6-1 CHECK LVLE SUPPLIES DIRECTLY ON CHARGER BOARD!

1. Main breaker on. Turn on the key switch.
2. Place DVM across the following capacitors on the charger board;
Check +5VDC DVM across A1C50. +5VDC +/-0.1VDC
Check +15VDC DVM across A1C49. +15VDC +/-0.3VDC
Check -15VDC DVM across A1C25. -15VDC +/-0.3VDC
3. Connect DVM to TP1 on the Charger Board. If a second meter is available, connect it to TP4 of the
Charger Board; Ground on left side of A1C49.
NOTE: The batteries may be removed from the AMX unit at this time, but is not required for this evaluation.
Individual batteries will be monitored later.
4. Attach the load box to the AMX. Black lead to the ground stud, Red lead to the top terminalof the
circuit breaker.
5. Turn the dial of the load box to approx. 10 minutes. Push the button until the red light comes on.
6. Plug in the charger cord. This will charge the batteries while the load box is on. Verify that the unit
displays `CHARGING'.
7. Verify that TP1 voltage goes to -5VDC +/-0.5VDC about 15 seconds after the cord is plugged in.
This verifies that the correct command is being sent to the charger.
TP1 VOLTAGE
8. Move the DVM to TP4, if second meter is not available.

9. Read the voltage at TP4 of the charger board. This voltage should climb as soon as the TP1 voltage
is at 5VDC and stabilize at something less than 10VDC. This check that the errors amplifier is not
saturated.
TP4 VOLTAGE
10. Now measure the voltage across the SENSOR RESISTOR R1. This should be 6.25+/-0.25VDC.
(With a command of 5 volts, this should provide a current of 2.5 amps through the sense resistor (R1)
which should give a voltage of 6.25VDC across R1, current sense resistor.
SENSE RESISTOR VOLTAGE
8-66
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-67
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
11. Monitor the battery voltage by hooking the DVM between the ground stud and the top terminal of the
circuit breaker. Let the load box time out. When this happens, verify that the battery voltage rises at
least 1 volt. This shows that the load box indeed has an effect on the batteries.
12. Keep watching the battery voltage. When it gets to 127VDC, go to the next step.
13. In the meantime, hook your oscilloscope to TP6. Verify that the VCO is outputting close to the
following frequencies. These frequencies alternate continously during charging to tell the CPU the
charging status. See Ill. 1.
This is a 24VDC square wave signal.
Battery Voltage Freq. (sampled for 5 sec.), F1=Bat Voltage 65.15Hz See Ill.2
Charge Current Freq. (sampled for 1 sec.), F2=Cur. Sense R1 Voltage 922.6Hz See Ill.3
Battery Voltage Frequency Current Sense Frequency

R1 Voltage
125 8.144KHz 6.25 5.766KHz
124 8.078KHz 6.00 5.535KHz
123 8.013KHz 5.75 5.304KHz
Tolerance is +/-20%.
14. When the battery voltage gets to 127VDC, read the voltage across the sense resistor, R1. This voltage
should be greater than 4 volts (but less than 6.25).
SENSE RESISTOR VOLTAGE
8-68
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
15. Continue to monitor battery voltage and sense resistor voltage. Verify that the battery voltage
stabilizes at about 130VDC +/-2VDC, and the charge current slowly decreases.
NOTE: The charger will go to CHARGE COMPLETE when the voltage across R1~1.65VDC. However, it is
not necessary to charge the batteries to CHARGE COMPLETE at this time. Towards the end of the charge
cycle, the charger will appear to turn on and off, or cycle. This is normal.
8-69
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Section 7
7-1 CHECK BATTERIES
1. Remove the batteries from the battery compartment using the procedure of Section 6-1, Battery
Removal" from AMX 4 Service" Direction 46-017220, 46-017328, or 46-017499. Pay particular
attention to the tightness of the lugs when loosening them. Loose connections will cause problems.
2. Inspect the battery seam welds around the vent strip corners. They should not move or separate
when pryed upward with a fingernail or small screwdriver. If so, then that cell is defective.
3. Reconnect the batteries in series, plus-to-minus, on the floor, close enough to the AMX 4 so that
they can be connected to the unit.
NOTE: To prevent damage to the battery terminals, torque to 30 in-lbs +/-5in-lbs.
(3.39 N-m +/-0.57 N-m)
4. Connect BATT+ to the circuit breaker, connect BATT- to the ground stud.
5. Connect the load box across the batteries; Black clip to the ground stud and Red clip to the top lug
on the circuit breaker.
6. Number the cells with a felt tip marker, 1 through 9.
7. Measure the battery set voltage from the circuit breaker to the ground stud no-load and note the
voltage readings in table 7-1 in the back of this document.
8. Measure each cell (no-load) in order, 1 through 9 and record in table 7-1.
NOTE: The spread of individual battery voltages, no-load should be no more than 0.20 volts. If one
battery stands out (low voltage) in this manner, continue with the testing, paying attention to the loaded
voltage values.
9. Set the load box to 15 minutes. Push the START" button on the load box until the RUN" light on the
front of the fixture comes on. The RUN" light will come on when the fan is up to speed.
NOTE: Check that BOTH heating elements in the Battery Load Fixture are glowing, by looking into the
frontt side (the side with the time knob) of the fixture.
10. After about 60 seconds, measure each cell in order, 1-9 and record them in table 7-1. Also, note
the total battery voltages. Do this as quickly as possible.
11. When the total battery voltage gets to 107VDC, again measure each cell 1 through 9 and record in the
table. When complete, turn off the load box.
AVOID DISCHARGING THE BATTERIES BELOW 107VDC.
12. Review the data and refer to section 7-2 to identify possible bad batteries.
13. If one or 2 batteries have been identified as being defective mark them accordingly and reinstall the
set with the defective cells at the front by the battery compartment door. This will make is very easy
and quick to replace the defective batteries on the return trip.
8-70
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7-2 LOOK FOR BAD CELLS
All the batteries in the group should be very close to each other, loaded voltage wise; approx. 0.07VDC
(typical), highest reading to lowest reading. At 107VDC, each battery should read approx. 11.85VDC.
If 1 or 2 cells have been recently replaced, it is possible that both their loaded and unloaded voltage may
be slightly higher that the rest of the batteries. This is normal. This can be determined by checking the test
date on the label. An original set of batteries will all have the same test date.
A shorted cell will read about 10.5VDC (no-load). If there is a shorted cell, then that cell may be replaced
if the set is 12 months old or less. If the set of batteries is 12 to 16 months old, a single cell replacement can
be attempted with moderate success, but the battery system operation cannot be guaranteed.
A weak cell or a cell with a bad seam will read 11.6VDC or lower, when loaded.
If the difference for any battery (under load) is greater than 0.15VDC and the difference for all the other
batteries is less than 0.10VDC, then the battery with the large difference can be considered to have a single
bad cell and this battery should be replaced individidually.
When replacing a single battery, make sure that the voltage of the replacement battery is 0.10 to 0.40VDC
higher than the average voltage of the remaining eight original batteries. This must be done in order to ensure
proper equalization of the battery set. The new battery may have to be discharged a little, or the other
batteries can be charged to bring them closer together in voltage.
After replacing defective individual cells, force the unit into extended charge. See section 7-3 for this
procedure.
If you are not able to diagnose a problem in any of th areas covered by this guide, including a battey or batteries,
contact the National Support Center (NSC), at this time.
7-3 FORCING AN EXTENDED CHARGE

1. Write DATA 15H in address NO TRICKLE COUNTER via LOOP TEST, based on the firmware revision
in your unit.
WRITE DATA
FMI FIRMWARE
46-302687G1/46-302688G1 WRITE DATA
46-303272G1/46-303273G1 15 H
LOOP TEST
ADDRESS 546
PRODUCTION FIRMWARE
46-303815G1/46-303816G1 WRITE DATA
LOOP TEST 15 H
ADDRESS CA5
NOTE: The next time the unit is plugged in, the extended charge will be performed. It is important that the
unit be allowed to complete the charge. Therefore the units should be located such that it will not be
disturbed until CHARGE COMPLETE is displayed.
8-71
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
CELL NO-LOAD 1ST LOADED 2ND LOADED

NUMBER VOLTAGE VOLTAGE VOLTAGE DIFFERENCE
TOTAL SET
VOLTAGE
1
TABLE 7-1
8-72
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-73
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Service Note 3397, May 28, 1993, Page 1 of 1
8-74
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Service Note 3407, June 16, 1993, Page 1 of 2
8-75
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Service Note 3407, June 16, 1993, Page 2 of 2
8-76
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Service Note 3411, March 1, 1993, Page 1 of 1
8-77
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-78
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-79
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Service Note 3504, October 3, 1994, Page 1 of 2
8-80
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Service Note 3504, October 3, 1994, Page 2 of 2
8-81
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0
8-82
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017305 AMX-4 Column Replacement, Rev. 2, Title Page
8-83
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017305 AMX-4 Column Replacement, Rev. 2, Page i
8-84
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017305 AMX-4 Column Replacement, Rev. 2, Page iii
8-85
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017305 AMX-4 Column Replacement, Rev. 2, Page 1
8-86
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-87
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-88
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-89
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-90
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-91
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-92
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-93
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-94
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-95
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-96
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-97
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-98
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-99
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-100
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017306 AMX-4 Wheel Replacement Instruction, Rev. 2, Title Page
GE Medical Systems
Technical
Publications
Direction 46-017306
Revision 2
AMX-4
Wheel Replacement Instruction
Copyright 1989, 1990, 1993 By General Electric Co.
8-101
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017306 AMX-4 Wheel Replacement Instruction, Rev. 2, Page i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
REVISION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
1 GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2 MOTOR, BRAKE AND DRIVE WHEEL

ASSEMBLIES REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3 INSTALLATION OF DRIVE WHEEL KIT

INTO NEW STYLE BASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4 INSTALLATION OF DRIVE WHEEL KIT

INTO OLD STYLE BASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
5 MOTOR AND BRAKE REASSEMBLY

AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
8-102
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017306 AMX-4 Wheel Replacement Instruction, Rev. 2, Page iii
REVISION HISTORY

0 Dec. 6, 1989 Initial release.
1 Dec. 5, 1990 Revised to include kit installation into old style base.
2 Jan. 8, 1993 Changed drawing number of wheel and axle assembly to 46-270166P6.

Title Page 2
Damage in
Transportation -
Dir. 46-013861 -
i 2
ii Blank
iii 2
1 thru 13 2
8-103
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017306 AMX-4 Wheel Replacement Instruction, Rev. 2, Page 1
AMX-4 WHEEL REPLACEMENT
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This kit 46-250217G1 contains a newly designed replacement wheel assembly. For this
reason even if only one existing wheel assembly has failed, both must be replaced, thereĆ
fore two wheel kits have been sent. This kit supersedes and replaces wheel P.N.
46-270166P1, P2, P3, P4 or P5. This kit will work on both old and new style base assemĆ
blies. It will prevent future wheel assembly failures. Refer to Table 1-1 for kit parts list.
Refer to Table 1-2 for a list of necessary tools.
TABLE 1-1
WHEEL KIT 46-250217G1 PARTS LIST
ITEM PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY.
1 46-270166P6 WHEEL AND AXLE ASSEMBLY 1
2 46-286973G1 CALIPER ASSEMBLY 1
3 46-286978P1 SUPPORT ANGLE (SILVER) 1
4 46-302160P1 SUPPORT ANGLE (BLACK) 1
5 46-302162G1 MOTOR ASSEMBLY 1
6 46-302163P1 MOTOR MOUNT PLATE 1
7 46-170498P169 SCREW, CAP 4

10-32 x 1.5 LG HEX SOC HD
8 46-170012P40 NUT, LOCK 1/4-20 4
9 12-275 WASHER 4
0.26 ID x 0.75 OD x 0.05 THK
10 46-220181P5 LOCKWASHER 4
SPG TYPE FOR #10 SCREW
11 46-170498P180 SCREW, CAP 1/4-20 x 0.68 LG 4

HEX SOC HD
12 46-220181P7 LOCKWASHER 4
SPG. TYPE FOR 1/4 SCREW
13 46-279292P1 SPRING PIN 1
14 46-208948P5 NUT 1/4-20 1
15 46-017306 INSTALLATION 1
INSTRUCTIONS
8-104
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
TABLE 1-2
LIST OF NECESSARY TOOLS
ITEM DESCRIPTION QTY.
1 1/4 x 6 LONG SOCKET EXTENSION 1
2 5/32 HEX SOCKET 1/4 DRIVE 1
3 3/8 TO 1/4 DRIVE ADAPTER 1
4 FLOOR JACK 46-302966P1 (FROM REGIONAL OFFICE) 1
5 1/4 OR 3/8 DRILL MOTOR 1
6 7/32 EXTENSION DRILL BIT (46-303363P1) 1*
7 3/8, 7/16 AND 3/4 OPEN OR BOX WRENCHES 1
8 DREMEL HIGH SPEED GRINDING TOOL 1
9 DREMEL ABRASIVE GRINDING WHEEL 1
10 LARGE SCREW DRIVER 1
11 SET OF L" SHAPED HEX WRENCHES 1
12 TORQUE WRENCH CAPABLE OF (70 IN-LBS) 1
* More than one of these drill bits may be required.
8-105
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
SECTION 2
MOTOR, BRAKE AND DRIVE WHEEL ASSEMBLIES REMOVAL
Description
This procedure covers the removal of the drive motors and brake assemblies. It also covĆ
ers drive wheel removal through the base assembly bottom. This procedure applies to
both old and new units.
Procedure
1. Place the horizontal arm in park position.
2. Turn OFF system power by turning OFF breaker.
3. Remove rear cover, cassette drawer, right cover and left cover. Refer to AMX-4
Service Direction 46-017220, 46-017328 (Japanese Models 46-270157G4 &
G5), or 46-017499 (Model 46-315161 Series), Sections 5-1 and 5-3 for addiĆ
tional information.
BRAKE CIRCUIT MAY BE LIVE THROUGH RELEASE SWITCH IF
WARNING GROUND LEAD IS NOT REMOVED.
4. Remove ground lead labeled # 2. Tape with electrically insulating tape separately
from all other ground leads.
5. Disconnect motor and brake wire connectors from motor control panel and reĆ
move ty-rap.
Motor and Brake Assembly Removal
6. Carefully remove spring between base assembly and motor brake assembly. This
removes tension from the drive belt. Refer to Illustration 2-1.
ILLUSTRATION 2-1
MOTOR AND BRAKE ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
NOTE: NOTCH IS DOWN
ON NEWER UNITS
HEX SOCKET
HEAD CAPSCREW
BRAKE
SHOULDERED
BINDING SCREW
HEAD
SCREW NUT
SPRING
WASHER PIN
MOTOR
MOTOR
MOUNT SPRING
HEX NUT
8-106
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
7. Remove nut and shouldered screw holding motor mount to base.

8. Remove drive belt from motor pulley.
9. Remove motor and brake assembly.
10. Remove brake by removing four binding head screws.
Drive Wheel Assembly Removal
11. Rotate front wheel casters toward rear, otherwise unit will be unstable when rear
of unit is raised.
12. Block the front wheel and lift drive wheel end of base assembly approximately 8
to 10 inches and place it on blocks.
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN LIFTING THE DRIVE END OF THIS

UNIT. IT CAN BECOME UNSTABLE AND TIP OVER WHEN THE DRIVE
WARNING
WHEELS ARE REPLACED.
Note: Unit may be lifted with a Floor Jack service tool 46-302966P1. Call regional
Tech Ops Mgr to obtain tool.
13. Remove two 10-32 Keps locknuts securing splash guard and lift out of base asĆ
sembly. Refer to Illustration 2-2.
ILLUSTRATION 2-2
DRIVE WHEEL ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
HEX SOCKET SUPPORT

HEAD CAPSCREW BAR
WASHER
WHEEL
BLOCK
DRIVE BELT
DRIVE
WHEEL
FLAT
WASHER
HEX HEAD
LOCKNUT
SUPPORT
ANGLE
SPLASH
GUARD
DRIVE BELT
DRIVE
WHEEL
8-107
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
14. Remove the wheel block by removing the four (10-32) hex socket head capscrews
(five on older units) and washers securing the outside wheel axle shaft to the supĆ
port bar on the base assembly.
15. Loosen the four (two on older units) locknuts and flat washers holding the wheel
support angle to the base assembly.
16. Slide the support angle to the side and off of the wheel axle and discard.
17. Leave drive belt on the axle pulley.
18. Move the wheel and axle out of its support.
19. Remove the wheel and axle through the bottom of the base assembly.
Note: Refer to Illustrations 2-3 and 2-4 for a view of the support bar notch position
on older and newer disassembled base assemblies.
ILLUSTRATION 2-3
POSITION OF SUPPORT BAR NOTCH ON OLDER UNITS
4 THREADED
HOLES
BASE
ASSEMBLY
NOTCH UP
SUPPORT
BAR
ILLUSTRATION 2-4
POSITION OF SUPPORT BAR NOTCH ON NEWER UNITS
4 THROUGH
HOLES
BASE
ASSEMBLY
NOTCH
DOWN SUPPORT
BAR
8-108
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
SECTION 3
INSTALLATION OF DRIVE WHEEL KIT INTO NEW STYLE BASE
Note: Refer to next section for Installation of Wheel Kit into Old Style Base."
Description
This procedure may be used to install both the right or left drive wheel on newer style
units. These drive wheels are installed through the base assembly bottom. It is necessary
to work under the raised drive end of this unit during the following installation proceĆ
dure.
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHILE WORKING UNDER RAISED UNIT. IT
MAY BECOME UNSTABLE AND TIP OVER WHILE PERFORMING THIS
WARNING
OPERATION.
Procedure
To install kit 46-250217G1 into a newer style base proceed as following:
1. The unit is on blocks approximately 10 inches above the floor.
Note: A light coat of grease (Lubriplate Fiske 630-AA), has been applied to each
end of axle by the factory.
2. Place the caliper assembly (item 2) on the drive wheel axle (item 1) to form a drive
wheel assembly. Refer to Illustration 3-1 for item numbers.
8-109
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
ILLUSTRATION 3-1
DRIVE WHEEL ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
LOCK WASHER HEX SOCKET
HEX SOCKET (ITEM 10) HEAD CAP SCREW
CALIPER DRIVE WHEEL HEAD CAPSCREW (ITEM 7)
ASSEMBLY AND AXLE (ITEM 7)
(ITEM 2) (ITEM 1)
LOCK WASHER
(ITEM 10)
DRIVE BELT
DRIVE
WHEEL
MOTOR
BOLTS
SPLASH
GUARD
FLAT WASHER
(ITEM 9)
HEX HEAD
LOCKNUT
(ITEM 8)
SUPPORT
ANGLE CALIPER
(ITEM 3) ASSEMBLY
DRIVE (ITEM 2)
BELT
DRIVE WHEEL
AND AXLE
(ITEM 1)
Note: End of axle shaft and caliber assembly should be flush within ± 0.02 in order
to be properly installed.
3. Install the drive belt on the drive wheel pulley.

4. Lift the drive wheel assembly into position through the base assembly bottom.
5. Place the drive wheel assembly axle into the notch of the wheel mounting support
on the side of the base assembly.
6. Attach the caliper assembly (item 2) to the base assembly with four hex socket
head capscrews (item 7) and four lock washers (item 10). Do not tighten capscrews
yet. Refer to Illustrations 3-1 and 3-2.
8-110
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
ILLUSTRATION 3-2
CALIPER ASSEMBLY MOUNTED ON SUPPORT BAR
HEX SOCKET LOCK WASHER

HEAD CAPSCREW (ITEM 11)
(ITEM 8)
CALIPER
ASSEMBLY
SUPPORT
BAR
7. Slide the support angle (silver" item 3 ) onto the wheel axle (opposite caliper asĆ
sembly) as far as it will go.
8. Install four locknuts (item 8) and flat washers (item 9) to hold the wheel support
angle to the base assembly. Torque to 50 to 70 in-lbs (5.6 to
7.8 NĆm).
9. Tighten the caliper assembly (item 2) to the base assembly. Torque hex socket head
capscrews (item 7) to 40 to 60 in-lbs (4.5 to 6.7 N-m).
10. Proceed to Section 5. Install the motor and brake assembly.
After Returning From Section 5
1. Reinstall ty-raps holding motor and brake wire connector to the motor control
panel.
2. Remove electrical tape insulation and reconnect ground lead.
3. Lower unit slightly and test rear drive assemblies.
4. Reinstall splash guards and secure with two existing lock nuts.
5. Install cassette drawer in mainframe. Refer to Section 5-2 of AMX-4 Service DiĆ
rection 46-017220, 46-017328, or 46-017499.
6. Reinstall right, left and rear covers onto unit.
7. Lower unit to the floor.
8-111
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
SECTION 4
INSTALLATION OF DRIVE WHEEL KIT INTO OLD STYLE BASE
Note: Refer to previous section for Installation of Wheel Kit into New Style Base."
Description
This procedure may be used to install both the right or left drive wheel on older style
units. These drive wheels are installed through the base assembly bottom. It is necessary
to lift the drive end of the unit during this procedure.
Procedure
To install kit 46-250217G1 into an older style base proceed as following:
Right Side KV Panel Modification
1. Remove screws securing choke Q2 and move choke out of the way.
2. Using the 7/32 drill bit, drill out the four 10-32 threaded holes. Holes are located
in the right support bar welded to the base assembly. Refer to Illustration 4-1.
ILLUSTRATION 4-1
SUPPORT BAR ON OLDER UNITS
(4) THREADED HOLES MUST

BE DRILLED OUT WITH
7/32 DIA. EXTENSION DRILL
BASE
WELD MUST BE REMOVED

NOTCH UP FROM BOTTOM OF THIS BAR
AROUND HOLES.
Note: Drill holes starting at top and drilling to the bottom.
8-112
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
3. Inspect the under side of the right support bar for surface flatness around the
drilled holes. If weld interferes with surface flatness, grind welds flat with Dremel
tool so that the screw heads set flat.
WEAR ADEQUATE EYE PROTECTION WHILE GRINDING SURFACE

WARNING
FLAT.
4. Install disk calipers assembly on the right wheel axle shaft.
Note: End of axle shaft and caliper assembly should be flush within ± 0.02 in order


WARNING
OPERATION.
7. Turn drive wheels assembly so that the caliper is facing downwards. Insert right
wheel assembly into base so that the wheel shaft clears the lower lip of the base.
Note: The fit of the drive wheel assembly into the base is extremely tight.
8. Raise drive wheel assembly up past the notch in the right support bar. Rotate drive
wheel assembly so that caliper assembly is now facing upwards.
9. Slip caliper square end surface into the right support bar notch.
10. Install four 10-32 x 1.5 hex socket caphead screws from the bottom through the
right support bar into the caliper assembly. Start screws but do not tighten yet. ReĆ
fer to Illustration 4-2.
ILLUSTRATION 4-2
CALIPER ASSEMBLY MOUNTED ON SUPPORT BAR
SUPPORT
BAR
CALIPER
ASSEMBLY
LOCK WASHER
(ITEM 11)
HEX SOCKET
HEAD CAPSCREW
(ITEM 8)
11. Slide a black" support angle onto the wheel axle (opposite caliper assembly) as
far as it will go.
8-113
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Note: Adjust for minimum axial backlash between support angle and drive wheel asĆ
sembly.
12. Tighten the two 1/4-20 Keps locknuts and flat washers holding the right wheel
support bracket to the base assembly. Torque to 50 to 70 in-lbs (5.6 to
7.8 N-m).
13. Tighten the right caliper assembly) to the base assembly. Torque the hex socket
head capscrews to 40 to 60 in-lbs (4.5 to 6.7 N-m).
Left Side Charger Rotor Control Modification
1. Remove screws securing five position fuse panel and move panel out of the way.
2. Remove transformer T1 46-270620P1 and lay out of the way.
3. Using the 7/32 drill bit, drill out the four 10-32 threaded holes. Holes are located
in the left support bar welded to the base assembly.
Note: Drill holes starting at top and drilling to the bottom.
4. Inspect the under side of the left support bar for surface flatness around the drilled
holes. If weld interferes with surface flatness, grind welds flat with Dremel tool so
that the screw heads set flat.
WEAR ADEQUATE EYE PROTECTION WHILE GRINDING SURFACE

WARNING
FLAT.
5. Install disk calipers assembly on the left wheel axle shaft.
Note: End of axle shaft and caliper assembly should be flush within ± 0.02 in order


WARNING
OPERATION.
8. Turn drive wheels assembly so that the caliper is facing downwards. Insert left
wheel assembly into base so that the wheel shaft clears the lower lip of the base.
Note: The fit of the drive wheel assembly into the base is extremely tight.
9. Raise drive wheel assembly up past the notch in the left support bar. Rotate drive
wheel assembly so that caliper assembly is now facing upwards.
10. Slip caliper square end surface into the left support bar notch.
8-114
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
11. Install four 10-32 x 1.5 hex socket caphead screws from the bottom through the
left support bar into the caliper assembly. Start screws but do not tighten yet.
12. Slide a black" support angle onto the wheel axle (opposite caliper assembly) as
far as it will go.
Note: Adjust for minimum axial backlash between support angle and drive wheel asĆ
sembly.
13. Tighten the two 1/4-20 Keps locknuts and flat washers holding the left wheel supĆ
port bracket to the base assembly. Torque to 50 to 70 in-lbs (5.6 to
7.8 N-m).
14. Tighten the left caliper assembly to the base assembly. Torque the hex socket head
capscrews to 40 to 60 in-lbs (4.5 to 6.7 N-m).
15. Proceed to Section 5 to install drive motor and brake assembly.
After Returning From Section 5
1. Reinstall Q2.
2. Reinstall transformer T1 and fuse panel.
3. Remove electrical tape insulation and reconnect ground lead.
4. Lower unit slightly and test rear drive assemblies.
5. Reinstall ty-raps holding motor and brake wire connector to the motor control
panel.
6. Reinstall splash guards and secure with existing lock nuts.
7. Install cassette drawer in mainframe. Refer to Section 5-2 of AMX-4 Service DiĆ
rection 46-017220, 46-017328, or 46-017499.
8. Reinstall right, left and rear covers onto unit.
9. Lower unit to the floor.
8-115
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
SECTION 5
MOTOR AND BRAKE REASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
Description
This procedure covers the installation of both the right or left motor and brake assemĆ
blies. Refer to Illustration 5-1 and Table 1-1 for kit supplied item numbers. Existing
parts are numbered 20 and above.
ILLUSTRATION 5-1
MOTOR AND BRAKE REASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
SPRING LOCKWASHER HEX SOCKET

ITEM 24 (ITEM 12) HEAD CAPSCREW
(ITEM 11)
SPRING PIN MOTOR
(ITEM 13) (ITEM 5)
NUT
BINDING
(ITEM 14)
HEAD
NOTCH ON SCREW
THIS SIDE HEX NUT ITEM 21
ITEM 22
HEX SOCKET
HEAD CAPSCREW
(ITEM 11) BRAKE
ITEM 20
BRAKE
ITEM 20
SHOULDERED
BINDING SCREW
HEAD ITEM 23
SCREW NUT
ITEM 21 (ITEM 14)
LOCKWASHER SPRING PIN
(ITEM 12) (ITEM 13)
NOTCH ON
MOTOR THIS SIDE
(ITEM 5)
MOTOR
MOUNT PLATE SPRING
(ITEM 6) HEX NUT ITEM 24
ITEM 22
1. Orientate existing brake (item 20) and new motor (item 5) to allow slack electric
power cable. Install brake (item 20) on motor (item 5) and secure with four existing
binding head screws (item 21).
2. Attach motor (item 5) to new mount plate (item 6) with four new hex socket head
capscrews (item 11) and new lockwashers (item 12).
3. Install new spring pin (item 13) and new nut (item 14) on mount plate (item 6).
Note: Motor mount plate (item 6), plate notch and spring pin (item 13) must be
orientated the same as shown in Illustration 5-1 or spring pin will rub on
wheel.
8-116
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
4. Move motor and brake assembly with motor mount plate into the base assembly.
5. Fasten motor mount plate to base assembly with existing hex nut (item 22) and
shouldered screw (item 23). Torque to 40 to 60 in-lbs (4.5 to 6.7 N-m).
6. Place drive belt (item 25) around motor pulley and wheel pulley. Refer to IllustraĆ
tion 5-2.
ILLUSTRATION 5-2
SIDE VIEW BASE ASSEMBLY
SPRING
ITEM 24
BASE
ASSEMBLY
DRIVE
BELT
ITEM 25
7. Carefully install existing spring (item 24) between base assembly and spring pin
(item 13). Refer to Illustrations 5-1 and 5-2. This places tension on the drive belt.
8. Repeat steps 1 through 7 for other new motor
9. Label connectors from motors' electrical power cables. Label left side cable conĆ
nector as J1 and label right side cable connector as J2. Connect motor and brake
cable connectors to motor control panel and replace ty-rap.
Use caution when installing brake electrical connectors. Connectors are keyed
CAUTION but can be forced together in reverse direction causing brake damage and
possibly printed wire board damage.
10. Return to either Section 3 or 4 (dependant on old or new base assembly) to comĆ
plete kit installation.
8-117
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0
8-118
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017307 AMX-4 Main Harness Replacement Instructions, Rev. 0, Title Page
8-119
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017307 AMX-4 Main Harness Replacement Instructions, Rev. 0, Page i
8-120
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017307 AMX-4 Main Harness Replacement Instructions, Rev. 0, Page 1
8-121
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017307 AMX-4 Main Harness Replacement Instructions, Rev. 0, Page 2
8-122
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017339 110V/1200V AMX-4 Battery Load Fixture, Rev. 1, Title Page
8-123
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017339 110V/1200V AMX-4 Battery Load Fixture, Rev. 1, Page i
8-124
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017339 110V/1200V AMX-4 Battery Load Fixture, Rev. 1, Page 1/2(blank)
8-125
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017339 110V/1200V AMX-4 Battery Load Fixture, Rev. 1, Page 3
8-126
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-127
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-128
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-129
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0
8-130
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017357 AMX-4 Horizontal Arm Replacement, Rev. 3, Title Page
GE Medical Systems
Technical
Publications
Direction 46-017357
Revision 3
AMX-4
Horizontal Arm Replacement
Copyright 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993 By General Electric Co.
8-131
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017357 AMX-4 Horizontal Arm Replacement, Rev. 3, Page i/ii(blank)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER TITLE PAGE
REVISION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
SECTION 1 - ON-SITE REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-1 Tools and Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-2 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
2 HORIZONTAL ARM REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

SECTION 1 - ARM REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
SECTION 2 - ARM INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
3 FUNCTIONAL CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

SECTION 1 - FUNCTIONAL CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1-1 Wear Block On Horizontal Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1-2 Latch On Horizontal Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
SECTION 2 - ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
2-1 Wear Block Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
2-2 Latch Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
2-3 Column Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
4 RENEWAL PARTS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
8-132
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017357 AMX-4 Horizontal Arm Replacement, Rev. 3, Page iii
REVISION HISTORY

0 May 24, 1990 Initial release.
1 Apr. 5, 1991 Revised direction format. Added replacement, functional check, and
calibration procedures. Expanded renewal parts list.
2 June 25, 1992 Updated Table 1-2, Documentation.
3 Jan. 8, 1993 Changed capscrew in Chapter 4 to 46-208562P49.

Title Page 2
Damage in
Transportation -
Dir. 46-013861 -
i 2
ii Blank
iii 2
1-1 and 1-2 2
2-1 thru 2-10 2
3-1 thru 3-6 2
4-1 2
8-133
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017357 AMX-4 Horizontal Arm Replacement, Rev. 3, Page 1-1
CHAPTER 1 - INTRODUCTION
This Subsystem Direction is supplied with each Horizontal Arm, part number
46-303170G1, used on the AMX-4. The goal of this document is to guide the service
representative through the removal of an existing horizontal arm and replace it with the
new arm. This direction accomplishes this by calling out procedures. These procedures
are called out in a specified order to make the installation of the components as easy as
possible.
The following On-site Requirements must be accounted for prior to beginning instalĆ
lation of the new horizontal arm.
SECTION 1
ON-SITE REQUIREMENTS
1-1 Tools and Test Equipment
There are additional tools and test equipment besides the standard service representaĆ
tive tool kit which must be available before installing the horizontal arm onto the
AMX-4. Refer to Table 1-1.
TABLE 1-1
TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
ITEM DESCRIPTION
Torque wrench, 0 - 150 in-lbs (0-17 NĆm)
Loctite 242
8-134
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
1-2 Documentation
The following selected Directions are necessary for correct installation of the HorizonĆ
tal Arm. Procedures from each document will be used and reflect the latest information
available at this time. Refer to Table 1-2.
TABLE 1-2
DOCUMENTATION
Direction Information
Category Number Document Description Source
Operator 46-017291 AMX-4 Operation GEMS

Manual 46-017334 AMX-4 Operation (Japanese) GEMS
46-017531 AMX-4 International Operation Manual GEMS
(46-315161 Series). Includes Directions
46-017493 (English), 46-017493-01
(French), 46-017493-06 (Spanish),
46-017493-08 (German), and 46-017493-11
(Italian).
Service 46-017205 AMX-4 Installation GEMS

Manual 46-017325 AMX-4 Installation (Japanese) GEMS
46-017496 AMX-4 Installation (Model 46-315161 Series) GEMS
Schematics 46-017356 AMX-4 Schematics (Upgrade) GEMS

Manual 46-017331 AMX-4 Schematics (Japanese) GEMS
46-017502 AMX-4 Schematics (Model 46-315161 Series) GEMS
Renewal 46-017317 AMX-4 Renewal Parts (Upgraded) GEMS

Parts 46-017330 AMX-4 Renewal Parts (Japanese) GEMS
Manual 46-017501 AMX-4 Renewal Parts (Model 46-315161 SeĆ GEMS
ries)
8-135
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
CHAPTER 2 - HORIZONTAL ARM REPLACEMENT
To prevent personal injury and/or equipment damage, secure the horizontal

CAUTION arm and column carriage before removing components from the arm. RemovĆ
ing weight allows the counterweight to rapidly descend and the arm to ascend,
possibly causing personal injury and/or damage to the unit.
DO NOT RELY ON THE LATCH TO HOLD THE ARM IN PLACE.

WARNING
SECTION 1
ARM REMOVAL
1. Swing column to the front of the AMX unit.

2. Extend horizontal arm to the out-most (extended) position.
3. Put a cart under the collimator, use wood blocks (or equivalent) so that the colliĆ
mator unit can be supported, and lower collimator onto the wood blocks. Refer to
Illustration 2-1.
ILLUSTRATION 2-1
COLLIMATOR/TUBE SUPPORTED
TUBE HORIZONTAL
ARM
GENERATOR
COLLIMATOR UNIT
CART
WOOD
BLOCKS
8-136
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
4. Put key switch, on the control console, to the OFF position. Refer to Illustration
2-2.
5. Put circuit breaker, on the front of the AMX unit, in the OFF position. Refer to
Illustration 2-3.
ILLUSTRATION 2-2
KEY LOCATION
OFF
ON
GENERATOR
UNIT
ILLUSTRATION 2-3
CIRCUIT BREAKER LOCATION
ON
OFF
GENERATOR
UNIT
8-137
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
6. Remove three screws from the cover plate on the column.

7. Loosen the fourth screw on the cover plate, rotate plate until opening is exposed,
and then tighten screw. Refer to illustration 2-4.
8. Remove three screws from top of the column base cover and slide cover up onto
column. Refer to illustration 2-4.
9. Put a rope (or equivalent) through the cover plate opening, feed the rope down
through the column, and pull rope out bottom of the column. Refer to Illustration
2-4.
10. Repeat step 9, pull rope tight, and tie the rope ends together with a square knot.
Refer to Illustration 2-4.
ILLUSTRATION 2-4
COLUMN SECURED
COLUMN
COLUMN
BASE
COVER
COVER
PLATE
ROPE
SQUARE
KNOT
8-138
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
11. Remove two screws and cover from the terminal box.
12. Remove 6-32 hex nut and two ground wires (green) from grounding lug of the
terminal box. Refer to Illustration 2-5.
13. Remove two ty-raps from wire harness in the terminal box. Refer to Illustration
2-5.
14. Tag and remove number 9 (red) and number 11 (black) brake cables from terminal
strip in the terminal box. Refer to Illustration 2-5.
15. Remove bushing and brake cable from the terminal box. Refer to Illustration 2-5.
ILLUSTRATION 2-5
TERMINAL BOX
TERMINAL
BOX
TY-RAPS
PIN 9
PIN 11
GROUNDING
LUG
BUSHING
BRAKE
CABLE
8-139
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
16. Remove bushing from the brake cable. Save bushing for installation of brake
cable.
Note: Do not loose bushing. Bushing must be used during installation of cable to terĆ
minal box.
17. Remove four ty-raps from brake, collimator, and tube cables. Refer to IllustraĆ
tion 2-6.
18. Remove two 10-32 x 1 long hex socket head screws and cable clamps from each
side of the horizontal arm.
19. Remove two 6-32 x 1/2 long round head screws and wire clamp from mounting
plate of horizontal arm. Refer to Illustration 2-6.
ILLUSTRATION 2-6
LOCATION OF TY-RAPS ON
CABLES
TY-RAPS
CABLE
CLAMP
10-32 x 1 LG
HEX SOCKET HEAD SCREWS
TY-RAPS
8-140
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
20. Remove eight 1/4-20 x 5/8 long hex socket flat head screws from left and right
tube supports. Discard screws. Refer to Illustration 2-7.
Note: Be sure shaft of the Allen wrench is all the way down the hex hole of the screw.
Otherwise, hex hole could become rounded, making screw removal difficult.
CAUTION Be sure to support collimator and tube during removal. Damage to equipment
or injury to personal could result if horizontal arm is not properly supported.
21. Remove two 1/4-20 x 1/2 (or 5/8) long hex socket flat head screws from carriage
of the column and bottom of the horizontal arm. Discard screws. Refer to IllustraĆ
tion 2-8.
22. Remove four 1/4-20 x 1/2 (or 5/8) long hex socket flat head screws from the carĆ
riage of the column and top of the horizontal arm. Discard screws. Refer to IllusĆ
tration 2-9.
CAUTION Be sure to support horizontal arm during removal. Damage to equipment or

injury to personal could result if horizontal arm is not properly supported.
23. Remove horizontal arm from carriage of the column.
ILLUSTRATION 2-7
TUBE/COLLIMATOR MOUNTING SCREWS
LEFT TUBE
SUPPORT
RIGHT TUBE
SUPPORT
1/4-20 x 5/8 LG
HEX SOCKET
FLAT HEAD SCREWS
8-141
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
ILLUSTRATION 2-8
HORIZONTAL ARM MOUNTING SCREWS - BOTTOM VIEW
1/4-20 x 5/8 LG
HEX SOCKET
FLAT HEAD SCREWS
ILLUSTRATION 2-9
HORIZONTAL ARM MOUNTING SCREWS - TOP VIEW
1/4-20 x 5/8 LG
HEX SOCKET
FLAT HEAD SCREWS
8-142
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
SECTION 2
ARM INSTALLATION
1. Align holes of horizontal arm with holes on carriage of the column.
Due to the lack of thread engagement, DO NOT reuse the hardware that was
CAUTION previously used to mount the horizontal arm to the vertical column.
2. Apply Loctite 242 onto the threads of four NEW 1/4-20 x 5/8 long hex socket
flat head screws and install into the vertical column and top of the horizontal arm.
Refer to Illustration 2-9. Torque screws 110 in-lbs (12.4 N-m).
3. Apply Loctite 242 onto the threads of two NEW 1/4-20 x 5/8 long hex socket flat
head screws and install into the vertical column and bottom of horizontal arm. ReĆ
fer to Illustration 2-8. Torque screws 110 in-lbs (12.4 N-m).
4. Apply Loctite 242 to threads of eight NEW 1/4-20 x 5/8 long hex socket flat head
screws and install into left and right tube supports. Refer to Illustration 2-7.
Torque screws 110 in-lbs (12.4 N-m).
Note: Be sure collimator and tube cables are outside of left and right tube supports
before installation of screws.
5. Install two 6-32 x 1/2 long round head screws and wire clamp onto mounting
plate of horizontal arm. Tighten screws.
6. Install two 10-32 x 1 long hex socket head screws and cable clamps onto each
side of the horizontal arm. Tighten screws.
7. Align brake, collimator, and tube cables, and install four NEW ty-raps. Refer to
Illustration 2-10.
8-143
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
ILLUSTRATION 2-10
LOCATION OF TY-RAPS ON CABLES
TY-RAPS
TY-RAP
TERMINAL
BOX
8. Put brake cable through hole in bottom of terminal box. Refer to Illustration
2-11.
9. Align brake cable along other cables, install bushing onto brake cable, and push
bushing into hole in bottom of terminal box. Refer to Illustration 2-11.
10. Install number 9 (red) and number 11 (black) brake cables onto terminal strip in
the terminal box. Refer to Illustration 2-11.
11. Install two NEW ty-raps onto wire harness in the terminal box. Refer to IllustraĆ
tion 2-11.
12. Install two ground wires (green) and 6-32 hex nut onto grounding lug of the terĆ
minal box. Refer to Illustration 2-11. Tighten nut.
13. Install two 6-32 x 1/2 long flat head screws and cover onto the terminal box.
Tighten screws.
8-144
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
ILLUSTRATION 2-11
BRAKE CABLE INSTALLED
TERMINAL
BOX
TY-RAPS
PIN 9
PIN 11
GROUNDING
LUG
BUSHING
BRAKE
CABLE
14. Remove rope (or equivalent) from the column.
15. Slide column base cover down to base of column.
16. Install three screws onto top of the column base cover. Tighten screws.
17. Loosen the screw on the cover plate, rotate plate until three other holes on plate
are aligned with holes in column, and install three screws into cover plate. Refer
to illustration 2-4. Tighten screws.
18. Put circuit breaker, on the front of the AMX unit, in the ON position. Refer to IlĆ
lustration 2-3.
19. Put key switch, on the control console, to the ON position. Refer to Illustration
2-2.
20. Lift horizontal arm up from cart, move arm to in-most (retracted) position, and
swing arm to the rear of the AMX unit.
8-145
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
CHAPTER 3 - FUNCTIONAL CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
SECTION 1
FUNCTIONAL CHECKS
1-1 Wear Block On Horizontal Arm
1. Move the horizontal arm until the inner and center tubes are fully retracted into
the outer tube.
2. Push the lock pin of the outer tube through the plate and up into the slot of the
wear block on the center tube. Refer to Illustration 3-1.
3. The lock pin should move up and down freely into the slot of the wear block.
If you are able to push the lock pin up until flush with the plate on the outer
tube, alignment is properly set. No alignment is required.
Note: Check screws to be sure that they are tight. If loose, tighten screws to torque
specified in Section 2-1, Wear Block Alignment.
If you are unable to push the lock pin up into the plate, the pin is hitting the
wear block outside the slot, and alignment is not properly set. If alignment
must be performed, refer to Section 2-1, Wear Block Alignment, of this
chapter.
ILLUSTRATION 3-1
WEAR BLOCK ALIGNMENT
SLOT
WEAR
BLOCK
OUT
PLATE
LOCK
PIN
8-146
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
1-2 Latch On Horizontal Arm
the outer tube.
2. Lower the horizontal arm until the latch pin of the outer tube rests into the latch
mechanism.
3. The latch pin should press the latch to the on position (pin fully engaged into the
latch mechanism). Refer to Illustration 3-2.
4. Lift the latch pin out of the latch mechanism, rotate the column 360, and lower
the horizontal arm until the latch pin of the outer tube rests into the latch mechaĆ
nism.
If you are able to press the latch to the on position (pin fully engaged into the
latch mechanism), alignment is properly set. No alignment is required.
If you are unable to press the latch to the on position (pin fully engaged into
the latch mechanism) one of the two brackets holding the latch pin is hitting
the latch mechanism, and the alignment is not properly set. If alignment must
be performed, refer to Section 2-2, Latch Alignment, of this chapter.
ILLUSTRATION 3-2
LATCH ALIGNMENT
LATCH
PIN
LATCH
MECHANISM
LATCH
8-147
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
SECTION 2
ADJUSTMENTS
2-1 Wear Block Alignment
1. Move the horizontal arm until the wear block on the center tube is retracted from
the outer tube.
2. Loosen the four 10-32 hex socket flat head screws on the wear block. Refer to IlĆ
lustration 3-3.
the outer tube.
4. Push the lock pin of the outer tube through the plate and up through the plate, adĆ
just the wear block on the center tube until you are able to push the pin into the
slot of the wear block, and release the lock pin.
5. Move the horizontal arm until the wear block on the center tube is retracted from
the outer tube. Refer to Illustration 3-3.
6. Tighten the four 10-32 hex socket flat head screws on the wear block.
the outer tube.
8. The lock pin should move up and down freely into the slot of the wear block. Refer
to Illustration 3-3.
If you are able to push the lock pin up until flush with the plate on the out tube,
alignment is properly set. No further alignment is required.
If you are unable to push the lock up into the plate, the pin is hitting the wear
block outside the slot, and the alignment is not properly set. If alignment must
be performed, repeat steps 1 through 8, or refer to Section 2-3, Column
Alignment, of this chapter.
9. Remove the two 10-32 x 3/4long hex socket flat head screws from the wear block,
apply Loctite 242 to threads of the screws, install screws into the wear block, and
torque screws to 65 in-lbs (7.3 N-m). Refer to Illustration 3-3.
10. Remove the two 10-32 x 7/8long hex socket flat head screws from the wear block,
apply Loctite 242 to threads of the screws, install screws into the wear block, and
torque screws to 90 in-lbs (10.2 N-m). Refer to Illustration 3-3.
8-148
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
ILLUSTRATION 3-3
WEAR BLOCK ADJUSTMENT
10-32 x 7/8 LG
HEX SOCKET
FLAT HEAD SCREW
10-32 x 3/4 LG
HEX SOCKET
WEAR FLAT HEAD SCREW
BLOCK
LOCK
PIN
8-149
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
2-2 Latch Alignment
Note: Perform Latch Alignment only after you have performed the Wear Block
Alignment procedure.
1. Rotate the column counter-clockwise until the latch pin on the horizontal arm is
above the latch mechanism on the cover of the generator.
Note: Rotate the column only if the cables allow it to be turned. Do not allow cables to
be pulled while column is rotated.
2. Loosen the four 1/4-20 hex socket button head screws on the plate of the outer
tube. Refer to Illustration 3-4.
mechanism. Refer to Illustration 3-4.
4. Slide the plate with latch pin and brackets until the latch is moved to the on posiĆ
tion.
5. Raise the horizontal arm until the latch pin is clear of the latch mechanism.
6. Tighten the four 1/4-20 hex socket button head screws on the plate of the outer
tube.
7. Rotate the column clockwise 360 until the latch pin on the horizontal arm is
mechanism.
If you are able to press the latch to the on position (pin fully engaged into the
latch mechanism), alignment is properly set. No alignment is required.
If you are unable to press the latch to the on position, one of the two brackets
holding the latch pin is hitting the latch mechanism, and the alignment is not
properly set. Refer to Section 2-3, Column Adjustment, of this chapter.
9. Remove two of the four 1/4-20 hex socket button head screws from the plate of
the outer tube, apply Loctite 242 to threads of the screws, install the two screws
into the plate, and torque screws to 80 in-lbs (9 N-m). Refer to Illustration 3-4.
10. Remove the other two of the four 1/4-20 hex socket button head screws from the
plate of the outer tube, apply Loctite 242 to threads of the screws, install the two
screws into the plate, and torque screws to 80 in-lbs (9 N-m). Refer to IllustraĆ
tion 3-4.
8-150
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
ILLUSTRATION 3-4
LATCH PIN BRACKET ADJUSTMENT
1/4-20 x 0.62 LG
HEX SOCKET
BUTTON HEAD SCREW
BRACKET LATCH
PIN
2-3 Column Alignment
1. If your are unable to press the latch to the on position and the Latch Adjustment
procedure has been completed, one of the two brackets holding the latch pin is hitĆ
ting the latch mechanism, and alignment is not properly set.
2. Remove three 10-32 x 1/2 long bind head screws from the column base covers.
3. Remove the two column base covers from the column.
4. While standing at the rear and looking toward the front of the generator unit: if
the left pin bracket is hitting the latch mechanism, adjust the left stop block on the
column: if the right pin bracket is hitting the latch mechanism, adjust the right stop
block on the column. Refer to Illustration 3-5.
mechanism.
6. If you are able to press the latch to the on position, alignment is properly set. No
further alignment is required. Proceed to Section 2-2, Latch Adjustment, step 9,
of this chapter.
7. Adjust stop block on the column as follows (refer to Illustration 3-5):
e. Loosen the two 10-32 x 1/8 long slotted head shield screws.
f. Rotate column until pin bracket clears latch mechanism.
g. Tighten screws to a torque of 80 in-lbs (9 N-m).
8. Rotate the column counter-clockwise until the latch pin on the horizontal arm is
mechanism.
10. Raise the horizontal arm to the upmost position.
8-151
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
11. Rotate the column clockwise until the latch pin on the horizontal arm is above the
latch mechanism on the cover of the generator.
mechanism.
If you are able to press the latch to the on position, alignment is properly set.
No further alignment is required.
If you are able to press the latch to the on position, the alignment is not properĆ
ly set. If alignment must be performed, repeat steps 1 through 12.
ILLUSTRATION 3-5
COLUMN ADJUSTMENT
RIGHT
STOP
BLOCK
10-32 x 1/8LONG
SHIELD
SCREWS
LEFT
STOP
BLOCK
FRONT OF
UNIT BACK OF
UNIT
8-152
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
CHAPTER 4 - RENEWAL PARTS LIST
HORIZONTAL ARM ASSEMBLY, 46-303170G1, AMX3A2
ITEM NO. NAME PART NO. DESCRIPTION
2 HORZ ARM ASM 46-302156G1 AMX4, SEE DIRECTION 46-017317,

46-017330 OR 46-017501
3 CAPSCREW 46-208562P49 1/4-20 X 5/8 LG HEX SOC FLAT HD
8-153
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0
8-154
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017395 AMX IV Horizontal Arm Brake Cable Assembly Kit, Rev. 0, 9-4-90
8-155
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0
8-156
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017396 Battery Set Replacement History Label Installation, Rev. 0, Title Page
8-157
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017396 Battery Set Replacement History Label Installation, Rev. 0, Page i
8-158
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017396 Battery Set Replacement History Label Installation, Rev. 0, Page 1
8-159
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017396 Battery Set Replacement History Label Installation, Rev. 0, Page 2
8-160
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017402 AMX-4 Counterweight Lifting Fixture, Rev. 0, Title Page
8-161
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017402 AMX-4 Counterweight Lifting Fixture, Rev. 0, Page i
8-162
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017402 AMX-4 Counterweight Lifting Fixture, Rev. 0, Page 1
8-163
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-164
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-165
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0
8-166
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017504 AMX-4 Caster Replacement Instructions, Rev. 0, Title Page
GE Medical Systems
Technical
Publications
Direction 46-017504
Revision 0
AMX-4 Caster Replacement Instructions
Copyright 1991 By General Electric Co.
8-167
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017504 AMX-4 Caster Replacement Instructions, Rev. 0, Page i/ii(blank)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
1 GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2 OLD CASTER REMOVAL PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3 NEW CASTER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
8-168
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017504 AMX-4 Caster Replacement Instructions, Rev. 0, Page iii
REVISION HISTORY

0 Nov. 8, 1991 Initial release.

Title Page 0
Damage in
Transportation -
Dir. 46-013861 -
i 0
ii Blank
iii 0
1 thru 7 0
8-169
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017504 AMX-4 Caster Replacement Instructions, Rev. 0, Page 1
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
The 46-315554G1 AMX-4 Spring Caster Kit includes one spring loaded caster
46-303780P1.
Note: The spring loaded casters must be used in pairs. Do NOT have a mismatch of a
one spring loaded caster and one old design (rigid) caster (46-270211P2) on
an AMX-4 unit. If a unit needs one of its 46-270211P2 casters replaced,
order TWO 46-315554G1 kits and replace both casters.
Refer to Table 1 for kit parts list. Refer to Table 2 for a list of necessary tools.
TABLE 1
CASTER KIT 46-315554G1 PARTS LIST
ITEM PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY.

1 46-303780P1 Shock/Caster 1
2 46-286166P1 Support plate 1
3 46-286279P5 Nut 4
4 46-170686P2 Sealant (Loctite 242) 1
5 508A865P3 Ziplok bag 1
6 46-315613P1 Tape (15 x 2 x .01) 1
7 46-315230P1 Container 1
8 46-315230P2 Container 1
9 46-017504 Installation Instructions 1
TABLE 2
LIST OF NECESSARY TOOLS
PART NUMĆ
ITEM BER DESCRIPTION QTY.
1 46-302966P1 AMX-4 lifting jack 1
2 46-315668P2* Torque wrench (200-1200 in-lb, 22.5-135.5 N-m) 1
3 N/A** Wood block approx. 4 x 4 (10 cm x 10 cm), by at least 28 (71 cm) 1
long
* 46-315668P2 is part of 46-268445G1 Torque Wrench Tool Kit.
** Suggest one nominal 4 x 4 board or two nominal 2 x 4 boards .
8-170
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
SECTION 2
OLD CASTER REMOVAL PROCEDURE:
1. Latch the horizontal arm assembly in place.
2. Be sure that the AMX key switch is in the OFF" position, and that the circuit
breaker is OFF."
3. Referring to Illustration 1, remove the three pieces of the front bumper assembly.
(This must be done in order to avoid damage to the front bumper when jacking up
the AMX unit.)
a. Remove each of the two corner pads by removing (4) 10-32 x 1.25 bolts
from each pad.
b. Remove the middle piece of the front bumper by removing (2) 10-32 x 1.25
bolts and (2) flat washers.
Note: Older AMX-4 units may have sticky tape holding the middle piece of the bumĆ
per. In this case, you have the option of removing the old sticky tape or leaving
it on. In either case, be sure that there are no lumpy residues.
ILLUSTRATION 1
REMOVAL OF BUMPER ASSEMBLY
FOR OLDER AMX-4 UNITS

ONLY, THE MIDDLE PIECE OF
THE BUMPER IS
SECURED WITH A STRIP OF
STICKY TAPE.
CORNER PAD
(4) 10-32 x 1.25 BOLT (2) FLAT

WASHER
(2) 10-32 x 1.25 BOLT CORNER PAD
MIDDLE
PIECE (4) 10-32 x 1.25 BOLT
8-171
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
4. Get the 46-302966P1 AMX-4 lifting jack and note the two lips on the front of
the jack per Illustration 2.
5. Referring to Illustration 3, put the jack under the front of the AMX unit. ENĆ
SURE THAT THE TWO LIPS ON THE FRONT OF THE JACK RETAIN THE
FRONT OF THE BASE IN ORDER TO PREVENT THE AMX UNIT FROM
FALLING OFF OF THE JACK.
ILLUSTRATION 2
AMX-4 LIFTING JACK 46-302966P1
LIP
LIP
ILLUSTRATION 3
AMX-4 UNIT WITH JACK IN PLACE
8-172
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
6. Lift the AMX unit high enough to put the approximately 4 x 4 (10 cm x 10 cm)
wood block (nominal 4 x 4 board or two nominal 2 x 4 boards suggested) unĆ
der the AMX unit as shown in Illustration 4. Be sure that the block(s) is (are) cenĆ
tered under the front battery box wall, and be sure that the block(s) extend(s) out
at least 2 (5 cm) on each side of AMX unit.
7. Lower the AMX unit and remove the jack.
ILLUSTRATION 4
AMX-4 UNIT SUPPORTED BY WOOD BLOCK
2
(5 cm)
MIN.
WOOD BLOCK(S) FRONT BATTERY

(SEE NOTES 1, 2, & 3) BOX WALL
NOTE 1: IF TWO BLOCKS ARE USED, ORIENTATE BLOCKS AS SHOWN

FOR MAXIMUM STABILITY.
NOTE 2: CENTER BLOCK(S) WITH FRONT BATTERY BOX WALL.
NOTE 3: LOCATE WOOD BLOCK(S) SO THAT BLOCK(S) STICKS

OUT AT LEAST 2 (5 cm) BEYOND EACH SIDE OT THE AMX UNIT.
8-173
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8. Referring to Illustration 5, remove one of the old casters by removing the four nuts
and the old support plate.
ILLUSTRATION 5
REMOVAL OF OLD CASTER
TYPICAL (RIGHT CASTER SHOWN)
OLD SUPPORT PLATE
(4) NUTS
OLD CASTER
8-174
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
SECTION 3
NEW CASTER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE:
1. Referring to Illustration 6, install the new caster as follows:
Note: This procedure covers the installation of either the right or left caster wheel.
a. Get the NEW furnished support plate (in case of any deformity of the old
support plate).
b. Install the new caster using the NEW furnished support plate, the four furĆ
nished nuts, AND the furnished Loctite 242. Note orientation of the support
plate.
c. Use the torque wrench to tighten the four nuts to within a range of 15 to 25
foot-pounds (20.5 to 34 N-m).
Note: Replace the caster on the other side of the AMX at this time, using Step 8 of
Section 2, and Step 1 of Section 3 of this direction.
ILLUSTRATION 6
INSTALLATION OF NEW CASTER
TYPICAL (RIGHT CASTER SHOWN)
NEW SUPPORT PLATE

46-286166P1
NOTE: ORIENTATE SUPPORT PLATE

SO THAT ITS ANGLED CORNER IS
TOWARD CORNER OF BASE OF THE
AMX UNIT
(4) NUTS 46-286279P5

(SEE NOTES 1 AND 2)
NEW 46-303780P1 CASTER
NOTE 1: APPLY LOCTITE 242 TO (4) BOLTS
NOTE 2: TIGHTEN (4) NUTS TO RANGE OF 15 TO 25 FT. LB.

(20.5 TO 34 N-m)
8-175
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
2. Put the jack under the front of the AMX unit USING THE TWO LIPS ON THE
FRONT OF THE JACK, and lift the AMX unit enough to remove the wood
block(s).
3. Lower the AMX unit and remove the jack.
4. Referring to Illustration 7, reinstall the three pieces of the front bumper assembly.
a. Reinstall the middle piece of the front bumper by installing the (2) 10-32 x
1.25 bolts and (2) flat washers.
Note: For older AMX-4 units that used sticky tape to secure the middle piece of the
bumper, install with the furnished piece of 15 x 2 x .01 tape. Put the new
piece of tape over the old piece of tape if it is still present. For newer units,
discard the furnished piece of tape.
b. Reinstall each of the two corner pads by installing (4) 10-32 x 1.25 bolts for
each pad.
ILLUSTRATION 7
REINSTALLATION OF BUMPER ASSEMBLY
FOR OLDER AMX-4

UNITS ONLY,
INSTALL FURNISHED
15 x 2 x .01
PIECE OF TAPE
CORNER PAD
(4) 10-32 x 1.25 BOLT (2) FLAT

WASHER
(2) 10-32 x 1.25 BOLT CORNER PAD
MIDDLE
PIECE (4) 10-32 x 1.25 BOLT
8-176
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017517 AMX-4 Film Bin Kit Installation, Rev. 1, Title Page
GE Medical Systems
Technical
Publications
Direction 46-017517
Revision 1
AMX-4 Film Bin Kit Installation
Copyright 1992, 1993 By General Electric Co.
8-177
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017517 AMX-4 Film Bin Kit Installation, Rev. 1, Page i
REVISION HISTORY

A Feb. 25, 1992 Preliminary release.
B April 10, 1992 General revisions to preliminary copy.
0 April 17, 1992 Initial production release.
1 Oct. 29, 1993 Make corrections to Item 7 in Table 1.

Title Page 1
Damage in
Transportation -
Dir. 46-013861 -
i 1
1 thru 6 1
8-178
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017517 AMX-4 Film Bin Kit Installation, Rev. 1, Page 1
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
The 46-316069G1 AMX-4 Film Bin Kit consists of the items listed in Table 1.
TABLE 1
AMX-4 FILM BIN KIT 46-316069G1 PARTS LIST
ITEM PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY.
1 46-270231G2 TRAY ASSEMBLY 1
2 46-315933P1 TRIM BAR 1
3 46-315963P1 TEMPLATE 1
4 46-170015P23 1/4-20 x .5 SEMS SCR 3
5 46-270729P1 TRAY HANDLE 1
6 46-279030P3 10 x .75 PHILLIPS PAN HD SCR 4
7 1000904P171 .266 ID X .50 OD X .032 THK FLAT WASHER 4
8 46-170015P27 6-32 x .5 SEMS SCR 5
9 1000904P39 #8 FLAT WASHER 5
10 46-017517 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 1
11 46-315954P1 CAUTION LABEL, ENGLISH/FRENCH 1
12 46-315954P2 CAUTION LABEL, ENGLISH/SPANISH 1
13 46-315954P3 CAUTION LABEL, ENGLISH/GERMAN 1
14 46-315954P4 CAUTION LABEL, ENGLISH/ITALIAN 1
15 46-315954P5 CAUTION LABEL, ENGLISH/JAPANESE 1
The new film bin is not as tall as the old film bin. (Refer to Illustration 1.) The difference
in height is made up by a new trim bar which is located above the film bin.
ILLUSTRATIONă1
DIFFERENCE IN HEIGHT OF OLD & NEW FILM BINS
NOTE
THE HEIGHT
DIFFERENCE
21.75"
(552mm)
20.5"
(521mm)
8-179
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
SECTION 2
REMOVAL OF OLD FILM BIN
1. Turn power OFF by turning the AMX-4 main circuit breaker OFF".
2. Move the tube unit out of the way. (Refer to Illustration 2.)
3. Remove the (3) 6-32 screws retaining the latch collar. Remove the latch collar
and rotate the (2) top cover spring retainers above the film bin 90 degrees toward
the column. Lift and lock the AMX-4 top cover out of the way. (Refer to IllustraĆ
tion 2.)
ILLUSTRATIONă2
PREPARING FOR REMOVAL OF OLD FILM BIN
A. MOVE THE TUBE

B. REMOVE LATCH
UNIT OUT OF THE
COLLAR.
WAY.
C. RELEASE (2) SPRING

RETAINERS BY ROTATING
THEM TOWARDS THE
COLUMN BY (90). THEN LIFT
AND LOCK TOP OUT OF THE
WAY.
E. REMOVE THE (3) MIDDLE

SCREWS HOLDING THE BIN
FLANGE.
D. REMOVE THE (2) SCREWS, HOLDING

THE KICK PLATE.
(FOR OLDER UNITS, YOU WILL HAVE
TO PRY OFF KICK PLATE.)
8-180
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
4. Remove the kick plate by removing (2) 1/4-20 flat head screws. Save the kick plate
and the (2) screws. (Refer to Illustration 2.)
Note: For old AMX-4 units, the kick plate may be attached by two snaps, rather than
screws.
5. Remove (3) 8-32 SEM screws (the three middle screws) and (3) washers from the
bottom of the film bin. (Refer to Illustration 2.)
6. Loosen, but do NOT remove, (2) 8-32 SEM screws (the two outside screws) from
the bottom of the film bin. (Refer to Illustration 3.)
7. Lift the film bin enough to clear the base mounting surface. (Refer to Illustration
3.)
8. Pull the bottom of the bin out slightly. Now the whole bin can be removed, down
and out.
ILLUSTRATIONă3
REMOVAL OF OLD FILM BIN
B. LIFT THE BIN ENOUGH FOR

CLEARANCE OF THE
FLANGE AT THE BOTTOM.
C. PULL THE BOTTOM OF
THE BIN OUT SLIGHTLY.
NOW THE WHOLE BIN CAN
BE REMOVED, DOWN AND
OUT. A. LOOSEN THE (2) OUTSIDE SCREWS
HOLDING THE BOTTOM FLANGE OF
THE BIN.
8-181
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
SECTION 3
INSTALLATION OF NEW FILM BIN
1. Temporarily put the furnished template over the handle brace, and align it from
side to side. The ends of the template should match up with the ends of the handle
brace sheet metal.
2. Use a nail set, punch, or drill to transfer the (3) hole locations from the template
to the handle brace.
3. Drill the (3) holes with a .281 (9/32) drill bit.
Note: Use care to protect the AMX-4 unit from drill filings.
4. Install the furnished trim bar using the (3) furnished 1/4-20 x 1/2 socket head cap
screws from behind the handle brace. Leave these screws loose to allow room for
adjustment.
Note: The trim bar is not symmetrical, and therefore only fits in one orientation.
ILLUSTRATIONă4
INSTALLATION OF TRIM BAR
HARDWARE FOR THE
TRIM BAR
TEMPLATE (FOR
MARKING ONLY)
NEW TRIM BAR
B. PLACE THIS TRIM BAR A. TEMPORARILY PUT THE TEMPLATE

AGAINST THE HANDLE ON THE AMX HANDLE BRACE, AND
BRACE, AND LOOSELY MARK THE HOLE PATTERN FOR HANDLE
ATTACH. DRILLING. BRACE
8-182
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
5. Install the furnished handle onto the new film bin with the (4) furnished #10 PhilĆ
lips head thread forming screws and (4) furnished #10 flat washers. Leave these
screws loose to allow room for adjustment.
6. Install (2) furnished 8-32 SEMS screws and (2) furnished #8 flat washers on the
(2) outside holes at the bottom of the new film bin drawer. Leave these screws
loose to allow room for adjustment.
7. Install the film fin. The screws fit into the slots in the base.
8. Center the film bin from side to side so that it clears the generator weldment on
both sides at all film bin positions. Then tighten the (2) screws at the outside holes
at the bottom of the film bin.
9. Install the remaining (3) furnished 8-32 SEM screws and (3) furnished #8 flat
washers on the (3) inside holes at the bottom of the new film bin drawer, and tightĆ
en these screws.
10. Adjust the trim bar to be flush with the top of the handle brace. Then tighten the
(3) 1/4-20 x 1/2 socket head cap screws that are holding the trim bar to the hanĆ
dle brace.
11. Adjust the handle on the film bin for an even gap, nominally 1/8 (3 mm), to the
trim bar. Then tighten the (4) screws holding the handle.
12. Check the alignment of the magnetic latch with the film bin, and adjust the magĆ
netic latch position if necessary.
13. Reinstall the kick plate with its (2) 1/4-20 flat head screws.
Note: For old AMX-4 units without the screw holes in the kick plate, snap the kick
plate in place.
14. Lower the top cover.
15. Replace the latch collar and screws, and secure the spring retainers.
8-183
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
SECTION 4
INSTALLATION OF FILM BIN LABEL
1. Clean the top of film bin, in the area where the film bin label is to be installed, with
Isopropyl alcohol. (Refer to Illustration 5.) Allow to dry.
2. Select the one of the five furnished film bin labels with the message in the lanĆ
guages that are the most appropriate for this site. Peel the backing from this label,
and install the label to the top of the film bin as indicated in Illustration 5.
ILLUSTRATIONă5
INSTALLATION OF FILM BIN LABEL
TYPICAL FILM BIN LABEL

(SELECT LABEL WITH MESSAGE IN
THE LANGUAGES MOST
APPROPRIATE FOR THIS SITE.)
8-184
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017533 AMX-4 Latch Switch Assembly Installation, Rev. 1, Title Page
GE Medical Systems
Technical
Publications
Direction 46-017533
Revision 1
AMX-4 Latch Switch Assembly

Installation
8-185
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017533 AMX-4 Latch Switch Assembly Installation, Rev. 1, Page i/ii(blank)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
1 PURPOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2 BACKGROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
3 PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
4 ADDENDUM TO AMX-4 SCHEMATICS DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
5 ADDENDUM TO AMX-4 RENEWAL PARTS DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
8-186
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017533 AMX-4 Latch Switch Assembly Installation, Rev. 1, Page iii
REVISION HISTORY

A Oct. 7, 1992 Preliminary release.
0 Nov. 30, 1992 Initial production release.
1 Mar. 19, 1993 Update Section 5.

Title Page 1
Damage in -
Transportation
Dir. 46-013861 -
i 1
ii Blank
iii 1
1 thru 9 1
8-187
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017533 AMX-4 Latch Switch Assembly Installation, Rev. 1, Page 1
SECTION 1
PURPOSE
The purpose of this procedure is to remove the old design latch base assembly from the
generator and the latch pin assembly from the horizontal arm, and to install a new latch
base assembly and latch pin assembly.
SECTION 2
BACKGROUND
The hardware to be installed consists of a new latch base assembly that has a new design
for the latch switch. The function of the latch switch is to indicate to the AMX-4 drive
and to the X-ray control system whether the arm/tube assembly is in the latched
position.
The new switch design is a non-contact Hall effect sensor which is backward
compatible with the existing AMX-4 electronics. The function of the new latch pin
assembly is to house the magnet for the operation of the Hall effect sensor. The new
assemblies are also mechanically backward compatible so that no modifications to the
AMX-4 are required to use this new hardware.
SECTION 3
PROCEDURE
1. Turn the AMX-4 unit OFF" at the key switch.
2. Disable the power to the AMX-4 system by flipping the circuit breaker to the
OFF" position (down).
3. Remove the three 6-32 screws that hold the trim ring onto the latch base/top
cover assembly, and remove the trim ring.
4. Rotate the retaining clips forward that release the top cover, and lift the top cover
to gain access to the electrical terminal strip (AMX1 A2 TS2) that the latch switch
and solenoid are connected to. (Refer to Illustration 1.)
8-188
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
ILLUSTRATIONă1
LATCH PIN BASE ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
(4) MOUNTING
SCREWS & WASHERS
TERMINAL STRIP
(AMX1 A2 TS2)
8-189
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
5. Disconnect the two leads of the latch switch from the terminal strip (terminals A2
TS2-1 and 2).
6. Disconnect the two leads of the latch solenoid from the terminal strip (terminals
A2 TS2-3 and 4).
7. Remove the four 1/4-20 socket head screws and washers that hold the latch base
assembly to the generator assembly. Remove the latch base assembly and discard.
(Refer to Illustration 1.)
8. Route the wires through the appropriate openings in the generator assembly, and
mount the new latch base assembly to it using new furnished hardware (four
1/4-20 x .625 LG socket head screws and four flat washers). Center the latch base
assembly in the aluminum mounting plate adjustment slots. Run the screws down
to position the latch base, but do not tighten.
9. Lower the top cover into position. Latch the arm into the latch base. Reposition
the latch base assembly to provide equal clearance to the ears of the latch pin asĆ
sembly. Check clearance when parking arm from either side.
Note: Use care in repositioning the latch base assembly. Do not hammer on or near
the Hall effect switch.
10. Raise and latch the top cover. Torque the attachment screws to 90 in-lbs (10.2 N-
m).
11. Connect the solenoid leads to the terminal strip. Connect the red lead from the
solenoid to terminal A2 TS2-4. Connect the black lead from the solenoid to terĆ
minal A2 TS2-3.
12. Connect the latch switch assembly leads to the terminal strip. Connect the black
lead from the switch to terminal A2 TS2-3. Connect the yellow lead from the
switch to terminal A2 TS2-2. Connect the blue lead from the switch to terminal
A2 TS2-1.
13. Remove the four 1/4-20 screws and washers, and remove the latch pin assembly
from the horizontal arm. When this is done, the horizontal arm lock pin is unreĆ
strained and should be removed as well. (Refer to Illustration 2.)
8-190
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
ILLUSTRATIONă2
BRACKET INSTALLATION ON HORIZONTAL ARM
LOCK PIN
(STEP #13)
(4) MOUNTING
SCREWS & WASHERS
8-191
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017533 AMX-4 Latch Switch Assembly Installation, Rev. 1, Page 5/6(blank)
14. Install the new latch pin assembly (46-316307G1) with new furnished hardware
(four 1/4-20 x .625 LG socket head screws and four flat washers). Make sure that
the horizontal arm lock pin is installed at this time as well. Leave the attachment
screws loose until the latch is aligned.
15. Lower the top cover and lock in place.
16. Latch the horizontal arm and allow the latch pin to align itself to the latch base.
Make sure that the pin is at the bottom of the slot in the latch base assembly, and
that the latch lock is fully engaged.
17. Unlatch the horizontal arm while holding the latch pin assembly and maintaining
the alignment. Tighten the latch pin assembly attachment screws so that they are
snug, but do not torque them yet.
18. Check alignment (the latch pin should not hit any part of the latch base until it botĆ
toms out on the base latch assembly slot). When alignment is satisfactory, torque
the latch pin attachment screws to 90 in-lbs (10.2 N-m).
19. Install the trim ring onto the latch base with the three 6-32 screws.
20. Flip the AMX-4 circuit breaker switch to the ON" position (up).
21. Turn the key switch to the ON" position and let the AMX-4 unit go through its
self-checks.
22. Verify that the unit drives at full speed when the horizontal arm is in the latched
position, and half speed when the horizontal arm is unlatched.
8-192
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017533 AMX-4 Latch Switch Assembly Installation, Rev. 1, Page 7/8(blank)
SECTION 4
ADDENDUM TO AMX-4
SCHEMATICS DIRECTION
Detach this AMX1 A2 S1 Hall effect tube parked sensor board schematic page from
this direction, and put this page with the schematics direction for this AMX-4 unit. The
board replaces the old tube parked switch AMX1 A2 S1.
HALL EFFECT TUBE PARKED SENSOR BOARD 46-288962G1

AMX1 A2 S1
46-288962-S
YEL (2)
(SEE NOTE)
R4
5.1K
1%
S1 0.125W E
UGN3140LT R3
2 MMBT3906L
1 OUT B Q1
VCC 5.1K
GND 3 1%
BLK (3) 0.125W C BLU (1)
(SEE NOTE) (SEE NOTE)
R1
301
1%
0.125W
Note: Refer to the AMX-4 Overall Wiring Schematic 46-270157-S or

46-315161-S for the following:
Blue lead (1) connects to AMX1 A2 TS2-1 (Sheet 8, Zone F6)
Yellow lead (2) connects to AMX1 A2 TS2-2 (Sheet 8, Zone F6)
Black lead (3) connects to AMX1 A2 TS2-3 (Sheet 2, Zone D7)
8-193
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
SECTION 5
ADDENDUM TO AMX-4
RENEWAL PARTS DIRECTION
This AMX-4 unit has latch switch hardware installed that does not correspond to the
current renewal parts manuals. Please note the following changed and added part numĆ
bers in Table 1. Table 1 should be used if the described parts need replacement.
Detach this page from this direction, and put this page with the renewal parts direction
for this AMX-4 unit.
TABLE 1
RENEWAL PARTS ADDENDUM
OLD PART NUMBER NEW / ADDED PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
N/A 46-316198G1 LATCH KIT
N/A 46-288962G1 HALL EFFECT SENSOR ELECTRONICS

PWB ASSEMBLY
N/A 46-316047P1 PLASTIC COVER OVER HALL EFFECT SENSOR

PWB ASSEMBLY
N/A 46-208562P37 COVER ATTACHMENT FLAT HEAD SCREWS
N/A 46-270985P1 SOLENOID
46-315591G1 46-316307G1 BRACKET ASSEMBLY, HORIZONTAL ARM
N/A 46-315366P1 LATCH PIN, DELRIN
8-194
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017552 AMX-4 Installation of Gates Genesis Batteries, Rev. 2, Title Page
GE Medical Systems
Technical
Publications
Direction 46-017552
Revision 2
AMX-4 Installation of
Gates Genesis® Batteries
8-195
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Source: Direction 46-017552 AMX-4 Installation of Gates Genesis Batteries, Rev. 2
Direction 46-017552
Revision 2
AMX-4 Installation of
Gates Genesis Batteries

XĆray equipment if not properly equipment can provide complete Room 1016, Bethesda, Maryland
used may cause injury. AccordĆ protection. Nor can any practical 20814, and of the International
ingly, the instructions herein conĆ design compel the operator to take Commission on Radiation ProtecĆ
tained should be thoroughly read adequate precautions to prevent tion, and take adequate steps to
and understood by everyone who the possibility of any persons careĆ protect against injury.
will use the equipment before you lessly exposing themselves or othĆ
attempt to place this equipment in ers to radiation. The equipment is sold with the unĆ
operation. The General Electric derstanding that the General ElecĆ
Company, Medical Systems It is important that everyone having tric Company, Medical Systems
Group, will be glad to assist and anything to do with xĆradiation be Group, its agents, and representaĆ
cooperate in placing this equipĆ properly trained and fully acĆ tives have no responsibility for injury
ment in use. quainted with the recommendaĆ or damage which may result from
tions of the National Council on improper use of the equipment.
Although this apparatus incorpoĆ Radiation Protection and MeasureĆ
rates a high degree of protection ments as published in NCRP Various protective material and deĆ
against xĆradiation other than the Reports available from NCRP PubliĆ vices are available. It is urged that
useful beam, no practical design of cations, 7910 Woodmont Avenue, such materials or devices be used.
8-196
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017552 AMX-4 Installation of Gates Genesis Batteries, Rev. 2, Page i
If you have any comments, suggestions or corrections to the information in this document, please
write them down, include the document title and document number, and send them to:
MEDICAL SYSTEMS
ENGINEERING, X-RAY W-702
MANAGER - FIELD SERVICE DEVELOPMENT
P.O. BOX 414
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1Ć1 Furnished Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1Ć2 Field Supplied Materials, Special Tools, Supplies,
and Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2 PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2Ć1 Gates Batteries No-Load Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2Ć2 Removal & Disposal of Hawker Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2Ć3 Installation of Gates Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2Ć4 Load Defaults & Recalibrate Entire System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2Ć5 Final Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3 SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
8-197
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Source: Direction 46-017552 AMX-4 Installation of Gates Genesis Batteries, Rev. 2, Page iii
REVISION HISTORY

A Feb. 18, 1993 Preliminary release.
B Mar. 4, 1993 Revisions after in-house trial.
C May 4, 1993 Added new battery sense circuit board and harness. Deleted the battery state of
health test that was used for the first field trials.
D July 27, 1993 Added 46-329314G2 Upgrade Kit.
0 Sept. 24, 1993 Initial product release.
1 Oct. 29, 1993 Make correction to Insulator #5 in Illustration 3. Add new furnished battery poĆ
larity label to Sections 1-1 and 2-5, and add new Illustration 7 to show installaĆ
tion of the label.
2 May 20, 1994 Clarified how to measure battery voltage in Section 2-3.

Title Page 2
X-Ray Protection 2
i thru iii 2
1 thru 19 2
8-198
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Direction 46-017552 AMX-4 Installation of Gates Genesis Batteries, Rev. 2, Page 1
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
1Ć1 Furnished Materials

46-329314G1: AMX-4 Gates Battery Upgrade Kit With Battery Test Harness
OR
46-329314G2: AMX-4 Gates Battery Upgrade Kit Without Battery Test Harness
QTY. QTY.
ITEM PART NO. DESCRIPTION 46-329314G1 46-329314G2
1 46-329098G1 BATTERIES GATES GENESIS, GROUP OF NINE 1 1
2 46-329088P1 TERMINAL PLATE 18 18
3 46-311805P3 LOCKWASHER, M6 36 36
4 46-312345P4 NUT, M6 18 18
5 46-321370G1 PRINTED WIRING ASSEMBLY 1 1
6 46-329061P1 BATTERY SPACER INSULATOR 3 3
12* 46-329091P1 BATTERY INTERCONNECT CABLE #1 WITH 2 BOOTS, 7.0" 2 2
13* 46-329091P2 BATTERY INTERCONNECT CABLE #2 WITH 1 BOOT, 13.5” 1 1
14* 46-329091P3 BATTERY INTERCONNECT CABLE #3 WITH 2 BOOTS, 19.0” 1 1
20 46-316915G2 BATTERY TEST HARNESS CABLE WITH TERMINAL BLOCK 1 NONE
21 46-208560P13 4-40 X .5 INCH SCREW 2 NONE
22 46-170012P34 4-40 KEPS NUT 2 NONE
23 46-329315P1 SHIPPING BOX TO RETURN OLD HAWKER BATTERIES 9 9
24 46-208758P3 TY-RAP STRAP 4 NONE
25 2100969 BATTERY SEPARATOR PAD 4 4
26 46-329183P1 BATTERY POLARITY LABEL 1 1
27 46-017552 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 1 1
* Battery cables 46-329091P1 through P8 are not available individually from SPO, but must be ordered from SPO as a set,
Part # 2101223.
8-199
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.

and Test Equipment
1. Digital voltmeter with 200 milliampere scale.
Note: Required accuracy for the digital voltmeter for AMX Charger Calibration is +
0.3 VDC at 120 VDC.
2. Storage oscilloscope.
3. HV divider C1515A with five foot HV cables & a 17.5 foot Belden 8422 cable
46-219921G2.
4. Battery Load Fixture 46-302882G1.
5. Torque wrench 46-282782P1 (2-36 in-lb. [0.2-4.1 NĆm]), or torque wrench set
46-268445G1.
8-200
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
SECTION 2
PROCEDURE
Perform indicated sequence of sections per flow chart of Illustration 1.
ILLUSTRATIONă1
DIR. 46-017552 FLOW CHART
START
DO SEC. 2-1
GATES BATTERIES NO-LOAD TEST"
DO SEC. 2-2
REMOVAL & DISPOSAL OF HAWKER BATTERIES"
DO SEC. 2-3
INSTALLATION OF GATES BATTERIES"
DO SEC. 2-4
LOAD DEFAULTS & RECALIBRATE ENTIRE
SYSTEM"
DO SEC. 2-5
FINAL STEPS"
END
2Ć1 Gates Batteries No-Load Test

Note: The new Gates batteries were thoroughly tested prior to being packed for this
battery installation kit. Although we don't expect it to happen, it is possible for
batteries to develop a cell short while in storage.
Therefore this No-Load test is a quality field test that must be performed on
the Gates batteries outside of AMX unit, before removing Hawker batteries
from AMX.
PERSONAL INJURY!
REMOVE ALL JEWELRY AND RINGS WHEN HANDLING BATTERIES.
WARNING
USE EXTREME CAUTION; HIGH AMPERAGE AND VOLTAGE IS
PRESENT. USE INSULATED TOOLS FOR WORKING ON BATTERIES.
Note: Do NOT connect the Gates batteries to each other or to the AMX for following
No-Load Test.
8-201
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
1. Number the Gates batteries with a felt tip marker, 1 through 9.
2. Measure each battery voltage (no-load) in order, 1 through 9, and record in Table
1 of this direction in columns marked NO-LOAD VOLTAGE".
3. Sum the nine individual battery voltages just recorded, in columns marked NO-
LOAD VOLTAGE", and record that sum in box marked TOTAL SET NO-
LOAD VOLTAGE" in Table 1.
4. Divide the TOTAL SET NO-LOAD VOLTAGE" sum by 9, and record that valĆ
ue in box marked AVERAGE BATTERY NO-LOAD VOLTAGE" in Table 1.
5. Now, in Table 1, compare the individual NO-LOAD VOLTAGE" values against

the AVERAGE BATTERY NO-LOAD VOLTAGE" value. Any battery that is
more than 0.2 volts lower than the AVERAGE BATTERY NO-LOAD VOLTĆ
AGE" value failed the No-Load test.
6. If any of these new Gates batteries failed the no-load test, order 46-329097P1
for replacement battery(s).
TABLE 1
INDIVIDUAL BATTERY & AVERAGE BATTERY NO LOAD VOLTAGES
BATTERY NO-LOAD BATTERY NO-LOAD

NUMBER VOLTAGE NUMBER VOLTAGE
1 6
2 7
3 8
4 9
5 xxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
TOTAL SET NO-LOAD VOLTAGE = _________________ VOLTS
AVERAGE BATTERY NO-LOAD VOLTAGE

(TOTAL SET NO-LOAD VOLTAGE BY 9) = _________________ VOLTS
8-202
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
2Ć2 Removal & Disposal of Hawker Batteries
Before starting to remove batteries, be sure that the AMX key switch is in the OFF"
position, and that the circuit breaker is OFF."
PERSONAL INJURY!
REMOVE ALL JEWELRY AND RINGS WHEN HANDLING BATTERIES
WARNING
OR REACHING IN BATTERY COMPARTMENT. USE EXTREME CAUĆ
TION; HIGH AMPERAGE AND VOLTAGE IS PRESENT. USE INSULATED
TOOLS FOR WORKING ON BATTERIES.
Note: Before working in battery compartment, be sure to remove battery ground

cable marked #2 from battery ground stud, and to tape connector separately
in order to assure that this cable will not short out to any other wiring.
1. Remove batteries from battery compartment using procedure of Section 6-1,

Battery Removal, of AMX-4 Service Direction 46-017220, 46-017328, or
46-017499, as appropriate to the AMX Model Number.
2. Leave the battery compartment top and bottom insulation in place in the AMX
unit. Set the remainder of the old battery insulators aside, since they will not be
used for installation of the Gates batteries.
3. Set old battery cables aside, since they will not be used for installation of the Gates
batteries. (This includes the old wires between batteries, from battery (-) to
ground stud, and from battery (+) to circuit breaker.)
4. Dispose of the old AMX lead acid batteries as follows:
a. In the USA:
Use the nine furnished shipping boxes to return the old Hawker batteries to
the address on the box labels.
b. In Canada, in Latin America, in the Europe pole, and in the Asia pole:
Contact your local FMI coordinator for disposal instructions.
2Ć3 Installation of Gates Batteries

Before starting to install batteries, be sure that the AMX key switch is in the OFF"
position, and that the circuit breaker is OFF."
PERSONAL INJURY!
WARNING
TION; HIGH AMPERAGE AND VOLTAGE IS PRESENT. USE INSULATED
TOOLS FOR WORKING ON BATTERIES.
Note: Observe the following during installation procedure:

Be sure that battery compartment top and bottom insulation is in place.
8-203
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Make all battery connections as shown in Illustration 2, using the hardware

shown. Torque to 45-50 inch pounds (5.1-5.6 NĆm) on ALL battery conĆ
nections.
Install batteries as shown in Illustration 3. Place insulation boots over ends
of each cable.
Note: Cable #'s indicated in Illustration 3 are physically marked on the parts as furĆ
nished. Insulator numbers are shown for convenience in description, but are
not physically marked on the parts. (There are no Insulators #3 and #7, so
don't look for them.) Battery #'s are as you marked the batteries in Section
2-1.
Note: References to the right and left sides of battery compartment are relative to an
observer looking into battery compartment from side of AMX.
Note: For schematic of the new battery sense circuit, refer to Section 3 of this direcĆ
tion, which consists of the Gates Battery Sense Schematic, 46-321370-S.
1. Install terminal plates on each battery. (Refer to Illustration 2.) Discard flat washĆ
ers supplied with batteries.
2. Position two batteries (shown as Batteries #2 & #4 in Illustration 3) in the battery

compartment opening stacked one on top of the other, with a battery separator
pad between them. Don't remove paper backing from separator pad. Orient pad
with paper backing facing up. Put both batteries into position at back of recess on
right side of compartment.
3. Position Batteries #1 & #3 in the compartment opening stacked one on top of the
other, with a separator pad between them. (Refer to Illustration 3.) Don't remove
paper backing from separator pad. Orient pad with paper backing facing up. Push
both batteries into position on right side of compartment, along side Batteries #2
& #4.
4. Install Insulator #4 as shown between Batteries #2 & #4 and Batteries #1 & #3.
Install one of the Insulator #2's next to Batteries #1 & #3, as shown, and another
of the Insulator #2's next to Batteries #2 & #4.
Note: Don't confuse Insulator #4 with the Insulator #1's. Insulator #4 has two nonĆ
functional holes, but the Insulator #1's each have two full cup-shaped bumps
with no holes.
5. Connect end of Cable #6 with sense lead to Battery #3 (+) and connect other end
to Battery #2 (-), as shown. Slide a boot over each terminal.
8-204
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
ILLUSTRATIONă2
INSTALLATION OF TERMINALS
AND TERMINAL PLATES ON BATTERIES
M6 HEX HD SCREW
(FURNISHED WITH BATTERY)
M6 LOCKWASHER
(FURNISHED WITH KIT)
TERMINAL PLATE
NOTE: TORQUE TO 45-50 IN-LBS

(5.1-5.6 NĆm) ON ALL
BATTERY CONNECTIONS.
(THIS SUPERCEDES TORQUE SPEC
ON BATTERY LABEL, WHICH IS A
MAXIMUM TORQUE.)
M6 HEX NUT
M6 LOCKWASHER
6. For one of the Cable #7's, connect end with sense lead to Battery #4 (+), and
connect other end to Battery #3 (-). Slide a boot over each terminal. For
remaining Cable #7, connect end with sense lead to Battery #2 (+) and connect
other end to Battery #1 (-). Slide a boot over each terminal.
7. Connect end of Cable #8 without sense lead to Battery #4 (-), and slide a boot
over this terminal. (Orient cable so that the terminal lug points down at 45 toward
door opening.) Do not connect the other end of Cable #8 yet.
8. Connect end of Cable #4 with sense lead to Battery #1 (+) as shown, and slide
a boot over this terminal. Route Cable #4 through grommet in hole in top of batĆ
tery compartment, connect it to the top terminal (LINE) on circuit breaker in
AMX1 A3, and slide boot over terminal.
9. Install Insulator #5, Insulator #6, and the remaining Insulator #2 as shown.
10. Position Batteries #5 & #6 in compartment opening stacked one on top of the
other with a separator pad between them, as shown. Don't remove paper backing
from separator pad. Orient pad with paper backing facing up.
11. For one of the Cable #1's, connect end with sense lead to Battery #6 (+), and
connect other end to Battery #5 (-). Slide boots over each terminal.
8-205
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
ILLUSTRATIONă3
INSTALLATION OF BATTERIES
IN BATTERY COMPARTMENT
CABLE #7
SENSE LEAD CABLE #7
CABLE #6
CABLE #4,
POSITIVE TO
CIRCUIT BREAKER
CABLE #8 SEE
NOTE 2.
CABLE #8
SENSE LEAD CABLE #4
SENSE LEAD
CABLE #7
CABLE #1 SENSE LEAD
SENSE LEAD
CABLE #7
CABLE #6
SENSE LEAD
PWB ASM
BATTERY SEPARATOR PAD, CABLE #3 46-321370G1
TYPICAL (4 PLACES)
SEE NOTE 3. CABLE #3
SENSE LEAD
CABLE #1
CABLE #5
SEE CABLE #5
NOTE 2. SENSE LEAD
CABLE #1
CABLE #1
SENSE LEAD SEE
NOTE 2.
CABLE #2
SENSE LEAD
SEE
NOTE 2.
CABLE #2,
NEGATIVE TO
GROUND STUD
NOTE 1: THERE ARE NO INSULATORS #3 & #7, SO DON'T LOOK FOR THEM.
NOTE 2: DON'T CONFUSE INSULATOR #4 WITH THE INSULATOR #1'S.
INSULATOR #4 HAS TWO NONĆFUNCTIONAL HOLES, BUT THE INSULATOR #1'S
EACH HAVE TWO FULL CUP-SHAPED BUMPS WITH NO HOLES. THE INSULATOR
#1'S MUST BE ORIENTED WITH BUMPS POINTING AWAY FROM YOU.
NOTE 3: ADD BATTERY SEPARATOR PADS BETWEEN BATTERIES 1 & 3, 2 & 4, 5 & 6,
AND 7 & 8. DON'T REMOVE PAPER BACKING FROM BATTERY SEPARATOR PADS.
ORIENT PADS WITH PAPER BACKING FACING UP.
8-206
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
12. Connect end of Cable #3 without the sense lead to Battery #6 (-), and slide a boot
over terminal. Do not connect other end of Cable #3 yet.
13. Push Batteries #5 & #6 to rear of battery compartment.
14. Connect free end of Cable #8 (the cable which comes from battery #4 [-]) to BatĆ
tery #5 (+), and slide a boot over terminal.
15. Place the furnished 46-321370G1 Printed Wiring Board Assembly (PWB) of IlĆ
lustration 4 into battery compartment as shown in Illustration 3.
a. Connect Cable #7 Sense Lead (that comes from Battery #2) to Terminal J2
of PWB (RHS [right hand side]) as shown in Illustration 4.
b. Connect Cable #7 Sense Lead (from Battery #4 [+]) to Terminal J4 of PWB

(RHS).
c. Connect Cable #6 Sense Lead (from Battery #3 [+]) to J3 of PWB (RHS).
d. Connect Cable #4 Sense Lead (from Battery #1 [+]) to J1 of PWB (RHS).
e. Connect Cable #1 Sense Lead (from Battery #6 [+]) to J6 (LHS [left hand
side]).
f. Connect Cable #8 Sense Lead (from Battery #5 [+]) to J5 (LHS) of PWB.
16. Install one of the Insulator #1's (the one that goes between Batteries #5 & #6 and
Batteries #7 & #8), as shown in Illustration 3, with cup-shaped bumps pointing
away from you. Route free end of Cable #3 over top of Insulator #1.
17. Position Batteries #7 & #8 in compartment opening stacked one on top of the othĆ
er with a separator pad between them, as shown. Don't remove paper backing
from separator pad. Orient pad with paper backing facing up.
18. For remaining Cable #1, connect end with sense lead to Battery #8 (+) and conĆ
nect other end to Battery #7 (-). Slide a boot over each terminal.
CAUTION / WARNING
This is "NOT" the number 5 19. Connect end of Cable #5 without sense lead to Battery #8 (-), and slide a boot
cable that was attached to over terminal. Do not connect other end of Cable #5 yet.
the ground lug
20. Push Batteries #7 & #8 back into position, as shown, while holding Cable #3
above Insulator #1.
21. Connect free end of Cable #3 (the Cable that comes from Battery #6 [-]) vertiĆ
cally to Battery #7 (+), and slide a boot over terminal.
22. Connect the following sense leads at this time:
a. Connect Cable #1 Sense Lead (from Battery #8 [+]) to J8 of PWB (LHS).

b. Connect Cable #3 Sense Lead (from Battery #7 [+]) to J7 of PWB (LHS).
8-207
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
ILLUSTRATIONă4
CONNECTION OF SENSE LEADS TO PRINTED WIRING BOARD ASM (PWB)
PRINTED WIRING BD ASM

46-321370G1
CABLE #7
SENSE LEAD
CABLE #1
SENSE LEAD (J2)
CABLE #7
SENSE LEAD
CABLE #4
SENSE LEAD
(J6)
(J5)
CABLE #6
(J1) SENSE LEAD
CONNECT HARNESS
(J4) TO CONNECTOR J11
CABLE #8 (J7) (APPLICABLE TO KIT
SENSE LEAD 46-329314G1 ONLY.)
(J8)
(J11)
(J3)
(J10)
CABLE #3
SENSE LEAD
CABLE #1
SENSE LEAD
(J9)
CABLE #2
SENSE LEAD
CABLE #5
SENSE LEAD
8-208
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
23. Install another of the Insulator #1's (the one that goes between Batteries #7 &
#8 and Battery #9), as shown, with cup-shaped bumps pointing away from you.
Route free end of Cable #5 over the top of this Insulator #1.
24. Install Insulator #8 as shown.
25. Position Battery #9 on top of Insulator #8 as shown.

CAUTION / WARNING
This is "NOT" the number 26. Connect free end of Cable #5 (the Cable that comes from Battery #8 [-]) to BatĆ
5 cable that was attached tery #9 (+), and slide a boot over terminal.
to the ground lug
27. Cable #2 will be the ground. To prevent Cable #2 from shorting after it is conĆ
nected to Battery #9, tape the end of Cable #2 that does not have the sense lead.
Connect other end of Cable #2 to Battery #9 (-), and slide a boot over cable terĆ
minal. Route Cable #2 through grommet in hole in top of battery compartment.
Do NOT connect Cable #2 to ground stud yet.
28. Connect the remaining sense leads:
b. Connect Cable #2 Sense Lead (from Battery #9 [-]) to J10 of PWB (LHS).
29. Measure the battery voltage between top circuit breaker terminal (LINE) with
Cable #4 connected (battery positive) and the unconnected end of Cable #2 (batĆ
tery negative). It should measure between 111 and 118 volts DC, depending upon
state of charge of the batteries. If it does not, determine the cause of the problem.
30. (Applicable to Kit 46-329314G1 ONLY.)
Route the terminal block cable through the unit and mount the terminal block as
follows:
a. Open top cover of AMX-4.
b. Route connector end of furnished terminal block cable through grommets in

chassis as shown in Illustration 5. To attach terminal block to chassis, drill two
holes .140 Diameter, 2.65 apart, and attach terminal block using hardware
as shown in Illustration 5.
c. Secure terminal block cable to existing harness using furnished Ty-rap straps.
Connect other end of cable to the 46-321270G1 PWB connector J11.
d. Measure the individual battery Voltages across terminals of terminal block.

Position 1 to Position 2 of terminal block measures Battery #1, Position 2 to
Position 3 measures Battery #2, and so forth. Voltage of each battery should
be greater than 12.0 Volts. The actual value will depend upon battery state of
charge.
8-209
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
ILLUSTRATIONă5
INSTALLATION OF BATTERY TEST HARNESS IN AMX-4 UNIT
(APPLICABLE TO KIT 46-329314G1 ONLY.)
VIEW A"
(2) 4-40 KEPS NUTS
46-170012P34
HARNESS CONNECTS TO
OPPOSITE SIDE OF AMX
(SEE VIEW A")
(2) 4-40 SCREWS

46-208560P13
CABLE
46-316915G2
CONNECT TO
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ASM
(SEE ILLUSTRATION 4)
8-210
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
31. Place the unit on a level floor. Extend the horizontal arm and rotate it to the front
end of the AMX (vertical-column end). Distribution of weight is necessary in
installing the battery-compartment cover. See Illustration 6.
32. Place the remaining Insulator #1 in the compartment opening with cup-shaped
bumps pointing away from you, as shown is Illustration 3.
The battery compartment cover is an integral part of the Base Assembly. All
CAUTION six bolts must be in place and torqued to 75 inch pounds (8.4 NewtonĆmeters)
or the Base Assembly can be warped or cracked.
33. Install battery compartment cover. Torque six capscrews to 75 inch pounds (8.4
NewtonĆmeters), as shown in Illustration 6.
(If applicable, reĆinstall the two metal plates [46-286167P1] that were installed
in a previous FMI to correct over-size mounting holes.)
34. Remove tape from free end of Cable #2, and connect Cable #2 to ground stud
using Flat Washer and Nut.
35. Install left side cover on AMX.
36. This completes the battery installation.

ILLUSTRATIONă6
AMX BATTERY COMPARTMENT
COVER INSTALLATION
ARM EXTENDED
LEVEL FLOOR
BOLTS TORQUED TO
75 IN. LBS. (8.4 NĆm)
8-211
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
2Ć4 Load Defaults & Recalibrate Entire System

Do the following sections, in sequence indicated below, from AMX-4 Calibration DiĆ
rection.
Note: To save time, you should install high voltage bleeder and set up oscilloscope for
proper triggering before you enter calibration mode.
CAUTION Observe proper radiation safety when making x-ray exposures!
1. Section 3-6: Load Default Values"
Note: Section 3-6 must be done before calibration of any item.
Note: After loading defaults, checksum errors will be displayed if you transition to
top menu level. Until AMX-4 is totally calibrated, these checksum errors will
be displayed as a reminder that system is not fully calibrated. Simply push the
mAs switch to continue past each checksum message, then mAs
to enter
calibration.
2. Section 3-1: Calibrate Drive Handle"
3. Section 3-2: Calibrate Voltmeter"
4. Section 3-3: Calibrate Generator"
Note: In order to assure exposure accuracy at high technique and low battery voltage,
DO NOT calibrate generator when battery voltage is 115 volts or greater.
Note: If there are TUBE SPITS at high kVp's during Calibrate Taps," try to slow the
pace of calibration when the kVp is greater than 115 kVp. That is, wait approxiĆ
mately 45 seconds between exposures, and keep the unit in prep longer by alĆ
lowing the message READY FOR X-RAY" to be displayed for 5 seconds beĆ
fore pressing expose switch.
5. Section 3-4: Calibrate Charger"
6. Section 3-5: Adjust Field Light On Time"
7. Section 3-7, steps 1 through 6: End Calibration"
Note: Step 6 of Section 3-7 of AMX-4 calibration direction requires functional

checks of calibrated items in order to ensure proper operation.
2Ć5 Final Steps

1. Attach the furnished battery label 46-329183P1 as shown in Illustration 7. Place
it over old battery polarity label (if present).
2. Be sure that the circuit breaker still OFF," and reinstall all covers.
3. Do a complete functional check of the AMX unit, including making exposures.
4. Recommend to the customer that he put the AMX unit on charge for an least one
hour before using.
8-212
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
ILLUSTRATIONă7
INSTALLATION OF FURNISHED BATTERY POLARITY LABEL 46-329183P1
INSTALL FURNISHED BATTERY POLARITY LABEL AS SHOWN.

PLACE IT OVER OLD BATTERY POLARITY LABEL (IF PRESENT).
8-213
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0
8-214
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
SECTION 3
SCHEMATICS
AMX2 A3 A1 Gates Battery Sense Circuit 46-321370G1
8-215/8-216(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
+ BATT N O T E S :
A 1 . T H E G R O U P N U M B E R A N D G R O U P R E V I S I O N A
J1
115. 2_VDC R 1 F O R T H I S P WA I S 4 6 – 3 2 1 3 7 0 G 1 – A
1
B AT T ERY # 1
+ 15. 0K
1% 2 . T H I S S C H E M A T I C M E E T S T H E S P E C I F I C A –
1. 0W
T I O N S O F G E S C H E M A T I C S T A N D A R D S
– J2
4 6 – 0 1 7 4 8 6 .
102. 4_VDC R 2 3 . U N L E S S O T H E R WI S E S P E C I F I E D
1
B AT T ERY # 2
+ 15. 0K
1% A L L R E S I S T O R S A R E 0 . 2 5 W, 1 % A N D A R E
1. 0W
I N O H M S .
B B
– J3
4 . A C T I V E L O W S I G N A L S A R E I N D I C A T E D
89. 6_VDC R3 WI T H ” * ” A F T E R T H E S I G N A L N A M E
1
B AT T ERY # 3
+ 15. 0K
1%
1. 0W
– J4
76. 8_VDC R4
1
B AT T ERY # 4
+ 15. 0K
1% BA T T E RY
C 1. 0W C
TEST
115. 2_VOLT_SENSE_9 P OI NT S
– J5 J11
102. 4_VOLT_SENSE_8
64. 0_VDC R5 1 2
1
B AT T ERY # 5
+ 15. 0K
1%
1. 0W 89. 6_VOLT_SENSE_7
3 1
76. 8_VOLT_SENSE_6
– J6
4 6
64. 0_VOLT_SENSE_5
51. 2_VDC R6 5 5
1 51. 2_VOLT_SENSE_4
B AT T ERY # 6
+ 15. 0K
1%
6 7
D 1. 0W 38. 4_VOLT_SENSE_3 D
7 8
– J7
8 3
38. 4_VDC R7 9 4
B AT T ERY # 7
+ 15. 0K
1%
10 9
11 10
GROUND_SENSE
– J8
E 25. 6_VDC R8 E
1
B AT T ERY # 8
+ 15. 0K
1%
1. 0W
– J9
12. 8_VDC R9
1
B AT T ERY # 9
+ 15. 0K
1%
1. 0W
S I G N
R E V I S I O N P C N N U M B E R D A T E
F – J10 n
O F F F
GROUND R1 0 A – – – – – – 2 5 M A R 9 3
1 n
15. 0K 0 – – – – – – 2 8 J U N 9 3 F B
– BATT 1% n
1. 0W
/ u s e r / a mx _ 4 / g a t e s _ b a t t e r y _ b d 1 1
H H
0 G A T E S B A T T E R Y S E N S E
XX X X – X X X– X XX
AMX 4
4 6 –3 21 3 70 – S
1 – D. VOI GHT 24–FEB–93 FRED BOEHM 28–J UN–93 4 0 4 TOM HELMI NI AK 28–J UN–93
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8-217/8-218(blank)
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0
HHS TEST DATA
NOTE: REFERENCE DIRECTION 46-013894 (SYSTEM FIELD TESTS FOR HHS)

- AMERICAS POLE
8-219
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Form FDA 2579 (7/92)
8-220
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
REV 0 Source: Form F3382MX, Rev. 2, 5-2292, Page 1
8-221
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-222
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-223
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-224
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-225
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-226
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-227
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
8-228
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
SECTION 9 - LAB/QUIZ
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 9 - LAB/QUIZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9-1
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
9-2
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
LAB GUIDE
COURSE: AMX-4 (XR011
TITLE OF LAB EXERCISE: AMX-4 CALIBRATION
Description: AMX-4 Standard Calibration
References: AMX-4 Service Manual Direction 46-017494 - Tab 3 - Calibration
Competency: Ability to calibrate the AMX-4 utilizing applicable documentation
Procedure Time: 1 Hour
Safety: AMX-4 should be placed in an area where exposures can be safely made to protect
personnel from unnecessary radiation. Refer to Section 2 (Page 2-1)
Lab Procedures: Utilize proper tools and test equipment as stated in Direction 46-017494 (Tab 3) to
accomplish the standard calibration as outlined in Tab 3.
9-3
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
LAB GUIDE
TITLE OF LAB EXERCISE: AMX-4 DIAGNOSTICS
Description: Optional lab. Run desired diagnostic tests - your choice
References: Direction 46-017207 (AMX-4 Diagnostics)
Competency: Ability to run on-board diagnostic check/tests
Procedure Time: Variable
Safety: Refer to Section 2 (Page 2-7)
Lab Procedures: Refer to 46-017207 AMX-4 Diagnostics for appropriate procedures.
9-4
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
LAB GUIDE
TITLE OF LAB EXERCISE: ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Description: Optional lab. Gather additional troubleshooting information (of your choice) -
waveforms, voltage measurements, etc.
References: AMX-4 Service Manual Direction 46-017494
Competency: none stated
Procedure Time: Variable
Safety: Refer to Section 2
Lab Procedures: Utilize proper tools and test equipment as stated in Direction 46-017494 to accomplish
this task.
9-5
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
DIAGNOSTICS LAB EXERCISE
1. Turn off the unit Loop Test. How did you do it?
2. Turn on the field lamp without the collimator light switches.
3. Activate the wheel drives without using the applications drive mode.
4. Look at RDP0, RDP1, RDP4, and RDP6 and determine what bits are active. What functions are active in the
IDLE" mode?
PORT # 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 HEX #
RDP0
RDP1
RDP4
RDP6
5. At RDP0, what hex value do we have when bits 3 & 4 are active?
6. Turn on the Rotor without the Handswitch.
7. What are the 5 most recent errors?
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
8. Demonstrate Checksum Bypass mode.
9. Using Loop Test, energize the SAFETY CONTACTOR.
10. Energize tap relay 4. What hex code did you enter?
Check for proper feedback. What hex code did you read?
11. Pull in all the taps relays using the Loop Test", and verify that they are all pulled in (leave the side covers on).
9-6
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
AMX -4 FIELD TRAINING Q&A DISCUSSION
Questions
1. Which manual contains the kVp Accuracy statement for AMX-4.
1. System Field Test for HHS
2. Functional Check
3. AMX-4 Operation (Overview Tab in Technical Supplement)
4. Installation
2. During calibration you receive a CHECK SUM ERR 1". The directions tell us to:
1. Recalibrate drive (Calibration Tab of AMX-4 Service Manual)
2. Recalibrate charger
3. Calibrate generator
4. Calibrate field light
3. Battery removal is covered in which manual?
1. AMX-4 Periodic Maintenance Section of the AMX-4 Service Manual
2. AMX-4 Battery Service Manual
3. Battery manufacturer's maintenance manual
4. AMX-4 Service section of AMX-4 Service Manual
4. What type of tube is used in the AMX-4?
1. MX-100, 0.6-1.0-15_
2. HRT-09, 0.75-1.25-15_
3. MX-75, 0.75-1.25
4. MX-75 FLXR
5. The Loop Test ...........
1. Continuously reads a selected address, or writes data that you specify to a selected address (Pg. 4-7 of
Proprietary Diagnostics)
2. Displays battery voltage on the kVp and mAs displays
3. Locks up the CPU to allow manual operation
4. Is not a valid test
9-7
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
6. Where is there a complete listing for the I/O Ports for the AMX-4?
1. Page 13-20 of Proprietary Diagnostics
2. Page 4-10 (Proprietary Diagnostics)
3. Page 118 Section 2 of Engineering Spec.
7. Where do we find the Error List" Listing?
1. S/N 3997
2. Page 12-10 Proprietary Diagnostics
4. NSC has the only existing list
8. Error 439's probable cause is ..
1. The X-Ray on status signal was not asserted within two milliseconds after the Exposure Start
Command signal was asserted. (Pg. 12-15 Proprietary Diagnostics)
2. Right drive current feedback from the drive control was higher than the command from the CPU board.
3. Back Up imer OK status signal was not asserted in pre-exposure interlock check during the prep cycle.
4. The X-Ray On status went low during the exposure.
9. The Bar Graph voltage range (version 46-302688G1/46-302687G1) when not Charging or Driving is ...
1. 109.00 to 113.00
2. 112.00 to 116.00 (Proprietary Diagnostics Pg. 13-23)
3. 114.00 to 128.00
4. 65% to 100% capacity
10. The tap relay coils on the AMX 1 A4 HV MODULE are optically isolated from the AMX1 A2 A1 CONTROLLER.
1. False
2. True (Pg. 2-8 and Pg. 8-4 of AMX-4 Service Manual)
3. Are not connected at all
4. Only after an FMI
9-8
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
11. During a Loop Test on WRPO* - Address 1000, What hex data number would you insert to pull in all the Tap
Relays?
1. E1
2. F9 (Pg. 5-8 of Proprietary Diagnostics)
3 EE
4. FF
12. An error LOW FIL LIMIT" occurs while you are performing a calibration. Where do you find the description of
this error?
1. Proprietary CD-ROM (Latest Release)
2. Proprietary Diagnostics
3. Calibration Section of the AMX-4 Service Manual (Also Proprietary Diagnostics Pg. 12-9)
4. NSC
13. The customer complains that the Max Fwd Drive Speed of the AMX-4 is slower than it used to be" - where do
you find the rated specification for this, prior to checking it out?
1. Proprietary Diagnostics - Section 13
2. Functional Check Section of the Service Manual
3. Technical Supplement - XR011
4. Operation Manual for the AMX-4 (Overview Tab of the Technical Supplement)
14. After replacing the collimator lamp in the AMX-4 collimator, where is the proper procedure located to verify
Light Field to X-Ray Field Alignment?
1. Functional Check Section of Service Manual
2. X-Ray Performance Guide for PMS
3. Periodic Maintenance Section of AMX-4 Service Manual (also Installation Section of AMX-4
Service Manual)
4. System Field Test for HHS
15. Where would the Algorithm for the normal prep to expose x-ray sequence be found?
1. Pg. 12-2 of Proprietary Diagnostics
2. Not published
3. S/N 3997
4. AMX-4 Proprietary Diagnostics (Pg. 13-21 or Pg. 15-5)
9-9
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
16. Where would you find the Power-Up" Error code listing?
1. Calibration Section of Service Manual
2. Proprietary Diagnostics (Pg. 12-2 and starting on Pg. 13-2)
3. CD-ROM (Proprietary - Mobiles)
4. Master Error Code Listing
17. What (2) places would the Calibration Error" codes be listed?
A. (Proprietary Diagnostics Pg. 12-9)
B. Calibration Section of AMX-4 Service Manual
18. Prior to using the Battery Load" Fixture, what should you check for tightness?
A. Internal Heating Elements
19. When viewing Histograms, error 19 has occurred 23 times - what does this indicate?
A. Intermittent Release of Drive Handle enable while driving unit = non-fatal and not troubleshootable.
20. The customer complains about the AMX-4 drive wheels leaving black skid marks on the tile flooring - what do
you have to do now?
1. Change the acceleration factor (Pg. 9-8 Proprietary Diagnostics)
2. Tell them to slow down
3. Order new Teflon wheel kit
4. Tell them That's the way it is"
21. While driving the unit in the forward direction, it tends to pull to the left (or right). How would you quickly resolve
this problem?
1. Run the Drive Diagnostics (Pg. 13-16 Proprietary Diagnostics)
2. Possibly indicates a bad Drive Wheel
3. There might be tape & foreign material wrapped around the wheel shaft
4. 2 and 3 above (See Pg. 12-12 and Pg. 12-13 Proprietary Diagnostics to see that choice #1 not
totally correct)
9-10
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
22. When should you initialize Histograms and the Error List?
1. At the end of a successful troubleshooting session
2. Never
3. Only after you have reported the errors
4. Never on the newer units
23. You have to replace the H/V Transformer - Where is the Removal/Installation Direction found for this
procedure?
1. Microfiche (yellow)
2. CD-ROM (Direction 46-017499)
3. Service Section of the AMX-4 Service Manual (Pg. vi - Index)
4. All of the above
24. An AMX-4 requires replacement of the X-Ray Tube. Will the Standard Collimator Alignment Tool be required
for this?
1. No (Collimator Mounting Plate comes pre-aligned w/new Tube Unit)
2. Get it close by trial and error
3. Only use the modified tool
4. The position of the central ray is not critical on mobile units
25. Customer complains of intermittent no exposure (prep initiates ok - but no x-ray) - what's your strategy?
1. Replace the handswitch/cord assembly
2. Get a DVM to check out the (2) items above
3. Run the Op-Switch Test (Pg. 4-3 Proprietary Diagnostics)
4. Blame the X-Ray Technician
9-11
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
9-12
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
SECTION 10 - NOTES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 10 - NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10-1
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
10-2
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
Notes
10-3
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
10-4
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
Notes
10-5
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
10-6
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
Notes
10-7
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
10-8
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
Notes
10-9
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
10-10
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
Notes
10-11
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
10-12
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
Notes
10-13
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
10-14
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
Notes
10-15
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
10-16
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
Notes
10-17
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
10-18
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
Notes
10-19
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
10-20
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
Notes
10-21
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
10-22
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
TEKTRONIX
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ CH.1
CH.2
SCOPE SETTINGS:
BOARD
WAVEFORM
CONDITION:
10-23
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
10-24
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
TEKTRONIX
CH.2
SCOPE SETTINGS:
BOARD
WAVEFORM
CONDITION:
10-25
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
10-26
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
TEKTRONIX
CH.2
SCOPE SETTINGS:
BOARD
WAVEFORM
CONDITION:
10-27
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
10-28
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
TEKTRONIX
CH.2
SCOPE SETTINGS:
BOARD
WAVEFORM
CONDITION:
10-29
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
10-30
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
TEKTRONIX
CH.2
SCOPE SETTINGS:
BOARD
WAVEFORM
CONDITION:
10-31
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
10-32
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
TEKTRONIX
CH.2
SCOPE SETTINGS:
BOARD
WAVEFORM
CONDITION:
10-33
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
10-34
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
TEKTRONIX
CH.2
SCOPE SETTINGS:
BOARD
WAVEFORM
CONDITION:
10-35
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
10-36
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
TEKTRONIX
CH.2
SCOPE SETTINGS:
BOARD
WAVEFORM
CONDITION:
10-37
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
10-38
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
TEKTRONIX
CH.2
SCOPE SETTINGS:
BOARD
WAVEFORM
CONDITION:
10-39
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
10-40
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
TEKTRONIX
CH.2
SCOPE SETTINGS:
BOARD
WAVEFORM
CONDITION:
10-41
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
10-42
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
SECTION 11 - MISCELLANEOUS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 11 - MISCELLANEOUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11-1
Rev. 7/22/2002
XR011 T.O.C.
Home
REV 0
11-2
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Either version must have

both PROM's
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
MAS UP,
MAS DWN,
KV DWN,
KV UP
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Automatic
Manual
Automatic
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
End of the list is the latest error
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
PASSWORD
MAS UP,
MAS DWN,
KV DWN,
KV UP
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Do this in LAB
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Try each one of these

when you run the Op
Switch Test LAB
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Do this in LAB
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Do this in LAB
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Do this in LAB
NOTE: This tolerance is

critical and will be checked
/ adjusted in the
Calibration LAB
NOTE: This does not mean it is still

sampling. It was a onetime sample
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
ONLY DO THIS LAB AFTER

CLASSROOM DISCUSSION !!!
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
ONLY DO THIS LAB

AFTER CLASSROOM
DISCUSSION !!!
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
ONLY DO THIS LAB

AFTER CLASSROOM
DISCUSSION !!!
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
ONLY DO THIS LAB

AFTER CLASSROOM
DISCUSSION !!!
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
ONLY DO THIS LAB AFTER CLASSROOM

DISCUSSION !!!
THIS COULD DESTROY THE CALIBRATION

TABLE
Binary and Hex WRITING example
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Do this in LAB
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Try each one of these

when you run the Op
Switch Test LAB
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Do this in LAB
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Do this in LAB
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Do this in LAB
NOTE: This tolerance is

critical and will be checked /
adjusted in the Calibration LAB
NOTE: This does not mean it is still

sampling. It was a onetime sample
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
ONLY DO THIS LAB

AFTER CLASSROOM
DISCUSSION !!!
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
ONLY DO THIS LAB

AFTER CLASSROOM
DISCUSSION !!!
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
ONLY DO THIS LAB

AFTER CLASSROOM
DISCUSSION !!!
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
ONLY DO THIS LAB

AFTER CLASSROOM
DISCUSSION !!!
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
ONLY DO THIS LAB AFTER CLASSROOM DISCUSSION !!!
THIS COULD DESTROY THE CALIBRATION TABLE
Binary and Hex WRITING example
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
You might want to refer to Loop Test (section 3-5 or 4-5) before using this section
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Write Ports
Do this one in
Loop Test LAB
Do this one in
Loop Test LAB
Do this one in
Loop Test LAB
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Binary Bit Number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Hex Value 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Example of Binary Bits selected 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
Example Hex Value would equal 2 0
TAP 3 would then pull in
RNT to PG 3 - 11
RTN to PG 4 -11
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
LED's on CPU Bd. #13 #16 #17 #18 #19
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Go to Class Tech Supplement (pg 4-33 Location B7) and

notice that "BIT" corresponds to the Q # on the chip U128
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
0 Hex
80 Hex NOTE: 255 to each motor will drive the
FF Hex AMX full speed forward, although one
motor is actually turning Forward while
the other is turning Backward.
FF Hex
80 Hex
0 Hex
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
MAS UP,
MAS DWN,
KV DWN,
KV UP
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
NOTE:
Loading Defaults will not
zero these out, BUT
Initializing Data Log or
Replacing the CPU will
ZERO these out
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
NOTE:
Loading Defaults will
not zero these out,
BUT Initializing Data
Log or Replacing the
CPU will ZERO
these out
Do this in Data Log Lab
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
"DO NOT" do this in LAB
Do this in LAB
NOTE:
You might need to press MAS
UP 2 times for this to exit
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
MAS UP,
MAS DWN,
KV DWN,
KV UP
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Do this in LAB
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Do this in LAB
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
"DO NOT" do thisin LAB
NOTE:
This does NOT zero out
the Histograms
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Do this in LAB
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
"DO NOT" do this in LAB
NOTE:
This does NOT zero out
the Eror List
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
MAS UP
MAS DWN
KV DWN
KV UP
NOTE:
This will also allow you to do a
forced charge when it will not
charge the normal way
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Filament Current Cal. explanation
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
This equals
15 hrs
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
This is the voltage that represents full

bar graph displayed
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
This equals
30 sec
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
This equals
30 sec
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
NOTE:
This is the starting point of the next exposure. It is what
the system uses to compare the start current to the end
current
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
NOTE:
This usually means the KV
did not reach 75% within 2
mil sec
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
NOTE:
60HZ INV OK and ROTOR INTLK
are required to get an exposure
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
RNT to pg 11-5
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
46-017207 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
017313 T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
AMX 4 IR CD
CD Master Document List
ID Document Title Filename Owner Last Edit

Date
1 AMX 4 IR CD AMX 4 IR CD.pdf Bruce Gaster 06/26/2002
2 Safety Edge .mpg Safety Edge .mpg LS EHS Mgr 11/02/1998
3 Network Connection.pdf Network Connection.pdf Bruce Gaster 9/20/2001
GEMS
4 AMX 4+ AMX4+.pdf
Documentation
5 Acrobat Reader 5 Acrobat Reader 5.exe Adobe. inc 8/14/2001
AMX 110,2,3 Lead Acid AMX 110,2,3 Lead Acid GEMS

6 2/22/1999
Battery Installation Battery Installation.pdf Documentation
7 AMX-4 Battery Job GEMS

AMX-4 Battery Job Cards 4/12/1999
Cards.pdf Documentation
AMX-4 Dosemeter AMX-4 Dosemeter GEMS

8 10/04/2000
Installation Installation.pdf Documentation
AMX-4 Series Diagnostics AMX-4 Series GEMS

9 4/12/1999
Direction Diagnostics Direction.pdf Documentation
FMI110637 AMX-4 Horizontal FMI110637 AMX-4 GEMS

10 3/14/1997
Column Horizontal Column.pdf Documentation
Installation Genesis
Installation Genesis Batteries GEMS
11 Batteries 5/08/2001
(Hawker&Panasonic) Documentation
(Hawker&Panasonic).pdf
12 Servicenote_Panasonic GEMS
Servicenote_Panasonic_revC 4/05/2002
_revC.doc Documentation
GEMS
13 Amx110 Amx110.pdf NA
Documentation
AMX2 Renewal GEMS

14 AMX2 Renewal Parts NA
Parts.pdf Documentation
AMX 4 Master List and Rev History.docPage 1 of 4 6/27/2002
Rev. 7/22/2002
AMX 4 IR CD
GEMS Rev 3-
15 AMX-2 AMX-2pdf Documentation 1684
GEMS Rev 3-
16 Chapter 10 Chapter 10.pdf
Documentation 1684
AMX-3 Prom GEMS

17 AMX-3 Prom Adapter 1/05/2000
Adapter.pdf Documentation
AMX-3 Renewal GEMS

18 AMX-3 Renewal Parts 6/17/1987
GEMS
19 AMX-3 Service Manual AMX-3 Service Manual 5/14/1999
Documentation
GEMS
20 AMX-3 Cookbook AMX-3 Cookbook.pdf Documentation 11/22/1984
AMX-4 Calibration Mod AMX-4 Calibration Mod GEMS

21 9/02/1994
2115090 2115090.pdf Documentation
Amx-4 Documentation Mod Amx-4 Documentation GEMS

22 6/22/2000
2115090 Mod 2115090.pdf Documentation
AMX-4 Functional Check AMX-4 Functional Check GEMS

23 9/02/1994
Mod 2115090 Mod 2115090.pdf Documentation
AMX-4 Installation Mod AMX-4 Installation Mod GEMS

24 6/23/1995
AMX-4 Periodic
AMX-4 Periodic Maintenance GEMS
25 Maintenance Mod 6/22/2000
Mod 2115090 Documentation
2115090.pdf
AMX-4 Renewal Parts
AMX-4 Renewal Parts GEMS
26 Direction Mod 3/07/2000
Direction Mod 2115090 Documentation
2115090.pdf
AMX4 Schematics Mod AMX4 Schematics Mod GEMS
27 6/23/1995
AMX-4 Service Mod GEMS

28 AMX-4 Service Mod 2115090 9/17/1996
2115090.pdf Documentation
AMX-4 Plus GEMS

29 AMX-4 Plus Calibration Calibration.pdf Documentation 11/08/2000
Rev. 7/22/2002
AMX 4 IR CD
AMX-4 Plus GEMS

30 AMX-4 Plus Documentation Documentation.pdf Documentation 12/13/2001
AMX-4 Plus Functional AMX-4 Plus Functional GEMS

31 11/08/2000
Check Check.pdf Documentation
AMX-4 Plus GEMS

32 AMX-4 Plus Installation 11/08/2000
Installation.pdf Documentation
AMX-4 Plus Operator GEMS

33 AMX-4 Plus Operator Manual 2/29/2000
Manual.pdf Documentation
AMX-4 Plus Periodic AMX-4 Plus Periodic GEMS

34 Maintenance Maintenance.pdf Documentation 11/08/2000
AMX-4 Plus Ratings and AMX-4 Plus Ratings and GEMS

35 Specifications Specifications.pdf Documentation 11/08/2000
AMX-4 Plus Renewal GEMS

36 AMX-4 Plus Renewal Parts 12/10/2001
AMX-4 Plus GEMS

37 AMX-4 Plus Schematics 11/08/2000
Schematics.pdf Documentation
GEMS
38 AMX-4 Plus Service AMX-4 Plus Service.pdf Documentation 11/08/2000
GEMS
39 Cmx110 Cmx110.pdf 8/18/1969
Documentation
CD Contents Revision History
Rev. 7/22/2002
AMX 4 IR CD
Updates for Session 06/18/2002

§ Created the AMX 4 IR CD
Updates for Session 07/22/2002

§ Doc 1: In the schematics section, Changed high lights to colored boxes and fixed
the wave form links. Added the AMX’s Manuals link to the Misc column of the
schedule.
§ Doc 6 through Doc 39: Installed it on the CD
Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

"&#$
,$#+#'&*
#) +#'&

-#*#'&
( )+#'&
' $ )# *
'(.)#!"+e . & )$ $ +)# '
( )+#&! ',% &++#'&
Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

X-ray equipment if not properly complete protection. Nor can any on Radiation Protection, and take
used may cause injury. practical design compel the adequate steps to protect against
Accordingly, the instructions operator to take adequate injury.
herein contained should be precautions to prevent the
thoroughly read and understood possibility of any persons carelessly The equipment is sold with the
by everyone who will use the exposing themselves or others to understanding that the General
equipment before you attempt to radiation. Electric Company, Medical Systems
place this equipment in Group, its agents, and
operation. The General Electric It is important that everyone having representatives have no
Company, Medical Systems anything to do with x-radiation be responsibility for injury or damage
Group, will be glad to assist and properly trained and fully acquainted which may result from improper use
cooperate in placing this with the recommendations of the of the equipment.
equipment in use. National Council on Radiation Various protective material and
Protection and Measurements as devices are available. It is urged that
Although this apparatus published in NCRP Reports such materials or devices be used.
incorporates a high degree of available from NCRP Publications,
protection against x-radiation other 7910 Woodmont Avenue, Room CAUTION: United States Federal
than the useful beam, no practical 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, law restricts this device to use by or
design of equipment can provide and of the International Commission on the order of a physician.
i
Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.

Home

ii
Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY MEDICAL SYSTEMS

MANAGER – INFORMATION INTEGRATION,
AMERICAS W–622
P.O. BOX 414
MILWAUKEE, WI 53201–0414
All electrical installations that are shall be performed by qualified GE requirements of the applicable
preliminary to positioning of the Medical personnel. The products electrical codes.
equipment at the site prepared for the involved (and the accompanying
equipment shall be performed by electrical installations) are highly
licensed electrical contractors. In sophisticated, and special The purchaser of GE equipment shall
addition, electrical feeds into the engineering competence is required. only utilize qualified personnel (i.e.,
Power Distribution Unit shall be In performing all electrical work on GE’s field engineers, personnel of
performed by licensed electrical these products, GE will use its own third-party service companies with
contractors. Other connections specially trained field engineers. All of equivalent training, or licensed
between pieces of electrical GE’s electrical work on these electricians) to perform electrical
equipment, calibrations, and testing products will comply with the servicing on the equipment.
All packages should be closely upon discovery, or in any event, 8*285–3449 immediately after
examined at time of delivery. If within 14 days after receipt, and the damage is found. At this time be
damage is apparent, have notation contents and containers held for ready to supply name of carrier,
“damage in shipment” written on inspection by the carrier. A delivery date, consignee name,
all copies of the freight or express transportation company will not pay freight or express bill number, item
bill before delivery is accepted or a claim for damage if an inspection damaged and extent of damage.
“signed for” by a General Electric is not requested within this 14 day
representative or a hospital period. Complete instructions regarding
receiving agent. Whether noted or claim procedure are found in
concealed, damage MUST be Call Traffic and Transportation, Section “S” of the Policy &
reported to the carrier immediately Milwaukee, WI (414) 827–3449 / Procedure Bulletins.
6/17/94
iii
Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

iv
Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

! # 8,,
#

8$,.$%.( 26,105
19 61 5( +,5 11-
#

11' 2(4$6,0* 4$&6,&(5

740,0* 6+( " 0
! "

"#

(&+$0,&$. (672

(&+0,37( (.(&6,10

$-,0* :21574(5

#

22.,&$6,10 ,2
!
#
#
.$55,),&$6,10
$46+ ($-$*( 744(06
22.,&$%.( ;/%1.5
8
Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

(!*
"'! %!&
$%
%"" '# '#"
(" " *! '# )%* *%

'!
'%( )
"

"
'%(
'%(

'%(

'%(
'%(
'%(
'%(

)
Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

# $)./-0/$*). $) /#$. *+ -/$*) ()0' - !*- 0. 2$/# /# *$' -4

)$/
* '.

*0- $. .$") !*- . *! *+ -/$*) ) 4 -. *! - '$' . -1$ )
# /$( 4*0 +0.# 0//*) 4*0 ) + ) *) /# .( *).$./ )/ -$*"-+#$
,0'$/4 ,0'$/4 *(+-' /* -$*"-+#. ( $) !0'' .' 3-4 -**(

$) /# $. // -4 *+ -/ /# - . )* ) /* +'0" $) 4*0- (*$' 3-4

0)$/ !*- /&$)" 3+*.0- . // -4 *+ -/$*) (& . /# .$'4 +/ /*
*+ -/$)" $)/ ).$1 - ) ( -" )4 -**( ++'$/$*).
0. *! 0'(*/*- -$1 -$1$)" ) +*.$/$*)$)" /# - ,0$- . ($)$5
(0( *! !!*-/ ) /# *)/-*' +) '. 0/24 .$") + -($/. *+/$(0( 1$.$$'$/4
!*- ./ -$)" *2) -*2 *--$*-.
# . '!./*++$)" 0(+ - *) *! ()4 0$'/$) .! /4 1$ . # '+. +- 1 )/ 0)5
2)/ (*$'$/4 /# (*/*-. ./*+ ) /# -& . /$1/ 0+*) $(+/ 2$/# )*/# -
*% /
+ -/*- *)/-*'. - ($-*+-* ..*- . *($)$)" /# '/ ./ / #)*'*"4 2$/#
.$(+'$$/4 *! .$")

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

# )(.,)& *( & $(&/ - .#, $&&/'$(. $-*&3- %* ( '- $-*&3 .) , 5
!& . .# . #($+/ - & . .. ,3 $-*&3 !), ."&( .. ,3 -../- (
' --" $-*&3 .) *,)0$ # &*!/& $(!),'.$)( )( .# )* ,.$(" -../- )! .#

)$&$ /.)'.$ 2*)-/, )(.,)&
), )* ,.$(" $(-.,/.$)(- , ! , .) )$&$ 1( ,- (/& /' ,

)-. - .$)(- )! 3)/, )* ,.), '(/& - Contents , ),"($4 /-$(" .1) # 5
$("-
D 0 ,0$ 1 (
D . *-

Overview - .# (' $'*&$ - *, - (.- " ( ,& $(!),'.$)( )( *,.$/&, )* ,.$)(
(.,)/.),3 $( (./, .# )0 ,0$ 1 $- $(. ( .) # &* "$0 3)/ ( )0 ,&& /( ,5
-.($(" )! *,) /, ), *$&$.3 +/$%&3 ( -$&3
# 1), overview $- !&"" $( &$% .#$-

( ** ,- $( .# & !. ',"$( )! .# *"

), -* $!$ .$& $(!),'.$)( $( -. *3-. * - +/ ( 3)/&& , ! , .) .# ./&
*,) /, ( .#$- '(/& 1 , ! , .) *,) /, - - steps.
# 1), -. *- $- !&"" $( )& . 2. &$% .#$-

( &-) ** ,- $( .# & !. ',"$( )! .# *"
. *- , &$-. (/' ,$&&3 (3 -/**& ' (.& $(!),'.$)( .#. $- $.$)(& $(!),5
'.$)( 3)/ -#)/& %()1 /. $(!),'.$)( .#. $-(. , &&3 ( --,3 .) * ,!),' .#
*,) /, $- &$-. /( , .# -. * $( /&& . D !),'.
D supplemental information is placed next to a bullet
.#$(% 3)/&& !$( .#

*),.& -$"( * ,!),'- -) -$&3 .#. $. - '- .)
( ,&3 ,/( $.- &!
) *,)'). )*.$'/' )* ,.$)( )! .#$- ), (3 ,$)",*#$ +/$*' (. #)1 0 ,

-/, .) , 3)/, )* ,.),- '(/& , !/&&3
( 1# ( (). $( /- -.), 3)/, '(/& $( .# -- .. .,3 -) .#. && ( 1 /- ,- (
-$&3 , ! , .) $. 1# ( (

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

SECTION 2
SAFETY FIRST
This equipment is to be used by authorized medical personnel only.
(.+ #, '!#'+ (+ 2+, ( +%#% ,+/# ( )+(&(- ()-#&.& , -2

,.+ -( + -"#, &'.% + .%%2 (+ ()+-#'! -" .'#-
) -" &'.% 0#-" -" *.#)&'- - %% -#&, "' '(- #' ., ,-(+ #- #' -"
,,-- -+2
THIS X-RAY UNIT MAY BE DANGEROUS TO PATIENT AND OPERAĆ

TOR UNLESS CORRECT EXPOSURE FACTORS AND OPERATING INĆ
WARNING STRUCTIONS ARE OBSERVED.
ALWAYS PROVIDE NECESSARY RADIATION PROTECTION FOR

YOUR PATIENT AND YOURSELF WHEN OPERATING ANY X-RAY
WARNING SYSTEM.
2-1 Good Operating Practices
D + % )+(' 0"#% )+ (+&#'! ' 1+2 1&

D -) $ - %,-
- &-+, +(& -" -. (+ -( -" .%% 1-',#(' ( -"
"',0#-" (+ (+ &$#'! ' 1)(,.+
D %02, ., -" )+()+ #% ,#3, ' -"'# -(+, (+ " )+(.+ -( &#'#4
&#3 1+2 1)(,.+ ' )+(. -" ,- #!'(,-# +,.%-,
D "$ -" #!#-% #,)%2 + .%%2 (+ &$#'! ' 1)(,.+ /+# 2 -"- -" ,4
%- -"'#*. #, -" #'-' -"'#*. 2 )+-#.%+ --'-#(' -( -" )%4
&'- ( -" #&% )(#'- #' -" & , ,--#'! -( #',.+ -"- 0"(% '.&+, +
'(- &#,-$' (+ ' #'-' & , +-#('% '.&+
D "' 1+2#'! )-#'-, &(/ -"& , + , )(,,#% +(& '+2 )-#'-,
D ,$ /#,#-(+, -( ,-) (.-,# -" +((& .+#'! ' 1)(,.+
D , !('% ,"#%, (+ )-#'-, 0"'/+ )(,,#%
D ,.+ -( + ' (%%(0 -" &#'-'' ,".% (.-%#' #' -" MainteĆ
nance and Service ,-#(' ( -"#, &'.%
D '+ &(,- ('#-#(', .&.%-#/ +#-#(' (, -( -" ()+-(+ 0#%% '(- 14
+(&&' &1#&.& )+&#,,#% %/%, (0/+ , 0#-" %% +#4
-#(')+(.#'! /#, *.%# # +#-#(' 1)+- ,"(.% /%.- ,#-.-#(',
#'/(%/#'! +*.'- 1)(,.+, .,#'! "#!" $) ' & , -"'#, -( -+&#' #
1-+ )+(--#/ /#, + ',,+2
While driving the AMX-4, keep the film bin closed. A loaded bin may close
CAUTION without warning possibly causing injury.

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

REV 2 DIRECTION 2115603-100

TELESCOPING ARM
Retractable arm supports
collimator and x-ray tube.
TAPE MEASURE
VERTICAL COLUMN
Supports telescoping arm.
CONTROL PANEL
Most controls and all displays
are found on this panel.
DRIVE HANDLE SKIN SPACER

Grip to activate BARS
the drive motors. COLLIMATOR
Adjusts easily.
Calibrated in inches
or cm.
SELF-STOPPING BUMPER
On impact stops the drive
motors and activates brakes.
BRAKE RELEASE
Releases brakes if
drive motors fail.
HANDSWITCH
FILM BIN Controls exposures and
Provides convenient storage automatically timed light field.
for ten 14" x 17" cassette.

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home


KEY SWITCH
Turn ON to drive the unit or take
exposures. Turn OFF to remove key.
NOTE: Top of cap key Recharge in ON or OFF positions.
when in OFF
position.
LATCH
Secure the vertical column
in the park / transport position.
KVP AND MAS DISPLAY

PENCIL TRAY Displays kVp and mAs selections.
MESSAGE DISPLAY
X-RAY EXPOSURE INDICATORS Displays status and
Light up when exposure is made. error messages.
KVP AND MAS CONTROLS

BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Press the up or down kVp/mAs
Shows relative state of charge. triangle to select the correct
At or near full charge, all segments are exposure setting.
illuminated.

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home


Be sure to refer to Maintenance and Service in this manual for important information on
the circuit breaker.
&# % )$(% %! % "!$%!

Keyswitch in
ON position.
D* & % "#!#$ diagnostics $%$%$ %! $&# '#)% $ (!#

!##%) $ "#!$$ %$ ! ) $! !# %(!
TESTING COMPLETE
% % %%#) $%%&$ $")$ % &" % & % $ #) !# !"#+
%!
( $! #) ""# ! % $$ $")

$ $") %&# % & % %

$")$ (#% !( % " &# ! #"#$ %$
% ! ! %% )!&# $#' #"#$ %%'

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home


%"$%#"&

#!$' &" " ( !#'#% &&! , !& %)" " !"()%" '

" &, $%#&&
!#)" #*" *,& #% (&' '%) " %#! #" %##! '# "#'% ,#( %&' !
&(% ' ' &#$" %! & $%#$% , $#&'#" " &(% , ' &# !+!(!
&$ " %
" &!$ , %$ ' %) " " &'% ' ("' '# ,#(% &'"'#" (&'%-
'#"

'
!

GRIP THE DRIVE HANDLE

TO ACTIVATE THE MOTORS....
RELEASE YOUR GRIP TO
STOP THE UNIT.

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

*!. -,'%,!$$1 "-+,+ ,' 1'-* ( & & (-+ '*/* ,-*& '*
(-$$ !& *.*+ , +(+ ' -( ,' %(
#% (* '-*
+$+,'((!& -%(* , , *'&, ' , -&!, -,'%,!$$1 ,!.,+ , *#+ &

,-*&+ ' , *!. %','*+ -('& !%(, ,' $( (*.&, !&,+ , -%(* !+ &2
+!%($1 *!( , *!. &$ & (-$$ , -&!, !& *.*+ + /!, &1 %'!$
)-!(%&, '/.* / & *!.!& , -&!, +-* ,' 0*!+ *+'&$ *
!, , ,$+'(!& *% 0,& '* (,!&, 0% ,

(!.',+ '& , +(',
*',,!& & %&-.*!& +!$1 '* 0, ('+!,!'&!& !& *!( , *!. &$
& ,-*& , -&!, ,' , +!* ('+!,!'&

%&-.*!& +( !+ -,'%,!$$1 *- 1 (*&, / & , ,$2
+'(!& *% !+ 0,&

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

& (!, * &##&- * ) )*')
" )+( * * * *#)&'!% ($ !) !% *

'&)!*!&% % * * *
**(. (!% &( !) +%'#+ % +##. (*(*
D/ % * '("*(%)'&(* '&)!*!&% * *#)&'!% ($ !)

'+) !%
%*( &,( * &%*(&# '%# &##!$*&( )"!% )'() -!* !%
-## %
)+(#. #* ##+)*(*!&%

+(% * ".)-!* *& ! %))(.

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

#" % #' %! %'% % !%!#$ $ % #$ !( $+
") $%# % & % $!"" #% %! )!&# $% %!
D* $ !# !' !'# #"% !# !%# #!& $&#$ %
#' !%!#$ ( &%!%) &$% %! % !!# $&#
D* $ $ !# "&$ %

%! % ! $%# %
) $%!" $") % $$ %$ "" $ #+
$ % %! # % $$ % ! % & (% !# !"#+
%!
! % & % %'% % #$ #$ )!&# #" ! % #'
# %% % $$%!"" &"# &"! "% ( %&# ! % #'
!%!#$ %'% % #$
D* ! #'#$ % & % #" % #' "& (#$ % $
$%!"" &"# $ %# # "&$ #'#$ % & %
D* ! %&# $#" !# # !# #!%% % & % "&$ ! $ ! % #' %!
% #% !# % "& ! % !%# & % ( %&# !# "'!% $)
If the motors fail press

this button and manually
relocate the unit.
% #' !%!#$ $!& "#$$ ! % &%%!
!% &$% !' % &) #!% % & % $#'+

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
AMX-4 OPERATION Home
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS (MODEL 2115090 SERIES)

##$
( ."#- -.#)( 3)/&& &,( ")1 .) -./* ( *)-#.#)( '"(#& )'*)((.- ) ."

.*- ), '"(#& *)-#.#)(#(! , ),!(#4 #( ." )&&)1#(! 13
D5 $/-.'(. ) )&/'( ( .&-)*#(! ,'
D5 ,)..#)( ) 2,3 ./ /(#. (
D5 $/-.'(. ) )&&#'.),
)/&& &-) &,( ")1 .) -&. *.#(. *,'.,- ."(#+/ -&.#)( ( #(&&3
")1 .) .% ( 2,3 2*)-/,
!"
!
)&&)1 ."- -.*- .) ,&- ." &." 0,.#& )&/'( ( .&-)*#(! ,' &)%- ,)'
." *,%.,(-*),. *)-#.#)(
% -/, .". ." /(#. #- ./,( ON.

!

,#* ." )&&#'.), "(&- .) .#0. ." -1#." )/ -")/& ", &#%#(!
-)/( #." ), */-" ." .&-)*#(! ,' )1( .) ,&- &." (
."( ,#- /*
D ). .". 3)/ )(&3 ( .) !,#* ) ." )&&#'.), "(&- .) .#0. ."
&)% ,&- -3-.' &&/-.,.#)(

TO RELEASE THE LOCKS,

GRIP BOTH THE COLLIMATOR
HANDLES, OR JUST ONE
HANDLE.

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

% * &##&-!% )*') /&+ % ( * &$'&%%*) &( '&)!*!&%!% !% &% &
*-& -/) / (!''!% * &##!$*&( %#) *& "' * #&" )/)*$ (#) &(
- %,( %))(/ &,((!!% * #&" )/)*$ -!* )#! * &(
% '&))!# - (&$$% * * /&+ +) * #&" (#) )/)*$
&** * ($ % ,(*!# &#+$% ))$#/ &+%*(#&"-!) *&

'&)!*!&% * *#)&'!% ($ ##+)*(*!&%

!) * ($ &% * ,(*!# &#+$% *& * )!( ! *
.*% * (*(*# ($ *& * )!( #%* % (#) ##+)*(*!&%

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home


-+ ,! ,- ++%$0 "+

&' ,". $'# "+ *)-"* & $",,$ 1
'*, "+ & ,' '.**" *","'& & *',, ,! ,-
+ ,! '$$"%,'* !&$+ ,' ('+","'& ,! ,- ,' ,! +"* & $
D '- %0 *',, ,! ,- "& ,/' "*,"'&+
$'#/"+ & '-&,*$'#/"+ *+ ,&,+ , .*0

*+ '*
#/*+ *+ & '*/*+ *+ ,&, ,

* $$-+,*,"'&

COLLIMATOR
ROTATION TUBE UNIT
KNOB
RETRACTABLE
ARM
110_
(FORWARDS)
...extend the arm and

0_ rotate the tube to the
DETENT desired angle.
-10_
(BACKWARDS)
Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home


%&,$ '$$!%+') $!%!+* (+!&+ )!+!'& /('*,) +' *!) ) +
!-& !*+& )'% + /)0 +, '$ *('+
)** + !$ $! + ,++'& '& !+ ) + '$$!%+') ') &*.!+ +' +!1
-+ + ! !&+&*!+0 !$ $%( $$,*+)+!'&

D !$ $! + !* +!% & ,+'%+!$$0 +,)&* ' *'&* +) 0', )1
$* + *.!+ ' ",*+ + !$ $! + +!%) '&++ 0',) *)-! )()*&1
++!-
D ' +!-+ + !$ $! + ') &'+ ) *'&* ()** + ,++'& !& . &
+ $! + '* ',+ ', %0 #( + !$ $! + '& ') ,( +' %!&,+* +)
%!&,+* + !$ $! + .!$$ +,)& ' ') ''$!& & )%!& !&+!- ')
%!&,+*

X-RAY
PREP/EXPOSE
BUTTON FIELD-LIGHT
BUTTON
PRESS THE FIELD LIGHT BUTTON, AND

COLLIMATE TO YOUR AREA OF INTERĆ
EST. THE CROSSHAIR BEAM SHOWS
THE FIELD CENTER.
....YOU MAY TAKE AN EXPOSURE

WHILE THE FIELD LIGHT IS ON; THE
LIGHT WILL AUTOMATICALLY TURN
OFF WHEN AN EXPOSURE IS TAKEN.

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

'+#,#'& ," '$$#%,'* & ,- -+#&! ," #$ $#!", & *'++"#* +"'. +
!-#+ " *'++"#* +"'.+ ," #$ &,* '* #& ('+#,#'&#&! ' ," '$$#%0
,'* + +,(

D + ," ,( %+-* '& ," +# ' ," '$$#%,'* ,' %+-* ,"
+'-*,'#%! #+,&
* ,' ," /('+-* -# #& ," "'$* '& ," *'&, ' ," '$0
-%& '* +-!!+, & /('+-* ,"&#)-+ $$-+,*,#'&

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

-**'+1# 5 "(201',% 1&# 0'6# -$ 1&# $'#*" 3'1& 1&# 13- !-,1/-* ),- 0 *-!1#" -,
1&# $/-,1 -$ 1&# !-**'+1-/ ## **201/1'-,
-/ $',# .-0'1'-,',% -$ 1&# !-**'+1-/ 0## 01#.
D &# *#$1 ),- !-,1/-*0 1&#

"'+#,0'-, -$ 1&# *"#0 ," 1&# /'%&1
*"# ),- !-,1/-*0 1&# "'+#,0'-, -$ 1&# *"#0 "'%/+ -,
1&# $!# -$ 1&# !-**'+1-/ 0&-30 3&'!& ),- !-,1/-*0 3&'!& "'+#,0'-, ##
**201/1'-,
D '#*" 0'6#0 $/-+ I 4 I 2. 1-

I 4
I !+ 4 !+ 1 I
!+
!, # - 1',#" &# ),- 0#*#!1-/0 ',"'!1# 1&# $'#*" 0'6# $-/ 0#*#!1#"
D '* ,2+ #/0 -, 1&# !*' /1#" 0!*# /# $-/ ',!&
!+ ," ',!&

!+ 0!*# 0

S I D / DFF S I D / DFF

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

&+ $/ (&** * &##!$*&( &+* !*) ,(*!# .!) * * !) *& * (! * &( #* !%
*-& -/) / )!$'# _ *%* $* & &( / $%+# #&" $* & &( % %#
&* ( * % _
90-degree detent method +## &+* * "%& ) ##+)*(*!&%

% (&** *
&##!$*&( *& * )!( _ *%* '&)!*!&% *%* -!## )%' !% '# %
#&"
Manual lock method: +## &+* * "%& '&)!*!&% * &##!$*&( *& * )!( %0
# &* ( * % _ *%* % *+(% * "%& #&"-!) *& )+( +(% *
"%& &+%*(#&"-!) *& +%#&" * &##!$*&( % ('&)!*!&%
&%*!%+ -!* Technique Selection &% * %.* '

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home


Be sure to refer to the AMX-4 Exposure Guide (found in the card holder attached to the
vertical column) for suggested techniques.

!
... use these keys

on the control panel ... to rapidly scroll
to select your para- through values, press
meters for a patient and hold the control
exam. key down.

)!& %! #$ % " "#$$ % " ##!( ! #$ % "
'& "#$$ % " ##!( &$%#%!
)!& %! #$ % $ "#$$ % $ ##!( #$$ % $
##!( %! #$ % '& &$%#%!

... your selection 66 16

is shown on two
displays; the kVp/mAs
display, at the
top of the control !
panel and the
message display,
just above the
kVp/mAs keys. !
66 16

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

D '-3*# 7-3 0$ "' + 6(+3+ -0 +(,(+3+ 4 *3$

5(** !0($%*7 ..$ 0 -, 2'$ +$11 &$ #(1.* 7 2- *$02 7-3
0$%3**7 "'$") 2'$ #(&(2 * #(1.* 7 1$$ **3120 2(-, !$%-0$ + )(,&
, $6.-130$ 2- (,130$ 2' 2 2'$ % "2-01 1$*$"2$# 0$ 2'-1$ 2' 2 0$ (,8
2$,#$# 7 . 02("3* 0 22$,2(-, 2- 2'$ .* "$+$,2 -% 2'$ #$"(+ * .-(,2 (,
2'$ +1 1$22(,& 2- (,130$ 2' 2 5'-*$ ,3+!$01 0$ ,-2 +(12 )$, %-0 , (,8
2$,#$# +1 %0 "2(-, * ,3+!$0
D '$ ). 0 ,&$1 %0-+ 2-

). (, 12$.1

,#

D '$ +1 0 ,&$1 %0-+ 2- +1 (, 12$.1

,# $%$0 2- 2'$ "' 02 !$*-5 %-0 + 6(+3+
2$"',(/3$ 0 2(,&1

2-

2-

2-
D 21 (+.-02 ,2 2- ,-2$ 2' 2 the kVp setting takes precedence over your mAs setĆ
ting. ' 2 (1 (% 7-30 2$"',(/3$ 5-3*# &$,$0 2$ 2-- +3"' '$ 2 %-0 2'$ 60 7
23!$ ,-#$ 2'$ +1 1$22(,& 5(** 32-+ 2(" **7 #$"0$ 1$ 2- .$0+(2 2'$ 1$8
*$"2$# ).
-0 (,12 ,"$ (% ). (1 1$2 2
2'$, 7-30 + 6(+3+ +1 5(** ,-2 $6"$$#
'$ + 6(+3+ **-5 !*$ ). ,# +1 0 2(,&1 12 2$# 5(2'(, 2'(1 -.$0 8
2(-, + ,3 * ,# 1 **-5$# !7 2'$ $/3(.+$,2 + 7 ..$ 0 2- $6"$$# 2'$
23!$ 0 2(,&1 $%$0$,"$ (0$"2(-,
Tube Ratings HRT 50 &
60 Hz). '$ 0$ 1-, %-0 2'(1 .. 0$,2 #(1"0$. ,"7 (1 2' 2 2'$ 23!$ 0 2(,&
"' 021 (, (0$"2(-,
0$ ! 1$# 3.-, '$ 2$# 23!$ 11$+8
!*7 '$ 2 3,(21 0$+ (,(,& 5'(*$ 2'$ "23 * + 6(+3+ **-5 !*$ ).
,# +1 0 2(,&1 0$ ! 1$# 3.-, "-*# 23!$ 11$+!*7 '$ &$,8
$0 2-0 "-,2 (,1 .0-.0($2 07 '$ 2 *- #(,& *&-0(2'+ 5'("' .0-2$"21 2'$
23!$ 11$+!*7 %-0 ** '$ 2 *- #(,& "-,#(2(-,1

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.

# % .# .. ,3 -../- ( ' --" $-*&3- !), .. ,3 )($.$)( It's important to
note that you do not have to raise your kVp or mAs value to compensate for low battery
voltage.

( 3)/0 *)-$.$)( *.$ (. ( -- .. - & . . #($+/ ( .# *,)* , -! .3
*, /.$)(- , .% ( !)&&)1 .# - -. *-

')0 #(-1$.# !,)' -& , -- .# #(-1$.# /..)( #&! 13 .) .#
PREP *)-$.$)( & ,.$(" .# ,).), .) *,)* , -* .% - )/. - )(-

D 1$&& ** , )( .# ' --" $-*&3
). )/ '3 $! 3)/ 1$-# *, -- .# /..)( && .# 13 )1( .) .% ( 2*)4
-/, # - )( *, * 3& $- /.)'.$ ! PREP/EXPOSE *)-$.$)(-
, *, -- -$'/&.( )/-&3 1$&& (). $-*&3
, -- .# X-RAY /..)( && .# 13 )1( .) .% ( 2*)-/, ( /$& .)(
1$&& -)/( ( .# X-RAY $($.), 1$&& &$"#. /*
D ! ( 2*)-/, $-(. .% ( 1$.#$( - )(- )! *, --$(" PREP , & - .#

*, * -1$.# ( , * . .# *, * 3& & - .# PREP/EXPOSE /..)(
( *, -- .) *, * *)-$.$)( "$(
D ! .# ' --" ** ,- 3)/ '3 -.$&& .% ().# , 2*)-/, &.#)/"#
/- )! $(-/!!$$ (. , )0 ,3 .$' .# - & . . #($+/ '3 $(/4
,. ! , .) Messages On Display $( .#$- '(/& !), )'*& . -,$*.$)(
)! && 2,3 ' --" -
D $-*&3- 1# ( .# ./ () $- ))&$(" ) 2*)-/, - (

.% ( 1#$& .#$- ' --" ** ,- # & (".# )! .# &3 1$&& 0,3 1$.# .#
- & . . #($+/ ! ( 2*)-/, $- .. '*. 1#$& $- .$0

1$&& $-*&3
D # %*'- /' ,$ $-*&3 1$&& !&-# !), )/. - )(- !. , .# , 4
& - )! .# #(-1$.# !,)' .# PREP *)-$.$)( $! ( 2*)-/, #- )4
/,,
/, .# /($. !), .,(-*),. 1# ( .# 2' $- )'*& .

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home


Battery charging is as easy as driving the AMX-4 to a correctly rated wall outlet and
plugging the unit in. Ratings are as follows:
D For Models 2115090 & 2115090-7: 120 Volts AC, 60 Hz at 6 amps.
D ForĂModels 2115090-2, 2115090-6, 2115090-8 & 2115090-11: 220/240 Volts
AC, 50 Hz at 3.15 amps.
D For Models 2115090-4, 2115090-5, 2115090-9 & 2115090-10: 100 Volts AC,
50/60 Hz at 6 amps.
The time required to fully recharge the AMX-4 batteries will vary according to batĆ
tery charge level as indicated on the battery status display.
During recharge the AMX-4 capacity gauge increases as the unit is charged. To reĆ
charge from 10% to 100% typically requires 4-5 hours.
Occasionally the AMX-4 automatically performs an extended charge to make sure
that all portions of the battery's internal plates get fully charged. This extended charge
occurs about every tenth time the battery is charged.
To recharge from 10% to 100% during an extended charge typically requires 10 hours.
The AMX-4 will continue to attempt extended charges until at least half of the exĆ
tended charge time is complete.
The extended charge will be transparent to the operator. The only indicaĆ
tion that it is in progress is the longer charge time.
Although portable application will vary site to site, under most operating conditions, a
fully charged AMX-4 is designed to supply enough charge for a typical 8-hour shift.
The AMX-4 capacity gauge visually represents the amount of battery capacity reĆ
maining via a 48 segment bar graph display.
ILLUSTRATION 6-1
BATTERY
CHARGING
PLUG
ÇÇ
TO CHARGE THE
BATTERY, SIMPLY PLUG
ÇÇ
THE UNIT INTO ANY
CORRECTLY RATED WALL
OUTLET.
6-1
Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
% Charge
AT OR NEAR FULL CHARGE,
ALL SEGMENTS ARE
ILLUMINATED.
"* ))'. ())*( !(&". &&'%-!#)( '#!$!$ ))'. ' $ ( %*"
%$". *( )% ) ' !$%'#)!%$ ( )% ) '")!+ ()) % '
% Charge
WHEN BATTERY
CHARGE DIPS BELOW
APPROXIMATELY 10%,
RECHARGE IS
RECOMMENDED.
RECHARGE RECOMMENDED
( ) !( *( !$ !)( +'!%*( #%( % %&')!%$ ) $*#' % (#$)( "!)

,!"" ("%,". '(
)( !#&%')$) )% $%) ) ) .%* do not have to raise your kVp and mAs valu )% %#&$/
() %' "%, ))'. +%")
%*" ) ))'. ' !& "%, &&'%-!#)".
% *"" &!).
,!"" "( %$ ) #(( !(&". all (#$)( ' -)!$*!(
) #((

!(&".(
% $(*' #-!#*# ))'. "! , '%##$ ) ) ) $%) ' '
*$)!" ) "() %$ " % ) ' '& (#$)( + -)!$*!(
""*()')!%$ ( %,( %, #* % ) ))'.( &!). !( *( %' ) +'!%*(
%&')!$ #%( %$ '")!+ (!(

56%
RELATIVE PERCENTAGE OF DAILY
BATTERY DRAIN ATTRIBUTED TO
THE VARIOUS AMX-4 OPERATING
MODES (TYPICAL)
26%
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
13%
4%
1%
Drive Idle Field Light X-Ray Prep X-Ray Generation

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
* $$,*+)+!'&
%'&*+)+* + %"')!+0 ' + ++)0* (!+0 !* ,* ')
)!- & !$ !* !&)* + + ),!& + %',&+ ' )!- +!% 0 ()#!& +
!& &+)$ $'+!'& & +,)&!& + *0*+% . & &'+ !& ,* .!$$ %#
%') (!+0 -!$$ ') /)0 &)+!'& & .!$$ !&)* + *)-! $! ' +
++)0

+ +!&* & (!!+!'& +!'& ') %') +!$ '& '.
+'+$ ++)0 (!+0 !* +)%!&

$
+!$* + -)!',* ++)0 $'* & '. + 0 + + ) )( !*($0

LOAD MODE APPROXIMATE TYPICAL DAILY

DISCHARGE RATE USAGE*
Idle 0.04 6 segments

(AMX-4 on but not in use) segments/minute
Drive 0.4 segments/minute 13 segments

(Drive handle engaged)
Field Light 0.3 segments/minute 3 segments

(Any time light is ON)
X-Ray Prep 0.4 segments/minute 1 segment

(PREP switch depressed)
X-Ray 0.0005 to 0.8 0 segments

(High voltage generation) segments/exposure
TOTAL DAILY SEGMENTS TURNED OFF: 23 segments (48%)
* - Based on data from a number of actual AMX-4 sites.

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

&!)- * )*'(

'4&2 4)& ! $)"2(&3 4/
* & : 4)& $"0"$*49

("5(& 7*,, 2&-"*. :345$+"4'5,, '/2 " 02&02/(2"--&% "-/5.4 /' 53"(& #&'/2&
4)& .5-#&2 /' ,*4 3&(-&.43 #&(*.3 4/ %&$2&"3& )*3 53"(& *3 &15*6",&.4 4/ "002/8*;
-"4&,9
-*.54&3 /' %2*6& /2
-*.54&3 /' *%,& .$& 4)*3 :345$+"4'5,, $"0"$*49

*3 53&% 4)& $"0"$*49 ("5(& 7*,, 50%"4& "$$/2%*.( 4/ "#,& )*3 '&"452& *3 -&".4 4/
&-5,"4& ". "54/-/#*,&3 '5&, ("5(& "'4&2 $/-0,&4&,9 '*,,*.( 50 *43 '5&, 4".+

)&. 4)& ! $"0"$*49 ("5(& %2/03 4/

*.)*#*4*.( 82"9 &80/352&3 *4 *3 0/3;
3*#,& 4/ "$$&33 3/-& &-&2(&.$9 $"0"$*49 4/ !$!( ". &8"- #9 452.*.( 4)& ! /''
".% 4)&. #"$+ /. '4&2 *4 )"3 $/-0,&4&% *43 0/7&250 4&343 4)& ! 7*,, 02/6*%&
&./5() $"0"$*49 '/2 "002/8*-"4&,9 3&$/.%3 /' 53"(& #&'/2& 82"9 &80/352&3 "2&
"("*. *.)*#*4&%
$ (%# (( ) ))'- #- $%) &'%+! (*!!$) +%") %'
&'%&' %&')!%$ , $

!( *( '%' ) !(
)*' ( %*" %$"- *( , $ (%"*)"- $(('-
&&"!)!%$ !&
/ *.352& 4)& (2&"4&34 2&,*"#*,*49 9/5 -"9 %&$*%& 4/ &34"#,*3) " #"44&29 $)"2(*.( 3$)&%;
5,& "4 9/52 0"24*$5,"2 3*4& #"3&% /. 0"34 &80&2*&.$& ".% ".4*$*0"4&% .&&%3
)&(
/,,/7 4)&3& 34&03 4/ 2&$)"2(& 4)& #"44&2*&3
$ ' '!$ ) ))'!( ",-( "%) ) *$!) !$ ,"" +$)!")

'
2*6& 4)& ! 4/ " %&3*(."4&% #"44&29 $)"2(*.( 34"4*/. /2 4/ " $/22&$4,9 2"4&%
7",, /54,&4 2"4*.( 0,"4& *3 ,/$"4&% /. 4)& '2/.4 /' 4)& 5.*4 "#/6& 4)& #"44&29
0,5( && ,,5342"4*/. /3*4*/. 4)& 5.*4 4/ 7*4)*.
'&&4 /' 4)& /54,&4
/ 0,5( *. '*2-,9 (2*0 4)& 0,5( ,/$"4&% /. 4)& '2/.4 /' 4)& 5.*4 ".% 05,, 4)& 2&;
42"$4"#,& $/2% 342"*()4 /54 5.4*, *4 *3 '5,,9 &84&.%&% &4 4)& $/2% #9 " 3,/7 05,,;2&;
,&"3& "$4*/. ,5( *.4/ 4)& #"44&29 $)"2(*.( 34"4*/.

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

$!& /$! (!..#! %.+'4 /* *)"%-( /$! $-#%)# .//0. /$! (!..#!

.$*0' ++!- *) /$! %.+'4

D 0-%)# $-#%)# '' */$!- *)/-*'. -%1%)# ) 3-4 !3+*.0-!. "*- %)5
./)! -! %.'! */! /$/ 4*0 (4 $-#! /$! //!-%!. 2%/$ /$!
%) !%/$!- /$! *- +*.%/%*)
$!) ++!-. *) /$! (!..#! %.+'4 ) '' '0! .!#5
(!)/. -! %''0(%)/! /$! //!-%!. -! "0''4 $-#! / *" +%/4
)+'0# /$! 0)%/ "-*( /$! *0/'!/ #%1%)# /$! +'0# .'%#$/ /0# /* -!'!.! "-*( /&!
0+ -!!'
"/!- 0)+'0##%)# /$! 0)%/ /0-) /$! 0)%/ *) ) 2%/ ++-*3%(/!'4
(%)0/!. !"*-! /&%)# 4*0- "%-./ !3+*.0-! /* !).0-! /!$)%,0! 0-4
D *0 (4 '!1! /$! 0)%/ %) /$! $-#! +*.%/%*) %) !"%)%/!'4 %" 4*0 2%.$ 2%/$5
*0/ (#%)# /$! !,0%+(!)/
D $! +-*(+/ (4 %.+'4 2$!) /$! "%-./ !3+*.0-! %.
//!(+/! "/!- $-#%)# " /$%. *0-. -0) /$! -*/*- "*- /*
.!*) . )
/$!) (&! /$! !3+*.0-! $%. +-*(+/ %. 0.! 4 )*-(' //!-4 1*'/#!
-%.! "/!- $-#%)#

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

" "

)&$$% + + 0&, #% +
),#)#0 .!+ *&+ #&+ % $!#
%&%)*!- #%) ''#0 + #%) +& + #&+ %&+ !)+#0 +& + ,%!+ +& *2
,) !%*+ $ +& + !),!+)0 &))&*!- $!# !* *'!## &) *'#* &%
+ ,%!+ *,) *,) +& #% !+ & !$$!+#0
% #"

+ ++)0 ) !* +&& #&. &) !% + -%+ & % &-)#& !% + ! -&#+ *0*2
+$ + !),!+ )") .!## !%+)),'+ '&.) +& + /)0 ,%!+
&,# + !),!+ )") +)!' + &%+)&# '%# #! +* .!## & &,+ % 0&,## ')2
-%+ )&$ &')+!% + ,%!+ & )*,$ &')+!&% #!' + !),!+ )") ,' +& +
'&*!+!&% %**)0 ) ) + ,%!+ &) ! + ++)0 !* (,+#0 ) +)0
+ ')&,) !%
+ ++)0 !* .!+ !% &')+!% &%!+!&% * !%!+ 0 + ++)0 *++,* % $*2
* !*'#0* % '&.) !%+)),'+!&%* ) )(,%+ + ) $0 ,#+ !% + !
-&#+ *0*+$ ,#+ !* !%!+ - + ,%!+ " 0 (,#!! *)-! )'2
)*%++!-
" &

$ !
& !%*,) + &%+!%, * ')&)$% & 0&,)
'&)+# /)0 ,%!+ *2
+#!* ')!&! $!%+%% ')&)$ .!+ (,#!! *)-! )')*%++!-
)!&! $!%+%% "* ) )(,!) + + &##&.!% !%+)-#* &% $&%+ %
+ ) $&%+ * +) !%*+##+!&% % -)0 0) + )+) ')!&! $!%+%%
* ,# % *$'# $ *"' ,)0 )+ ) ')&-! &% + &##&.!% '*
# $ $

!# 0*+$* % !+* **&!+* $!%+!% .&)#.! &)%!1+!&% & *)-!
')*&%%# *'!##0 +)!% &% $!# /)0 (,!'$%+ &%*,#+ 0&,) )')*%2
++!- +& !% &,+ $&) &,+ ## + -!## *)-! ')&)$*

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.

Maintenance/Checks Frequency
Counterweight cable replacement Every 5 years
Inspect counterweight cable Every year (Refer to Appendix 5 of 2115682-100, AMX-4
Periodic Maintenance (Model 2115090 Series))
Verify no movement between collimator and tube unit Every year, verify that there is no movement between the
collimator and X-ray tube. If any movement is detected, you
MUST remove the collimator and inspect all related fasteners.
Refer to Direction 46-017538, AMX-4 Collimator Interface
Inspection and Torquing Procedures, at the back of the Periodic
Maintenance manual for additional information.
Extension arm inspection Every year (Refer to Section 3-3 in Direction 2115680-100,
AMX-4 Functional Check (Model 2115090 Series))
Collimator general inspection and adjustment Every year (Refer to Section 3-4 in Direction 2115680-100,
Filament and rotor interlocks Every year (Refer to Section 3-5, Direction 2115680-100, AMX-4
Functional Check (Model 2115090 Series))
X-ray tube anode rotation Every year (Refer to Section 3-5, Direction 2115680-100, AMX-4
Column and carriage assembly inspection Every year (Refer to Section 3-3 in Direction 2115680-100,
mAs accuracy Every year (Refer to Appendix 3, Direction 2115682-100, AMX-4
kVp accuracy Every year (Refer to kVp Accuracy and Indirect Linearity" (Test
3-3) in Tab 3 of Direction 46-013894, System Field Test
for HHS)
Operator displays Every year (Refer to Generator Operator Indicators" (Test 3-1) in
Tab 3 of Direction 46-013894, System Field Test for HHS)
Cross hair Every year (Refer to Appendix 2, Direction 2115682-100, AMX-4
Collimator alignment Every year (Refer to Appendix 2, Direction 2115682-100, AMX-4
Field size indicator Every year (Refer to Appendix 2, Direction 2115682-100, AMX-4
Rotational detent Every year (Refer to Section 3-4, Direction 2115680-100, AMX-4
Exposure tone is audible and x-ray on indicators light Every year
up when handswitch depressed to expose position
Auxiliary items (battery charger, HV cables, etc.) Every year
Equipment and Serial Number:

Date of Inspection: _
Maintenance Check Performed By:

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.

Technic Selected
mAs kVp Primary Volts kVp Time (Sec.)

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

2* &%) . *" (!..#!. ) ++!- *) /$! (!..#! %.+'4 *) /$! *)/-*' *1!-
(!..#!. ) (!..#!.
//0. (!..#!. .%(+'4 %)"*-( 4*0 *" /$! *+!-/%)# *) %/%*) *" /$! )
'**& .*(!/$%)# '%&! /$%.

)*/$!- /4+! *" (!..#! ''! ) !--*- (!..#! (4 ++!- .$*0' +-*'!( *0-
2%/$ /$! !,0%+(!)/ ) !--*- (!..#! '**&. .*(!/$%)# '%&! /$%.

*/! /$/ ) !--*- (!..#! %)'0 !. ) '+$)0(!-% * ! ) 2%'' %.+'4 *)! '%)! /
/%(!
" ) !--*- (!..#! ++!-. "*''*2 /$!.! ./!+.
-4 /$! "0)/%*) #%) " /$! +-*'!( %. *--!/! ) )* !--*- (!..#! %. %.5
+'4! +-*!! . 0.0'
" /$! !--*- (!..#! ./%'' %.+'4. /0-) /$! 0)%/ /$!) &
D %#)*./%. *- .!'"/!./. -! ,0%&'4 +!-"*-(! 2$!) /$! 0)%/ %. /0-)! &
*)
D $!) %#)*./%. -! *(+'!/! /$! "*''*2%)# (!..#! %.+'4.

*2 /-4 /$! "0)/%*) *)! (*-! " /$! +-*'!( %. *--!/! ) )* !--*- (!.5
.#! %. %.+'4! +-*!! . 0.0'
" /$! +-*'!( +!-.%./. '' 4*0- .!-1%! -!+-!.!)//%1! ) -!+*-/ /$! * ! )
(!..#! .$*2) *) /$! %.+'4 $%. 2%'' +-!+-! .!-1%! "*- /$! /4+! *" +-*'!(
!)*0)/!-! ) /$! .!-1%! -!,0%-!
) /$! "*''*2%)# +#!. 2!'' '%./ /$! .//0. (!..#!. ) %)'0 ! -%!" !3+')/%*) *"
!$ *)!

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

-"#, &,,! #,)%2, -" .'#- #, - #-, .-(&-# %#+-#(' %#&#- ,+/# %% #,
+(&&' -( ',.+ .+- -"'#*. ' +#(!+)"# +,.%-, 1)(,.+, +
'(- #'"##-

"#, &,,! &2 ))+ 0"' --&)-#'! -( -$ "#!" -"'#*. 1)(,.+ #&4
&#-%2 -+ +&(/#'! -" .'#- +(& "+! 1)(,.+ #, )+/'- )+-#'!

-" #% %&) (+ +#/#'! -" 0#%% ,,#,- #' ,-#%#3#'! -" --+2 /(%-! ,(
-"- -" 1)(,.+ &2 &
"#, &,,! &2 ))+ 0"' --&)-#'! -( 1)(, 0"#% ('%2 0 ,!&'-,

+&#' (' -" --+2 "+! #'#-(+ 1)(,.+ #, )+/'- "+!#'! -" --+4
#, 0#%% %#&#'- -" &,,! ' %%(0 1)(,.+,
" "+! )+(,, #, (&)%- ' -" --+2 #, .%%2 +"+!

" .'#- #, "+!#'!

%% &(, + #,% 1)- +#/ +/# #, +*.#+

( 1)(,.+, ' -$' 0"#% -"#, &,,! ))+, " %'!-" ( -" %2 0#%%
/+2 0#-" -" ,%- -"'#*. "#, &,,! #,)%2, 0"#% -" -. '( #, ((%4
#'!
#,)%2 (' -" %)"'.&+# #,)%2 '2 -#& ' --&)- #, & -( #'+, -"
$) (/

#,)%2 (' -" %)"'.&+# #,)%2 '2 -#& ' --&)- #, & -( +, -"
$) %(0

-" #% %#!"- #, (' (+ (/+ &#'.-, -" %#!"- 0#%% .-(&-#%%2 -.+' ( -(

)+/'- -" (%%#&-(+ +(& (/+"-#'! (. &2 -#/- -" #% %#!"- #' (.-
&#'.-,
#,)%2 (' -" %)"'.&+# #,)%2 '2 -#& ' --&)- #, & -( #'+, -"
&, (/
(+ (/ -" )-% '+!2 %#&#- (+ -" 1+2 -. '( "
)-% "- %#&#- #, , (' -" $) 2(. ,%- (- -"- -" $) ,--#'! 0#%%
%02, -$ )+' (/+ -" &, ,--#'! "- #, # -" -"'#*. ,%- 0(.%
!'+- -(( &." 1+2 -. "- -" &1#&.& &, 0#%% .-(&-#%%2 +, -(
)+&#- -" ,%- $)

#,)%2 (' -" %)"'.&+# #,)%2 '2 -#& ' --&)- #, & -( +, -"
&, %(0

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

READY FOR X-RAY '$ /1$/ "8"+$ ' 2 24""$22%4++8 ".,/+$3$# -# - $7/.241$ , 8 !$ 3 *$- 6(3'(- 3'$
-$73
2$".-#2 % - $7/.241$ (2 33$,/3$# %3$1
2$".-#2 3'$ /1$/ "8"+$ ,423 !$
1$/$ 3$#
RECHARGE '$ $23(, 3$# 42 !+$ ! 33$18 " / "(38 (2 -$ 1

. ,.1$ $7/.241$2 , 8 !$
IMMEDIATELY - 3 *$- +3'.4&' "' 1&$ (2 3.. +.6 3. ".,/+$3$ - 791 8 $7 , 8.4++ ' 5$ $-.4&'
XĆRAY INHIBITED $-$1&8 3. #1(5$ 3'$ 4-(3 3. ".11$"3+8 1 3$# 6 ++ .43+$3 %.1 1$"' 1&$
RECHARGE '$ 1$, (-(-& ! 33$18 " / "(38 (2 //1.7(, 3$+8

.1 +$22
RECOMMENDED
RELEASE HANDLE '$ 6 2 ,.5(-& % 23$1 3' - 3'$ #1(5$ ,.3.12 ++.6 $+$ 2$ 3'$ 1(5$ -9
#+$ 3. "+$ 1 3'$ ,$22 &$ -# 3'$- ".-3(-4$ 6(3' -.1, + ./$1 3(.- '(2 , 8 ' //$- (%
8.4 /42' 3'$ 3.. ' 1# 6'$- #1(5(-& #.6- 1 ,/
RELEASE PREP SW '$ /1$/ 26(3"' (2 23(++ #$/1$22$# %(5$ 2$".-#2 %3$1 - $7/.241$ .1 !$8.-# 3'$

2$".-# 3(,$.43 % 3 *(-& - $7/.241$ 1$/$ 3 3'$ /1$/ "8"+$ 1$+$ 2$ 3'$ /1$/
26(3"' -# 6'$- 3'$ ,$22 &$ (2 -. +.-&$1 #(2/+ 8$# /1$22 3. /1$/ /.2(3(.-
& (-
RESET AEC CNTROL $2$3 3'$ ".-31.++$1 (2 .- !43 -.3 $- !+$#

'$ +(&'3 (2 %+ 2'(-& .- 3'$ 43., 3(" 7/.241$ .-31.+ 4-(3 '(2 (-#(9
" 3$2 3'$ / ##+$ (2 -.3 ".--$"3$# $2$3 3'$ ".-31.++$1
'$ 1$# 1$2$3 .- 3'$ 43., 3(" 7/.241$ .-31.+ 4-(3 (2 +(3 '(2 (-#(9
" 3$2 3'$ ! "*4/ 3(,$ (2 3.. 2'.13 $2$3 3'$ ".-31.++$1
REVERSE ONLY .16 1# #1(5$ (2 /1$5$-3$# !$" 42$ 3'$ 2 %$38 !4,/$1 (2 (- ".-3 "3 6(3' -.3'$1 .!9
)$"3 $5$12$ 3'$ 4-(3 !$%.1$ /1."$$#(-&
TESTING COMPLETE .6$14/ #( &-.23(" 3$23(-& (2 %(-(2'$#
WAIT (3 !$%.1$ 3 *(-& -.3'$1 $7/.241$ (2/+ 8$# 6'$- 3'$ 34!$ -.#$ ' 2 "..+$# !43
!$%.1$ 3'$ ! 33$18 ' 2 1$".5$1$# %1., 3'$ /1$5(.42 $7/.241$ +3'.4&' 1 #(.&1 /'2
" - !$ 3 *$- !$" 42$ .% +.6 ! 33$18 5.+3 &$ 3'$8 , 8 -.3 "'($5$ 3'$ #$2(1$# */
3$"'-(04$ ""41 "8
WAIT/ACT-XX.X %3$1 - $7/.241$ 3'$ %($+# 6(++ #(2/+ 8 3'$ "34 + $7/.241$ ,2
X-RAY DISABLED '(2 ,$22 &$ //$ 12 (% - 33$,/3 3. , *$ - $7/.241$ .""412 6'(+$ (2
#(2/+ 8$#
X-RAY TUBE PARKED . $7/.241$2 " - !$ 3 *$- 6(3' 3'$ 71 8 34!$ (- 3'$ / 1* 31 -2/.13 /.2(3(.-

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.

Home

#))!!*!&%
% &)% .!+ %+)%+!&%# +0 +%)

+ &!#
)0 %!+ !* #**!! * 0' (,!'$%+ #** (,!'$%+ %+)%##0 &.)
(,!'$%+ )!%)0 (,!'$%+ % &%+!%,&,* &')+!&%
0' (,!'$%+ ')&-!* % (,+ ) & ')&++!&% !%*+ #+)! * &"
!% ')+!,#) ))!%
D ##&.# #" ,))%+
D )#!!#!+0 & + ')&++!- )+ &%%+!&%
% &)% .!+ %+)%+!&%# +0 +%)
+ $%,+,)) !* %&+
)*'&%*!# &) %0 &%*(,%* ,* 0 ,%,+ &)!1 $&!!+!&% & + !* (,!'2
$%+
!* (,!'$%+ !* %&+ *,!+# &) ,* !% + ')*% & #$$# *
) ) %& ,*) )'## ')+* !% + !* ,%!+ !* .&,# !%#, + &) )# *
.## * %0 &+ ) $!%* &) *&%)0 ')+
(* " +((%*
&!# )0 %!+ &$'#!* .!+ #** 0' *+%)*

''#!# -$&#)
(&**!, (* (&+% %+!!* %0 +)$!%# . ! !* !%+% &) &%%+!&% &
% /+)%# ')&++!- &%,+&) +& ')&++ !%*+ #+)!# * &" !% * & ,#+
!* *0$&# &% + (,!'$%+ $%* + + + &$'%0!% &')+!% !%*+),+!&%*

) &+# &%)+#* +& **,) * &')+!&%
%(&+) ,&#* %!+* % -&!# %)&,* ! -&#+ 1)
+%*!&%# (* (&+% ($!%# )$!%# !)+#0 &%%+ +& '&!%+ &
$*,)!% *,''#0 &) &%+)&# !),!+ &) +& *)%!% ')+ . ! !* !%+% +&
)+ &) ,%+!&%# ',)'&**

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

"
" !"
" " " " " !

" "
"

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home

Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
Operation T.O.C.
Home
GE Medical Systems
GE Medical Systems: Telex 3797371

P.O. Box 414, Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53201 U.S.A.
(Asia, Pacific, Latin America, North America)
GE Medical Systems — Europe: Telex 698626
283, rue de la Miniére, B.P. 34, 78533 Buc Cedex
France
Rev. 7/22/2002
GEN / PAN Batt T.O.C.
Home

#!"
)"!(!$#'
!&(!$#

*!'!$#
#'(""(!$# $
#'!', ((&!'
$%+&! (e + #&" "(&! $
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

#

## #

D
)

$

#

#

#

D

D

&

(

(

D

"

D

"

D

%

#
D '

#

%
D

!
#

D

#
!

i
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

D " !

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

ii
Rev. 7/22/2002
AMX-4 INSTALLATION OF Home
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS GENESIS BATTERIES


XĆray equipment if not properly practical design compel the adequate steps to protect against
used may cause injury. operator to take adequate injury.
Accordingly, the instructions precautions to prevent the
herein contained should be possibility of any persons The equipment is sold with the
thoroughly read and understood carelessly exposing themselves or understanding that the General
by everyone who will use the others to radiation. Electric Company, Medical
equipment before you attempt to Systems Group, its agents, and
place this equipment in It is important that everyone having representatives have no
operation. The General Electric anything to do with xĆradiation be responsibility for injury or damage
Company, Medical Systems properly trained and fully which may result from improper use
Group, will be glad to assist and acquainted with the of the equipment.
cooperate in placing this recommendations of the National
equipment in use. Council on Radiation Protection Various protective material and
and Measurements as published in devices are available. It is urged
Although this apparatus NCRP Reports available from that such materials or devices be
incorporates a high degree of NCRP Publications, 7910 used.
protection against xĆradiation other Woodmont Avenue, Room 1016,
than the useful beam, no practical Bethesda, Maryland 20814, and of CAUTION: United States Federal
design of equipment can provide the International Commission on law restricts this device to use by or
complete protection. Nor can any Radiation Protection, and take on the order of a physician.
iii
Rev. 7/22/2002
MEDICAL SYSTEMS
MANAGER - INFORMATION INTEGRATION, AMERICAS W-622
P.O. BOX 414

All electrical installations that are shall be performed by qualified GE requirements of the applicable
preliminary to positioning of the Medical personnel. The products electrical codes.
equipment at the site prepared for involved (and the accompanying
the equipment shall be performed by electrical installations) are highly
licensed electrical contractors. In sophisticated, and special The purchaser of GE equipment
addition, electrical feeds into the engineering competence is required. shall only utilize qualified personnel
Power Distribution Unit shall be In performing all electrical work on (i.e., GE's field engineers, personnel
performed by licensed electrical these products, GE will use its own of thirdĆparty service companies with
contractors. Other connections specially trained field engineers. All equivalent training, or licensed
between pieces of electrical of GE's electrical work on these electricians) to perform electrical
equipment, calibrations, and testing products will comply with the servicing on the equipment.
All packages should be closely upon discovery, or in any event, damage is found. At this time be
examined at time of delivery. If within 14 days after receipt, and the ready to supply name of carrier,
damage is apparent, have notation contents and containers held for delivery date, consignee name,
damage in shipment" written on inspection by the carrier. A freight or express bill number, item
all copies of the freight or express transportation company will not pay damaged and extent of damage.
a claim for damage if an inspection
bill before delivery is accepted or Complete instructions regarding
is not requested within this 14 day
signed for" by a General Electric claim procedure are found in
period.
representative or a hospital Section S" of the Policy &
receiving agent. Whether noted or Call Traffic and Transportation, Procedure Bulletins.
concealed, damage MUST be Milwaukee, WI (414) 827-3449Ă/
reported to the carrier immediately 8*285-3449 immediately after
6/17/94
iv
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

REVISION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
1 MATERIALS AND TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1Ć1 Battery Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
and Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2 CHECK CPU AND CHARGER BOARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2Ć1 Check CPU Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2Ć2 Check Central Processor Unit (CPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2Ć2Ć1 Set for French or English Operator Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2Ć2Ć2 JP1 Jumper Position Possibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2Ć3 Check Battery Charger Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3 GENESIS BATTERY NO-LOAD TEST

(BATTERIES DISCONNECTED, OUTSIDE OF AMX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3Ć1 Low Voltage Batteries (Cells) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3Ć2 Zero No-Load Test Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3Ć3 One or Two No-Load Test Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3Ć4 Three or More No-Load Test Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4 REMOVE OLD BATTERIES AND WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

4Ć1 Remove Trim Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4Ć2 Remove Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4Ć2Ć1 Remove Battery Compartment Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4Ć2Ć2 Disconnect and Remove Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
5 DISPOSE OF OLD BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

5Ć1 Hawker Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
5Ć2 Gates Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
5Ć2Ć1 Build Cardboard Fillers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
5Ć3 Panasonic Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
5Ć4 Return Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
5Ć4Ć1 USA Pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
5Ć4Ć2 Non-US . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
6 INSTALL GENESIS BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
7 INSTALL PANASONIC BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
8 LOAD DEFAULTS AND RECALIBRATE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
9 FINAL STEPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
10 SCHEMATICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
v
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

vi
Rev. 7/22/2002

Home

A June 27, 1996 Preliminary release.
0 July 1, 1996 Initial release. Was 46-017552.
1 October 18, 1996 Sectionalized; Added reference to CPU/charger board replacement.
2 December 10, 1997 General update; Added HAWKER return box for batteries.
3 May 8, 2001 Added Panasonic batteries.

Title Page 3
i thru viii 3
1 thru 42 3
Back Page -
vii
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

viii
Rev. 7/22/2002
AMX-4 INSTALLATION OF
Home

One of two:
D 46-329098G2: Battery Upgrade Kit Battery Test Harness (batteries

and terminal plates only)
D 46-329314G3: Battery Upgrade Kit Battery Test Harness
TABLE 1

QTY.
ITEM PART NO. DESCRIPTION 46-329314G3
1 46-329098G2 BATTERIES GENESIS, GROUP OF NINE 1
2 46-329088P2 TERMINAL PLATE 18
3 46-311805P3 LOCKWASHER, M6 36
4 46-312345P4 NUT, M6 18
5 46-321370G1 PRINTED WIRING ASSEMBLY 1
6 46-329061P1 BATTERY SPACER INSULATOR 3
12* 46-329091P1 BATTERY INTERCONNECT CABLE #1 WITH 2 BOOTS, 7.0 INCH 2
13* 46-329091P2 BATTERY INTERCONNECT CABLE #2 WITH 1 BOOT, 13.5 INCH 1
* Battery cables 46-329091P1 through P8 are not available individually from GPO, but must be ordered from GPO as a set,
Part # 2101223.
1
Rev. 7/22/2002
TABLE 1 (CONT.)

QTY.
ITEM PART NO. DESCRIPTION 46-329314G3
20 46-316915G2 BATTERY TEST HARNESS CABLE WITH TERMINAL BLOCK 1
21 46-208560P13 4-40 X .5 INCH SCREW 2
22 46-170012P34 4-40 KEPS NUT 2
23 46-329315P1 SHIPPING BOX TO RETURN OLD HAWKER BATTERIES 9
24 46-208758P3 TY-RAP STRAP 4
25 2100969 BATTERY SEPARATOR PAD 4
26 46-329183P1 BATTERY POLARITY LABEL 1
27 2165154-100 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 1
28 46-303747P1 BATTERY RETURN (RECYCLE) LABELS 9
29 46-303755P1 LABEL (DO NOT SHIP BY AIR) 18
30 46-303768P1 LABEL (UN CERCIFICATION MARKING) 9
31 2186370 FOAM BLOCKING 18
32 2186370-2 FOAM BLOCKING 9
33 2186370-3 FOAM BLOCKING 9
%
$ #!" " $"
"# $#
D Digital voltmeter with 200 milliampere scale
# Required accuracy for the digital voltmeter for AMX Charger Calibration is
+ 0.3 VDC at 120 VDC.
D Storage oscilloscope
D HV divider (C1515A) with:
- Five foot (1.5 meter) HV cables

- 17.5 foot (5.3 meter) Belden 8422 cable (46-219921G2)
D Torque wrench set (46-268445G1)
D Drill and 9/64 inch drill bit
2
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

ILLUSTRATIONă1

Start
Section 2
Check CPU &
Charger Board
Y
Is CPU
46–264974G2?
Is CPU Y Is CPU Firmware Y Order Firmware Kit

46–264974G1? Reg G or Later? 46–329225G1
N N
Order CPU T34974

(46–264974G2)
Is Charger Board N Order

46–288786G1/G2? 46–288786G1/G2
End Section 2
3
Rev. 7/22/2002

Newer firmware (version 46-329187G1/46-329188G1 and after) limits the charge

cycle time. CPU and firmware should be upgraded to the latest revision to upgrade the
battery charging algorithm. Verify revision of current CPU board or replace CPU
board in accordance with Section 2Ć2 and Table 2.
TABLE 2

CPU BOARD PART # AND REV. CHECK/VERIFY ORDER

46-264974G1 REV. G OR LATER EPROMS ARE 46-329187G1 (U104) /46-329188G1 (U51) 46-329225G1
FIRMWARE KIT
46-264974G2 N/A N/A
46-264974G1-F OR EARLIER REV N/A 46-264974G2
OR (T3497H)
ANY PRIOR VINTAGE CPU BOARD
NOTE: FOR 46-264974G1-G VERIFY JP1 JUMPER IN B" AND THAT DIP SWITCH S75
OR 46-264974G2 POSITIONS 5 AND 7 ARE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION
2Ć2Ć1.
U51 contains calibration routines. U104 contains applications and diagnostic
routines.

Order replacement CPU board 46-264974G2 (T3497H) or later if not already presĆ
ent. Older firmware (before version 46-329187G1/46-329188G1) does not limit the
time of the charge cycle. This can cause excessive overheating while charging if a batĆ
tery is failed.
Set for French or English Operator Messages
Selection of French or English operator messages is determined by position 6 of DIP

switch S75 on the AMX Controller (CPU) Board.
1. Look at the operator messages displayed to determine if they are in the desired
language.
2. To change the language of the operator messages, set Position 6 of DIP switch
S75 on the CPU Board in accordance with Illustrations 2 and 3.
The other positions of S75 are shown for reference, but should not require
changing.
4
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

ILLUSTRATIONă2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CLOSED (ON) POSITIONS 5, 6 & 7 CLOSED (ON),
WITH ROCKERS DEPRESSED THIS SIDE
FRENCH
OPEN (OFF) POSITIONS 1, 2, 3, 4 & 8 OPEN (OFF),
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
POSITIONS 5 & 7 CLOSED (ON),
CLOSED (ON) WITH ROCKERS DEPRESSED THIS SIDE
ENGLISH
POSITIONS 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 & 8 OPEN (OFF)
OPEN (OFF)
ILLUSTRATIONă3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
POSITIONS 5, 6 & 7 CLOSED (ON),
CLOSED (ON) WITH LEVERS THIS SIDE
FRENCH
OPEN (OFF) POSITIONS 1, 2, 3, 4 & 8 OPEN (OFF),
WITH LEVERS THIS SIDE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
POSITIONS 5 & 7 CLOSED (ON),
CLOSED (ON) WITH LEVERS THIS SIDE
ENGLISH
OPEN (OFF) POSITIONS 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 & 8 OPEN (OFF)
WITH LEVERS THIS SIDE
TABLE 3

PORT
SW NORMAL SW ADDR&
# POSITION NAME FUNCTION BIT # COMMENTS
1 OFF - (NONE) -
2 OFF - (NONE) -
3 OFF OPT ENABLES POWER 1100H OFF (PORT LOGIC 1) = ENABLES +24, +15 TESTS
SW 1 SUPPLY2 TESTS BIT 6 ON (PORT LOGIC 0) = DISABLES +24, +15 TESTS
4 OFF BAUD SELECTS BAUD RATE 1100H OFF (PORT LOGIC 1) = 375K BAUD RATE
RATE BIT 5 ON (PORT LOGIC 0) = 187.5K BAUD RATE
5 ON OPT (NOT USED) 1000H

SW 4 BIT 2
6 OFF-ENG OPT SELECTS LANGUAGE 1000H OFF (PORT LOGIC 1) = ENGLISH

ON-FREN SW 3 OF MESSAGE BIT 1 ON (PORT LOGIC 0) = FRENCH
7 ON OPT CYCLES CPU 1400H OFF (PORT LOGIC 1) = CYCLE CPU AT POWER UP
SW 2 BIT 2 (SEE NOTE 1 BELOW)
ON (PORT LOGIC 0) = NORMAL RUN MODE
8 OFF - (NONE) -
5
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

JP1 Jumper Position Possibilities
D A Ċ No write protect; the CPU has control when data is written
D B Ċ Data may be written only in RAM 1 when service switch is in the service
mode
D C Ċ Data is write protected all the time and cannot be written into. RAM 1
(U107) stores cal data; RAM 2 (U54) stores auto cal data and data log

The minimum battery charger board is a 46-288786G2 or newer. It is fully backward

compatible and is recommended for all units. The 46-288786G1 board is the non-
EMC compliant version of the G2 board.
6
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

"
!
The new Genesis batteries were thoroughly tested prior to being packed for this batĆ
tery installation kit. Although we don't expect it to happen, it is possible for batteries
to develop a cell short while in storage.
Therefore this No-Load test is a quality field test that -312 be performed on the
Genesis batteries /321+&' of AMX unit, $'(/0' removing old batteries from AMX.
"
"

!

/2' / %/..'%2 2*' '.'1+1 $#22'0+'1 2/ '#%* /2*'0 /0 2/ 2*' ! (/0 (/,,/45
+.) //#& '12
1. Number each battery cell with a felt tip marker, 1 through 9.
2. Measure battery voltage no-load and note the voltage readings in Table 4.
TABLE 4

NO–LOAD TEST
BATTERY # NO–LOAD VOLTAGE SUM
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
9
PACK AVERAGE
3. Measure each cell (no-load) and record the output voltage in Table 4.
4. Add the NO-LOAD VOLTAGE values for each battery.
5. Divide the Step 4 sum by 9 (to establish the pack average).
6. Compare the individual NO-LOAD VOLTAGE values to the PACK AVERĆ

AGE value.
7
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

!

Batteries more than 0.2 volts lower than the pack average fail the no-load test. Order
individual cells (2172339) if required.
!
The battery pack is good and can be installed.
!
1. Read the test date on the batteries. If the battery PACK is:
D MORE than two years old, go to Section 3Ć4

D LESS than two years old, order individual replacement cells (2172339)
!
1. Replace entire battery set with a new FULLY-CHARGED battery set.
2. Mark ALL nine batteries of the old set as defective. Return defective battery
pack.
8
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

SECTION 4
REMOVE OLD BATTERIES AND WIRING
Before starting to remove batteries, be sure that the AMX key switch is OFF, the circuit
breaker is OFF, and the charger cord is unplugged.
PERSONAL INJURY!
WARNING
TION; HIGH AMPERAGE AND VOLTAGE IS PRESENT. USE INSUĆ
LATED TOOLS FOR WORKING ON BATTERIES.
4Ć1 Remove Trim Covers
1. Pull corners of front cover from ball stud retainer sockets on frame. See IllustraĆ
tion 4.
ILLUSTRATIONă4
SIDE COVERS
HAND SWITCH
4-40 x 3/8
SCREWS
RIGHT COVER
6-32 X 1/2
BLACK OXIDE
SCREW
BALL STUDS
BATTERY COMPARTĆ
FRONT COVER MENT COVER
SCREWS TOP AND
BOTTOM
BALL STUDS
4-40 x 3/8
SCREWS
LEFT COVER
6-32 X 1/2 BLACK OXIDE
SCREW
2. Remove two screws retaining rear cover on base assembly. Remove rear cover.
3. Disconnect hand switch on right side trim cover.
4. Remove two 4-40 x 3/8 binding head screws and one 6-32 x 1/2 black oxide bindĆ
ing head screw holding each cover to base and frame assemblies.
5. Pull covers off ball stud retaining sockets and carefully remove from unit.
9
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

* "$%)"
!(("&#"'

%(" During removal:
D Reference to the right and left sides of battery compartment are relative to the
view shown in Illustration 6.
D Cable numbers (#s) indicated in Illustration 6 and in this instruction are marked
on the parts.
D Disconnect cables only in the order instructed, and only when instructed.
D Don't remove paper backing from any insulating separator pad.
D All battery lead connectors must be insulated to prevent electrical contact with
the frame or other battery terminals.
D Save all connecting hardware.
** Remove Battery Compartment Cover
1. Verify that AMX key switch is OFF, circuit breaker is OFF, and charger cord is
disconnected.
2. Remove and tape battery ground cable marked #2 to ensure that this cable will
not short out to any other wiring. SEPARATE THIS CABLE FROM ALL OTHĆ
ERS. See Illustration 5.
ILLUSTRATIONă5

CIRCUIT BATTERY
BREAKER GROUND STUD
CABLE MARKED #4
CABLE MARKED #2
PLATES BASE ASSEMBLY

46-286167P1 BATTERY
(IF PRESENT: SEE TEXT) COMPARTMENT
COVER CAPSCREWS
10
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

3. Remove and tape cable marked #5 separately from ALL other cables.
4. Remove all remaining battery cables from battery ground stud. Tape ALL cables
separately.
5. Remove battery lead cable marked #4 from terminal on Circuit Breaker in

AMX1 A3 Module. Be certain boot covers the connector and it cannot short out.
Tape connector to ensure it will not short.
6. Remove hex head cap screws securing battery compartment cover. Remove
cover.
Plates 46-286167P1 correct units where capscrews do not properly secure the
cover to the compartment opening.
7. Remove insulator board from compartment entrance.
Disconnect and Remove Batteries
1. Disconnect cable marked #4 from the battery. Cover the connector with boot
and remove cable. Refer to Illustration 6.
ILLUSTRATIONă6

CABLE # 1
CABL CABLE CABLE #2(-)

E #3
INSULATOR # 3
CABLE #2(-) TO
GROUND STUD
CABLE
#1
CABLE #4(+) TO
CIRCUIT BREAKER
CABLE
#1
CABLE
#3
BATTERY
INSULATOR CABLE
#1 INSULATOR
2. Remove cable marked #1. Cover connectors with boots.
3. Disconnect cable marked #3. Cover connector with boot.
4. Remove two batteries and remove insulator board.
5. Remove lower cable marked #3. Cover connector with boot.
11
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

7. Disconnect upper cable marked #3. Cover connector with boot.
8. Remove two batteries and remove insulator board.
9. Remove lower cable marked #3. Cover connector with boot.
11. Disconnect upper cable marked #3. Cover connector with boot.
12. Remove two batteries and remove insulator boards on left side and at rear of
compartment.
13. Remove insulator board covering three remaining batteries recessed in right side
of compartment.
14. Remove cable marked #2. Cover cable connector end with boot.
15. Remove cable marked #3. Cover cable connector end with boot.
16. Remove two remaining cables marked #1. Cover cable connector ends with
boots.
17. Remove remaining three batteries and two insulator boards.
18. Leave the battery compartment top and bottom insulation in place in the AMX
unit. Set the remainder of the old battery insulators aside.
19. Set old battery cables aside. This includes the old wires between batteries, from
battery (-) to ground stud, and from battery (+) to circuit breaker.
12
Rev. 7/22/2002

" !
Return the removed Hawker batteries using the battery return box (part number
46-329315P1) and the foam block fillers in the kit.
1. Position battery in box (see Illustration 7).
2. Position fillers A and B in box in accordance with Illustration 7.
3. Place Filler C on top of the battery.
ILLUSTRATIONă7

FILLER C
FILLER B
FILLER A FILLER A
BATTERY
FILLER B
TABLE 5

FILLER A DIMENSIONS (INCHES) FILLER B DIMENSIONS (INCHES) FILLER C DIMENSIONS (INCHES)

A B THICK A B THICK A B THICK
6 5.5 1 9.75 6 0.9 11.7 5.6 1.6
DIMENSIONS A
13
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

If a new battery does not function correctly, use the battery return box (part number
46-329315P1) to return individual failed cells.
Build Cardboard Fillers
1. Lay the 33 inch long filler sheets flat, oriented as shown in Illustration 8.
ILLUSTRATIONă8

A B C D E F G H I 5-7/8 INCHES
33 INCHES
SLIT SCORED OTHER SIDE
SLIT SCORED THIS SIDE
2. Fold the 33 inch long filler sheet in accordance with Table 6.
TABLE 6

DIMENSIONS
FILLER A FILLER B (INCHES)
SEGMENT ORIENT NEXT TO AND SEGMENT ORIENT NEXT TO AND A B
A VERT D A HORIZ D 5-7/8 3-7/16
B HORIZ C B HORIZ C 5-3/16
C HORIZ B F C HORIZ B F 5
D VERT A E D HORIZ A E 3-14
E VERT D E HORIZ D 3
F HORIZ C F HORIZ C 4-1/4
G VERT H G VERT H 2-5/16
H VERT G I H VERT G I 3
I VERT H I VERT H 2-15/16
DIMENSIONS A
14
Rev. 7/22/2002
3. Fold both filler strips so that they look like the filler assemblies in Illustration 9.
4. Insert the Filler A and B around the battery. Install the Filler K to create tension.
See Illustration 9.
5. Insert second Filler J in top of box.
ILLUSTRATIONă9

A
D
E
F B
C
G
H FILLER J
I FILLER K 2 PIECES:
1 IN BOTTOM OF BOX
1 ON TOP AFTER FILLERS IN PLACE
FILLER A ASSEMBLY
H
G I
BATTERY
RETURN BOX
E F
D C
A B
FILLER B ASSEMBLY
6. Insert a Filler J in the bottom of the return box. Place the battery in the box.
TABLE 7

FILLER A B
J 11-5/8 16-1/2
K 4 7
15
Rev. 7/22/2002
# !!"
Return the removed Panasonic batteries using the battery return box (part number
46-329315P1) and the foam block fillers in the kit.
1. Position battery in box (see Illustration 7).
2. Position fillers A and B in box in accordance with Illustration 7.
3. Place Filler C on top of the battery.
ILLUSTRATIONă10

FILLER C
FILLER B
FILLER A FILLER A
BATTERY
FILLER B
TABLE 8

FILLER A DIMENSIONS (INCHES) FILLER B DIMENSIONS (INCHES) FILLER C DIMENSIONS (INCHES)

A B THICK A B THICK A B THICK
6 5.5 1 9.75 6 0.9 11.7 5.6 1.6
DIMENSIONS A
16
Rev. 7/22/2002

Home


1. Tape the box securely. See Illustration 11.
2. Fill out shipped from portions of shipping labels.
ILLUSTRATIONă11

USA Pole
Affix labels to boxes as shown in Illustration 12.
ILLUSTRATIONă12

SHIP TO: GE RECYCLING CENTER

2200 EAST COLLEGE AVE.
CUDAHY, WI 53110
4G/Z22/S/**
U.S.A./+AI0455
** LAST TWO DIGITS OF YEAR

PACKAGE WAS MANUFACTURED
Non-US
In Canada, in Latin America, in the Europe pole, and in the Asia pole, contact your
local FMI coordinator for disposal instructions.
17
Rev. 7/22/2002

Home

Before starting to install batteries, be sure that the AMX key switch is OFF, that the
circuit breaker is OFF, and the charger cord is unplugged.

#

#

#

!" During installation:
D Make all battery connections as shown in Illustration 14 using the hardĆ

ware shown.
D Reference to the right and left sides of battery compartment are relative
to the view shown in Illustration 14.
D Cable numbers (#s) indicated in Illustration 14 and in this instruction are

marked on the parts.
D Insulator numbers are shown for convenience in description, but are not
D There are no Insulators #3 and #7.
D Battery #s may not be marked on batteries.
D Be sure that battery compartment top and bottom insulation from the
previous set of batteries is in place.
D Connect cables only in the order instructed, and only when instructed.
D Apply 45-50 pound-inches (5.1-5.6 N-m) torque to ALL battery conĆ

nections.
D Place insulation boots over ends of each cable.
D Don't remove paper backing from any insulating separator pad. Orient
insulator pads with paper backing facing up.
18
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

1. Install terminal plates on each battery. See Illustration 13. Discard flat washers
supplied with batteries.
"!
! $ ! # !!
#
" !# ! !# &
! !% !!
2. Position Batteries #2 & #4 (see Illustration 14) in the battery compartment

stacked one on top of the other, with a battery separator pad between them. Put
both batteries into position in back right side of compartment.
ILLUSTRATIONă13
!! !
! ! !!

#
M6 HEX HD SCREW
(FURNISHED WITH BATTERY)
M6 LOCKWASHER
TERMINAL PLATE
(46–329088P2)
NOTE: TORQUE TO 45–50 IN–LBS

(5.1–5.6 N-m) ON ALL
(THIS SUPERCEDES TORQUE
SPEC ON BATTERY LABEL, WHICH
IS A MAXIMUM TORQUE.)
M6 HEX NUT
M6 LOCKWASHER
19
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
ILLUSTRATIONă14

CABLE #7
SENSE LEAD CABLE #7
CABLE #6
CABLE #4,
POSITIVE TO
CIRCUIT BREAKER
CABLE #8 SEE
NOTE 2.
CABLE #8
SENSE LEAD CABLE #4
SENSE LEAD
CABLE #7
CABLE #1 SENSE LEAD
SENSE LEAD
CABLE #7
CABLE #6
SENSE LEAD
BATTERY TEST
BATTERY SEPARATOR PAD, CABLE #3 TERMINAL STRIP
TYPICAL (4 PLACES)
SENSE LEAD
CABLE #1
CABLE #5
SEE CABLE #5
NOTE 2. SENSE LEAD
CABLE #1
CABLE #1
SENSE LEAD SEE
NOTE 2.
CABLE #2
SENSE LEAD
SEE
NOTE 2.
CABLE #2,
NEGATIVE TO
GROUND STUD
NOTE 1: THERE ARE NO INSULATORS #3 & #7
INSULATOR #4 HAS TWO NONĆFUNCTIONAL HOLES. INSULATOR #1'S EACH HAVE
TWO FULL CUP-SHAPED BUMPS WITH NO HOLES. THE INSULATOR #1'S MUST BE
ORIENTED WITH BUMPS POINTING AWAY FROM YOU.
AND 7 & 8.
20
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

3. Position Batteries #1 & #3 in the compartment stacked one on top of the other,
with a separator pad between them (see Illustration 14). Push both batteries into
position alongside Batteries #2 & #4.

Don't confuse Insulator #4 with the Insulator #1. Insulator #4 has two nonĆ
functional holes. Insulator #1s have two full cup-shaped bumps with no
holes.
4. Install Insulator #4 between Batteries #2 & #4 and Batteries #1 & #3. Install
an Insulator #2 next to Batteries #1 & #3, and another Insulator #2 next to BatĆ
teries #2 & #4.
5. Connect end of Cable #6 with sense lead to Battery #3 (+) and connect other
end to Battery #2 (-), as shown. Slide a boot over each terminal.
over this terminal. (Orient cable so that the terminal lug points down at 45_ toĆ
ward door opening.)
Do not connect the other end of Cable #8 yet.
7. Connect end of Cable #4 with sense lead to Battery #1 (+), and slide a boot over
this terminal. Route Cable #4 through grommet in hole in top of battery comĆ
partment, connect it to the top terminal (LINE) on circuit breaker in AMX1 A3,
and slide boot over terminal.
8. Connect a Cable #7 end with sense lead to Battery #4 (+), and other end to BatĆ
tery #3 (-). Slide a boot over each terminal.
9. Connect the remaining Cable #7 sense lead end to Battery #2 (+) and connect
10. Install Insulator #5, Insulator #6, and the remaining Insulator #2.
11. Position Batteries #5 & #6 in compartment, one on top of the other with a sepaĆ
rator pad between them.
12. Connect one Cable #1 end with sense lead to Battery #6 (+), and other end to
Battery #5 (-). Slide boots over each terminal.
13. Connect end of Cable #3 without the sense lead to Battery #6 (-), and slide a
boot over terminal.
Do not connect other end of Cable #3 yet.
21
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

15. Connect free end of Cable #8 (from Battery #4 [-]) to Battery #5 (+), and slide
a boot over terminal.
16. Place the test terminal board of Illustration 15 into battery compartment as
shown in Illustration 14.
(RHS [right hand side]) as shown in Illustration 15.
b. Connect Cable #7 Sense Lead (from Battery #4 [+]) to Terminal J4 (RHS).
c. Connect Cable #6 Sense Lead (from Battery #3 [+]) to J3 (RHS).
d. Connect Cable #4 Sense Lead (from Battery #1 [+]) to J1 of (RHS).
side]).
f. Connect Cable #8 Sense Lead (from Battery #5 [+]) to J5 (LHS).
17. Install an Insulator #1 between Batteries #5 & #6 and another between BatterĆ
ies #7 & #8, as shown in Illustration 14, with cup-shaped bumps pointing away
from you. Route free end of Cable #3 over top of Insulator #1.
18. Position Batteries #7 & #8 in compartment stacked one on top of the other with
a separator pad between them.

19. Connect end of remaining Cable #1 with sense lead to Battery #8 (+) and other
CAUTION / WARNING end to Battery #7 (-). Slide a boot over each terminal.
This is "NOT" the number 5
cable that was attached to the over terminal.
ground lug
above Insulator #1.
22. Connect free end of Cable #3 from Battery #6 [-] to Battery #7 (+), and slide
23. Connect the sense leads:
a. Connect Cable #1 Sense Lead (from Battery #8 [+]) to J8 (LHS).

22
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

ILLUSTRATIONă15

TEST TERMINAL BOARD

46–321370G1
CABLE #7
SENSE LEAD
CABLE #1
SENSE (J2)
CABLE #7
LEAD SENSE LEAD
CABLE #4
SENSE LEAD
(J6)
(J5)
CABLE #6
(J1)
SENSE LEAD
CONNECT HARNESS
TO CONNECTOR J11
(J4) (APPLICABLE TO KIT
CABLE #8 (J7) 46–329314G3 ONLY.)
SENSE
LEAD
(J8)
(J11)
(J3)
(J10)
CABLE #3
SENSE
LEAD
CABLE #1
SENSE
LEAD (J9)
CABLE #2
SENSE
LEAD CABLE #5
SENSE
LEAD
24. Install another Insulator #1 between Batteries #7 & #8 and Battery #9, with
cup-shaped bumps pointing away from you. Route free end of Cable #5 over
the top of this Insulator #1.
26. Position Battery #9 on top of Insulator #8.

23
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

28. Tape the end of Cable #2 that does not have the sense lead to prevent it from
shorting after it is connected to Battery #9.
29. Connect other end of Cable #2 to Battery #9 (-), and slide a boot over cable
terminal. Route Cable #2 through grommet in hole in top of battery compartĆ
ment.
#' # #""' ! #% ! #' '$ '# %#(" &'( )'
Cable #4 connected (battery positive) and the unconnected end of Cable #2
(battery negative). It should measure between 111 and 118 volts DC, depending
on state of charge of the batteries.
32. $$! ! '# '

Route the terminal block cable through the unit and mount the terminal block
as follows:
b. Route connector end of furnished terminal block cable through grommets

in chassis as shown in Illustration 16.
c. Drill two holes 0.140 inches (9/64 inch) diameter, 2.65 inches apart, and atĆ
tach terminal block using hardware as shown in Illustration 16.
d. Secure terminal block cable to existing harness using furnished Ty-rap

straps. Connect other end of cable to the test terminal board connector J11.
#' The terminal block is a test point, and is only connected to the harness.
e. Measure the individual battery voltages across terminals of terminal block.

be greater than 12.0 Volts. The actual value will depend upon battery state
of charge.
24
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

ILLUSTRATIONă16

VIEW A"
(2) 4-40 KEPS NUTS
46-170012P34
HARNESS CONNECTS TO
(SEE VIEW A")
(2) 4-40 SCREWS

46-208560P13
CABLE
46-316915G2
CONNECT TO TEST TERMINAL

BOARD (SEE ILLUSTRATION 15)
25
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

ILLUSTRATIONă17

ARM EXTENDED
LEVEL FLOOR
BOLTS TORQUED TO
75 IN. LBS. (8.4 NĆm)
NewtonĆmeters), as shown in Illustration 17. Install the two metal plates (if appliĆ
cable) that correct over-size mounting holes.
! ,,*1 '%(*,%&, '.* "+ & "&, *$ (*, ' ,!
+ ++%$1 $$
+"0 '$,+ %-+, "& ($ & ,'*)- ,' ('-& "&!+ /,'&2%2
,*+ '* ,!
+ ++%$1 & /*( '* *#
36. Remove tape from free end of Cables #2 and #5.
37. Connect Cables #2 and #5 to ground stud using flat washer and nut.
26
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

Before starting to install batteries, be sure that the AMX key switch is OFF, that the
circuit breaker is OFF, and the charger cord is unplugged.

#

#

#

!" During installation:
D Make all battery connections as shown in Illustration 19 using the hardĆ

ware shown.
D Reference to the right and left sides of battery compartment are relative
to the view shown in Illustration 19.
D Cable numbers (#s) indicated in Illustration 19 and in this instruction are

D Insulator numbers are shown for convenience in description, but are not
D There are no Insulators #3 and #7.
D Battery #s may not be marked on batteries.
D Be sure that battery compartment top and bottom insulation from the
previous set of batteries is in place.
D Connect cables only in the order instructed, and only when instructed.
D Apply 45-50 pound-inches (5.1-5.6 N-m) torque to ALL battery conĆ

nections.
D Place insulation boots over ends of each cable.
D Don't remove paper backing from any insulating separator pad. Orient
insulator pads with paper backing facing up.
27
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

1. Do not install install terminal plates on each battery. See Illustration 18.

!

#
"

" #
"
2. Position Batteries #2 & #4 (see Illustration 19) in the battery compartment

stacked one on top of the other, with a battery separator pad between them. Put
both batteries into position in back right side of compartment.
ILLUSTRATIONă18

" "
NOTE: TORQUE TO 45–50 IN–LBS

(5.1–5.6 N-m) ON ALL
M5 HEX NUT
(FURNISHED WITH BAT-
M6 LOCKWASHER
TERY)
28
Rev. 7/22/2002
ILLUSTRATIONă19

CABLE CABLE #7
#6 SENSE LEAD
CABLE #7
SEE CABLE #4,

NOTE 2. POSITIVE TO
CABLE #8 CIRCUIT BREAKER
CABLE #8
SENSE LEAD
CABLE #4
SENSE LEAD
CABLE #1
SENSE LEAD
CABLE #7
CABLE #7 CABLE #6
SENSE LEAD SENSE LEAD
BATTERY TEST
BATTERY SEPARATOR PAD, CABLE #3 TERMINAL STRIP
TYPICAL (4 PLACES)
CABLE #1 7 SENSE LEAD
CABLE #5
SEE CABLE #5
NOTE 2. SENSE LEAD
CABLE #1
CABLE #1
SENSE LEAD SEE
NOTE 2.
CABLE #2
SENSE LEAD
SEE
NOTE 2.
CABLE #2,
NEGATIVE TO
GROUND STUD
NOTE 1: THERE ARE NO INSULATORS #3 & #7
INSULATOR #4 HAS TWO NONĆFUNCTIONAL HOLES. INSULATOR #1'S EACH HAVE
TWO FULL CUP-SHAPED BUMPS WITH NO HOLES. THE INSULATOR #1'S MUST BE
ORIENTED WITH BUMPS POINTING AWAY FROM YOU.
AND 7 & 8.
29
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

3. Position Batteries #1 & #3 in the compartment stacked one on top of the other,
with a separator pad between them (see Illustration 19). Push both batteries into
position alongside Batteries #2 & #4.

Don't confuse Insulator #4 with the Insulator #1. Insulator #4 has two nonĆ
functional holes. Insulator #1s have two full cup-shaped bumps with no
holes.
4. Install Insulator #4 between Batteries #2 & #4 and Batteries #1 & #3. Install
an Insulator #2 next to Batteries #1 & #3, and another Insulator #2 next to BatĆ
teries #2 & #4.
5. Connect end of Cable #6 with sense lead to Battery #3 (+) and connect other
end to Battery #2 (-), as shown. Slide a boot over each terminal.
over this terminal. (Orient cable so that the terminal lug points down at 45_ toĆ
ward door opening.)
Do not connect the other end of Cable #8 yet.
7. Connect end of Cable #4 with sense lead to Battery #1 (+), and slide a boot over
this terminal. Route Cable #4 through grommet in hole in top of battery comĆ
partment, connect it to the top terminal (LINE) on circuit breaker in AMX1 A3,
and slide boot over terminal.
8. Connect a Cable #7 end with sense lead to Battery #4 (+), and other end to BatĆ
tery #3 (-). Slide a boot over each terminal.
9. Connect the remaining Cable #7 sense lead end to Battery #2 (+) and connect
10. Install Insulator #5, Insulator #6, and the remaining Insulator #2.
11. Position Batteries #5 & #6 in compartment, one on top of the other with a sepaĆ
rator pad between them.
12. Connect one Cable #1 end with sense lead to Battery #6 (+), and other end to
Battery #5 (-). Slide boots over each terminal.
13. Connect end of Cable #3 without the sense lead to Battery #6 (-), and slide a
boot over terminal.
30
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

15. Connect free end of Cable #8 (from Battery #4 [-]) to Battery #5 (+), and slide
16. Place the test terminal board of Illustration 20 into battery compartment as
shown in Illustration 19.
(RHS [right hand side]) as shown in Illustration 20.
b. Connect Cable #7 Sense Lead (from Battery #4 [+]) to Terminal J4 (RHS).
c. Connect Cable #6 Sense Lead (from Battery #3 [+]) to J3 (RHS).
d. Connect Cable #4 Sense Lead (from Battery #1 [+]) to J1 of (RHS).
side]).
f. Connect Cable #8 Sense Lead (from Battery #5 [+]) to J5 (LHS).
17. Install an Insulator #1 between Batteries #5 & #6 and another between BatterĆ
ies #7 & #8, as shown in Illustration 19, with cup-shaped bumps pointing away
from you. Route free end of Cable #3 over top of Insulator #1.
18. Position Batteries #7 & #8 in compartment stacked one on top of the other with
a separator pad between them.

19. Connect end of remaining Cable #1 with sense lead to Battery #8 (+) and other
CAUTION / WARNING end to Battery #7 (-). Slide a boot over each terminal.
This is "NOT" the number 5
cable that was attached to 20. Connect end of Cable #5 without sense lead to Battery #8 (-), and slide a boot
the ground lug over terminal.
above Insulator #1.
23. Connect the sense leads:
a. Connect Cable #1 Sense Lead (from Battery #8 [+]) to J8 (LHS).

31
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

ILLUSTRATIONă20

TEST TERMINAL BOARD

46–321370G1
CABLE #7
SENSE LEAD
CABLE #1
SENSE (J2)
CABLE #7
LEAD SENSE LEAD
CABLE #4
SENSE LEAD
(J6)
(J5)
CABLE #6
(J1)
SENSE LEAD
CONNECT HARNESS
TO CONNECTOR J11
(J4) (APPLICABLE TO KIT
CABLE #8 (J7) 46–329314G3 ONLY.)
SENSE
LEAD
(J8)
(J11)
(J3)
(J10)
CABLE #3
SENSE
LEAD
CABLE #1
SENSE
LEAD (J9)
CABLE #2
SENSE
LEAD CABLE #5
SENSE
LEAD
24. Install another Insulator #1 between Batteries #7 & #8 and Battery #9, with
cup-shaped bumps pointing away from you. Route free end of Cable #5 over
the top of this Insulator #1.
26. Position Battery #9 on top of Insulator #8.

32
Rev. 7/22/2002

Home

28. Tape the end of Cable #2 that does not have the sense lead to prevent it from
shorting after it is connected to Battery #9.
29. Connect other end of Cable #2 to Battery #9 (-), and slide a boot over cable
terminal. Route Cable #2 through grommet in hole in top of battery compartĆ
ment.
#' # #""' ! #% ! #' '$ '# %#(" &'( )'
Cable #4 connected (battery positive) and the unconnected end of Cable #2
(battery negative). It should measure between 111 and 118 volts DC, depending
on state of charge of the batteries.
32. $$! ! '# '

Route the terminal block cable through the unit and mount the terminal block
as follows:
b. Route connector end of furnished terminal block cable through grommets

in chassis as shown in Illustration 21.
c. Drill two holes 0.140 inches (9/64 inch) diameter, 2.65 inches apart, and atĆ
tach terminal block using hardware as shown in Illustration 21.
d. Secure terminal block cable to existing harness using furnished Ty-rap

straps. Connect other end of cable to the test terminal board connector J11.
#' The terminal block is a test point, and is only connected to the harness.
e. Measure the individual battery voltages across terminals of terminal block.

be greater than 12.0 Volts. The actual value will depend upon battery state
of charge.
33
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

ILLUSTRATIONă21

VIEW A"
(2) 4-40 KEPS NUTS
46-170012P34
HARNESS CONNECTS TO
(SEE VIEW A")
(2) 4-40 SCREWS

46-208560P13
CABLE
46-316915G2
CONNECT TO TEST TERMINAL

BOARD (SEE ILLUSTRATION 15)
34
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

ILLUSTRATIONă22

ARM EXTENDED
LEVEL FLOOR
BOLTS TORQUED TO
75 IN. LBS. (8.4 NĆm)
NewtonĆmeters), as shown in Illustration 22. Install the two metal plates (if appliĆ
cable) that correct over-size mounting holes.
! ,,*1 '%(*,%&, '.* "+ & "&, *$ (*, ' ,!
+ ++%$1 $$
+"0 '$,+ %-+, "& ($ & ,'*)- ,' ('-& "&!+ /,'&2%2
,*+ '* ,!
+ ++%$1 & /*( '* *#
36. Remove tape from free end of Cables #2 and #5.
37. Connect Cables #2 and #5 to ground stud using flat washer and nut.
35
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

- 2'$ %-**-5(,& 1$"2(-,1 (, 1$/3$,"$ (,#(" 2$# !$*-5, %0-+ *(!0 2(-, (8
0$"2(-,
-2$ To save time, you should install high voltage bleeder and set up oscilloscope
for proper triggering before you enter calibration mode.
!1$04$ .0-.$0 0 #( 2(-, 1 %$27 5'$, + )(,& 60 7 $6.-130$1
1. Section 3-6: Load Default Values"
-2$ $"2(-,
+312 !$ #-,$ !$%-0$ " *(!0 2(-, -% ,7 (2$+

-2$ After loading defaults, checksum errors will be displayed if you transition to
top menu level. Until AMX-4 is totally calibrated, these checksum errors will
be displayed as a reminder that system is not fully calibrated. Simply push the
+1 Y switch to continue past each checksum message, then +1 B to enter
calibration.
2. Section 3-1: Calibrate Drive Handle"
3. Section 3-2: Calibrate Voltmeter"
4. Section 3-3: Calibrate Generator"
-2$ To ensure exposure accuracy at high technique and low battery voltage,
calibrate generator when battery voltage is 115 volts or greater.
-2$ If there are TUBE SPITS at high kVp's during Calibrate Taps," 207 2- 1*-5
2'$ . "$ -% " *(!0 2(-, 5'$, 2'$ ). (1 &0$ 2$0 2' , ).. That is, wait
approximately 45 seconds between exposures, and keep the unit in prep longĆ
er by allowing the message READY FOR X-RAY" to be displayed for 5 seĆ
conds before pressing expose switch.
5. Section 3-4: Calibrate Charger"
6. Section 3-5: Adjust Field Light On Time"
7. Section 3-7, steps 1 through 6: End Calibration"
-2$ 2$.
-% $"2(-, -% " *(!0 2(-, #(0$"2(-, 0$/3(0$1 %3,"2(-, *
"'$")1 -% " *(!0 2$# (2$+1 (, -0#$0 2- $,130$ .0-.$0 -.$0 2(-,
36
Rev. 7/22/2002

Home


1. Attach the furnished battery label 46-329183P3 as shown in Illustration 23.

Place it over old battery polarity label (if present).
2. Be sure that the circuit breaker is still OFF, and reinstall all covers.
3. Perform a complete functional check of the AMX unit, including making expoĆ
sures.
4. Put the AMX unit on charge for an least one hour before using.
ILLUSTRATIONă23

- + PANASONIC
BATTERY
INSTALL FURNISHED BATTERY

POLARITY LABEL AS SHOWN.
PLACE IT OVER OLD BATTERY
POLARITY LABEL (IF
PRESENT).
GENESIS
BATTERY
37
Rev. 7/22/2002

Home

38
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

#"&! ( 3./#). #(#2

+2

&(1 0'## &.!+*.&*
.& !&$&! /&* )#-&! +-/% )#-&!
#"&! ( 3./#). 5 0-+,# #(#2
-0# "# ( &*&4-#
0! #"#2
- *!#
Rev. 7/22/2002
Home

39
Rev. 7/22/2002
GEN / PAN Batt

Home

40
Rev. 7/22/2002
GEN / PAN Batt
Home

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
+ BAT T N O T E S :
A 1 . T H E G R O U P N U M B E R A N D G R O U P R E V I S I O N A
J1
115. 2_VDC R 1 F O R T H I S P WA I S 4 6 – 3 2 1 3 7 0 G 1 – A
1
B A T T E RY # 1
+ 15. 0K
1% 2 . T H I S S C H E M A T I C M E E T S T H E S P E C I F I C A –
1. 0W
T I O N S O F G E S C H E M A T I C S T A N D A R D S
– J2
4 6 – 0 1 7 4 8 6 .
102. 4_VDC R 2 3 . U N L E S S O T H E R WI S E S P E C I F I E D
1
B A T T E RY # 2
+ 15. 0K
1% A L L R E S I S T O R S A R E 0 . 2 5 W, 1 % A N D A R E
1. 0W
I N O H M S .
B B
– J3
4 . A C T I V E L O W S I G N A L S A R E I N D I C A T E D
89. 6_VDC R3 WI T H ” * ” A F T E R T H E S I G N A L N A M E
1
B A T T E RY # 3
+ 15. 0K
1%
1. 0W
– J4
76. 8_VDC R4
1
B A T T E RY # 4
+ 15. 0K
1% B A T T E RY
C 1. 0W C
T EST
115. 2_VOLT_SENSE_9 P OI NT S
– J5 J11
102. 4_VOLT_SENSE_8
R5 1 2
64. 0_VDC
1
B A T T E RY # 5
+ 15. 0K
1%
3 1
76. 8_VOLT_SENSE_6
– J6
4 6
64. 0_VOLT_SENSE_5
51. 2_VDC R6 5 5
B A T T E RY # 6
+ 15. 0K
1%
6 7
D 1. 0W 38. 4_VOLT_SENSE_3 D
7 8
– J7
8 3
38. 4_VDC R7 9 4
B A T T E RY # 7
+ 15. 0K
1%
10 9
11 10
GROUND_SENSE
– J8
E 25. 6_VDC R8 E
1
B A T T E RY # 8
+ 15. 0K
1%
1. 0W
– J9
12. 8_VDC R9
1
B A T T E RY # 9
+ 15. 0K
1%
1. 0W
S I G N
R E V I S I O N P C N N U M B E R D A T E
F – J10 n
O F F F
GROUND R1 0 A – – – – – – 2 5 M A R 9 3
1 n
15. 0K 0 – – – – – – 2 8 J U N 9 3 F B
– BAT T 1% n
1. 0W
1 1
H H
0 Y

Y BATTERY SENSE
XXXX– XXX– XXX
A MX 4
46–321370–S
1 – D. VOI GHT 24–FEB–93 FRED BOEHM 28–J UN–93 4 0 4 TOM HELMI NI AK 28–J UN–93
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
41
Rev. 7/22/2002
GEN / PAN Batt
Home

42
Rev. 7/22/2002

Amx 4 Ir CD PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Amx 4 Ir CD PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AMX – 4 IR Support CD

“This information contained herein is for training

Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 MISC

Introductions Technical Supplement: Technical Supplement: Technical Supplement: AMX 4 Diagnostics

Perform Loop Test Lab Battery replacement Lab

Approved By: Ken Deshaies, October 21, 1994

Copyright E 1994 by General Electric Company

MSI produced documents are not intended for use as

Proprietary to General Electric Company

Primary Source Documentation Referenced

Service Note 3278

GE Medical Systems AMX-4 Home

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

REVISION DATE REASON

PAGE REV PAGE REV

GE Medical Systems AMX-4 Home

This page intentionally left blank.

SECTION 1- ADMINISTRATIVE MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

SECTION 2 - ENVIRONMENTAL, HEALTH & SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

SECTION 3 - OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

SECTION 4 - MODULE/CIRCUIT BOARD INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

SECTION 5 - WAVEFORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

SECTION 6 - PROPRIETARY DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

SECTION 7 - MOBILE AID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

SECTION 8 - SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

SECTION 9 - LAB/QUIZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

SECTION 10 - NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

SECTION 11 - MISCELLANEOUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

SECTION 1 - ADMINISTRATIVE MATERIAL

SECTION TITLE PAGE

SECTION 1 - ADMINISTRATIVE MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

This page intentionally left blank.

1-1 EMPLOYEE TRAINING AGREEMENT

2. GE agrees to provide Employee with specialized training at GEMS Education Center.

Time Between beginning Percent of Cost To Be

GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY

This page intentionally left blank.

1-2 RESIDENT TRAINING COURSE REQUIREMENTS

PLEASE FILL IN ALL APPLICABLE BLANKS

Check the message board at each break for messages.

This page intentionally left blank.

1-3 HARASSMENT POLICY

HUMAN RESOURCES POLICY NUMBER 2.5

I. NEED FOR A POLICY

II. STATEMENT OF POLICY

III. POLICY APPLICATION

- Racial, ethnic and/or religious insults or slurs

- Unwelcome sexual advanced or touching

- Sexual comments, jokes, stores or innuendoes

- Display of sexually explicit or otherwise offensive posters, calendars or materials

IV. REPORTING AND INVESTIGATION

V. REMEDIAL ACTION AND SANCTIONS

VI. RESPONSIBILITY FOR INTERPRETATION

1-4 COURSE DESCRIPTION

COURSE TITLE: AMX-4

1. Basic computer and electronic fundamentals

1. Install the AMX-4 utilizing approved procedures and protocols.

This page intentionally left blank.

1-5 SUGGESTED COURSE SCHEDULE

This page intentionally left blank.

1-6 COURSE FEEDBACK

1. 1 2 3 4 5 This course taught the competencies listed in the course description.

ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ